JP7473060B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP 2011-172988 A

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

The present invention has been made to solve at least some of the above problems, and can be realized in the following forms:

[form]
A plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a game value providing means electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and configured to execute a process for providing a game value for a game;
a payout means electrically connected to the game value providing means, and executing a payout process for paying out prize balls as the game value based on a prize ball providing signal from the game value providing means, the prize ball providing signal being related to the number of prize balls to be provided;
a process execution means that is electrically connected to the game value providing means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals, and that executes at least a specific process related to the output of predetermined numerical information related to a predetermined game, which is a process different from the payout process and is not based on the prize ball providing signal ;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game value providing means includes:
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information used in a process for providing a game value to the game, the reference information being referenced in response to detection by the predetermined detection means;
a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the process executing means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before the execution of a predetermined game process that is periodically repeated at least to progress a game is started;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball-entering information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detecting means, to the processing executing means;
Equipped with
The process execution means includes:
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value providing means;
an execution means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information regarding a processing result of the specific processing performed by the execution means;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
a presentation display means for displaying a presentation to be executed for each game round, which is one unit of a process for notifying the result of a predetermined lottery process, and which is visible from the front of the gaming machine;
A means for outputting the processing result information to the performance display means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means is configured to make the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means of the game value providing means non-rewritable,
the game value providing means cannot directly change the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means;
When a front body of the gaming machine is opened and a predetermined state occurs, opening information corresponding to the opening of the front body of the gaming machine is transmitted from the gaming value providing means, and information corresponding to the opening information is stored in the processing execution means;
The plurality of predetermined detection means include at least a predetermined detection means which provides different game values based on the detection of a game ball,
The execution means includes a means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal based on the predetermined detection means having different game values and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
The information stored based on the predetermined information signal is erased at a predetermined timing after the specific process is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

The above-mentioned form can increase the enjoyment of the game.

1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment. FIG. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface that are variably displayed on the pattern display device. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in jackpot lotteries, etc. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/lose table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. An explanatory diagram showing the contents of a winning/losing table for the lottery for opening electric gimmicks. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a main control device and the configuration of an inspection machine. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of the processing contents in a game history management chip and an inspection machine. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of an input port provided in a main MPU; FIG. An explanatory diagram explaining the ball entry detection process performed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the goal determination process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram illustrating how the presence or absence of a goal is detected. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a CPU of the game history management chip. A block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a main control device and the configuration of an inspection machine provided in a pachinko machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of the processing contents in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 6 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing in detail the configuration of a main control device and the configuration of an inspection machine provided in a pachinko machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic overview of the processing in the game history management chip and inspection machine of aspect 7 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic overview of the processing in the main MPU in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 12 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. A flowchart showing the ball entry detection process performed by the main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a game history process executed by the master MPU (master CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific processing executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 37 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 46 of the first embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part of the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine in aspect 50 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 56 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration of an information display unit. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the manner in which game history information is displayed on the information display unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on the information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on the information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on the information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on the information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which setting information is displayed on the information display unit in a setting change mode. FIG. A block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a main ROM; FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of a main RAM. FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a memory map of a main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main CPU in aspect 75 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the main CPU in aspect 76 of the first embodiment. This is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator changes the lottery settings of a pachinko machine. This is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator checks the lottery settings of a pachinko machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 88 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a part of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 11 is a flowchart showing a part of a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) in aspect 91 of the first embodiment. 6 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit. 10 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit when the number of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000; 10 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit when the number of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000; 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU (main CPU) of aspect 100 of the first embodiment. A block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of an audio/light emitting control device 90 and a display control device 100 in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change process executed by a main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a startup date and time information acquisition process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an activation type notification process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the RTC performance process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. An explanatory diagram explaining an RTC performance execution determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing a startup date and time information acquisition process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 102 of the first embodiment.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Application to other configurations:
C. Regarding the inventions extracted from the above embodiments:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of the gaming machine:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko game machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a "pachinko machine") in the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 relative to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 relative to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound and light emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window 18 is formed in the approximate center of the front door frame 14. Resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided around the window 18 of the front door frame 14. The electric parts are composed of light-emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light-emitting means plays a role in enhancing the presentation effect by lighting or blinking during each game played by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, etc. In addition, a glass unit 19 consisting of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the open window 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board through the glass unit 19 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed in a box shape with an open top, and stores game balls such as loaned balls loaned from a loaning machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and launches the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 to the front of the game board. The lower tray 21 is disposed below the upper tray 20 and is formed in a box shape with an open top. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 20. The bottom surface of the lower tray 21 is formed with an outlet 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and the player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and is discharged to the outside from the lower tray 21.

A performance operation button 24 is provided in front of the periphery of the upper tray 20 as an operation receiving means. The performance operation button 24 is an operation unit that allows the player to perform input operations for the game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Furthermore, an operating handle 25 for the player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front. When the player operates the operating handle 25, game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there are a touch sensor 25a for permitting the operation of the game ball launching mechanism, a wait button 25b that stops the launch of game balls by the game ball launching mechanism when pressed by the player, and a variable resistor 25c that detects the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a turns on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the amount of rotation, and game balls are launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Next, the configuration of the back of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The back of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with control devices for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the rear surface of the inner frame 13.

The first control unit 51 is equipped with a main control device 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board that has the function of controlling the main game and the function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material. This board box is configured so that traces of opening and closing (also called traces of opening or traces of unsealing) remain. For example, sealing stickers are affixed to the parts that can be opened and closed, and the word "unsealed" appears when the board box is opened.

The second control unit 52 includes an audio/light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The audio/light emission control device 90 controls light-emitting means such as speakers and various lamps provided on the front of the pachinko machine 10 based on commands sent from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the pattern display device based on commands sent from the audio/light emission control device 90. The pattern display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays patterns and images for performances.

The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a launch control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. When an instruction to launch game balls is input from the main control device 60, the launch control device 80 controls the game ball launch mechanism to launch game balls with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 25 by the player. In addition, on the back of the inner frame 13, there are several devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as a tank 54 to which game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a tank rail 55 connected below the tank 54 and having a gently sloping slope so that the game balls flow downstream, a case rail 56 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, and a payout device 71 that receives game balls from the case rail 56 and pays out a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70.

Next, we will explain the game board. The game board is removably attached to the front of the inner frame 13.

Figure 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on its front surface. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to define a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. Game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism are guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flow down the game area PA. In the game area PA, multiple nails 42 are planted approximately perpendicular to the game board 30, and various gimmicks such as windmills are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning port 32, a first starting port 33, a second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36. The game board 30 is also provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 has a special chart unit 37, a general chart unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general winning openings 32 are openings through which game balls can enter, and multiple openings are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 71. In this embodiment, three general winning openings 32a, 32b, and 32c are provided as the general winning openings 32. Hereinafter, the general winning opening 32a will also be referred to as the first winning opening 32a, the general winning opening 32b will also be referred to as the second winning opening 32b, and the general winning opening 32c will also be referred to as the third winning opening 32c.

The first starting hole 33 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter. The first starting hole 33 is located at the lower center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed.

The second starting hole 34 is an entrance through which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery, which will be described later, is executed. In addition, the second starting hole 34 is provided with an electric device 34a as a normal electric device.

The through gate 35 has a through hole that penetrates vertically. The through gate 35 is a through gate that triggers a lottery to open the electric role 34a. Specifically, when a game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric role opening lottery). If the electric role opening is selected as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role 34a transitions to an electric role opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is disposed upstream of the second start port 34 in the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that passes through the through gate 35 can flow down the game area PA after passing through and enter the second start port 34. Note that in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the prize ball is not paid out.

The variable winning device 36 is provided with a large winning opening 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the large winning opening 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the large winning opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a large winning lottery (internal lottery). If the large winning lottery results in a large winning or small winning, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to an opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening/closing process of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 transitions to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter to an open state in which the game ball can enter, and transitions again to a closed state after a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 36a of the variable prize device 36, 15 game balls are paid out as prize balls by the payout device 71.

In addition, an outlet 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that do not enter the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the outlet 43.

In this embodiment, the game balls that enter the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, the third winning hole 32c, the big winning hole 36a, and the outlet hole 43 are configured to merge into a discharge passage provided on the back of the game board 30, and a discharge passage detection sensor that detects the game balls is provided in the discharge passage. As described below, in this embodiment, the game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor, making it possible to know the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30.

The special symbol unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each configured with a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first pattern display unit 37a is a display unit for displaying the first pattern. The first pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is performed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the first pattern in a variable or predetermined manner as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is performed. When the lottery is completed, the first pattern display unit 37a causes the segment display to display the first pattern in a stationary manner corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is performed triggered by a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 is also referred to as a game round for the first starting hole.

The second pattern display unit 37b is a display unit for displaying the second pattern. The second pattern refers to a pattern that is displayed in a variable or stationary manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34. When a jackpot lottery triggered by a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is held, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the second pattern in a variable or predetermined manner as a display mode until a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed. When the lottery is completed, the second pattern display unit 37b causes the segment display to display the second pattern in a stationary manner corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is held in response to a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is also referred to as a game round for the second starting hole.

Here, the time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a or the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also referred to as the change time. Specifically, the time from when the first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a starts to when it stops is also referred to as the first change time, and the time from when the second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b starts to when it stops is also referred to as the second change time.

The special symbol unit 37 further includes a first reserved display section 37c and a second reserved display section 37d, which are made up of LED lamps, located adjacent to the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b.

The first reserve display unit 37c displays the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the first starting hole 33 are reserved.

The second reserve display unit 37d displays the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 34 by the color and combination of the LED lamps that are lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that enter the second starting hole 34 are reserved.

The general map unit 38 is composed of a light-emitting display section in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a lottery to open an electric reel is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the general map unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to light up, flash, or display in a predetermined manner. When the lottery to open an electric reel is completed, the general map unit 38 displays in a predetermined manner corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display unit 39 is composed of a light-emitting display unit in which multiple LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of rounds that will occur in the open/close execution mode, or a display corresponding thereto. A round is a game in which the open/close door 36b remains open until one of the following conditions is met: either a predetermined upper limit duration has elapsed, or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls have entered the variable winning device 36. The number of rounds varies depending on the type of jackpot that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of rounds when the open/close execution mode is started, and ends when the open/close execution mode is ended.

The special chart unit 37, the general chart unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured with segment displays or light-emitting displays using LED lamps, and may be configured with various display devices capable of showing the lottery in progress and the lottery results, such as, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, or a dot matrix display device.

The variable display unit 40 is disposed approximately in the center of the play area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a pattern display device 41. The pattern display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the pattern display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the pattern display device 41, and may be configured with various display devices, such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first pattern display unit 37a displays a variable or predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. Also, when the second pattern display unit 37b displays a variable or predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, the pattern display device 41 displays a variable or predetermined display of the pattern accordingly. The pattern display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable or predetermined display of the pattern triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, but also displays effects during the opening and closing execution mode to which the game is entered when a jackpot is won. Details of the pattern display device 41 are explained below.

Figure 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns and display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Figure 4(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the patterns that are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. As shown in Figure 4(a), patterns showing the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the pattern display device 41. Note that as the variably displayed patterns, patterns in which the numbers 1 to 8 are each accompanied by an image of a character or the like may be used.

Figure 4(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. As shown in the figure, three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3, left, center, and right, are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the pattern rows Z1 to Z3, the numbers 1 to 8 shown in Figure 4(a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and a variable display is performed in which each pattern row scrolls from top to bottom or bottom to top with a periodicity. As shown in Figure 4(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one pattern is displayed in a stopped state on the pay line L for each pattern row. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, a variable display is started in which the patterns of each pattern row Z1 to Z3 scroll in a predetermined direction with a periodicity. Then, the scrolling symbols are switched from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, each of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displays a predetermined symbol in a static display state. When the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is static, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is a jackpot win, a predetermined combination of symbols is formed on the valid line L. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the valid line L. Note that the manner of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned manner, and various modes of the variable display of the symbols can be adopted, such as the number of symbol rows, the number of valid lines, the direction of the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row.

Here, a play round is one unit of processing for notifying a player of the results of a jackpot lottery for special information acquired based on winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies a player of the results of one jackpot lottery for one piece of special information for each play round. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on winning at either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the segment display to vary in either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b for each play round, and then stops the segment display so that the display corresponds to the lottery result for the acquired special information. In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on a winning entry in either the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, it causes the pattern display device 41 to variably display a predetermined pattern sequence for each play round, and then causes the pattern sequence to be frozen so that it corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. The time required for one play round is also called the unit play time. The unit play time is composed of the fluctuation time, which is the time from when the fluctuation display begins to when the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed, and the freeze time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is frozen and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a first pending display area Ds1 and a second pending display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pattern display device 41. The first pending display area Ds1 displays the number of pending balls based on winning at the first starting hole 33. The second pending display area Ds2 displays the number of pending balls based on winning at the second starting hole 34. Note that in this embodiment, as described above, the number of pending game balls that have won at the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34 is a maximum of four each.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using a block diagram.

Figure 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly composed of a main control device 60, and also includes an audio and light emission control device 90 and a display control device 100.

The main control device 60 is equipped with a main control board 61 that is responsible for the main control of the game. The main control board 61 is equipped with an MPU 62 that is composed of elements with multiple functions. The MPU 62 is equipped with a CPU 62x that executes various control programs, a ROM 63 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the CPU 62x executes the programs recorded in the ROM 63, and an input/output port 62a. The MPU 62 further includes a game history management chip 300 and an inspection terminal 65.

The game history management chip 300 calculates various game history information, which will be described later, based on ball entry information for the starting hole, winning hole, and gate (hereinafter collectively referred to as "ball entry hole"). The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for transmitting the game history information stored in the game history management chip 300 to an inspection machine, which will be described later. The game history management chip 300 and the inspection terminal 65 will be described in detail later.

The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit that functions as a random number generator. Some of the functions of the MPU 62 may be provided by other elements.

The input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85. The main control board 61 receives a stable 24V DC power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into the operating power required by the main control device 60, the dispensing control device 70, etc., and supplies power to each device. In this embodiment, the power supply device 85 is also equipped with a capacitor 87, and continues to supply power to each device for a predetermined period of time when a power failure occurs or when the power switch is turned off.

Also, the input side of the MPU 62 is connected to the ball entry detection sensors provided at each ball entry port. Specifically, the large prize entry port detection sensor 44a that detects a game ball that has entered the large prize entry port 36a, the first start port detection sensor 44b that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 33, the second start port detection sensor 44c that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 34, the first prize entry port detection sensor 44d that detects a game ball that has entered the first prize entry port 32a, the second prize entry port detection sensor 44e that detects a game ball that has entered the second prize entry port 32b, the third prize entry port detection sensor 44f that detects a game ball that has entered the third prize entry port 32c, the through gate detection sensor 44g that detects a game ball that has passed through the through gate 35, and the discharge passage detection sensor 44h that detects a game ball that has passed through the above-mentioned discharge passage are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 determines whether the game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered the start port or the winning port, and whether the game ball has passed through the through gate or the discharge passage. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the game ball entering the first start port 33 and the second start port 34.

The output side of the MPU 62 is connected to a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, an electric role drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric role 34a of the second starting port 34, and the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 controls the drive of the various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening and closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable winning drive unit 36c so that the opening and closing door 36b is opened and closed. Also, if the electric role opening lottery results in a win, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric role drive unit 44b so that the electric role 34a is opened. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display unit 37a or the second symbol display unit 37b in the main display unit 45, and in the opening and closing execution mode, executes display control of the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45.

The payout control device 70 and the sound and light emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the MPU 62. For example, the payout control device 70 receives a prize ball command from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area of the ROM 63. Specifically, when a game ball is identified as entering the general winning hole 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, when a game ball is identified as entering the first starting hole 33, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 3 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when a game ball is identified as entering the second starting hole 34, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 1 game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out the prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

The payout control device 70 is connected to the launch control device 80. The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball launch mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is met. The launch control device 80 is also connected to the operation handle 25. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in response to the amount of rotation, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

The audio and light emission control device 90 receives various commands sent from the main control device 60 and executes processing corresponding to the various commands received. Specifically, based on the various commands received from the main control device 60, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the driving of various lamps 47 consisting of light-emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the front door frame 14, the driving of the speaker 46, and controls the display control device 100. In addition, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the audio and light emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by the player at a specified timing, the audio and light emission control device 90 controls the various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, etc. to perform a game performance that reflects the operation.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the variation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the sound and light emission control device 90, and grasps whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach performance, and the content of the performance executed while the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is displaying a variation. In this embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variation time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for the jackpot lottery and the like. The various counters are provided in various counter areas of the RAM 64, and are used when the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the main display unit 45, and the settings of the pattern display of the pattern display device 41. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used to allocate the jackpot type. The reach random number counter C3 is used for reach judgment as to whether or not a reach is generated when the pattern sequence displayed on the pattern display device 41 is changed out of the normal range.

The random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. In addition, the change type counter CS is used to determine the change time in the first and second pattern display sections 37a and 37b of the main display section 45, and in the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, the electric device opening counter C4 is used for the electric device opening lottery to determine whether or not the electric device 34a of the second starting hole 34 is opened.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to its counter value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after it reaches its maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a specified area of the RAM 64.

The RAM 64 also includes a reserved information storage area 64b and a judgment processing execution area 64c. The reserved information storage area 64b includes a first reserved area Ra and a second reserved area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b. When a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the change type counter CS at the time of the ball entering are stored in chronological order in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b.

The details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will now be described. As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 1199, for example, and return to 0 after reaching a maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 goes through one cycle, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically, and when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33, the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering, and when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34, the updated value is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c, where it is compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will result in a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the judgment process execution area 64c in the order obtained by the game ball entering the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. The jackpot random number counter C1 that has been moved to the execution area AE is then compared with the hit/miss table stored in the hit/miss table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a jackpot will result.

Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the type of jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to increment by one within the range of 0 to 39, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically, and the updated value is stored in the first reserved area Ra of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second reserved area Rb of the reserved information storage area 64b at the time when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, it determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the judgment process execution area 64c. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described in detail. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach will occur when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within a range of, for example, 0 to 238, and to return to 0 after reaching a maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b when the game ball enters the second starting hole 34. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach has occurred. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the judgment processing execution area 64c, and then compared with the reach judgment table stored in the reach judgment table storage area of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not a reach has occurred. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode transitions to the open/close execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a jackpot has occurred regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The term "reach" refers to a display state in which some combinations of symbols that may result in a combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot are displayed as stopped in some of the multiple symbol rows displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and in this state, the remaining symbol rows display a variable pattern. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols corresponding to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 4(b), a symbol is first displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z3 to form a reach line, and when the reach line is formed, the variable pattern display is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is displayed as stopped in the symbol row Z2.

The reach also includes a reach effect in which, when a reach line is formed, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a varying manner while a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image in the background screen, and a reach effect is performed by reducing or hiding the symbol combination on which the reach line is formed and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, the reach random number counter C3 or another counter may be used to determine whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character.

Next, the details of the change type counter CS will be explained. The change type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the change time in the first pattern display section 37a and the second pattern display section 37b, and the change time of the pattern in the pattern display device 41. The change type counter CS is configured to increment by 1 in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The change type counter CS is updated once each time the normal processing described below is executed, and is repeatedly updated during the remaining time in the normal processing. The buffer value of the change type counter CS is acquired when the change display in the first pattern display unit 37a or the second pattern display unit 37b starts, and when the change pattern is determined when the pattern display device 41 starts changing the pattern. When determining the change time in the first pattern display unit 37a and the second pattern display unit 37b, the change time table stored in the change time table storage area of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, the details of the electric role opening counter C4 will be described. The electric role opening counter C4 is configured to be incremented by one in sequence within the range of, for example, 0 to 465, and to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric role opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, the value of the electric role opening counter C4 stored in the electric role holding area 64d is moved to the electric role execution area 64e, and then a lottery is held in the electric role execution area 64e to determine whether or not to control the electric role 34a to an open state using the value of the electric role opening counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0, 1, the electric role 34a is controlled to an open state, and if C4 = 2 to 465, the electric role 34a is maintained in a closed state.

In addition, at least one of the acquired values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the electric role opening counter C4, and the variable type counter CS corresponds to special information in the present invention. In addition, at least one of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is also called reserved information.

Next, the hit/miss table will be explained. The hit/miss table is table data for checking against the jackpot random number counter C1 when a jackpot lottery is held based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode and a high probability mode set as lottery modes for the jackpot lottery, and when a jackpot lottery is held in the low probability mode, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is referenced, and when a jackpot lottery is held in the high probability mode, the hit/miss table for the high probability mode is referenced.

Figure 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table. Figure 7(a) shows the win/lose table for the low probability mode (for the low probability mode), and Figure 7(b) shows the win/lose table for the high probability mode.

As shown in FIG. 7(a), the hit/miss table for the low probability mode has five values, 0 to 4, set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) is a miss. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), the hit/miss table for the high probability mode has 16 values, 0 to 15, set as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will result in a jackpot. Of the values from 0 to 1199, any value other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 is a miss. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the hit/miss table for the high probability mode. However, as long as the result of the jackpot lottery shows a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/lose table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the big win lottery.

A "small win" is a result that triggers a transition to the opening and closing execution mode in which the opening and closing of the variable winning device 36 is executed, but does not trigger a transition to either the lottery mode or the support mode. In contrast, a "miss" is a result that does not trigger a transition to the opening and closing execution mode, and further does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or the support mode.

Next, the types of jackpots will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes.
(1) The number of times (number of rounds) the opening and closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened and closed in the opening and closing execution mode
(2) Aspects of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode (3) A lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) for the big win lottery after the opening and closing execution mode ends

As a mode of the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening and closing execution mode, a high frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequency of game balls entering (winning) the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening and closing execution mode is relatively high and low. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, it can be set so that one opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, it can be set so that one opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10.

The opening time limit for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the number of balls that can be opened per one opening are arbitrary, as long as the frequency of balls entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode is higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. Specifically, the opening time limit for one opening may be set longer or the number of balls that can be opened per one opening may be set higher in the high-frequency winning mode than in the low-frequency winning mode. To clearly distinguish between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode may be configured so that there is essentially no winning in the variable winning device 36.

In this embodiment, the opening and closing execution mode does not have multiple types of winning modes, and during the opening and closing execution mode, the above-mentioned high frequency winning mode is set. In other words, one opening of the opening and closing door 36b in the opening and closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls that have entered the opening and closing door 36b reaches 10.

In this embodiment, if a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to assign a jackpot type. The jackpot type assignment corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as an assignment table in the assignment table storage area of the ROM 63.

Figure 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. Figure 8(a) shows the distribution table for the first start port, and Figure 8(b) shows the distribution table for the second start port. The distribution table for the first start port is referenced when a jackpot lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the first start port 33, and the distribution table for the second start port is referenced when a jackpot lottery is drawn based on a game ball entering the second start port 34.

As shown in the distribution table for the first starting hole in FIG. 8(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the jackpot types based on the first starting hole 33 are set as 16R sure-win jackpot, 8R sure-win jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot.

The 16R probability variable jackpot and 8R probability variable jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high frequency support mode.

The 16R normal jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are jackpots in which the opening and closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening and closing execution mode is a high-frequency winning mode, the win/lose lottery mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a low-probability mode, and the support mode after the opening and closing execution mode ends is a high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0-39", "0-13" corresponds to a 16R special jackpot, "14-27" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot, "28-33" corresponds to a 16R regular jackpot, and "34-39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as the types of jackpots. Therefore, the form of jackpots is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R special jackpot, followed by the 8R special jackpot, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. In this way, by setting multiple types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player, monotony in the game is prevented and it is possible to increase attention to the game.

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a 16R guaranteed jackpot and an 8R regular jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting port 34. In the distribution table for the second starting port, of the jackpot type counter C2 values of "0 to 39", "0 to 27" corresponds to a 16R guaranteed jackpot and "28 to 39" corresponds to an 8R regular jackpot.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the allocation of the jackpot type when a jackpot is reached is different between a jackpot based on a game ball entering the first starting hole 33 and a jackpot based on a game ball entering the second starting hole 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage to the player.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and determines the type of jackpot using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment indicators to be stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b. When making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area of the ROM 63 is referenced.

In the pachinko machine 10, as the support mode of the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, a high-frequency support mode and a low-frequency support mode can be set so that the frequency with which the electric device 34a of the second starting opening 34 opens per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with a situation in which the launch of game balls into the game area PA continues in a similar manner.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening lottery using the electric role opening counter C4 differs between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. The probability of winning the electric role opening lottery in the electric role opening lottery is made higher in the high frequency support mode than in the low frequency support mode. Also, in the high frequency support mode, the opening time of the electric role 34a once a winning electric role opening is set longer than in the low frequency support mode.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where an electric role opening win occurs in the high frequency support mode and the electric role opening state of the electric role 34a occurs multiple times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state may be set to be shorter than the opening time of one time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the time secured from the one electric role opening lottery to the next electric role opening lottery may be set to be relatively shorter than in the low frequency support mode.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, the high-frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in the establishment of the conditions for obtaining special information.

Figure 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win/lose table (win/lose table for the lottery to open electric reels) used when executing the lottery to open electric reels.

Figure 9 (a) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) used in the low-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 9 (a), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values, 0 and 1, set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in a winning electric role opening. 464 values, from 2 to 465, are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in a losing electric role opening. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

Figure 9 (b) shows a winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in Figure 9 (b), the winning/losing table for the electric role opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in winning the electric role opening. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric role opening counter C4 that will result in losing. In other words, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening is won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the electric role opening is won during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role opening is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the winning/losing table for the electric device opening lottery is set so that the high frequency support mode has a higher probability of the game ball entering the second starting hole 34 than the low frequency support mode.

Figure 10 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the configuration of the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following, the MPU 62, CPU 62x, ROM 63, and RAM 64 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, main CPU 62x, main ROM 63, and main RAM 64, respectively.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area and a calculation execution condition storage area.

The prize ball number data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball number data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. In this embodiment, the prize ball number data storage area stores the following prize ball number data.
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 (number of first starting hole prize balls P ₁ ): 3
The number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second starting hole 34 (number of second starting hole prize balls _P2 ): 3
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the first winning hole 32a (number of first winning hole prize balls P _N1 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the second winning hole 32b (number of second winning hole prize balls P _N2 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the third winning hole 32c (number of third winning hole prize balls P _N3 ): 10
Number of game balls paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters the big prize opening 36a (number of big prize opening balls P _S ): 15

The main MPU 62 determines the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entry port by referring to the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setting process executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball count data set in this pachinko machine 10.

The calculation execution condition memory area stores a calculation execution condition that is a condition for the game history management chip 300 to start a calculation to calculate game history information. In this embodiment, the calculation execution condition is stored as the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaching 500. This calculation execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 during the initial setting process that is executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This allows the game history management chip 300 to grasp the calculation execution condition that has been set in this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 is a semiconductor chip that calculates various game history information based on the ball entry information of game balls into each ball entry port and stores the calculated game history information. The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires ball entry information of game balls into each ball entry port from the CPU 62x, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that enter each ball entry port, a prize ball number data storage memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a calculation execution condition storage memory 307 that stores the calculation execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300 and calculates game history information based on the number of game balls that enter each ball entry port and the number of prize balls set for each ball entry port when the calculation execution condition is satisfied, and a calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 includes a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays the game history information received from the game history management chip 300, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 11 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic of the processing performed by the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320.

The buffer 302 is provided between the CPU 62x of the main MPU 62 and the register 304, and obtains ball entry information at each ball entry port from the CPU 62x. Specifically, the buffer 302 has a number of bits corresponding to each ball entry port, and the CPU 62x turns ON ("1") the bit corresponding to the ball entry port through which it is determined that a game ball has entered. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that a game ball has entered the first start port 33, it turns ON ("1") the bit in the buffer 302 corresponding to the first start port 33.

The buffer 302 is also provided with bits for grasping the game mode and the state of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as the game state) when the game ball enters each ball entrance. In this embodiment, a bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in (a mode that is not in the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the opening and closing execution mode), a bit for determining whether or not the high probability mode is in, a bit for determining whether or not the high frequency support mode is in, a bit for determining whether or not the opening and closing execution mode is in, a bit for determining whether or not the first reserved number is in the upper limit, a bit for determining whether or not the second reserved number is in the upper limit, a bit for determining whether or not the front door frame 14 is open, and a bit for determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state where a trouble such as a malfunction has occurred are provided. For example, when the CPU 62x determines that the normal mode is in progress at the timing when the game ball enters the first start opening 33, it sets the bit for determining whether or not the normal mode is in the buffer 302 to ON ("1").

Register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each entrance. Specifically, register 304 is composed of multiple counters corresponding to each entrance, and when it is determined that a bit in buffer 302 contains ball entry information (i.e., when the bit is ON), 1 is added to the counter value corresponding to the bit that is determined to contain ball entry information. In this embodiment, register 304 is composed of a non-volatile register that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

In this embodiment, the register 304 stores the following values by means of counters corresponding to the respective entrances:
Number of game balls entering the big prize opening 36a = Number of balls entering the big prize opening N _S
Number of game balls entering the first starting hole 33 = Number of balls entering the first starting hole N ₁
Number of game balls entering the second starting hole 34 = Number of balls entering the second starting hole N ₂
Number of game balls entering the first winning port 32a = Number of balls entering the first winning port N _N1
Number of game balls entering the second winning port 32b = Number of balls entering the second winning port N _N2
Number of game balls entering the third winning hole 32c = Number of balls entering the third winning hole N _N3
Number of game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 = Number of balls passing through the through gate _NG
Number of game balls passing through the discharge passage = Number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT
As described above, the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage coincides with the number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 .

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the register 304 stores the number of game balls that have entered each ball entrance for each game state.
The number of game balls that entered each entry port during normal mode; The number of game balls that entered each entry port during high probability mode; The number of game balls that entered each entry port during high frequency support mode; The number of game balls that entered each entry port during open/close execution mode; The number of game balls that entered the first start port 33 during normal mode and during a period when the first reserved number is at the upper limit; The number of game balls that entered the second start port 34 during normal mode and during a period when the second reserved number is at the upper limit; The number of game balls that entered each entry port while the front door frame 14 is open; The number of game balls that entered each entry port during an error.

For example, if it is determined that there is ball entry information in the bit corresponding to the first starting port 33 of the buffer 302 (the bit is ON), and if it is determined that there is information in the bit that determines whether or not the normal mode is in progress (the bit is ON), then 1 is added to the value of the first starting port ball entry number counter, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33, and 1 is added to the value of the first starting port ball entry number counter during normal mode, which is a counter that stores the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 during normal mode.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. Therefore, the contents of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 are the same as the contents of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

The calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is a memory for storing the calculation execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. As described above, the calculation execution conditions are conditions for starting the calculation for calculating the game history information. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, it is set to start the calculation for calculating the game history information every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300 by the CPU 62x and stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Therefore, the contents of the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are the same as the contents of the calculation execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63. Note that the number of game balls that have passed through or entered other than the discharge passage may be stored as a criterion as the calculation execution condition, or a number other than 500 may be stored as a criterion.

The CPU 308 judges whether or not the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are satisfied, and when it judges that the calculation execution conditions are satisfied, it calculates various pieces of game history information based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the register 304. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 calculates the following values as game history information each time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the register 304 reaches 500:

・Ratio of prize balls to be paid out as prize balls by the operation of the prize balls (number of prize balls) / total number of prize balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= ( _N2 x _P2 + _NS x _Ps ) / ( _NN1 x _PN1 + _NN2 x _PN2 + _NN3 x _PN3 + _N1 x _P1 + _N2 x _P2 + NS _{x Ps} )
・Continuous feature ratio = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of continuous features (number of consecutive feature prize balls) / Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= ( _NS x _Ps ) / ( _NN1 x _PN1 + _NN2 x _PN2 + _NN3 x _PN3 + _N1 x _P1 + _N2 x _P2 + NS _{x Ps} )
・Payout rate (total)
=Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)/number of game balls shot onto the game board 30=(N _N1 ×P _N1 +N _N2 ×P _N2 +N _N3 ×P _N3 +N ₁ ×P ₁ +N ₂ ×P ₂ +N _S ×P _S )/N _OUT

The above values are calculated based on the following criteria.
The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the device (number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the electric device 34a as a normal electric device and the variable winning device 36 as a special electric device = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start hole 34 and the large winning hole 36a = _N2 x _P2 + _Ns x _Ps
The number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of consecutive roles (number of consecutive role prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the variable winning device 36 as a special electric device = Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of a game ball into the large winning opening 36a = N _S × P _S
The number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3
- Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls (total number of prize balls)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34 and the large winning hole 36a = N _N1 × P _N1 + N _N2 × P _N2 + N _N3 × P _N3 + N ₁ × P ₁ + N ₂ × P ₂ + N _S × P _S

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the following game history information is calculated based on the number of game balls that enter each ball entry port counted for each game state.

・Payout ratio (in normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during normal mode / Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting port 33 during normal mode + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during normal mode, payout rate (during normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 during normal mode / Ball payout rate (during high frequency support mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during the high frequency support mode / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 during the high frequency support mode BY (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c during normal mode + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first starting hole 33 during the period in normal mode when the first reserved number is at the upper limit + Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the second starting hole 34 during the period in normal mode when the second reserved number is at the upper limit / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 during normal mode BY _MIN (during normal mode)
= Number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on game balls entering the first to third winning ports 32a to 32c during normal mode / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30 during normal mode; Ball entry rate while front door frame is open = Number of game balls that entered each winning port while the front door frame 14 is open / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30; Ball entry rate during error = Number of game balls that entered each winning port during an error / Number of game balls fired onto the game board 30. Note that the above game history information is just an example, and other game history information may be calculated.

After the CPU 308 calculates the various pieces of game history information, it stores the calculated pieces of game history information in the calculation result storage memory 309 and resets the values of the counters in the register 304 to "0." Note that, hereinafter, the various pieces of game history information calculated each time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30 are collectively referred to as the "short-term game history information group."

The calculation result storage memory 309 is a memory that stores the game history information calculated by the CPU 308, and in this embodiment, it is configured as a non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even if the power supply is cut off. The calculation result storage memory 309 also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information groups were written, and when there is no free area to write the calculated short-term game history information groups, the CPU 308 stores the calculated short-term game history information groups in the area in which the short-term game history information groups that were written the oldest are stored. In other words, the calculation result storage memory 309 is configured to overwrite the short-term game history information groups in order starting from the oldest (first-in, first-out method), and is always in a state in which the most recent short-term game history information groups are stored.

In this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 sets of short-term gaming history information calculated every time 500 gaming balls are launched onto the gaming board 30. For example, if gaming balls are continuously launched for 10 hours in one day, 60,000 gaming balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term gaming history information will be stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 in one day. Therefore, the calculation result storage memory 309 is capable of storing sets of short-term gaming history information for the most recent 10 days.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the game history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of the game history information. When the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. As a result, the inspection machine 320 acquires the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 and displays the acquired game history information on the display unit 328.

In this manner, in this embodiment, every time the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaches 500, i.e., every time 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30, game history information such as the role ratio is calculated and stored in the calculation result storage memory 309. The calculated game history information is then displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

A3. Details of various processes executed in the gaming machine:
Next, a description will be given of each process executed by the MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment). The processes executed by the MPU 62 are roughly classified into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, and a timer interrupt process that is started periodically (every 4 msec in this embodiment).

First, we will explain the main process with reference to the flowchart in Figure 12.

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the master MPU 62. In step S10101, an initial setting process is executed. Specifically, the initial setting of each control device when the power is turned on and the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64 are determined. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the initial setting process, a process is executed to transmit calculation data to the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the calculation data (number of prize balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the master ROM 63 are transmitted to the game history management chip 300. As described later, the game history management chip 300 that has received the calculation data stores the number of prize balls data and the calculation execution conditions in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307, respectively, and transmits a setting completion command indicating that storage has been completed to the master MPU 62. After executing step S10101, proceed to step S10102.

In step S10102, it is determined whether or not a setting completion command has been received. If it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has been received (S10102: YES), the process proceeds to step S10103, where interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10102 that a setting completion command has not been received (S10102: NO), the process of step S10102 is executed again. In other words, until the setting completion command is received, the process does not proceed to step S10103, and interrupt permission is not set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur.

After executing step S10103, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107. In other words, the main MPU 62 is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described below, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time is used to repeatedly execute the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107. In this respect, the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 can be said to be non-periodic processing that is executed non-periodically.

In the remaining process, first, in step S10104, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In the following step S10105, random number initial value update processing is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and in step S10106, fluctuation counter update processing is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processing, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is incremented by 1, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, in step S10107, interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the processing of step S10107, the process returns to step S10104, and the processing of steps S10104 to S10107 is repeated.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x in this embodiment).

Figure 13 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62. The timer interrupt process is started at a specific interval (4 msec interval in this embodiment).

In the timer interrupt process, first, in step S10201, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is read out sequentially from the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric role release counter C4, and the read numerical information is added by 1 to each counter, and then the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, proceed to step S10202.

In step S10202, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated in the random number initial value update process, and the process proceeds to step S10203, where the fluctuation type counter CS is updated in the fluctuation type counter update process. Then, the process proceeds to step S10204.

In step S10204, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the large prize opening 36a to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when information is set to switch the electric role 34a of the second start opening 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the electric role drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, proceed to step S10205.

In step S10205, a read process is executed. In the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes. Then, the process proceeds to step S10206.

In step S10206, the signals received from each of the goal detection sensors 44a to 44h are read, and a goal detection process is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. The details of the goal detection process will be explained in detail later. Then, proceed to step S10207.

In step S10207, the ball entry detection information is output to a bit in the buffer 302 of the game history management chip 300. Specifically, the bit corresponding to the ball entry port into which the game ball was determined to have entered in the ball entry detection process in step S10206 is turned ON ("1"), and the bit corresponding to the game status of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON ("1"). Then, the process proceeds to step S10208.

In step S10208, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S10209, where a prize ball command output setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10210.

In step S10210, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S10210, the process proceeds to step S10211.

In step S10211, a ball entry process for the through gate is executed in response to the entry (passage) of a game ball into the through gate 35. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variable type counter CS is obtained based on the determination that a game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35, and the obtained counter value is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S10211, the process proceeds to step S10212.

In step S10212, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery is performed, and display control of the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b is performed. After executing step S10212, the process proceeds to step S10213.

In step S10213, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. In the game state transition process, a process is executed to transition the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S10213, the process proceeds to step S10214.

In step S10214, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role 34a is to be opened (electric role opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role 34a is to be opened, the electric role 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S10214, the process proceeds to step S10215.

In step S10215, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process is executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operation handle 25. After executing step S10215, the process proceeds to step S10216.

In step S10216, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the results of the various processes executed in this timer interrupt process. After executing step S10216, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the ball entry detection process executed in step S10206 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 13).

The ball entry detection process involves a process to check the detection results of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and during this process, the input port 62b of the input/output port 62a of the main MPU 62 is checked. Before explaining the ball entry detection process, the configuration of the input port 62b provided on the main MPU 62 will be explained with reference to Figure 14.

Figure 14 is an explanatory diagram explaining the configuration of the input port 62b provided in the main MPU 62. The input port 62b is configured as an 8-bit parallel interface so that it can handle eight types of signals simultaneously. An area in which information "0" or "1" is stored according to the voltage of each signal is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each terminal. In other words, the area includes the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7.

In addition, more than eight types of signals are input to input port 62b, but in order to limit the number of signals that can be input simultaneously to eight, the group of signals to be input to input port 62b is switched through switching control by the driver IC. In the ball entry detection process, the group of signals to be input to input port 62b is set to each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h.

In a situation where such a setting has been made, the 0th bit D0 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the large prize entry opening detection sensor 44a, the 1st bit D1 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first start opening detection sensor 44b, the 2nd bit D2 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second start opening detection sensor 44c, the 3rd bit D3 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the first prize entry opening detection sensor 44d, the 4th bit D4 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the second prize entry opening detection sensor 44e, the 5th bit D5 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the third prize entry opening detection sensor 44f, the 6th bit D6 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the through gate detection sensor 44g, and the 7th bit D7 stores information corresponding to the ball entry signal from the discharge passage detection sensor 44h.

In this case, when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h do not detect the passage of a game ball, they output a HIGH level signal indicating that they are not detecting as a ball entry signal, and when they detect the passage of a game ball, they output a LOW level signal indicating that they are detecting as a ball entry signal. However, an inversion circuit is provided in the main control board 151, and the state of the signal is inverted before each of the detection signals is input to the input port 62b. Then, when the input port 62b receives a LOW level signal through the inversion circuit, it stores "0" information (data 0 or no information) in the corresponding bit, and when it receives a HIGH level signal through the inversion circuit, it stores "1" information (data 1 or present information) in the corresponding bit.

In other words, when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h do not detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "0" information, which corresponds to information indicating no detection, and when the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h detect the passage of a game ball, the corresponding bit stores "1" information, which corresponds to information indicating detection.

Each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h may be configured to output a LOW level signal as a ball entry signal while it is not detecting the passage of a game ball, and to output a HI level signal as a ball entry signal while it is detecting the passage of a game ball. In this case, the inversion circuit may be omitted.

Figure 15 is an explanatory diagram explaining the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. Figure 15 (a) is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62. Figure 15 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the ball entry determination area used in the ball entry detection process. In the ball entry detection process, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 15 (a), first, in step S10301, a process is executed to transfer the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the first ball entry determination area WA1 in the register of the main MPU 62. The first ball entry determination area WA1 is composed of 8 bits as shown in Figure 15 (b-1), and has a data capacity that can store all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. In this case, the bits that are stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence with the bits that are stored in the first scoring area WA1, and for example, the information in the 0th bit D0 is always stored in a specified bit in the first scoring area WA1.

In the next step S10302, a wait process for ball entry detection is executed. In this wait process, the main MPU 62 waits without executing any process until a predetermined wait time has elapsed. In this pachinko machine 10, the wait time is set to 10 μsec, but as long as it does not interfere with the execution of periodic timer interrupt processing and can fully achieve the action and effect of setting this wait process, which will be described later, the specific wait time can be any value, but it is preferably in the range of 2 μsec to 500 μsec, and more preferably in the range of 10 μsec to 100 μsec.

By the way, it takes at least 1.2 μsec to execute the processing of one step. Therefore, even if the processing of step S10302 is not set, a compulsory wait time of 1.2 μsec occurs between steps S10301 and S10303. In this regard, in step S10302, not only is the minimum time required to execute the processing set, but an additional wait time is set between the processing of steps S10301 and S10303.

In the following step S10303, a process is executed to transfer the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 to the second ball entry determination area WA2 in the register of the main MPU 62. Incidentally, since the information in the input port 62b is updated at intervals shorter than the time between the completion of step S10301 and the start of step S10303, the information transferred from the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 in step S10303 may be different from that in step S10301.

The second entry judgment area WA2, like the first entry judgment area WA1, is composed of 8 bits as shown in FIG. 15(b-2), and has a data capacity that can store all of the information stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7. In this case, the storage source bits in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 and the storage destination bits in the second entry judgment area WA2 are predetermined in a one-to-one correspondence, and the relationship between the storage source bits and the storage destination bits is the same as in the case of the first entry judgment area WA1.

Then, in step S10304, the goal determination process is executed, and the goal detection process ends. The goal determination process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 16.

Figure 16 is a flowchart showing the ball entry determination process executed by the main MPU 62. In the ball entry determination process, first, in step S10401, 8 is set to the ball entry determination counter provided in the main RAM 64. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports. Specifically, in this embodiment, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter, "8", corresponds to the 0th bit D0 of the large winning port 36a, "7", corresponds to the 1st bit D1 of the first starting port 33, "6", corresponds to the 2nd bit D2 of the second starting port 34, "5", corresponds to the 3rd bit D3 of the first winning port 32a, "4", corresponds to the 4th bit D4 of the second winning port 32b, "3", corresponds to the 5th bit D5 of the third winning port 32c, "2", corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35, and "1" corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage. In the next step S10402, each bit of information corresponding to the current numerical information of the scoring counter in the first scoring judgment area WA1 and the second scoring judgment area WA2 is grasped. In this case, each piece of information grasped is information read from the same bit in the input port 62b.

In the next step S10403, the AND process is performed on each piece of information grasped in step S10402, and the AND process result is stored in a register. In step S10404, the AND process result is stored in the corresponding bit of the first post-operation area WA3 and the second post-operation area WA4 on the side different from the side where the information of the AND process result was stored in the ball entry detection process in the previous timer interrupt process. The first post-operation area WA3 and the second post-operation area WA4 are composed of 8 bits as shown in Figures 15 (b-3) and 15 (b-4), and have a data capacity that can store all the information of the AND process result between each bit of the first entry ball determination area WA1 and each bit of the second entry ball determination area WA2. In this case, the order of the bits of the first entry ball determination area WA1 and the second entry ball determination area WA2 that were the subject of the AND process and the order of each bit in the first post-operation area WA3 and the second post-operation area WA4 are uniquely determined.

Then, in step S10405, the information of the bit corresponding to the current numerical information of the goal determination counter is read from either the first post-calculation area WA3 or the second post-calculation area WA4, which is the side in which the information of the result of the AND process in the goal determination process in the previous timer interrupt process was stored. Then, in step S10406, an inversion process is performed to invert the read information between "0" and "1".

Then, in step S10407, an AND process is performed between the information resulting from the AND process in step S10403 and the information resulting from the inversion process in step S10406, and in the following step S10408, it is determined whether the result of the AND process is "1", which corresponds to the ball entry detection start information. If it is determined in step S10408 that the result of the AND process is "1", the process proceeds to step S10409 and subsequent steps.

In step S10409, it is determined whether the numerical information of the current ball entry determination counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. If it corresponds to either the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, in step S10410, the start hole ball entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and in step S10411, the numerical information of the three prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The start hole entry flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34, and for the main MPU 62 to identify that a process other than the execution of a prize ball should be executed in response to the entry of a game ball into the first start hole 33 or the second start hole 34. Incidentally, since the ball entry detection sensors 44b and 44c are provided in the first start hole 33 and the second start hole 34, respectively, the entry of a ball into the first start hole 33 and the entry of a ball into the second start hole 34 may be detected simultaneously within one processing cycle of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, in order to deal with this, the start hole entry flag is provided corresponding to the number of start holes 33 and 34, and specifically, two are provided. In addition, the three prize ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times that a three prize ball command instructing the execution of three prize balls should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10409, in step S10412, it is judged whether the numerical information of the current ball entry judgment counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the large prize opening 36a (variable prize opening device 36). If it corresponds to the variable prize opening device 36, in step S10413, the large prize opening ball entry flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and in step S10414, the numerical information of the 15 prize ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The large prize entry ball flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the variable prize entry device 36, and is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify a state in which processing corresponding to the entry of a game ball into the variable prize entry device 36, other than the execution of a prize ball, should be executed. The 15 prize ball counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times that a 15 prize ball command that instructs the execution of 15 prize balls should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10412, in step S10415, it is judged whether the numerical information of the current ball entry judgment counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to the through gate 35. If it corresponds to the through gate 35, in step S10416, the through passage flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1".

The through pass flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to determine that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35, and also to determine that the main MPU 62 is in a state where processing corresponding to the game ball entering the through gate 35 should be executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10415, in step S10417, it is judged whether the numerical information of the current winning ball judgment counter is information indicating a bit corresponding to any one of the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, and the third winning hole 32c. If it corresponds to any one of the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, and the third winning hole 32c, in step S10418, the general winning hole winning ball flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1", and in step S10419, the numerical information of the three winning ball counter provided in the main RAM 64 is incremented by 1.

The general winning hole ball entry flag is a flag for the main MPU 62 to identify the entry of a game ball into the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, or the third winning hole 32c. Incidentally, since the first winning hole 32a, the second winning hole 32b, and the third winning hole 32c are each provided with ball entry detection sensors 44d, 44e, and 44f, the entry of a ball into the first winning hole 32a, the entry of a ball into the second winning hole 32b, and the entry of a ball into the third winning hole may be simultaneously detected within one processing cycle of the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, in order to deal with this, the general winning hole ball entry flag is provided in accordance with the number of general winning holes 32a, 32b, and 32c, and specifically, three are provided. In addition, the 10-ball counter is a counter for the main MPU 62 to identify the number of times that a 3-ball command, which instructs the execution of 10 winning balls, should be output.

If a negative judgment is made in step S10417, this means that the ball entry this time corresponds to the discharge passage, so in step SAD20, the discharge passage passing flag provided in the main RAM 64 is set to "1". The discharge passage passing flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 62 to identify that the game ball has passed through the discharge passage.

If a negative determination is made in step S10408, or after any of steps S10411, S10414, S10416, S10419, and S10420 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S10421. In step S10421, the goal determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10422, it is determined whether the goal determination counter is "0".

If the goal counter is not "0", steps S10402 to S10420 are executed for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the goal counter updated in step S10421. If steps S10402 to S10420 have been executed for the number of pieces of numerical information set in step S10401, a positive judgment is made in step S10422, and this goal determination process ends.

Next, with reference to Figure 17, we will explain how the ball entry detection process (Figure 15) is executed to detect whether or not a ball has entered the general entry port 32, the variable entry device 36, the first start port 33, the second start port 34, the through gate 35, and the discharge passage.

Figure 17 is an explanatory diagram that explains how the presence or absence of a goal is detected. First, with reference to Figure 17 (A), the timing for monitoring the detection results (hereinafter also referred to as goal information) of goal detection sensors 44a to 44h is explained. Figure 17 (A) is a timing chart that explains the timing for monitoring each goal information item.

As shown in Figure 17 (A), in a configuration in which the timer interrupt process (Figure 13) is started at a cycle of T1 (specifically, 4 msec), the process of monitoring the scoring information is carried out twice (steps S10301 and S10303) during each processing of the timer interrupt process. The process of monitoring each set of scoring information is carried out at different times, but the process of monitoring the scoring information on the front side (step S10301) is carried out when a time period of T2 has elapsed from the timing at which the timer interrupt process was started.

In this case, the timing at which the ball entry detection process is executed in the timer interrupt process is before processes whose processing times are likely to fluctuate, such as the game round control process and the electric support process, and furthermore, the processes executed in the timer interrupt process before the ball entry detection process are processes whose processing times are relatively less likely to fluctuate. Therefore, the period until the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the leading side is started in the timer interrupt process for each processing round is the same, approximately the same, or similar at T2. Therefore, of the processes that monitor a set of ball entry information included in each processing round of the timer interrupt process, the process of monitoring the ball entry information on the leading side is executed periodically.

In addition, among the processes for monitoring each set of scoring information, a wait process for detecting scoring (step S10302) is executed between the process for monitoring the scoring information on the front side (step S10301) and the process for monitoring the scoring information on the back side (step S10303). However, this wait process does not execute any processing and simply waits until a certain wait time T3 has elapsed. Therefore, among the processes for monitoring a set of scoring information included in each processing round of the timer interrupt process, the process for monitoring the scoring information on the back side is executed periodically.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17(B), the content of the calculation performed when a goal determination is made will be described. FIG. 17(B) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the content of the calculation performed when a goal determination is made. Note that, in practice, various calculations are performed in units of one bit, but in the following explanation, the content of the calculation is explained in units of one byte. However, a configuration in which calculations are actually performed in units of one byte as described below may also be used.

In the case of FIG. 17(B), first, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information from the first side in the nth timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17(B1), "00100000" is set in the first ball entry determination area WA1. In this case, the ball entry information from the third winning hole detection sensor 44f among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h indicates that a game ball has been detected (hereinafter also referred to as ball entry information), and the ball entry information from the other sensors indicates that a game ball has not been detected (hereinafter also referred to as no ball entry information).

In addition, in the process of monitoring the subsequent ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17 (B2), "10100000" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h and the third winning hole detection sensor 44f each indicate ball entry information, and the other sensors indicate no ball entry information.

When the information of the first scoring judgment area WA1 and the second scoring judgment area WA2 is set as described above, the result of the AND process becomes "00100000" as shown in FIG. 17 (B3), and this information is set in the first post-calculation area WA3 as the result of monitoring the scoring information in the timer interrupt process of the nth processing round. Note that if the result of monitoring the scoring information in the n-1th timer interrupt process is set in the first post-calculation area WA3, the result of monitoring the scoring information in the nth timer interrupt process is set in the second post-calculation area WA4. Also, the scoring judgment process is executed using the result of monitoring the scoring information in the n-1th time and the result of monitoring the scoring information in the nth time, but the details of the calculations in this process are omitted here.

Next, in the process of monitoring the ball entry information from the front side in the n+1th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17 (B4), "10100110" is set in the first ball entry judgment area WA1. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, the second starting hole detection sensor 44c, and the first starting hole detection sensor 44b each indicate ball entry information, and the other sensors indicate no ball entry information.

In addition, in the process of monitoring the subsequent ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), "10100010" is set in the second ball entry determination area WA2. In this case, among the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f, and the first starting hole detection sensor 44b each indicate ball entry information, while the other sensors indicate no ball entry information.

When the information in the first scoring judgment area WA1 and the second scoring judgment area WA2 is set as described above, the result of the AND process becomes "10100010" as shown in FIG. 17 (B6), and this information is set in the second post-calculation area WA4 as the result of monitoring the scoring information in the timer interrupt process of the n+1th processing round.

After that, in the ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) in the n+1th timer interrupt process, the result of the monitoring of the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is first read from the first post-calculation area WA3, and an inversion process is performed on the information of the monitoring result that was read. This results in "11011111" as shown in FIG. 17 (B7). Then, the result of the inversion process is ANDed with the result of the monitoring of the ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process. This results in "10000010" as shown in FIG. 17 (B8). In this case, the ball entry determination process determines that the discharge passage detection sensor 44h has detected the entry of a game ball, and determines that the first start hole detection sensor 44b has detected the entry of a game ball.

Also, as shown in FIG. 17 (B4), in the process of monitoring the ball-entering information on the front side in the n+1th timer interrupt process, the second start hole detection sensor 44c indicates that a ball has been entered, but this is due to electrical noise. In this case, even if a switch from no-ball-entering information to ball-entering information is confirmed, it is not immediately determined that a ball has been entered, but rather that a ball has been entered if the ball-entering information is confirmed multiple times. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 17 (B5), in the process of monitoring the ball-entering information on the rear side in the n+1th timer interrupt process, the second start hole detection sensor 44c indicates that a ball has not been entered, and the occurrence of electrical noise is not treated as a game ball entering.

In addition, the third winning hole detection sensor 44f indicates that a ball has entered the hole in both the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process and the process of monitoring one set of ball entry information in the n+1th timer interrupt process. This indicates that the sensor is continuing to detect a game ball whose entry has already been detected. In this case, the occurrence of a ball entry is determined on the condition that the monitoring result of the ball entry information in the nth timer interrupt process is "0", so a single game ball entering the hole is not treated as multiple balls entering the hole.

By executing the ball entry detection process as described above, the detection results of each ball entry detection sensor 44a to 44h are monitored, and if a ball entry corresponding to the award of a game ball occurs, an increment process is performed on the 3 prize ball counter, the 10 prize ball counter, and the 15 prize ball counter according to the location of the ball entry. If any of these counters is "1" or more, a prize ball command is set in the prize ball command output setting process (step S10209) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 13), and the set prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 70. In this case, the output setting of the prize ball command is performed only once in one processing of the timer interrupt process. Therefore, for example, even if the 15 prize ball counter is "2" or more, the 15 prize ball command is sent only once in one processing. However, this is not limited to this, and a configuration in which a predetermined number of prize ball commands (for example, 2 or 3) are sent in one processing may be used.

It is also possible that the 3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, and 15 prize ball counter are all equal to or greater than "1." In this case, the output of the prize ball command with the greater number of prize balls is prioritized. In other words, the output of the 15 prize ball command is prioritized over the output of the 10 prize ball command and the output of the 3 prize ball command, and the output of the 10 prize ball command is prioritized over the output of the 3 prize ball command.

When the 15 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 15 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 15 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Also, when the 10 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 10 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 10 prize ball counter is decremented by 1. Also, when the 3 prize ball counter is "1" or greater and a 3 prize ball command is set as the output target, the 3 prize ball counter is decremented by 1.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300. In this embodiment, the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes the following main processing when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on.

Figure 18 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300.

In step S10501, it is determined whether or not calculation data including prize ball count data and calculation execution conditions has been received. If it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has been received (S10501: YES), the process proceeds to step S10502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10501 that calculation data has not been received (S10501: NO), the process of step S10501 is executed again. In other words, until calculation data is received, the process continues in an infinite loop without proceeding to the next step S10502.

In step S10502, the received prize ball count data is stored in prize ball count data storage memory 306. Then, the process proceeds to step S10503, where the received calculation execution conditions are stored in calculation execution condition storage memory 307. Then, the process proceeds to step S10504.

In step S10504, a setting completion command is sent to the main CPU 62x, which means that storage of the prize ball count data in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 has been completed, and storage of the calculation execution conditions in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 has been completed. Then, proceed to step S10505.

In step S10505, it is determined whether or not the bit of the buffer 302 contains ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x ("1" is stored in the bit). In step S10505, if it is determined that the bit of the buffer 302 contains ball entry information received from the main CPU 62x (S10505: YES), the process proceeds to step S10506, where 1 is added to the counter of the register corresponding to the bit of the buffer 302. Specifically, for example, if the bit corresponding to the first start hole ball entry information of the buffer 302 is "1" and the bit corresponding to the normal mode is "1", 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the large prize hole N _S of the register 304, and 1 is added to the counter corresponding to the number of balls entering the large prize hole during the normal mode. Then, the process proceeds to step S10507. On the other hand, in step S10505, if it is determined that there is no winning ball information received from the main CPU 62x in the bit of the buffer 302 (S10505: NO), the process proceeds to step S10507 without executing step S10506.

In step S10507, it is determined whether or not the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the register 304 is 500, that is, whether or not the number of game balls shot to the game board 30 has reached 500. In step S10507, when it is determined that the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 is satisfied (S10507: YES), the process proceeds to step S10508.

In step S10508, calculation processing is performed to calculate various game history information based on the prize ball number data stored in prize ball number data storage memory 306 and the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in register 304. Then, the process proceeds to step S10509, where the calculated various game history information is stored in calculation result storage memory 309. Then, the process proceeds to step S10510, where the number of game balls that have entered each entrance stored in register 304 is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10511.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10507 that the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage memory 307 are not satisfied (S10507: NO), the process proceeds to step S10511 without executing steps S10508 to S10510.

In step S10511, it is determined whether or not a transmission request command for game history information has been received from the inspection machine 320. If it is determined that a transmission request command has been received (S10511: YES), the process proceeds to step S10512, where the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 displays the received game history information on the display unit 328. After executing step S10512, the process returns to step S10505, and the process from step S10505 onwards is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10511 that a transmission request command for game history information has not been received from the inspection machine 320 (S10511: NO), the process returns to step S10505 without executing the process of step S10512, and the process from step S10505 onwards is repeated.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 can calculate game history information that is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in a game that has been played. If the game machine has been illegally modified, the calculated game history information may become an unnatural value that differs from the expected value. Therefore, by checking the game history information, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is provided with a calculation result storage memory 309 that stores the calculated game history information in a non-volatile manner. Since the game history information is information that has a correlation with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the game history information differs for each pachinko machine 10 and is information specific to the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the game history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. According to this embodiment, the game history information that reflects the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10 main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be inspected by acquiring the game history information from the pachinko machine 10 main body itself. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, information regarding the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be acquired by a hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since the pachinko machine 10 is circulated from one place to another, it may be left in a state where it is not connected to the hall computer. In this case, the conventional pachinko machine 10 cannot hold information about the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stores the game history information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, in the calculation result storage memory 309 of the game history management chip 300 stored inside the housing of the pachinko machine 10 main body, so that even if the pachinko machine 10 is not connected to the hall computer, the game history information can be obtained from the pachinko machine 10 main body. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can always link the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information one-to-one, regardless of the state (installed in a game hall or in circulation) of the pachinko machine 10, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 and the main CPU 62x are both mounted on the main MPU 62, and are configured to operate with the same power source. Therefore, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is calculated by a hall computer, even if a malfunction occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or a malfunction occurs in the processing of the hall computer, the game history information can be calculated as long as power is supplied to the pachinko machine 10. If the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by different power sources, and there is a malfunction in the power supply of the game history management chip 300, a malfunction occurs in which the game history information cannot be calculated even though the game is being executed by the pachinko machine 10. In contrast, according to this embodiment, since the main CPU 62x and the game history management chip 300 are operated by the same power source, the game history information can always be calculated as long as the game can be executed. Therefore, the reliability of the game history information can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, which is a space that leaves traces of opening and closing (also called traces of opening or unsealing). Therefore, if physical contact is made with the calculation result storage memory 309, traces of opening the board box will remain. Therefore, if the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 is altered through physical contact with the calculation result storage memory 309, it is possible to grasp the alteration from the traces on the board box. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the game history information. Since some pachinko machines 10 are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution, but since the calculation result storage memory 309 is stored inside the board box, which leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the game history information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the game history information is information acquired based on the game that has been executed, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be properly managed and inspected by preventing unauthorized modification of the game history information that reflects the characteristics of the game on the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, so that the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 related to the paid-out prize balls can be calculated. Furthermore, even if different prize ball number data is set for each type (model) of the pachinko machine 10, the game history management chip 300 can calculate correct game history information using the prize ball number data set for each type of pachinko machine 10. If the game machine is illegally modified, the calculated game history information may be an unnatural value different from the expected value. Therefore, by checking the correct game history information, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x transmits a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 to the game history management chip 300. Therefore, even if the game history management chip 300 is configured in such a way that it cannot access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 or the game history management chip 300 is configured in such a way that it cannot grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, the game history management chip 300 can obtain the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the main processing of the master CPU 62x, interruption of the timer interrupt processing is not permitted until a setting completion command is received, and the game ball launch control processing included in the timer interrupt processing is not executed. In other words, game balls are not launched until storage of the prize ball count data in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 is completed, so that it is possible to prevent game balls from being omitted from the calculation of the game history information by the game history management chip 300.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, game history information for each period until 500 game balls are detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is calculated and stored, so even if there is variation in the time until 500 game balls are detected by each pachinko machine 10, game history information that is not affected by the variation in time can be calculated and stored. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are released, it is possible to calculate and store highly accurate game history information that is less affected by this. Also, the required storage capacity can be reduced compared to a configuration in which ball entry information for each ball entry port is stored as is.

Differing types (models) of pachinko machines 10 have different game characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing the calculation to calculate the game history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10. According to this embodiment, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and can therefore execute the calculation to calculate the game history information when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10 are met.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 executes a calculation to calculate the game history information, it erases the number of game balls that have entered each entrance (counter value) stored in the register 304, making it possible to store information regarding the number of game balls that have entered in the register 304 again. Therefore, the storage capacity required for the register 304 can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320, so that the inspection machine 320 can display the game history information of the pachinko machine 10. Then, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information displayed on the inspection machine 320.

A4. Other aspects of the first embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 was set to the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaching 500, but the calculation execution condition may be set to a time interval for executing the calculation. For example, the time interval for executing the calculation may be set to one hour, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may calculate the game history information every hour. The inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the detailed game history information calculated every hour, and can appropriately determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Note that different types (models) of pachinko machines 10 have different game characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions (time intervals) for executing the calculation to calculate the game history information will also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even in this aspect 1, the game history management chip 300 acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and can execute the calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10 are met.

The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may also be configured to measure the elapsed time since the calculation was executed, determine whether or not the player is playing, and suspend measurement of the elapsed time during the period during which it is determined that no game is being played. Specifically, for example, if there is no ball-entry information in the bit of the buffer 302 for a predetermined time (e.g., three minutes), it may be configured to determine that no game is being played and suspend measurement of the elapsed time, and if ball-entry information is confirmed in the bit of the buffer 302, it may be configured to determine that game play has resumed and resume measurement of the elapsed time. With this configuration, game history information can be calculated only for the period during which game play is actually being played.

The measurement of elapsed time may be configured to use a timer counter, or may be configured to provide an RTC (Real-Time Clock) and use the RTC's date and time information. Also, the game history information may be calculated at each predetermined time.

<Aspect 2>
In the first embodiment, the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 was set to the number of game balls detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h reaching 500, but the calculation execution condition may be set to the detection of a power interruption. Specifically, when the power failure monitoring circuit 86 detects a power interruption, it outputs a signal indicating that a power interruption has occurred to the game history management chip 300. The CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that receives the signal determines that a power interruption has occurred and calculates game history information. In this configuration, the register 304 is composed of a volatile memory, and the ball number information is erased. According to this configuration, the game history information can be calculated based on the number of game balls detected during the period from when the supply of power to the pachinko machine 10 is started to when the power interruption occurs. That is, the game history information is calculated for each period from when the business of the game hall starts to when it ends, so that the game history information is calculated for each business day of the game hall. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp whether or not there has been a change in the characteristics of the game history information across the business days of the game hall, and can appropriately determine whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, if the chip is configured to include a capacitor 87 that supplies power to the game history management chip 300 even after a power interruption occurs, the CPU 308 can reliably complete the calculation of the game history information and the storage of the game history information in the memory 309 for storing the calculation results.

<Aspect 3>
In the first embodiment, the master CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to this configuration, the game history information is displayed on the symbol display device 41 of the pachinko machine 10, so that an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 without using a dedicated device (inspection device 320, etc.) for checking the game history information. It is preferable that the master CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309 but not be able to change data, etc. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, etc.

<Aspect 4>
In the first embodiment, the main CPU 62x may be configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309, and an LED lamp for notifying that the game history information stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 does not satisfy a predetermined condition may be provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, a predetermined location of the main display unit 45). For example, the LED lamp may be configured to be illuminated when a specific value included in the game history information (for example, a role ratio, a consecutive role ratio, a payout ratio (in normal mode)) is no longer included in a predetermined range. With this configuration, an inspector of the pachinko machine can easily find a pachinko machine 10 in which a specific value included in the game history information is no longer included in the predetermined range. Then, by checking the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved. In particular, if the nails near the first starting hole 33 or the general winning holes (the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c) are tampered with, the payout ratio (in normal mode) will fall outside the predetermined range (e.g., 0.60 to 0.70) assumed when the pachinko machine was designed. Therefore, by configuring the LED lamp to light up when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is no longer within the predetermined range (e.g., 0.60 to 0.70), it is possible to properly determine whether the nails near the first starting hole 33 or the general winning holes (the first to third winning holes 32a to 32c) are tampered with.

Furthermore, the light emission mode (color) of the LED lamp may be determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value (e.g., reel ratio, consecutive reel ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode)) included in the game history information from a predetermined range. For example, the first LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the reel ratio is within a predetermined range (0.70 or less), to emit purple light when the reel ratio is 0.71 to 0.80, and to emit red light when the reel ratio is 0.81 to 1.00. The second LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the consecutive reel ratio is within a predetermined range (0.60 or less), to emit purple light when the consecutive reel ratio is 0.61 to 0.70, and to emit red light when the consecutive reel ratio is 0.71 to 1.00. Also, the third LED lamp may be configured to emit blue light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a predetermined range (0.60 to 0.70), emit purple light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is 0.71 to 0.80, and emit red light when the payout ratio (in normal mode) is 0.81 to 1.00. With this configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily grasp how much a specific value included in the game history information deviates from the predetermined range. Note that it is preferable that the main CPU 62x is configured to be able to access the calculation result storage memory 309 but not to change data, etc. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the game history information from being destroyed or rewritten due to noise, program bugs, etc.

<Aspect 5>
In the first embodiment, the calculation data (number of prize balls data and calculation execution conditions) stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x), but the game history management chip 300 may be configured to be able to access the number of prize balls data storage area and the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 may access the main ROM 63 immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to obtain the calculation data (number of prize balls data and calculation execution conditions), and store the obtained calculation data in the number of prize balls data storage memory 306 and the calculation execution condition storage memory 307. With such a configuration, the processing load of the main MPU 62 can be reduced.

<Aspect 6>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 is configured to calculate the game history information such as the ratio of the winning combinations, but the number of winning balls for every 500 balls stored in the register may be stored as is, and the inspection machine 320 may calculate the game history information. With such a configuration, the processing load of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of the sixth aspect will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 19 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 has a prize ball count data storage area and a memory execution condition storage area.

As in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball number data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. As in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process that is executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This enables the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball number data that is set in this pachinko machine 10.

The memory execution condition memory area stores memory execution conditions that are conditions under which the game history management chip 300 executes the memory process described below. In this mode 6, the memory execution condition is stored as the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage reaching 500. This memory execution condition stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process that is executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This enables the game history management chip 300 to grasp the memory execution conditions that have been set in this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires ball entry information for each entry port from the CPU 62x, a register 304 that stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port, a prize ball number data memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a memory execution condition memory 307a that stores memory execution conditions acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball number memory 309a that sequentially stores the number of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in the register 304. The above-mentioned storage process is a process of storing the number of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in the register 304 in the ball number memory 309a.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment 6, the winning ball number information stored in the winning ball number storage memory 309a and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, etc., a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays various information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

In this aspect 6, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of the number of winning balls information and the number of winning balls data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the number of winning balls information stored in the number of winning balls storage memory 309a and the number of winning balls data stored in the number of winning balls data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates the game playing history information based on the number of winning balls information and the number of winning balls data received, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Figure 20 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic diagram of the processing performed by the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 in aspect 6 of the first embodiment.

The processing contents in the buffer 302 and the register 304 are the same as those in the first embodiment described above, so the explanation is omitted.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 6, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. Therefore, the contents of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 are the same as the contents of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63.

The memory for storing execution conditions 307a is a memory for storing the memory execution conditions set in the pachinko machine 10. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the memory execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63 are transmitted by the CPU 62x to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the memory for storing execution conditions 307a. Therefore, the contents of the memory execution conditions stored in the memory for storing execution conditions 307a are the same as the contents of the memory execution conditions stored in the main ROM 63.

The CPU 308 judges whether the stored execution condition stored in the memory 307a for storing stored execution conditions is satisfied, and when it judges that the stored execution condition is satisfied, stores information on the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the register 304 in the memory 309a for storing the number of balls, and resets the value of each counter of the register 304 to "0". In this aspect 6, the CPU 308 stores information on the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the register 304 in the memory 309a for storing the number of balls entering each entrance every time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage stored in the register 304 _N OUT reaches 500. In the following, the information on the number of game balls entering each entrance counted while 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 is also referred to as a "short-term ball number information group".

The memory for storing the number of entering balls 309a is a memory that sequentially stores information about the number of entering balls stored in the register 304 (short-term entering ball number information group), and in this embodiment, it is configured with a non-volatile memory that can retain its memory even if the power supply is cut off. The memory for storing the number of entering balls 309a also stores information about the order in which the short-term entering ball number information group was written, and when there is no free area to write the short-term entering ball number information group, the CPU 308 stores the short-term entering ball number information group in the area in which the short-term entering ball number information group with the oldest written order is stored. In other words, the memory for storing the number of entering balls 309a is configured to overwrite the short-term entering ball number information group in order from the oldest (first-in, first-out method), and the most recent short-term entering ball number information group is always stored.

In this aspect 6, the memory for storing the number of entering balls 309a has a capacity capable of storing 1200 sets of short-term entering ball number information, which is information regarding the number of entering balls into each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. For example, if game balls are launched continuously for 10 hours in one day, 60,000 game balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term entering ball number information will be stored in the memory for storing the number of entering balls 309a in one day. Therefore, the memory for storing the number of entering balls 309a can store sets of short-term entering ball number information for the most recent 10 days.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the short-term ball entry number information group and the winning ball number data to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. Then, the inspection machine 320 calculates game playing history information such as the ratio of game devices based on the short-term ball entry number information group and the winning ball number data, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, in this aspect 6, the inspection machine 320, like the CPU 308 in the first embodiment, is capable of calculating one short-term game history information group for one short-term ball entry number information group, and is also capable of adding up the number of game balls that have entered each entry port stored in each of the multiple short-term ball entry number information groups, and using the added number of balls to calculate long-term game history information (long-term game history information group). In other words, the inspection machine 320 in this aspect 6 is capable of calculating not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls that have entered each entry port in a short period in which 500 game balls have been shot, but also a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls that have entered each entry port in a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (about 10 days' worth) have been shot.

In addition, in this embodiment 6, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received group of short-term ball entry count information on the display unit 328. The inspection machine 320 may also be configured to receive each counter value stored in the register 304 and display each received counter value on the display unit 328.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x may transmit the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 to the inspection machine 320. With such a configuration, the prize ball count data storage memory 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

In addition, the time interval for executing the storage process may be set as the storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63. For example, one hour may be set as the time interval for executing the storage process, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 may be configured to execute the storage process every time one hour has passed.

The storage execution condition stored in the storage execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 may be set to the detection of a power interruption. Specifically, when the power outage monitoring circuit 86 detects a power interruption, it outputs a signal indicating that a power interruption has occurred to the game history management chip 300, and the CPU 308 of the game history management chip 300 that receives the signal may determine that a power interruption has occurred and execute storage processing.

In addition, in aspect 6, the calculation for calculating the gaming history information is performed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but the calculation may be performed in part or in whole by the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300, and the gaming history information resulting from the calculation may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 7>
In the first embodiment, the gaming history management chip 300 calculates gaming history information such as the ratio of bonus items, but the ball entry information in the buffer may be stored as is, and the inspection machine 320 may calculate the gaming history information based on the ball entry information. With such a configuration, the processing load of the gaming history management chip 300 can be reduced. Details of the seventh aspect will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 21 is a block diagram showing in detail the configuration of the main control device 60 and the inspection device 320 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

In this embodiment 7, the main MPU 62 is provided with an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information to the game history management chip 300. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply, and can update the date information and time information even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

The main ROM 63 of the main MPU 62 is provided with a prize ball count data storage area. Note that in this embodiment 7, a calculation start condition storage area is not provided.

As in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data storage area stores the number of game balls (prize ball number data) that are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters each ball entrance. As in the first embodiment, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is sent to the game history management chip 300 in the initial setting process that is executed after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This enables the game history management chip 300 to grasp the prize ball number data that is set in this pachinko machine 10.

The game history management chip 300 includes a buffer 302 that acquires ball entry information for each ball entry port from the CPU 62x, a prize ball number data storage memory 306 that stores prize ball number data acquired from the main ROM 63, a CPU 308 that controls the entire game history management chip 300, and a ball entry information storage memory 309b that sequentially stores ball entry information for each ball entry port stored in the buffer 302.

The inspection terminal 65 is a terminal for connecting the inspection machine 320 and the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage memory 309b and the winning ball number data stored in the winning ball number data storage memory 306 are transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

The inspection machine 320 is equipped with a CPU 321 that executes various control programs, a ROM 324 that records various control programs and fixed value data, etc., a RAM 326 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data, a display unit 328 that displays various information, and a connection cable 329 for connecting to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10.

In this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300, requesting the transmission of ball entry information, etc. and the number of winning balls data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the ball entry information, etc. stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b and the number of winning balls data stored in the number of winning balls data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates the game playing history information based on the received ball entry information, etc. and the number of winning balls data, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Figure 22 is an explanatory diagram that shows a schematic overview of the processing in the game history management chip 300 and the inspection machine 320 in aspect 7 of the first embodiment.

The processing content in buffer 302 is the same as in the first embodiment described above, so a detailed explanation is omitted.

The memory for storing ball entry information 309b is a memory that sequentially stores the ball entry information stored in the buffer 302 and information on the game state when the game ball entered the game, and in this embodiment, it is configured with a non-volatile memory that can retain memory even if the power supply is cut off. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the ball entry information and information on the game state are stored, the date and time information of the game ball entering each ball entry port is added and stored. In addition, the memory for storing ball entry information 309b also stores information on the order in which the ball entry information, etc. were written, and when there is no free area to write the ball entry information, etc., the CPU 308 stores the ball entry information, etc. in the area in which the ball entry information, etc., that was written the oldest is stored. In other words, the memory for storing ball entry information 309b is configured to overwrite the oldest ball entry information, etc. in order (first-in, first-out method), and the most recent ball entry information, etc. is always stored.

The prize ball number data storage memory 306 is a memory for storing the prize ball number data set in the pachinko machine 10. In this aspect 7, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63 is transmitted to the game history management chip 300 and stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306. Therefore, the content of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is the same as the content of the prize ball number data stored in the main ROM 63. Furthermore, in this aspect 7, when the inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 is transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

As described above, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the game playing history management chip 300 requesting the transmission of ball entry information and the number of winning balls data. When the CPU 308 of the game playing history management chip 300 receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the ball entry information, information on the game status, and date and time information stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b, and the number of winning balls data stored in the prize ball number data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65. The inspection machine 320 then calculates the game playing history information based on the received information, and displays the calculated game playing history information on the display unit 328.

Specifically, the inspection machine 320 of this aspect 7 is capable of calculating not only game history information (short-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entering each entrance during a short period in which 500 game balls are shot, but also game history information (long-term game history information group) based on the number of balls entering each entrance during a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (approximately 10 days' worth) are shot. In other words, it is possible to calculate game history information for any period.

Furthermore, in this aspect 7, since date and time information (year, month, day and time information) is added to the winning ball information, etc., the inspection machine 320 can calculate the gaming history information by specifying the date and time range for which the gaming history information is to be calculated, within the range of the date and time information added to the received winning ball information, etc. Therefore, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can perform a detailed inspection based on the gaming history information with the specified date and time range.

In addition, in this embodiment 7, the following configuration may be adopted.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to display the received ball entry information, etc., on the display unit 328. With such a configuration, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can also ascertain the date and time when the game ball was detected by each ball entry detection sensor.

In addition, instead of the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 transmits the prize ball count data stored in the prize ball count data storage memory 306 to the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x may transmit the prize ball count data stored in the main ROM 63 to the inspection machine 320. With such a configuration, the prize ball count data storage memory 306 can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the game history management chip 300 can be reduced.

In addition, in aspect 7, the calculation for calculating the gaming history information is performed by the CPU 321 of the inspection machine 320, but the calculation may be performed in part or in whole by the CPU 308 of the gaming history management chip 300, and the gaming history information resulting from the calculation may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 8>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects, the calculation execution conditions or the storage execution conditions are stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history management chip 300 acquires these conditions from the main ROM 63. However, the game history management chip 300 may store these conditions in a non-volatile memory from the beginning. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which an inappropriate calculation execution condition or storage execution condition is stored in the main ROM 63, and the game history information or the number of balls that enter the balls cannot be properly stored. For example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which an extremely short period (e.g., the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT =5) is stored as the calculation execution condition or the storage execution condition, and only the game history information or the number of balls that enter the balls for an extremely short period (e.g., about one hour) is stored in the calculation result storage memory 309 or the number of balls that enter the balls storage memory 309a.

<Aspect 9>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects, the game history management chip 300 is configured to have a function for storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, a function for calculating game history information such as the ratio of game balls, and a function for storing the calculated game history information. However, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have some of these functions. Also, the game history management chip 300 may not be provided, and the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300) may have all of these functions. According to such a configuration, since there is no need to provide a separate game history management chip 300, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs. However, according to the configuration in which the game history management chip 300 is provided, the processing load of the main CPU 62x can be reduced.

<Aspect 10>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to have some or all of the functions of a functional unit other than the gaming history management chip 300 (for example, the inspection machine 320 or the main CPU 62x), or some or all of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300 may be provided by a functional unit other than the gaming history management chip 300. For example, if the gaming history management chip 300 is configured to have some of the functions of the inspection machine 320, the processing load and manufacturing costs of the inspection machine 320 can be further reduced, and if the inspection machine 320 is configured to have some of the functions of the gaming history management chip 300, the processing load and manufacturing costs of the gaming history management chip 300 can be further reduced.

<Aspect 11>
In the first embodiment, the game history management chip 300 calculates the game history information such as the ratio of the game features, but the game history management chip 300 may not be provided and the main CPU 62x may calculate the game history information. Details of the eleventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

Figure 23 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in aspect 11 of the first embodiment. This aspect 11 differs from the first embodiment (Figure 5) in that it does not have a game history management chip 300 and that the main RAM 64 has a ball count storage area and a calculation result storage area.

Based on the game ball entry information received from the input/output port 62a, the main CPU 62x updates the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the entry ball number storage area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 are met, calculation is performed based on the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 and the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in the entry ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 to calculate game history information, and the game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64. A specific explanation is given below.

24 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic overview of the processing in the main MPU 62 in the aspect 11 of the first embodiment. The main CPU 62x judges whether the calculation execution condition stored in the calculation execution condition storage area of the main ROM 63 is satisfied, and when it is judged that the calculation execution condition is satisfied, stores information on the number of game balls entering each entrance stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x in the entering ball number storage area of the main RAM 64. In this aspect 11, the main CPU 62x stores information on the number of game balls entering each entrance in the entering ball number storage area of the main RAM 64 every time the value of the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT stored in the cache of the main CPU 62x reaches 500. As described above, the information on the number of game balls entering each entrance counted while 500 game balls are shot to the game board 30 is also called a "short-term entering ball number information group".

The number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 is an area that sequentially stores information about the number of scoring balls (short-term scoring ball number information group). The number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 also stores information about the order in which the short-term scoring ball number information group was written, and when there is no free area to write the short-term scoring ball number information group, the main CPU 62x stores the newly written short-term scoring ball number information group in the area in which the short-term scoring ball number information group with the oldest written order is stored. In other words, the number of scoring balls storage area of the main RAM 64 is configured to overwrite the short-term scoring ball number information group in order starting with the oldest (first-in, first-out method), so that the most recent short-term scoring ball number information group is always stored.

In this aspect 11, the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 has a capacity capable of storing 1200 sets of short-term entering ball count information, which is information regarding the number of entering balls into each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. For example, if game balls are launched continuously for 10 hours in one day, 60,000 game balls will be launched in one day, and 120 sets of short-term entering ball count information will be stored in the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 in one day. Therefore, the entering ball count storage area of the main RAM 64 is capable of storing sets of short-term entering ball count information for the most recent 10 days.

Then, the main CPU 62x newly calculates one short-term game history information group for one newly stored short-term ball entry number information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. Furthermore, the main CPU 62x adds the number of game balls entering each entry port stored in each of the multiple short-term ball entry number information groups including the newly stored short-term ball entry number information group each time the calculation execution condition is satisfied, and calculates long-term game history information (long-term game history information group) using the added number of balls. That is, the main CPU 62x of this aspect 11 can calculate not only a short-term game history information group based on the number of balls entering each entry port in a short period in which 500 game balls were shot, but also a long-term game history information group based on the number of balls entering each entry port in a long period in which, for example, 600,000 game balls (about 10 days' worth) were shot. Then, the calculated game history information is stored in the calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64.

The calculation result storage area of the main RAM 64 is composed of an area for sequentially storing short-term game history information groups and an area for storing long-term game history information groups. The area for sequentially storing short-term game history information groups also stores information regarding the order in which the short-term game history information groups were written, and when there is no free area for writing the short-term game history information groups, the main CPU 62x stores the newly calculated short-term game history information groups in the area in which the short-term game history information groups with the oldest written order are stored. That is, the area for sequentially storing the short-term game history information groups of the main RAM 64 is configured to be overwritten in order starting from the oldest short-term game history information group (first-in first-out method), and the most recent short-term game history information group is always stored. The area for storing the long-term game history information groups is overwritten with the newly calculated long-term game history information group every time the calculation execution condition is satisfied. In other words, the area that stores the long-term gaming history information group stores the latest long-term gaming history information group calculated based on multiple short-term ball count information groups, including the latest short-term ball count information group.

When the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, it transmits a transmission request command to the main CPU 62x. When the main CPU 62x receives the transmission request command from the inspection machine 320, it transmits the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 to the inspection machine 320. The inspection machine 320 then displays the received game history information on the display unit 328.

In addition, in this embodiment 11, when a predetermined operation is performed to display the game history information on the pattern display device 41, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is output to the sound and light control device 90 via the input/output port 62x and displayed on the pattern display device 41.

In addition, in this embodiment 11, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, the backup power supplied from the capacitor 87 is configured to retain the short-term ball count information group and game history information stored in the main RAM 64 for several days.

With this configuration, the main CPU 62x, which is a single processing unit, executes processes for progressing the game, such as the jackpot lottery process, and processes for calculating and storing game history information, so there is no need to provide a dedicated game history management chip 300 for calculating and storing game history information, and the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Furthermore, the main RAM 64 is configured to store a group of short-term ball entry count information, which is information regarding the number of game balls that enter each entry port counted while 500 game balls are launched onto the game board 30. This makes it possible to calculate the most recent group of short-term game history information and long-term game history information while significantly reducing the memory capacity required for the main RAM 64, compared to a configuration in which the game ball entry information is stored in its original format (for example, a configuration in which the game ball entry information is stored in the ball entry information storage memory 309b of FIG. 22).

The main CPU 62x is not limited to being configured to calculate both a short-term gaming history information group and a long-term gaming history information group as gaming history information, but may be configured to calculate only one of them.

<Aspect 12>
Fig. 25 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 12 of the first embodiment. The difference from the above-mentioned aspect 11 (Fig. 23) is that the main MPU 62 is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a non-volatile memory that can be rewritten and can retain its memory even if the power supply is cut off. This flash memory 64x is provided with a ball entry number storage area for storing the short-term ball entry number information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11, and a calculation result storage area for storing the short-term game history information group and the long-term game history information group in the above-mentioned aspect 11.

The main CPU 62x in this mode 12 is configured to store the short-term ball entry number information group and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x each time the calculation execution condition is met.

This configuration allows the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10 to be reduced compared to a configuration that includes a game history management chip 300. Furthermore, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for an extended period of time, the short-term ball entry number information group and the game history information are retained, so that no matter what state the pachinko machine 10 is in (for example, a distribution state in which the pachinko machine 10 is not supplied with power for an extended period of time, etc.), it is possible to always keep the pachinko machine 10 and the game history information linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be managed and inspected.

In addition, since there is no need to provide an area in the main RAM 64 for storing the short-term ball entry number information group and game history information, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 can be reduced, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

<Aspect 13>
In the first embodiment and other aspects, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between a game mode in which a game progress process, which is a process for progressing a game, can be executed, and an inspection mode in which game history information is output to the inspection machine 320. The game progress process is a process executed based on the detection of a game ball by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, and includes a jackpot lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a variable display process of the patterns on the main display unit 45, and an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a.

In the inspection mode, the game progress process may not be executed even if the game ball passes through the area detected by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection mode is entered, the inspection mode flag for determining whether or not the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode is turned ON. The main control device 60 then determines whether or not the inspection mode flag is ON, and if it determines that the inspection mode flag is ON, it does not proceed to the processing flow for executing the normal game progress processing, but proceeds to the processing flow for the inspection mode. As a result, even if the main control device 60 receives a signal indicating that a game ball has been detected from the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, it is configured not to execute processing based on the reception of the signal (for example, processing to obtain the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, processing to pay out prize balls, processing to send commands to the sound and light emission control device 90, etc.).

With this configuration, it is possible to execute in the inspection mode processes that are undesirable to execute in parallel with game progress processing, or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. Furthermore, with this configuration, game progress processing is not executed in the inspection mode, so when developing a program for processing to be executed in the inspection mode, there is no need to consider measures to take in the event that game progress processing is executed in parallel, which can significantly improve the efficiency of developing programs for processing to be executed in the inspection mode.

The game history information is information whose contents change when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process for outputting game history information is executed in parallel with game progress processing, the game progress processing may be executed while an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 is inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information, causing the content of the game history information to change from time to time, which may make it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, according to the configuration of aspect 13, the game history information is output in an inspection mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even if a game ball has passed through a specified area, so that it is possible to prevent the content of the game history information from changing while it is being output. As a result, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can carry out the inspection smoothly.

The manner in which the game history information is output in the inspection mode is not limited to the manner in which the game history information is output to the inspection device 320 and displayed, and may be in other manners. For example, the game history information may be configured to be output to the pattern display device 41 and displayed.

In addition, the information output in the inspection mode is not limited to game history information, and may be other information. For example, it may be other information based on the detection of game balls by the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h, such as game ball entry information and number of game balls that have entered.

<Aspect 14>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 is capable of switching between a game mode and an inspection mode, when a specified operation (hereinafter also referred to as a "mode switching operation") for transitioning from the game mode to the inspection mode is performed by an inspector while game progress processing in the game mode is being executed, the configuration may be such that the transition from the game mode to the inspection mode occurs at the time when the game progress processing being executed is completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

Specifically, for example, when a mode switching operation is performed by pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button during execution of game progress processing in game mode, the processing is completed up to a predetermined processing stage for each game progress processing being executed (jackpot lottery processing, electric role release lottery processing, prize ball payout processing, variable display processing of patterns on the main display unit 45, opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.). Then, when the game progress processing is completed up to the predetermined processing stage, the processing after that processing stage is not executed and a standby state is entered. Then, when the processing of all the game progress processing being executed is completed up to the predetermined processing stage, the game mode is switched to the inspection mode.

This configuration makes it possible to reduce the occurrence of processing errors when switching to the inspection mode, compared to a configuration in which the game mode is switched to the inspection mode immediately after a mode switching operation is performed, regardless of whether the ongoing game progress processing has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the game mode is switched to the inspection mode immediately after a mode switching operation is performed, regardless of whether the game progress processing being performed has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage, if a mode switching operation is performed during the period in which the pattern change display processing is being performed in the main display unit 45 as the game progress processing in the game mode, the game mode will switch to the inspection mode in the middle of the pattern change display in the main display unit 45, making it difficult to control the timing of the pattern stop and the pattern change time. In contrast, according to the configuration of this aspect 14, for example, if a mode switching operation is performed during the period in which the pattern change display processing is being performed in the game mode, the game mode will switch to the inspection mode at the timing when the pattern change display processing is completed and the pattern has stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing malfunctions such as making it difficult to control the timing of the pattern stop and the pattern change time.

When the game mode is switched (returned) from the inspection mode, the game progress processing of the remaining processing stages that were scheduled to be executed before the game mode was switched to the inspection mode may be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the game progress processing that he or she was expecting ends in an incomplete state.

In addition, if a mode switching operation is performed while game progress processing is being executed in the game mode, the game mode may be switched to the inspection mode at the timing when all of the game progress processing being executed is completed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing errors when restarting the game progress processing.

In addition, when a mode switching operation is performed during execution of game progress processing in the game mode, the game execution processing is interrupted, and information that enables resumption of the interrupted game progress processing is stored in the main RAM 64, and when the storage is completed, the game mode is switched to the inspection mode. With such a configuration, the pachinko machine 10 quickly switches from the game mode to the inspection mode, making it possible to inspect many pachinko machines 10 in a short period of time.

The mode switching operation for transitioning from the game mode to the inspection mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be in other forms. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button. Furthermore, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, the same processing as when the mode switching operation is performed may be executed.

<Aspect 15>
Among the above first embodiment and other aspects, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 is capable of switching between a game mode and an inspection mode, if an automatic return condition is met during the inspection mode, that is, 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, the configuration may be such that the inspection mode will transition to the game mode even if a specified operation for transitioning from the inspection mode to the game mode (for example, an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button) has not been performed.

According to this configuration, if 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, the inspection mode is configured to transition to the game mode even if the specified operation for transitioning from the inspection mode to the game mode has not been performed, so it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the specified operation is not performed and the game mode is not returned to. For example, even if an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 forgets to perform the specified operation after inspecting the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 using the game history information output in the inspection mode, the game mode will be returned to if 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the pachinko machine 10 does not return to a game mode in which game progress processing can be performed and the player is unable to play the pachinko machine 10.

The automatic recovery condition is not limited to 10 minutes having passed since the mode was changed to the inspection mode, and may be other conditions. For example, the automatic recovery condition may be 5 minutes having passed since the mode was changed to the inspection mode, or 10 minutes having passed since the inspection device 320 was removed from the inspection terminal 65.

The predetermined operation for switching from the inspection mode to the game mode is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button, and may be in other forms. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the mode switching button.

<Aspect 16>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a RAM clear button for initializing the main RAM 64 may be provided on the main control device 60, and when an operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button (hereinafter also referred to as an "erase operation") is performed, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be erased (initialized).

Furthermore, the main control device 60 may be configured to be able to switch between the game mode and the inspection mode. And, in a state after transitioning to the inspection mode but before transitioning to the game mode, for example, in a state during the inspection mode, or in a state in which the power is turned off after transitioning to the inspection mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be erased even if an erasure operation is performed by pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button.

With this configuration, even if an erase operation is performed to erase information stored in the main RAM 64 after transitioning to the inspection mode but before transitioning to the game mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased. Therefore, even if an erase operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to transition to the game mode after transitioning to the inspection mode but before transitioning to the game mode, the information can be prevented from being mistakenly erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the erasing operation for erasing information stored in the main RAM 64 is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and the operation for switching between the game mode and the inspection mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, there is a risk that when trying to switch from the inspection mode to the game mode by pressing the power button while pressing the mode switch button, the user may accidentally press the power button while pressing the RAM clear button. However, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, even if an erasing operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button is performed after switching to the inspection mode but before switching to the game mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being erroneously erased.

More specifically, for example, when switching from the game mode to the inspection mode, if a configuration is adopted in which the game progress processing being executed in the game mode is temporarily stopped and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the inspection mode is stored in the main RAM 64, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the mode switch button to return from the inspection mode to the game mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, the information for resuming the game progress processing is erased, and the game progress processing cannot be resumed after returning to the inspection mode, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. In contrast, according to the configuration of this aspect 16, even if the player accidentally presses the power button while pressing the RAM clear button to switch to the game mode after switching to the inspection mode but before switching to the game mode, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the main RAM 64 from being erroneously erased, and therefore prevent a disadvantage from being caused to the player.

The game history information may be stored in the main RAM 64. With such a configuration, there is no need to provide a separate dedicated memory for storing the game history information, which reduces the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, when an erasure operation is executed, the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 is not erased regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10 (such as whether the power is on or off, or whether it is in game mode or inspection mode), and only information other than the game history information stored in the main RAM 64 (such as information stored to resume game progress processing) may be erased (initialized). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent intentional erasure of game history information that deviates from a predetermined specified range.

The erase operation is not limited to the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the RAM clear button, and may be in other forms. For example, it may be a single operation of pressing the RAM clear button.

<Aspect 17>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects described above, in a configuration in which the main control device 60 can switch between a game mode and an inspection mode, when the main control device 60 transitions from the game mode to the inspection mode, a game stop command, which is a command indicating that the game progress processing will be temporarily stopped by transitioning to the inspection mode, may be transmitted to the voice and light-emitting control device 90, and the game progress processing that was being executed may be temporarily stopped in the inspection mode. Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions to the inspection mode while the variable display of the pattern on the main display unit 45 is being executed, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the counting of the variable time of the pattern on the main display unit 45 is stopped. In addition, when the main control device 60 transitions from the inspection mode to the game mode, a game resume command, which is a command indicating that the game mode will be transitioned to and the game progress processing will be resumed, may be transmitted to the voice and light-emitting control device 90.

The audio and light emitting control device 90 is configured to temporarily stop the currently running presentation when it receives a game stop command, and then resume the temporarily stopped presentation when it receives a game resume command. With this configuration, even when the main control device 60 transitions between the game mode and the inspection mode, it is possible to synchronize the game progress processing executed by the main control device 60 (e.g., the pattern change display processing on the main display unit 45) with the presentation controlled by the audio and light emitting control device 90 (e.g., the pattern change display processing on the pattern display device 41), and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable after transitioning to the game mode.

The audio and light emission control device 90 may be configured not to stop the performance being performed even when a game stop command is received. Specifically, for example, when a game stop command is received while the pattern display device 41 is displaying a changing pattern, the control of the changing pattern display in the pattern display device 41 is continued, and a layer of another image (e.g., a black image) is displayed on top of the layer of the changing pattern display. However, since the control of the changing pattern display in the pattern display device 41 is continued, the changing pattern display continues under the black image layer. Then, when the time for changing the pattern in the pattern display device 41 has elapsed, the display of the changing pattern ends under the black image layer, but the pattern does not stop but continues to sway slightly.

When a game resume command is received from the main control unit 60, the black image layer that was displayed above the layer of changing patterns is removed, and the pattern layer is displayed again. At this time, the main control unit 60 transitions (returns) from the inspection mode to the game mode, and resumes the game progress process (changing display of patterns on the main display unit 45) that was stopped.

Then, the main control device 60 resumes the display of the changing patterns on the main display unit 45, where it had stopped counting the changing time, and when the remaining changing time has elapsed, that is, when it is time to stop the changing of the patterns on the main display unit 45, it sends a pattern stop command to the audio and light emission control device 90. Having received the pattern stop command, the audio and light emission control device 90 sends a pattern stop command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 completely stops the patterns that had been displayed in a slightly swaying manner on the pattern display device 41.

According to this configuration, when the main control device 60 is in the inspection mode, the display on the main display unit 45 is turned off, and the display on the pattern display device 41 is a black image. Then, when the main control device 60 transitions from the inspection mode to the game mode, the display of the changing patterns on the main display unit 45, which had stopped counting the changing time, is resumed, and the patterns on the pattern display device 41 are displayed in a changing state or in a small shaking state. Then, the patterns on the pattern display device 41 are stopped at the timing when the patterns on the main display unit 45 are stopped. That is, it is possible to synchronize the display of the changing patterns on the main display unit 45 and the display of the changing patterns on the pattern display device 41. In addition, since the control of the currently executed performance is not stopped even when a game stop command is received, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of malfunctions caused by temporarily stopping the control of the currently executed performance. Examples of malfunctions include, for example, when the control of the performance is temporarily stopped, when the control of the performance is resumed, a shift occurs in the timing of the multiple performances when multiple performances are being executed, or a shift occurs between the video displayed on the pattern display device 41 and the sound output from the speaker 46.

In addition, if the main control device 60 is configured not to send a pattern stop command to the audio/light control device 90 even when it is time to stop the pattern change on the main display unit 45, the display of the changing patterns on the pattern display device 41 will continue to be in a small swaying state, and the pattern on the pattern display device 41 will stop when it receives a change command sent from the main control device 60 or a standby command sent when no hold information is stored.

<Aspect 18>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41 when a predetermined time is reached. Specifically, for example, the game mode may be switched to the inspection mode when 11:10 p.m. is reached, and the game history information of the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the symbol display device 41. According to this configuration, the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 at about 11:10 p.m. after the game hall closes, so that an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can quickly inspect and check the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 after the game hall closes, without having to take the time to switch each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

Also, the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10 may be displayed on the pattern display device 41 upon receipt of a predetermined signal from the hall computer. With such a configuration, for example, all pachinko machines 10 installed in a gaming hall can be switched to the inspection mode at the same time, and the game history information of each pachinko machine 10 can be displayed on each pattern display device 41, so that an inspector of the pachinko machines 10 can quickly inspect and check the game history information of many pachinko machines 10 without having to go through the trouble of switching each pachinko machine 10 from the game mode to the inspection mode.

<Aspect 19>
In the first embodiment and other aspects, the game history information may be configured to be always displayed on the symbol display device 41. With such a configuration, the player or inspector can always check the game history information, so that if an abnormality occurs, such as the game history information deviating from a predetermined range, the abnormality can be noticed immediately. As a result, the soundness of the game can be quickly ensured.

<Aspect 20>
In the first embodiment and other aspects described above, a seven-segment display composed of seven light-emitting diodes may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and the seven-segment display may display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. For example, when the main control device 60 transitions from the above-mentioned game mode to the inspection mode, the seven-segment display may display whether the role ratio, payout ratio (in normal mode), etc. stored in the pachinko machine 10 are within a predetermined range.

More specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions from the game mode to the inspection mode, a "1" indicating that a display regarding the role ratio will be made is displayed on the seven-segment display, and then if the role ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically, if the role ratio is 0.700 or less), an "O" indicating OK is displayed on the seven-segment display, while if the role ratio is not within the predetermined range, an "E" indicating an error is displayed on the seven-segment display. After the role ratio is displayed, a "2" indicating that a display regarding the consecutive role ratio will be made is displayed on the seven-segment display, and if the consecutive role ratio is within a predetermined range (specifically, if the consecutive role ratio is 0.600 or less), an "O" indicating OK is displayed on the seven-segment display, while if the consecutive role ratio is not within the predetermined range, an "E" indicating an error is displayed on the seven-segment display. After displaying the continuous feature ratio, the seven-segment display may display "2" to indicate that the payout ratio (in normal mode) will be displayed, and if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within a specified range (specifically, if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is within the range of 0.60 to 0.70), the seven-segment display may display "O" indicating OK, whereas if the payout ratio (in normal mode) is not within the specified range, the seven-segment display may display "E" indicating an error.

This configuration makes it possible to easily and quickly check game history information such as the ratio of game devices. In addition, because the seven-segment display consumes little power, it is possible to check game history information using only a small amount of power from a capacitor, battery, etc. installed inside the pachinko machine 10, even when the power to the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

In addition, the seven-segment display may be configured to always display information related to the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10. With this configuration, it is possible to simply and quickly inspect the game history information, such as the ratio of the handicap items, without switching from the game mode to the inspection mode. In addition, even in a pachinko machine 10 that does not have an inspection mode, it is possible to simply and quickly inspect the game history information, such as the ratio of the handicap items. Furthermore, if the seven-segment display is configured to be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the seven-segment display is not within the player's field of vision, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being distracted by the display of the seven-segment display and being unable to concentrate on the game. On the other hand, when an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 inspects the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, he or she only needs to rotate the pachinko machine main body 12 supported by the hinge 15 forward and check the display of the seven-segment display provided on the back of the pachinko machine main body 12, so that it is possible to simply and quickly inspect the game history information, such as the ratio of the handicap items. Instead of a seven-segment display, other displays capable of displaying game history information in a recognizable manner may be used, such as a segment display made up of a number of light-emitting diodes other than seven.

<Aspect 21>
In the first embodiment and the other aspects, the sound and light emitting control device 90 may be configured to calculate the game history information. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 may transmit a signal including the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63 in the initial setting process to the sound and light emitting control device 90, and the sound and light emitting control device 90 may calculate the game history information based on the acquired prize ball number data and the ball entry information of the game balls transmitted from the main control device 60, and display the calculated game history information on the pattern display device 41.

With this configuration, even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is unable to access the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, or even if the audio and light emitting control device 90 is unable to grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, the audio and light emitting control device 90 can obtain the prize ball number data stored in the prize ball number data storage area of the main ROM 63, and calculate the game history information. In addition, because the audio and light emitting control device 90 calculates the game history information instead of the main control device 60, the processing load on the main control device 60 can be significantly reduced.

<Aspect 22>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 that can be switched from the game mode to the inspection mode, but also to a game machine that can be switched from the game mode to another mode. For example, the first embodiment and the other aspects can be applied to a game machine having a game status display mode that can display the status of the game-related processing, such as the status of the high probability mode flag or the high frequency support mode flag, the contents of the stored reserved information, etc.

<Aspect 23>
26 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the above-mentioned game history information. The main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for expanding programs and the like for executing processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for expanding programs and the like for executing processing for calculating and displaying the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as game history processing). The main CPU 62x writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64 when processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than the game history processing), and writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64 when processing for the game history is executed.

The first area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit ball entry detection information storage area, stack area, etc., which will be described later. The second area of the main RAM 64 is also used as an 8-bit buffer area, prize ball tally buffer, calculation buffer, calculation result buffer, stack area, etc., which will be described later. These details will be described later.

The input/output port 62a is also connected to a game history information display unit 45z. The game history information display unit 45z is composed of four seven-segment displays, and is provided on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10. As described below, the game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x is displayed on this game history information display unit 45z.

Figure 27 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in mode 23 of the first embodiment. In this mode, the timer interrupt processing is started at a 4 msec cycle, as in the first embodiment. The differences from the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (Figure 13) described above are that the ball entry detection processing shown in step S10606 is different, that a game history processing for calculating and displaying game history information is added as the last processing (step S10616) of this timer interrupt processing, and that the ball entry detection information output processing (processing of step S10207 in Figure 13), which is a processing for outputting ball entry detection information to the game history management chip, is omitted. The other processing is the same as the processing described in the timer interrupt processing of the first embodiment (Figure 13) described above. Below, the ball entry detection processing of step S10606 shown in Figure 27 and the game history processing shown in step S10616 will be described.

Figure 28 is a flowchart showing the ball entry detection process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this ball entry detection process in aspect 23, if the previous (one time before) timer interrupt process determines that there is no information ("0") in the bit of input port 62b, the current timer interrupt process determines that there is information ("1") in the bit, and the timer interrupt process subsequently determines that there is information ("1") in the bit, then it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry hole corresponding to that bit. An example of the ball entry detection process is described below.

In step S10701, the information currently stored in the 0th to 7th bits D0 to D7 (FIG. 14) of the input port 62b is read (hereinafter, also referred to as the "scoring ball determination information"), and in step S10702, the read "scoring ball determination information" is stored in the first buffer, which is an 8-bit buffer. That is, the first buffer is a buffer for storing the "scoring ball determination information" read from each bit of the input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process. The second buffer, which will be described later, is an 8-bit buffer for storing the "scoring ball determination information" read from each bit of the input port 62b in the previous timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the first buffer and the second buffer are provided in the first area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10702, proceed to step S10703.

In step S10703, the ball entry determination counter provided in the main RAM 64 is set to 8. Then, proceed to step 10704. The numerical information of the ball entry determination counter corresponds to the bits of each of the eight ball entry ports, similar to the ball entry determination counter (step S10401) used in the ball entry determination process (FIG. 16) of the first embodiment described above. Specifically, in this embodiment, the numerical information of the ball entry determination counter, "8", corresponds to the 0th bit D0 of the large winning port 36a, "7" corresponds to the 1st bit D1 of the first starting port 33, "6" corresponds to the 2nd bit D2 of the second starting port 34, "5" corresponds to the 3rd bit D3 of the first winning port 32a, "4" corresponds to the 4th bit D4 of the second winning port 32b, "3" corresponds to the 5th bit D5 of the third winning port 32c, "2" corresponds to the 6th bit D6 of the through gate 35, and "1" corresponds to the 7th bit D7 of the discharge passage.

In step S10704, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the second buffer, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". If it is determined in step S10704 that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10704: NO), the process proceeds to step S10705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10704 that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10704: YES), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10705 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10705, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the first buffer, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". In step S10705, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10705: YES), the process proceeds to step S10706. On the other hand, in step S10705, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10705: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10706 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10706, it is determined whether or not there is scoring determination information in the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the scoring determination counter in the current input port 62b, i.e., whether or not the scoring determination information stored in that bit is "1". In step S10706, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is "1" (S10706: YES), the process proceeds to step S10707. On the other hand, in step S10706, if it is determined that the scoring determination information is not "1" (S10706: NO), the process proceeds to step S10710 without executing the processes from step S10707 to step S10709 described below.

In step S10707, it is determined which type of ball entry port the current numerical information of the ball entry judgment counter indicates the bit corresponding to, and a ball entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the ball entry port corresponding to the bit is turned ON. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the current numerical information of the ball entry judgment counter indicates the bit corresponding to the large prize entry port 36a, the large prize entry port ball entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the large prize entry port 36a is turned ON. Also, for example, if it is determined that the current numerical information of the ball entry judgment counter indicates the bit corresponding to the second start port 34, the second start port ball entry flag indicating that the game ball has entered the second start port 34 is turned ON. After executing step S10707, proceed to step S10708.

In step S10708, the numerical information of the prize ball counter corresponding to the ball entry port where the ball entry flag was set to ON in step S10707, i.e., where it was determined that a game ball has entered, is incremented by 1. Specifically, for example, if the large prize entry port ball entry flag is set to ON, the 15 prize ball counter is incremented by 1, and if the second start port ball entry flag is set to ON, the 3 prize ball counter is incremented by 1. After executing step S10708, proceed to step S10709.

In step S10709, the goal determination counter is decremented by 1, and then in step S10710, it is determined whether the goal determination counter is "0".

If it is determined in step S10710 that the goal counter is not "0" (S10710: NO), the process executes steps S10704 to S10708 for the bit corresponding to the numerical information of the goal counter updated in step S10709. If the process executes steps S10704 to S10708 for the numerical information set in step S10703, the goal counter becomes "0", a positive determination is made in step S10710 (S10710: YES), and the process proceeds to step S10711.

In step S10711, the 8-bit information for scoring a ball stored in the first buffer is stored (copied) in the second buffer. As a result, the information for scoring a ball obtained from input port 62b in the current timer interrupt process is referenced in the scoring ball detection process in the next timer interrupt process. After executing step S10711, proceed to step S10712.

In step S10712, the ball entry detection information indicating that a game ball has been detected in the ball entry detection process of the current timer interrupt process is stored in a ball entry detection information storage area capable of storing 8-bit information. Specifically, the ball entry detection information storage area stores, for each bit corresponding to each of the above-mentioned eight ball entry ports, "1" if the ball entry flag is ON, and "0" if the ball entry flag is OFF, as ball entry detection information. For example, as a result of executing the ball entry detection process in the current timer interrupt process, if the big prize entry port ball entry flag and the second start port ball entry flag are ON and the ball entry flags corresponding to the other ball entry ports are OFF, the ball entry detection information storage area stores 8-bit ball entry detection information of "00000101". The 8-bit ball entry detection information stored in this ball entry detection information storage area is referenced in the game history process described later. After executing step S10712, this ball entry detection process is terminated.

Figure 29 is a flowchart showing the game history processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. In this game history processing, the role ratio and consecutive role ratio are calculated, and processing is executed to display them on the game history information display unit 45z. Specifically, the role ratio is calculated, and the calculated role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. After that, the consecutive role ratio is calculated, and the calculated consecutive role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. After that, the role ratio is calculated again, and the calculated role ratio is displayed for 5 seconds on the game history information display unit 45z. In this way, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio are alternately displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. An example of a specific process is described below.

In step S10801, a save process is executed to save information stored in the register in the master CPU 62x (hereinafter also referred to as register information) to the stack area of the second area of the master RAM 64. In this mode 23, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27), before the game history process (step S10616 in FIG. 27) is executed, the process related to the progress of the game (steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27), which is a process other than the game history process, is executed, so in the save process, the register information related to the progress of the game is saved to the stack area of the second area of the master RAM 64. Specifically, the value of the stack pointer in the master CPU 62x (address value indicating the top of the stack area of the first area) is saved (pushed) to the bottom of the stack area of the second area of the master RAM 64. Then, the address value indicating the top of the stack area of the second area of the master RAM 64 is set to the stack pointer of the master CPU 62x. Thereafter, the register information stored in the registers in the master CPU 62x is sequentially saved (pushed) to the stack area (the top of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64) indicated by the stack pointer set in the master CPU 62x. By executing this saving process, the address value of the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the master CPU 62x, so that the master CPU 62x can execute the process of calculating and displaying the game history information described below using the second area of the master RAM 64. After executing step S10801, proceed to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether the abnormal flag stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is ON. The abnormal flag is a flag that is turned ON when the prize ball tally value described below is an abnormal value. In step S10802, if it is determined that the abnormal flag is ON (S10802: YES), the process proceeds to step S10803, where the prize ball tally value is cleared to 0. Then, the process proceeds to step S10804, where the abnormal flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S10805. On the other hand, in step S10802, if it is determined that the abnormal flag is not ON (S10802: NO), the process proceeds to step S10805 without executing the processing in steps S10803 and S10804.

In step S10805, an OR operation is performed for each corresponding bit in the ball entry detection information storage area and the buffer area, and the result of each OR operation (logical sum) is stored (overwritten) in the corresponding bit in the buffer area. Details of this process will be described later. The buffer area is an area capable of storing the same 8 bits of information as the ball entry detection information storage area, and is provided in the second area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S10805, proceed to step S10806.

In step S10806, it is determined whether or not there is ball-entry detection information in at least one of the eight bits in the buffer area (whether or not one or more bits store a "1"). If it is determined in step S10806 that there is ball-entry detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area (S10806: YES), the process proceeds to step S10807.

In step S10807, a target setting process is executed to set the bits to be the target of the prize ball counting process, which will be described later, among the eight bits in the buffer area. In this embodiment, in one target setting process, two consecutive bits are set as the target of the prize ball counting process. Also, as described later, when the target setting process is executed in the next or subsequent timer interruption process, two consecutive bits located next to the two bits set in the previous target setting process are set as the target of the prize ball counting process. In this way, the two bits to be the target of the prize ball counting process are shifted sequentially to the neighboring bits. Note that after the last two bits of the eight bits are set as the target of the prize ball counting process, the first two bits are set again as the target of the prize ball counting process in the next target setting process. In this way, in this embodiment, the order of the two bits to be set as the target of the prize ball counting process from the eight bits in the buffer area is predetermined. After executing step S10807, the process proceeds to step S10808, and the prize ball counting process corresponding to the set bits is executed. Here, a specific example of the processing from step S10805 to step S10808 is described using FIG. 30.

Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a specific process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 23 of the first embodiment. As described above, the ball entry detection information storage area is an 8-bit storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each ball entry port. Specifically, in this aspect, the 0th bit D0 of the ball entry detection information storage area corresponds to the large prize entry port 36a, the first bit D1 corresponds to the first start port 33, the second bit D2 corresponds to the second start port 34, the third bit D3 corresponds to the first prize entry port 32a, the fourth bit D4 corresponds to the second prize entry port 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third prize entry port 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage.

The buffer area is an 8-bit memory area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and each bit corresponds to each ball entry port. Specifically, in this embodiment, the 0th bit D0 of the buffer area corresponds to the large prize entry port 36a, the first bit D1 corresponds to the first start port 33, the second bit D2 corresponds to the second start port 34, the third bit D3 corresponds to the first prize entry port 32a, the fourth bit D4 corresponds to the second prize entry port 32b, the fifth bit D5 corresponds to the third prize entry port 32c, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. In other words, each bit of the buffer area corresponds to each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area.

In the ball entry detection process described above (Figure 28), when it is determined that a game ball has entered an entry port such as the large prize entry port 36a, the bit corresponding to the entry port through which it has been determined that the game ball has entered, out of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area, is turned ON ("1").

Figure 30 (A1) shows an example of processing when the nth timer interrupt processing is executed. In this nth timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that game balls have entered the second starting hole 34 and the first winning hole 32a, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00001100". In addition, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing is executed are "00000000". Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing are executed are "00001100". As a result, the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated every time the timer interrupt processing is executed, is set as the processing target for the prize ball counting processing described later, and is held in the buffer area until the processing is executed.

In the nth timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, the two consecutive bits D0 and D1 are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the 0th bit D0 (the bit corresponding to the large prize opening 36a) set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process is "1", "15" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of consecutive prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the 0th bit D0 is "0", the addition is not performed. In this embodiment, the prize ball tallying buffer is configured as a ring buffer, and is configured to store the number of prize balls paid out in the most recent specified period. In addition, the number of consecutive prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the consecutive prize opening, and means the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the large prize opening 36a.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the first bit D1 (the bit corresponding to the first starting hole 33) set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the first bit D1 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in Figure 30 (A1), the 0th bit D0 is "0" and the 1st bit D1 is also "0", so the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process has been executed, the two bits (the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1) set as targets for the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A2) shows an example of processing when the n+1th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+1th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a game ball has entered the second winning hole 32b, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00010000". In addition, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing is executed are "00001100", the same as the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the nth timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed are "00011100".

In the n+1th timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the second bit D2 and the third bit D3, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the second bit D2 (the bit corresponding to the second start port 34) set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process is "1", "3" is added to the total number of prize balls and the number of special prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the second bit D2 is "0", the addition is not performed. The number of special prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls by the operation of the special device, and means the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the second start port 34 and the large prize port 36a.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the third bit D3 (the bit corresponding to the first winning slot 32a) set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the third bit D3 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 (A2), the second bit D2 is "1", so "3" is added to the total number of winning balls and the number of special winning balls. Also, the third bit D3 is "1", so "10" is added to the total number of winning balls.

After the prize ball counting process is executed, the two bits (second bit D2 and third bit D3) set as targets for the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A3) shows an example of processing when the n+2th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+2th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a game ball has entered (passed through) the through gate 35, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "01000000". In addition, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing is executed are "00010000", the same as the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the n+1th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed are "01010000".

In the n+2th timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the fourth bit D4 and the fifth bit D5, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

In the prize ball tallying process, if the fourth bit D4 (the bit corresponding to the second winning slot 32b) set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the fourth bit D4 is "0", the addition is not performed.

Furthermore, in the prize ball tallying process, if the fifth bit D5 (the bit corresponding to the third winning slot 32c) set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process is "1", "10" is added to the total number of prize balls stored in the prize ball tallying buffer. On the other hand, if the fifth bit D5 is "0", this addition is not performed.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 (A3), the fourth bit D4 is "1", so "10" is added to the total number of winning balls. Also, the fifth bit D5 is "0", so the above-mentioned addition is not performed.

After the prize ball counting process has been executed, the two bits (fourth bit D4 and fifth bit D5) set as targets for the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

Figure 30 (A4) shows an example of processing when the n+3th timer interrupt processing is executed. In this n+3th timer interrupt processing, the ball entry detection processing determines that a game ball has entered the large prize opening 36a, and the values of the eight bits in the ball entry detection information storage area are "00100001". In addition, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area before the OR processing is executed are "01000000", the same as the buffer area after the prize ball counting processing in the n+2th timer interrupt processing described above. Therefore, the values of the eight bits in the buffer area after the OR processing is executed are "01100001".

In the n+3 timer interrupt process, of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area after the OR process is performed, two consecutive bits, the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

However, in this embodiment, the sixth bit D6 corresponds to the through gate 35, and the seventh bit D7 corresponds to the discharge passage. No prize balls are set in the through gate 35 or the discharge passage. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7 are set as targets for the prize ball counting process, they are not added to the total number of prize balls, etc., in the prize ball counting process. After that, the two bits (sixth bit D6 and seventh bit D7) set as targets for the prize ball counting process in the buffer area are cleared to 0.

After that, in the n+4th timer interrupt process, the 0th bit D0 and the 1st bit D1 are again set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process. Thereafter, the same process is repeatedly executed. However, as described below, if there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), the target setting process (step S10807) and the prize ball counting process (step S10808) are not executed. Also, in this embodiment, from a state in which there is no ball entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0"), a state in which there is ball entry detection information in at least one bit of the buffer area again occurs, and when the target setting process is executed, the two bits set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process in the previous target setting process are stored, and the two consecutive bits located next to the two bits are set as the processing target of the prize ball counting process. In addition, if the two bits set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process in the previous target setting process are the sixth bit D6 and the seventh bit D7, the two consecutive bits, the zeroth bit D0 and the first bit D1, are set as the processing targets for the prize ball counting process.

As described above, in this embodiment, two of the eight bits in the buffer area are set as the target for the prize ball tallying process in one timer interrupt process, so if there is ball entry detection information in at least one bit in the buffer area, the timer interrupt process is executed four times, and the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits in the buffer area.

Return to the explanation of Figure 29. After executing the prize ball tallying process in step S10808, proceed to step S10809.

In step S10809, a calculation result display control process is executed. Specifically, control is executed to display the value (the combination ratio or continuous combination ratio, which is the calculated game history information) stored in the calculation result buffer described later on the game history information display unit 45z. After executing step S10809, the process proceeds to step S10810.

In step S10810, it is determined whether it is time to execute a calculation process to calculate game history information. Specifically, it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process when a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) has passed since the pachinko machine 10 was turned on, or when 5 seconds have passed since the previous execution of the calculation process. If it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process in step S10810 (S10810: YES), the process proceeds to step S10811. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not time to execute the calculation process in step S10810 (S10810: NO), the process proceeds to step S10813 without executing the processes in steps S10811 and S10812 described below.

In step S10811, the type of game history information to be calculated in the calculation process (task 1 and task 2 described below) is set. In this embodiment, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio are alternately set as the type of game history information to be calculated. Then, the process proceeds to step S10812, and task 1 is specified as the next task to be executed in the task process (step S10814) described below. After executing step S10812, the process proceeds to step S10813.

In step S10813, a process is executed to restore the register information saved in the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64 in the above-mentioned saving process to the register of the main CPU 62x. Specifically, the saved register information is restored (popped) to the register in the main CPU 62x in sequence from the stack area (the top of the stack area of the second area of the main RAM 64) indicated by the stack pointer set in the main CPU 62x. After that, the value of the stack pointer (the address value indicating the top of the stack area of the first area) saved at the bottom of the stack area of the second area is restored (popped) to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x. By executing this restoration process, the address value of the stack area of the first area of the main RAM 64 is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, so that the main CPU 62x can again execute a process related to the progress of the game using the first area of the main RAM 64. After that, the game history process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of step S10806, if it is determined in step S10806 that there is no ball-entry detection information in the bits of the buffer area (all bits are "0") (S10806: NO), proceed to step S10814.

In step S10814, one of the following three tasks is executed as specified. If no task is specified, task 3 is executed. In other words, instead of executing the three tasks sequentially in one timer interrupt process, only one of the three tasks is executed as specified in one timer interrupt process.

[Task 1]
The dividend and divisor required to calculate the game history information set as the calculation target are stored in the calculation buffer. Specifically, for example, when it is set to calculate the ratio of the accessory, the number of accessory prize balls is stored as the dividend, and the total number of prize balls is stored as the divisor in the calculation buffer. Also, for example, when it is set to calculate the ratio of consecutive accessory, the number of consecutive accessory prize balls is stored as the dividend, and the total number of prize balls is stored as the divisor in the calculation buffer. After that, task 2 is specified as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the timer interrupt process from the next time onwards.

[Task 2]
The calculation is performed to divide the dividend stored in the calculation buffer by the divisor, and the calculation result (quotient) is stored in the calculation result buffer. After that, task 3 is specified as the next task to be executed when the process proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing.

[Task 3]
It is determined whether the prize ball tally values (number of accessory prize balls, number of consecutive accessory prize balls, total number of prize balls) are valid, and if it is determined that they are not valid, the abnormal flag is turned ON, and then task 3 is designated as the next task to be executed when the processing proceeds to step S10806 in the next or subsequent timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the prize ball tally value is valid, the abnormal flag is not turned ON, and task 3 is designated as the next task. Here, a case where the prize ball tally value is invalid is when there is a contradiction in the prize ball tally value, such as when the number of accessory prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive accessory prize balls exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive accessory prize balls exceeds the number of accessory prize balls.

After executing a specified task out of the three tasks described above, the process proceeds to step S10809 described above, and the value (role ratio or continuous role ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. In this embodiment, the first 7-segment display constituting the game history information display unit 45z displays information indicating the type of game history information, and the remaining three 7-segment displays display the value of the game history information.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment described above, the processing related to the progress of the game included in the timer interrupt processing (processing other than the processing for the game history) is programmed to end in a time shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt processing is started (4 msec in this embodiment), but the time required for the processing related to the progress of the game to end varies depending on the situation of the progress of the game. On the other hand, since the processing for the game history is processing that is not related to the progress of the game, it is preferable to secure the time for executing the processing related to the progress of the game in one timer interrupt processing in priority over the time for executing the processing for the game history. In addition, even if the various processes included in the processing for the game history (for example, the prize ball counting processing and the calculation processing for each bit, etc.) are not configured to be continuously executed and completed in one timer interrupt processing, there is no effect on the progress of the game. Therefore, in this embodiment, even if the execution time of the process related to the game progress becomes maximum depending on the state of the game progress, the execution time of one timer interrupt process (execution time of the process related to the game progress + execution time of the process for the game history) is shorter than the time until the next timer interrupt process starts. In this manner, the various processes included in the process for the game history are divided into multiple processes, and the divided processes are executed in one timer interrupt process, and the various processes are completed by executing the timer interrupt process multiple times. As a result, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process for the game history while ensuring the time required to execute the process related to the game progress in one timer interrupt process.

Specifically, according to this embodiment, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the two tasks (task 1 and task 2) constituting the arithmetic process, which is the process of calculating the game history information, can be executed, and by executing the timer interrupt process twice, both tasks constituting the arithmetic process are executed, so the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which both tasks are executed in one execution of the timer interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than 4 msec, which is the interval for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process (hereinafter also referred to as the interrupt interval), and thus preventing the timer interrupt process from being executed at intervals of 4 msec.

In addition, according to this aspect, a series of processes with a set execution order is divided into multiple tasks, and in one execution of the timer interrupt process, one of the multiple tasks is executed, and then the task to be executed next to the one task is specified. Therefore, even if a series of processes is incorporated into the timer interrupt process and the time required for the execution of the timer interrupt process is longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interrupt process when incorporated into the timer interrupt process, the series of processes can be incorporated into the timer interrupt process and executed. Specifically, according to this aspect, even in a gaming machine configured such that the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is longer than 4 msec when the arithmetic process for calculating the game history information is incorporated into the timer interrupt process executed at intervals of 4 msec, the arithmetic process can be incorporated and executed. Furthermore, since the arithmetic process for calculating the game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if all tasks are not executed in one execution of the timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be allocated to the execution time of other processes included in the timer interrupt process, and the degree of freedom in designing the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in one execution of the timer interrupt process, two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing target of the prize ball tallying process, and the prize ball tallying process can be executed for the set processing target bits. By executing the timer interrupt process multiple times, the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the prize ball tallying process is executed for all eight bits D0 to D7 in one execution of the timer interrupt process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than 4 msec, which is the interval for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process, and making it impossible to execute the timer interrupt process at 4 msec intervals.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when two bits out of the eight bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area are set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process, they are set in a predetermined order, so there is no need to perform a determination process to determine which bit to set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process, which simplifies the process and, as a result, improves the processing speed. Furthermore, the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to execute the determination process can be reduced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x can execute the timer interrupt process four times in a time shorter than the shortest interval (about 18 msec in this embodiment) between two consecutive game balls entering one ball entrance and being detected, so that the prize ball tallying process (step S10808 in FIG. 29) can be executed for all eight processing target candidates (bits D0 to D7 in the buffer area) in a time shorter than the shortest interval. Therefore, even if two game balls enter the same ball entrance in succession, even if the entry detection information updated based on the entry of the first game ball being detected at the ball entrance is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, and then the entry detection information corresponding to the remaining ball entrances is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, the prize ball tallying process can be completed for all of these entry detection information before the entry of the next second game ball is detected at the ball entrance. In other words, when the entry detection information updated based on the detection of the second game ball entering the ball entry opening is set as the processing target and the prize ball tallying process is executed, the prize ball tallying process for the entry detection information updated based on the detection of the first game ball entering the ball entry opening has already been completed. The effects of this configuration are explained below.

In a configuration in which binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether or not a game ball has entered is used as the ball entry detection information as in this embodiment, if the prize ball counting process is not performed on the ball entry detection information updated from "0" to "1" based on the entry of the first game ball into a ball entry port by the time the entry of the second game ball into the ball entry port is detected at the ball entry port, the ball entry detection information corresponding to the ball entry port is still "1" at the time the entry of the second game ball is detected at the ball entry port, and the entry of the second game ball cannot be recorded. In other words, even though two game balls have entered the ball entry port in succession, the ball entry detection information corresponding to the ball entry port cannot be distinguished from a situation in which only one game ball has entered the ball entry port, and the prize ball counting process treats the situation as one game ball entering the ball entry port. As a result, the prize ball counting process may not be able to record the exact number of prize balls.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the prize ball tallying process is executed on the ball entry detection information that has already been updated by the entry of the first game ball into the ball entry port at the time the entry of the second game ball is detected at the ball entry port, and since the ball entry detection information is set to "0", it is possible to record the entry of the second game ball. As a result, it is possible to record an accurate number of prize balls in the prize ball tallying process. This makes it possible to adopt binary information of "0" or "1" indicating whether or not a game ball has entered as the ball entry detection information while ensuring accuracy in the prize ball tallying process, thereby reducing the memory capacity for storing the ball entry detection information and improving the processing speed of the prize ball tallying process.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game history process (FIG. 29) includes a save process (step S10801 in FIG. 29) in which information held in the register in the master CPU 62x for executing the process related to the progress of the game is written to a stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Therefore, when the master CPU 62x starts the game history process, if the register in the master CPU 62x holds information for executing the process related to the progress of the game that was being executed immediately before the start of the game history process, the information can be temporarily moved (saved) by writing it to the stack area in the second area of the master RAM 64. Therefore, the information for executing the process related to the progress of the game that was held in the register in the master CPU 62x can be erased, and when the game history process is executed by the master CPU 62x, the information for executing the game history process can be held in the register in the master CPU 62x.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the game history processing (Figure 29) includes a return process (step S10813 in Figure 29) that causes the information written in the stack region of the second area of the main RAM 64 during the save process to be retained in the register of the main CPU 62x. Therefore, when the game history processing is terminated, the information for executing the processing related to the progress of the game is retained again in the register of the main CPU 62x, and the processing related to the progress of the game that was being executed before the start of the game history processing can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the game history processing.

In addition, according to this embodiment, since the save process and the return process are included in the game history process, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processes related to the progress of the game other than the game history process are executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the game history process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the game history process without modifying the program for executing processes related to the progress of the game other than the game history process. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute the game history process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute the game history process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x writes information in the game history process only to the second area of the main RAM 64, so it is possible to prevent information written in the first area of the main RAM 64 from being overwritten by the execution of the game history process. Therefore, in a configuration in which processing related to the progress of a game is executed using the first area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the game history processing from affecting the processing related to the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the main CPU 62x writes information in the process related to the progress of the game only to the first area of the main RAM 64, so it is possible to prevent information written in the second area of the main RAM 64 from being overwritten by the execution of the process related to the progress of the game. Therefore, in a configuration in which the process for the game history is executed using the second area of the main RAM 64, it is possible to prevent the process for the game progress from affecting the process for the game history.

In addition, according to this embodiment, an 8-bit buffer area capable of storing ball entry detection information is provided, so that the ball entry detection information in the ball entry detection information storage area, which is updated each time the timer interrupt process is executed, can be set as the processing target for the prize ball counting process and held until the process is executed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball counting process (step S10808) is executed in one timer interruption process, the calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814) is not executed. In other words, since both the prize ball counting process and the calculation process are not executed in one timer interruption process, the time required for one execution of the timer interruption process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interruption process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval of the timer interruption process, and the timer interruption process from being unable to be executed at the interrupt interval. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the prize ball counting process in which the ball entry status of the game balls and the processing load are correlated is executed in preference to the calculation process in which the ball entry status of the game balls and the processing load are not correlated, so that the interval between the execution of the prize ball counting process is prevented from becoming too long, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the prize ball count value, which is the processing result of the prize ball counting process, from being unable to accurately reflect the ball entry status of the game balls. Specifically, for example, it is possible to prevent the next game ball from entering the ball entry port corresponding to a bit in the buffer area before the prize ball counting process is executed for that bit, and to prevent two game balls from entering the bit being treated as one game ball.

In addition, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, when the prize ball tallying process (step S10808) is not executed and it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process (step S10810: YES), the calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814) is executed. Therefore, neither the prize ball tallying process nor the calculation process is executed in one timer interrupt process, and in that situation, instead of the prize ball tallying process and the calculation process, another process independent of these processes (in this embodiment, a process for determining the validity of the prize ball tally value (task 3 in step S10814)) can be executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when either the prize ball tallying process or the calculation process is executed in one timer interrupt process, the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process is configured to be shorter than the interrupt interval. Therefore, in a situation where neither the prize ball tallying process nor the calculation process is executed, by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the prize ball tallying process and the calculation process, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval.

In addition, according to this embodiment, although it is possible to calculate two types of game history information, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, in the calculation process in one timer interrupt process, the calculation process is performed for calculating either the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, so the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the calculation process in one timer interrupt process is performed for calculating two types of game history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the timer interrupt process from becoming longer than the interrupt interval, making it impossible to execute the timer interrupt process at a specified interrupt interval. In addition, the storage capacity of the main RAM 64 for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

In addition, according to this embodiment, in the ball entry detection process, when the ball entry determination information for a bit corresponding to each ball entry port changes from "0" to "1" to "1", it is determined that a game ball has entered the ball entry port corresponding to that bit, so that, as in the first embodiment described above, the occurrence of erroneous detection due to electrical noise can be suppressed.

<Aspect 24>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the game history information is calculated by calculating the ratio of the game features and the ratio of consecutive game features, but the game history information to be calculated is not limited to these, and various game history information shown in the first embodiment can be calculated. For example, the ball output rate and payout ratio shown in the first embodiment may be calculated. In this case, the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been shot onto the game board 30) may also be calculated in the same manner as in the above-mentioned prize ball counting process (step S10808 in FIG. 29).

<Aspect 25>
In the game history processing of the above-mentioned mode 23 (Figure 29), if it is determined in step S10802 that the abnormality flag is ON, the prize ball tally value is cleared (step S10803) and the abnormality flag is turned OFF (step S10804). However, if the abnormality flag is turned ON a predetermined number of times within a predetermined period, information indicating that an abnormality has occurred may be displayed on the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 26>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the calculation process which is the process of calculating the game history information is divided into a plurality of tasks for execution, but the type of the process to be divided into a plurality of tasks is not limited to the calculation process, and various processes can be divided into a plurality of tasks for execution. For example, in a configuration in which the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 sets the contents of the performance to be executed, the process of setting the contents of the performance may be divided into a plurality of tasks for execution.

<Aspect 27>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, two bits out of eight bits in the buffer area are set as processing targets for the prize ball counting process, but the number of bits to be processed is not limited to two, and may be other numbers. For example, five bits may be set as processing targets in one timer interrupt process. Also, all eight bits may be set as processing targets in one timer interrupt process. Also, only a predetermined bit out of the eight bits (for example, six bits from the 0th bit D0 to the 5th bit D5 in which the prize balls are set) can be set as processing targets, and two bits may be set as processing targets in one timer interrupt process.

<Aspect 28>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the first area of the main RAM 64 is assigned as a memory area for executing processing related to the progress of the game, and the second area of the main RAM 64 is assigned as a memory area for executing processing for the game history, but the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be assigned as a memory area for executing processing other than the processing for the game history.

The main RAM 64 may also be configured to be divided into three or more areas. For example, the third area of the main RAM 64 may be assigned as a memory area for executing a process for outputting game history information to the outside.

<Aspect 29>
In the above-mentioned embodiment 23, the game history process includes the save process and the restore process, but the save process and the restore process may be included in a process other than the game history process. For example, the save process and the restore process may be included in a process that is scheduled to be deleted when the design of the gaming machine is changed.

<Aspect 30>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the game history processing is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27), but the game history processing may be incorporated into the main processing (FIG. 12). In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the game history processing is incorporated into the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) as processing different from the processing related to the progress of the game, but processing other than the game history processing may be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing as processing different from the processing related to the progress of the game. For example, a transmission processing for transmitting information on the game status to a hall computer installed in a game hall at a predetermined timing may be incorporated into the timer interrupt processing as processing different from the processing related to the progress of the game. Also, various processing different from the processing related to the progress of the game may be incorporated into the main processing.

<Aspect 31>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the game history process (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. However, the game history management chip 300 may be provided, and the main CPU 62x executes the game history process (FIG. 29) to calculate the game history information. According to such a configuration, the game history information can be calculated in two systems, so that even if a malfunction occurs in one system, the game history information can be calculated. In addition, if the game history information calculated from the two systems is compared and a notification (display) is made as to whether or not these values match, it is possible to confirm the reliability and accuracy of the calculated game history information.

The gaming history management chip 300 may also be configured to execute the gaming history process (Figure 29) described in aspect 23 above to calculate gaming history information.

<Aspect 32>
In step S10805 of the game history processing (Figure 29) of the above-mentioned mode 23, the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area (Figure 30) provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 is read out by OR processing. However, instead of this configuration, an 8-bit storage area (hereinafter also referred to as the second ball entry detection information storage area) corresponding to the ball entry detection information storage area may be provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and the information stored in each bit of the ball entry detection information storage area provided in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be duplicated (copied) to the second ball entry detection information storage area provided in the second area of the main RAM 64, and the information of each duplicated bit may be read out by OR processing in step S10805.

The ball entry detection information storage area may also be configured to be provided in the second area of the main RAM 64.

<Aspect 33>
In step S10814 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned mode 23, when the calculation processing (task 1 or task 2) for calculating the game history information is not executed, the processing for determining the validity of the prize ball tally value included in task 3 is always executed. However, the processing for determining the validity of the prize ball tally value may be executed only once each time the game history information is newly calculated. Specifically, for example, after the validity of the prize ball tally value is determined in task 3, a determined flag indicating that the determination has been performed is set to ON, and when the task 3 is executed next time, if the determined flag is ON, the processing for determining the validity of the prize ball tally value is not executed. Then, in the task 1 executed again, the determined flag may be set to OFF. With such a configuration, it is possible to further shorten the processing time required for one game history processing to be completed while determining the validity of the prize ball tally value that is the basis for calculating the game history information and ensuring the validity of the game history information.

<Aspect 34>
In step S10810 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned aspect 23, when a predetermined time (e.g., 30 minutes) has elapsed since the power-on of the pachinko machine 10, or when 5 seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the calculation process, it is determined that it is time to execute the calculation process and calculate the game history information. However, instead of this configuration, it may be determined that it is time to execute the first calculation process immediately after the power-on without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse from the power-on, and thereafter, it may be determined that it is time to execute the calculation process every time 5 seconds have elapsed since the previous execution of the calculation process. In this configuration, until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information may be displayed in a blinking manner when displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, and after the total number of prize balls reaches 60,000, the calculated game history information may be displayed in a lit manner when displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp whether a sufficient amount of statistical data has been accumulated as the prize ball tally value that is the basis for calculating the displayed game history information. In addition, instead of the total number of winning balls, the flashing display may be switched to a lit display based on the aggregate value of the number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30).

<Aspect 35>
In step S10807 of the game history processing (FIG. 29) of the above-mentioned aspect 23, the multiple candidates for the prize ball counting process are pre-fixed as 8 bits in the buffer area, but the 8 bits in the buffer area may be divided into two groups of 4 bits each, one of the two groups may be selected as the multiple candidates for the prize ball counting process, and two bits from the 4 bits belonging to the selected group may be set as the target for the prize ball counting process. However, as in the above-mentioned aspect 23, the multiple candidates for the prize ball counting process are pre-fixed as 8 bits in the buffer area, which simplifies the processing and improves the processing speed because it is not necessary to execute the process of selecting one of the two groups. Furthermore, the storage capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting one of the two groups may be reduced.

<Aspect 36>
In the game history process of the above-mentioned aspect 23 (FIG. 29), the number and type of tasks (various processes) to be executed in the game history process in the current timer interrupt process may be determined based on the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute the tasks by effectively utilizing the remaining time until the next timer interrupt process is started.

<Aspect 37>
31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 37 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 37, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to execute the process (game history process) for calculating and displaying the above-mentioned game history information. In addition, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (first area and second area) as in the above-mentioned aspect 23 (FIG. 26), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game and various flags (high probability mode flag, high frequency support mode flag, etc.), and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes (game history process) for calculating and displaying the game history information and various numerical information (the above-mentioned prize ball tally value, ball number information, role ratio, etc. of game history information). Then, as in the above-mentioned mode 23 (Figure 26), when the main CPU 62x is executing processing related to the progress of the game (processing other than processing for the game history), it writes information only to the first area of the main RAM 64, and when it is executing processing for the game history, it writes information only to the second area of the main RAM 64.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 31, the main MPU 62 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with a flash memory 64x, which is a non-volatile memory that can be rewritten and retains memory even when the power supply is cut off. In this embodiment, a NAND type flash memory is used as the flash memory 64x, but a NOR type flash memory may also be used. In the game history process, the main CPU 62x of this embodiment executes a process of writing various numerical information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 to the flash memory 64x at a predetermined timing. Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x executes a process of writing various prize ball tally values, etc. to the flash memory 64x every time the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value reaches 500. That is, the flash memory 64x stores various numerical information (game history information such as prize ball tally value, ball number information, and role ratio) acquired based on the execution of the game.

In this way, according to the configuration of this embodiment, various numerical information (game history information such as prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and role ratio) obtained based on the execution of the game is stored in the flash memory 64x, so that even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off for an extended period of time, this various numerical information can be retained. For example, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is not supplied for an extended period of time during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the pachinko machine 10 based on the various numerical information stored in the flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 38>
In the above aspect 37, a pressable flash memory clear button may be provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the flash memory 64x (the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, the ratio of special devices, and other game history information, etc.) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, an IC chip for erasure processing capable of executing an erasure process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and a Hi-level signal is input to the input terminal of the IC chip for erasure processing while the flash memory clear button is pressed. The IC chip for erasure processing is configured to execute an erasure process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the Hi-level signal input to the input terminal continuing for 10 seconds. With this configuration, compared to a configuration in which information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by processing by the master CPU 62x, it is possible to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x while suppressing the effect on the processing related to game execution by the master CPU 62x and the operation of the master RAM 64.

Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves evidence of opening. Specifically, for example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a board box to which a seal sticker that leaves evidence of opening has been affixed, and the button cannot be pressed unless the seal sticker is peeled off and the board box is opened.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button, which leaves traces of opening on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to know whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been erased.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (e.g., the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modification may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information (e.g., the ratio of game features) stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10. A person who inspects whether the pachinko machine 10 is playing a normal game (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover the illegal modification made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. In that case, since traces of the opening will remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x, traces will remain indicating that the information may have been erased in order to conceal the fraud. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and ultimately to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

Incidentally, pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated, and a person who wants to circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only a person who has a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as a "legitimate person") can erase the traces of the opening of the board box, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10, who is a legitimate person, can affix a new seal, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game.

The configuration for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x based on the operation of the flash memory clear button is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., five times) within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). In addition, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which an IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the main CPU 62x monitors whether the flash memory clear button is pressed or not, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), an erasure program for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed to erase the information.

The flash memory clear button is not limited to being stored inside a board box to which a seal is affixed, and may be stored in a space that leaves traces of opening (also called traces of opening and closing). For example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a space covered by a lid member, and the flash memory clear button cannot be operated unless at least a part of the lid member is destroyed to open the space. According to such a configuration, the lid member must be destroyed to open the space in order to operate the flash memory clear button, so when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the destroyed lid member remains as a trace of the space in which the flash memory is stored being opened. Also, for example, the flash memory clear button may be stored inside a board box formed by joining multiple case bodies (for example, a box-shaped case body and a lid-shaped case body that can seal the open part of the box-shaped case body) with a joining part (crimping part), and a predetermined part of the joining part (crimping part) must be destroyed when separating the multiple case bodies that make up the board box. According to this configuration, in order to operate the flash memory clear button, a specific portion of the joint (crimping portion) must be destroyed to separate the multiple case bodies and open the board box, so when the flash memory clear button is pressed, the joint (crimping portion) with the specific portion destroyed remains as a trace of the board box being opened. Furthermore, the flash memory clear button may be configured to be stored inside the board box joined by the above-mentioned joint (crimping portion), and a seal seal that leaves a trace of its removal by leaving an adhesive layer on the bonded object when peeled off may be attached across the boundary between the multiple case bodies. According to this configuration, when the flash memory clear button is pressed, in addition to the trace of the board box being opened, which is the joint (crimping portion) with the specific portion destroyed, a seal seal that has been peeled off or cut at the boundary between the case bodies will remain.

<Aspect 39>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, the above-mentioned inspection machine 320 (Figure 10) for inspecting whether various pieces of game history information are within normal ranges may be connected to the inspection terminal 65 provided on the main MPU 62, and when a predetermined signal (e.g., an erase command) is received from the inspection machine 320, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and role ratio) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-mentioned aspect 38, an erasure process IC chip capable of executing an erasure process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and when an erasure command is sent from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, the erasure command is input to an input terminal of the erasure process IC chip. Then, based on receiving the erasure command from the input terminal, the erasure process IC chip executes an erasure process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the erasure process IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on receiving an erasure command from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, so that anyone who has the inspection machine 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of the information by anyone who does not have the inspection machine 320.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (e.g., the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modification may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information (e.g., the ratio of prizes) stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10. An inspector who checks whether the pachinko machine 10 is playing a normal game can discover the illegal modification of the pachinko machine 10 by, for example, connecting the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x with the inspection device 320. For this reason, there may be a person (illegal person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, an inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. Furthermore, by restricting who can have the inspection machine 320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

Note that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated from one place to another, and a person who wishes to circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only a person who has a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 for erasing the information for the legitimate reason (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the above-mentioned inspector can have the inspection machine 320, it will be possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of play.

Furthermore, when information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be configured to be transmitted to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure.

Specifically, for example, the above-mentioned IC chip for erasure processing transmits a transmission start command to the inspection device 320 indicating that transmission of information stored in the flash memory 64x is to be started based on receiving an erasure command from the input terminal. The inspection device 320 that has received the transmission start command transitions to a reception-enabled mode in which information can be received, and transmits a reception-enabled command indicating that the mode is reception-enabled to the IC chip for erasure processing. The IC chip for erasure processing that has received the reception-enabled command starts transmitting the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Then, when the transmission of the information is completed, the IC chip for erasure processing transmits a transmission completion command to the inspection device 320. The inspection device 320 that has received the transmission completion command checks whether there are any errors such as missing data in the received information, and if there are no errors, transmits a reception completion command to the IC chip for erasure processing. The IC chip for erasure processing executes an erasure process to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on receiving the reception completion command.

With this configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the person who owns the inspection device 320, the information that was erased from the flash memory 64x remains in the inspection device 320, and the information can be confirmed by the inspection device 320.

The configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which an IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the main CPU 62x monitors whether an erasure command has been received from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and when the erasure command is received, an erasure program for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed to erase the information. In addition, when an erasure command is received from the inspection machine 320, the main CPU 62x may transmit the information stored in the flash memory 64x to the inspection machine 320, and then execute an erasure program for erasing the information to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

In this embodiment, the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased using an inspection machine 320 for inspecting whether various pieces of game history information are within normal ranges. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration using an inspection machine 320, and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be erased using a dedicated terminal for erasing the information.

<Aspect 40>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when a flash memory clear button stored inside the space where traces of opening remain is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (e.g. 10 seconds) and a predetermined signal (e.g. erase command) is received from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (game history information such as prize ball tally, number of balls scored, and role ratio) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-mentioned aspect 38, an erasure process IC chip capable of executing an erasure process to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and a Hi-level signal is input to the input terminal of the erasure process IC chip while the flash memory clear button is pressed. Then, based on the Hi-level signal input to the input terminal continuing for 10 seconds, the erasure process IC chip transitions to an erasure process execution standby mode in which it can execute an erasure process to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x. When the erasure process IC chip receives an erasure command from the inspection machine 320 in this erasure process execution standby mode, it executes an erasure process to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, since the flash memory clear button is stored inside the board box that leaves traces of opening, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened and the flash memory clear button is operated, and traces of opening are left on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, since the erasure processing IC chip erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, a person who has the inspection machine 320 can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Therefore, based on whether traces of opening remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp whether the board box of the pachinko machine 10 may have been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been erased, and it is also possible to restrict the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the inspection machine 320.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (e.g., the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modification may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information (e.g., the ratio of prizes) stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10. An inspector who checks whether the pachinko machine 10 is playing a normal game can discover the illegal modification of the pachinko machine 10 by, for example, connecting the inspection device 320 to the inspection terminal 65 and checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x with the inspection device 320. For this reason, there may be a person (illegal person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, an inspection machine 320 that can be connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10 is required. If the person who can have the inspection machine 320 is restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person has the inspection machine 320, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the flash memory clear button. In that case, since a trace of the opening will remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, a trace will remain that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the fraudulent modification made to the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to further reduce the motivation to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, improving the soundness of the game.

Incidentally, pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated, and a person who wishes to circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only a person who has a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) and the above-mentioned inspector can have the inspection machine 320, and in which only legitimate persons can erase traces of the opening of the board box, it will be possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of play.

The configuration in which the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased based on the flash memory clear button accepting a predetermined operation and receiving a predetermined signal from the inspection machine 320 is not limited to the above configuration, and various other configurations can be adopted. For example, when the flash memory clear button is pressed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 times) within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the IC chip for erasure processing may be configured to transition to the above-mentioned erasure processing execution standby mode. Also, for example, when an erasure command is received from the inspection machine 320, the IC chip for erasure processing may transition to the above-mentioned erasure processing execution standby mode, and when the flash memory clear button is pressed continuously for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) in the erasure processing execution standby mode, the erasure processing may be executed to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. Also, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the IC chip for erasure processing is not provided, and the main CPU 62x executes a function equivalent to that of the IC chip for erasure processing to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

Furthermore, similar to the above-mentioned aspect 39, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, the information stored in the flash memory 64x may be transmitted to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 prior to the erasure. With such a configuration, even if the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased by an erroneous operation against the will of the owner of the inspection machine 320, the information erased from the flash memory 64x remains in the inspection machine 320, and the information can be confirmed by the inspection machine 320.

<Aspect 41>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, an operation panel for accepting input of authentication information (e.g., a PIN number) and a display for displaying the input authentication information may be provided on the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10, and when the authentication information inputted by the operation panel matches the authentication information individually set for the pachinko machine 10, the information stored in the flash memory 64x (the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, the ratio of special devices, and other game history information) may be erased.

Specifically, for example, as in the above-mentioned aspect 38, an IC chip for erasure processing capable of executing an erasure process for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is provided, and authentication information input via an operation panel is input to an input terminal of the IC chip for erasure processing. The IC chip for erasure processing then determines whether the authentication information input from the operation panel matches the authentication information stored in the ROM of the IC chip for erasure processing, and if it determines that they match, executes an erasure process for erasing the information stored in the flash memory 64x.

According to the configuration of this aspect, the IC chip for erasure process erases the information stored in the flash memory 64x based on a match between the authentication information accepted by the accepting means and the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10, so that a person who has the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., a person who knows the PIN number set in the pachinko machine 10) can erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x. In other words, it becomes possible to restrict the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (e.g., the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modification may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information (e.g., the ratio of game features) stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10. An inspector who checks whether a game is being played normally on the pachinko machine 10 can discover any illegal modifications made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x. For this reason, there may be someone (a fraudulent person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent an inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x, it is necessary to have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10. Then, by restricting who can have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the flash memory 64x from being erased by unauthorized persons, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of motivation to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

Incidentally, pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated, and a person who wishes to circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine 10) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only a person who has a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10) can have the authentication information set in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game.

The authentication information input to erase information stored in the flash memory 64x is not limited to a PIN number, and various types of authentication information can be used. For example, authentication information can be authentication characters (password, passphrase) that are a combination of multiple character strings, a barcode with a specific pattern, a password generated according to a predetermined rule (e.g., a one-time password), biometric authentication information of a specific person (fingerprint, iris, vein pattern, etc.), etc.

<Aspect 42>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game including the high probability mode flag, the high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased, and the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered information, the game history information such as the ratio of special devices, etc.) may be configured not to be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the main CPU 62x determines whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, it erases the information stored in the main RAM 64 that is stored in the first area of the main RAM 64, but does not erase the information stored in the second area.

According to this configuration, it is possible to erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game) while leaving the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game). Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of the execution of the game or when the business hours of the game parlor are opened or closed, there is a desire to erase the information used to control the execution of the game and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the information acquired based on the executed game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, it is possible to erase the information used to control the execution of the game while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the pachinko machine 10.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned RAM clear button, a second RAM clear button for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and when the second RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the second RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the second RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), it erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) that cannot be erased by operating the RAM clear button can be erased by operating the second clear button.

Furthermore, the second RAM clear button may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening. Specifically, for example, the second RAM clear button may be stored inside a board box to which a seal sticker that leaves traces of opening has been affixed, and the button cannot be pressed unless the seal sticker is peeled off to open the board box.

According to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button, which leaves traces of opening on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to know whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 has been opened and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may have been erased.

If the pachinko machine 10 is illegally modified (e.g., the nails are illegally altered), the illegal modification may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 (e.g., the ratio of game features, etc.). A person (inspector) who inspects whether the pachinko machine 10 is playing a normal game can discover the illegal modification made to the pachinko machine 10 by checking the information stored in the flash memory 64x and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For this reason, there may be a person (illegal person) who wishes to erase the information to prevent the inspector from discovering that the pachinko machine 10 has been illegally modified.

However, according to the configuration of this aspect, in order to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, it is necessary to open the board box of the pachinko machine 10 and operate the second RAM clear button. In that case, since traces of opening will remain on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, even if an unauthorized person erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64, traces will remain indicating that the information may have been erased in order to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized modifications made to the pachinko machine 10, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized modifications to the pachinko machine 10, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

Note that pachinko machines 10 may be traded and circulated, and a person who wants to circulate a pachinko machine 10 that has already been played on (a so-called used pachinko machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only a person (a legitimate person) who has a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 of the pachinko machine 10 can erase the traces of the opening of the board box, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game. Specifically, for example, by establishing a distribution system in which only the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10, who is a legitimate person, can affix a new seal, it is possible to promote smooth distribution of pachinko machines 10 while ensuring the soundness of the game.

The space that leaves traces of opening (also called traces of opening and closing) can be configured in any of the various ways described in aspect 38 above.

<Aspect 43>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is not erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the master CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, monitors whether the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). If it determines that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed within the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the master CPU 62x erases the information stored in the first area of the master RAM 64, but does not erase the information stored in the second area of the master RAM 64. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear button has remained pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the master CPU 62x does not erase the information stored in the first area of the master RAM 64, but erases the information stored in the second area of the master RAM 64.

With this configuration, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64. In other words, the information to be erased can be selected without providing another operation unit (e.g., a button, etc.) for selecting the information to be erased, which simplifies the structure of the pachinko machine 10.

Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of game execution or when the business hours of the game parlor are opened or closed, if it is desired to erase the information used to control the execution of the game (the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) and initialize the control of the game machine, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). On the other hand, if it is desired to erase the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) and to newly distribute the game machine, the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed continues for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds). In this way, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

Note that while the process of deleting the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed, and so there is a possibility that errors may occur in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the prize ball tally. Therefore, by configuring the game so that game play does not start until the deletion process is completed (for example, by configuring the game so that the launch of game balls is prevented), the occurrence of such errors can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is executed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and further, whether or not the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is determined to be valid is determined, and if it is determined to be valid, the information is not erased, and if it is determined to be invalid, the information is erased. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent a game from being started while the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is in an invalid state. Note that the case where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is invalid is, for example, when the number of prize balls for the accessory exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for the accessory exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for the accessory exceeds the number of prize balls for the accessory, or when there is a contradiction in the prize ball count.

<Aspect 44>
In the above-mentioned aspect 37, when an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is performed, and the RAM clear button is not pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not erased. On the other hand, when an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button is performed, and the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), not only is the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 erased, but the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may also be erased.

Specifically, for example, immediately after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the master CPU 62x determines whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button is pressed, erases the information stored in the first area of the master RAM 64. Furthermore, the master CPU 62x monitors whether the RAM clear button remains pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and if it determines that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed within the predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it does not erase the information stored in the second area of the master RAM 64. On the other hand, if it determines that the RAM clear button has remained pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the master CPU 62x also erases the information stored in the second area of the master RAM 64.

According to this configuration, similar to the above-mentioned aspect 43, by performing different operations on the RAM clear button, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the main RAM 64. Furthermore, by performing the operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and allowing the RAM clear button to remain pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), it is possible to erase both the information stored in the first area and the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64.

Note that while the process of deleting the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed, and so there is a possibility that errors may occur in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the prize ball tally. Therefore, if the configuration is such that game play does not start until the deletion process is completed (for example, a configuration that prevents the launch of game balls), the occurrence of such errors can be suppressed.

<Aspect 45>
In the above aspect 37, when the RAM clear button provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds) while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 may be erased.

Specifically, for example, the main CPU 62x monitors whether the RAM clear button is pressed, and if it determines that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 10 seconds), it erases the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 from the information stored in the main RAM 64.

With this configuration, it is possible to erase the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 without providing a separate operation unit (e.g., a button, etc.) for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. Note that while the process of erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is being executed, the above-mentioned game history process cannot be executed temporarily, and therefore errors may occur in the number of game balls entering each ball entry port and the prize ball tally. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the execution of the game is temporarily stopped during the period from the start to the end of the execution of the erasure process (e.g., a configuration in which the launch of game balls is temporarily suppressed), the occurrence of such errors can be suppressed.

<Aspect 46>
In each of the above aspects, when information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls entered, and the game history information, such as the ratio of special features) is erased, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) may be erased. In other words, when a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is executed or a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is received from another device (e.g., the inspection machine 320), not only the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be erased without fail.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which information used to control the execution of a game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased and is maintained as is even though information acquired based on an executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased. Specifically, for example, since the information acquired based on an executed game is information that serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of a game executed in the pachinko machine 10, when the information that serves as a guarantee is erased, it is preferable to initialize the game state of the pachinko machine 10 by erasing information used to control the execution of a game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information related to a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support mode flag that indicates the game state). According to this configuration, when erasing information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64), the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is also erased, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is because the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased even though the information used to ensure the fairness of the game has been erased.

In addition, for example, if the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased but the information used to control the execution of the game (the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is maintained as is, the high probability mode or high frequency support mode may be maintained as is in the pachinko machine 10 even though the information acquired based on the executed game (the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64) is erased. In this case, when a game is executed in the pachinko machine 10, the game starts in the high probability mode or high frequency support mode in a state where the amount of information acquired based on the executed game is not sufficient as statistical data, so that the game history information such as the role ratio is likely to be calculated as a biased value. Therefore, as in this embodiment, when information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball count information, game history information such as the ratio of special features, etc.) is erased, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag) is always erased, making it possible to prevent game history information such as the ratio of special features from being calculated as a biased value.

In addition, various operation modes can be used as the operation for erasing the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64. For example, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a RAM clear button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and continuing the state in which the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a second RAM clear button separately provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing both the RAM clear button and the second RAM clear button, etc. can be used.

Furthermore, for example, when an operation is performed in which the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON while pressing the RAM clear button, and the RAM clear button is no longer pressed within a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, including the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag, etc.) is erased, and the information stored in the second area (information obtained based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball number information, game history information such as the ratio of prize balls, etc.) may not be erased.

According to this configuration, it is possible to erase the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game) while leaving the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game). Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in the control of the execution of the game or when the business hours of the game parlor are opened or closed, there is a desire to erase the information used to control the execution of the game and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the information acquired based on the executed game. According to the configuration of this aspect, by operating the RAM clear button, it is possible to erase the information used to control the execution of the game while leaving the information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 32 is a flowchart showing an example of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in this embodiment. The main CPU 62x executes this main processing when the power is turned on.

In step S10901, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button is pressed. If it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is pressed (step S10901: YES), the process proceeds to step S10903, where it is determined whether or not the RAM clear button remains pressed.

If it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button is not continuing to be pressed, i.e., if it is determined that the RAM clear button is no longer pressed (step S10903: NO), the process proceeds to step S10904, where the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the first area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10903 that the RAM clear button is continuing to be pressed (step S10903: YES), the process proceeds to step S10905, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds).

If it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (step S10905: NO), the process returns to step S10903, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button is still pressed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10905 that the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds) (step S10905: YES), the process proceeds to step S10906. That is, if the RAM clear button has not been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10904 described above, and if the RAM clear button has been pressed for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), the process proceeds to step S10906 described below.

In step S10906, the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the first area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10907, where the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is erased, and the initial setting process of the second area is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10901 that the RAM clear button is not pressed (step S10901: NO), the process proceeds to step S10902, where it is determined whether or not the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. Specifically, for example, it is determined whether or not the prize ball tally value (number of prize balls for special feature, number of consecutive prize balls for special feature, total number of prize balls) which is the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid. Here, a case where the prize ball tally value is invalid is when there is a contradiction in the prize ball tally value, such as when the number of prize balls for special feature exceeds the total number of prize balls, when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature exceeds the total number of prize balls, or when the number of consecutive prize balls for special feature exceeds the number of prize balls for special feature. If it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is not valid (step S10902: NO), the process proceeds to steps S10906 and S10907 described above, where the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 and the information stored in the second area are erased. Then, the process proceeds to step S10908. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10902 that the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 is valid (step S10902: YES), the process proceeds directly to step S10908.

In step S10908, interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After step S10908 is executed, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912. The remaining processing of steps S10909 to S10912 is the same as the remaining processing of steps S10104 to S10107 in FIG. 12 described above, and therefore will not be described here.

According to the processing flow described above, when executing the process of deleting the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, ball number information, and game history information such as the ratio of game devices) (step S10906), a process of deleting the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and high frequency support mode flag) (step S10907) is always executed.

<Aspect 47>
In each of the above aspects, when information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game, such as the prize ball tally, the number of balls received, and the game history information, such as the ratio of special features) is erased, information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag) may be erased. In other words, when an operation for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is executed or a predetermined signal for erasing information stored in the flash memory 64x is received from another device (e.g., the inspection machine 320), not only the information stored in the flash memory 64x is erased, but also the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 may be erased without fail.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which information used to control the execution of a game (information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64) is not erased and is maintained as is even though information acquired based on an executed game (information stored in the flash memory 64x) is erased. Specifically, for example, since the information acquired based on an executed game is information that serves as a guarantee for determining the fairness of a game executed in the pachinko machine 10, when the information that serves as a guarantee is erased, it is preferable to initialize the game state of the pachinko machine 10 by erasing information used to control the execution of a game in the pachinko machine 10 (for example, information related to a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support mode flag that indicates the game state). According to this configuration, when erasing information acquired based on the executed game (information stored in flash memory 64x), the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is also erased, so it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is maintained as it is because the information used to control the execution of the game (information stored in the first area of main RAM 64) is not erased even though the information used as a guarantee for judging the fairness of the game has been erased.

Furthermore, when the information stored in the flash memory 64x (information acquired based on the executed game) is erased, in addition to the information stored in the first area of the main RAM 64 (information used to control the execution of the game, such as the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag), the information stored in the second area of the main RAM 64 (information acquired based on the executed game) may also be erased.

<Aspect 48>
In some of the above-mentioned embodiments, the main RAM 64 is divided into two areas (a first area and a second area), and the first area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes related to the progress of the game and various flags (such as a high probability mode flag and a high frequency support mode flag), and the second area of the main RAM 64 is used as an area for storing programs for executing processes for calculating and displaying game history information (game history processing) and various numerical information (game history information such as the above-mentioned prize ball tally, number of balls entered, and role ratio), but instead of this configuration, a configuration may be used in which a RAM that performs the functions of the first area of the main RAM 64 (a RAM used for game progress processing) and a RAM that performs the functions of the second area of the main RAM 64 (a RAM used for game history processing) are separately provided.

<Aspect 49>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in the aspect having the flash memory 64x, the flash memory 64x may be configured to be stored inside a space that leaves a trace of opening (for example, a board box with a seal attached). According to such a configuration, in order to make an illegal alteration to the information stored in the flash memory 64x, the board box of the pachinko machine 10 is opened, and a trace of opening is left on the board box of the pachinko machine 10. That is, based on whether or not a trace of opening remains on the board box of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to grasp whether or not the board box of the pachinko machine 10 may have been opened and the information stored in the flash memory 64x may have been illegally altered. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to conceal the illegal alteration made to the information stored in the flash memory 64x, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a motive to make an illegal alteration to the information stored in the flash memory 64x, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

The space that leaves traces of opening (also called traces of opening and closing) can be configured in the various ways described in aspect 38 above.

<Aspect 50>
33 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic diagram of a part of the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the embodiment 50. In the main MPU 62 in this embodiment, a ball entry detection IC 62c is provided between the input/output port 62a and the main CPU 62x.

The ball entry detection IC 62c is electrically connected to each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h via the input/output port 62a, and determines whether or not a game ball has entered each ball entry port based on the signal received from each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h, and outputs information indicating the result of the determination (ball entry information, which is information regarding whether or not a game ball has entered each ball entry port) to the main CPU 62x and the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. A detailed explanation is given below.

Each ball entry detection sensor 44a-44h, which detects the entry of a game ball into each ball entry port, is electrically connected to eight input bits, the 0th bit D0 to the 7th bit D7, provided in the input port 62b, and the eight input bits D0-D7 are electrically connected to eight input bits R0-R7 provided in the ball entry detection IC 62c. In this embodiment, a Lo level signal is always input to each of the eight input bits R0-R7 provided in the ball entry detection IC 62c, and when the ball entry detection sensor detects the entry of a game ball into the ball entry port, the signal input to the input bit corresponding to the ball entry detection sensor among the eight input bits R0-R7 rises from Lo level to Hi level.

The ball entry detection IC 62c judges whether or not a game ball has entered each entry port based on the signal output from each entry port detection sensor 44a to 44h. In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c monitors eight input bits R0 to R7 corresponding to the eight entry port detection sensors 44a to 44h, respectively, and judges that a game ball has entered the entry port corresponding to the input bit when it detects a rising edge from Lo level to Hi level in the signal input to each input bit. However, if a rising edge is detected but the Hi level state does not continue for a predetermined period, or if a rising edge is detected but the rising edge occurs within a predetermined interval from the most recent falling edge, the detected rising edge is likely to be noise, so it is judged that a game ball has not entered the entry port corresponding to the input bit. Note that various methods can be used to judge whether or not a game ball has entered each entry port, and for example, a method similar to the ball entry judgment process (FIGS. 16 and 17) described above may be used.

The ball entry detection IC 62c judges whether or not a game ball has entered each ball entry port at each predetermined period, and outputs ball entry information, which is information indicating the result of the judgment, to the main CPU 62x by serial transmission communication, and also outputs it to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65. In this embodiment, since eight ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h are provided, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information (8 bits of ball entry information) indicating whether or not a game ball has entered each of the eight ball entry ports at each predetermined period (every 4 ms). Specifically, the ball entry detection IC 62c constantly outputs a Lo level signal, and at each predetermined period (every 4 ms) when it has determined whether or not a ball has entered the game, it outputs a 50 μs Hi level signal as a start bit, then outputs eight bits of a 50 μs Hi level signal (ball entered) or Lo level signal (ball not entered) corresponding to whether or not a game ball has entered the game at each of the eight ball entry ports, and finally outputs a 50 μs Lo level signal as a stop bit.

The master CPU 62x, which receives ball entry information from the ball entry detection IC 62c, executes processing related to the progress of the game, such as the jackpot lottery and the payout of prize balls, based on the received ball entry information for each ball entry port. The master CPU 62x also executes the above-mentioned game history processing (FIG. 29), and also executes processing related to the calculation and display of game history information, such as the ball payout rate (total), the ratio of special features, and the ratio of consecutive special features. The master CPU 62x then stores the numerical information used in the calculation process of the game history information and the calculated game history information in the flash memory 64x.

Next, we will explain the inspection using an inspection device 320 that can receive the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c.

In this embodiment, while a game is being played on the pachinko machine 10, that is, while a player or inspector is operating the control handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 to launch game balls onto the game board 30 and play the game as normal, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 uses the inspection device 320 to inspect whether or not a legitimate game is being played on the pachinko machine 10 during this inspection period. A detailed explanation is given below.

The inspection machine 320 can execute a ball entry information receiving mode in which ball entry information for each ball entry port is received from the ball entry detection IC 62c, a ball entry port information setting mode in which ball entry port information, which is information regarding the type of ball entry port and the number of winning balls provided in the pachinko machine 10, is set, and a game history information calculation mode in which the various game history information described above is calculated based on the received ball entry information and the set ball entry port information.

When an inspector inspects whether a legitimate game is being played on a pachinko machine 10, he or she connects the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to switch the inspection machine 320 to the ball entry information receiving mode described above. The player or inspector operates the operation handle 25 of the pachinko machine 10 being inspected to launch game balls onto the game board 30, and continues playing the game as usual.

When the inspection machine 320 switches to the scoring information receiving mode, it outputs a Hi-level signal to the output permission signal line 329b in the connection cable 329. The output permission signal line 329b is electrically connected to the output permission determination bit 62d of the scoring detection IC 62c via the inspection terminal 65. The scoring detection IC 62c determines whether or not a Hi-level signal has been input to the output permission determination bit 62d, and outputs the scoring information described above to the information transmission signal line 329a in the connection cable 329 via the inspection terminal 65 by serial transmission communication only during the period in which it determines that a Hi-level signal has been input to the output permission determination bit 62d.

In the ball entry information receiving mode, the inspection machine 320 receives ball entry information corresponding to eight ball entry ports at predetermined intervals, and measures (counts) and stores the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port. The inspection machine 320 then displays information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port that has been measured (counted) on the display unit 328. That is, each time a game ball enters each ball entry port as the player or inspector plays a game, 1 is added to the information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port that is displayed on the display unit 328. As a result, the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port after switching to the ball entry information receiving mode is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

After a sufficient inspection period (e.g., about 10 hours) has elapsed, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball entrance information receiving mode, and the inspection machine 320 transitions to the ball entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the ball entrance information setting mode, it displays an input screen on the display unit 328 for the inspector to input the type of ball entrance and the number of prize balls for each ball entrance. In this embodiment, the inspection machine 320 receives 8 bits of ball entrance information every predetermined period in the ball entrance information receiving mode, so that the display unit 328 displays an input screen for inputting the type of ball entrance and the number of prize balls for each of the eight ball entrances. The type of ball entrance is the type of ball entrance at which each ball entrance detection sensor 44a to 44h, such as the first start entrance 33, the second start entrance 34, the large prize entrance 36a, and the discharge passage, is installed, and the number of prize balls is the number of game balls paid out as prize balls when one game ball enters the ball entrance.

The inspector operates the operation unit 327 to input the ball entrance information (ball entrance type information and prize ball number information) for each ball entrance into the inspection machine 320. Specifically, the inspector obtains information such as which bit in the ball entrance information output from the ball entrance detection IC 62c corresponds to which type of ball entrance (type information) and information such as how many prize balls should be set for which type of ball entrance (prize ball number information) from the specifications or instruction manual of the pachinko machine 10, and inputs the obtained information into the inspection machine 320. When the inspector has completed inputting the ball entrance information, the inspection machine 320 transitions to a game history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game play history information calculation mode, it calculates the various game play history information described above based on the number of game balls entering each entrance port measured (counted) in the ball entry information receiving mode and the type information and number of winning balls information set in the ball entry port information setting mode. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (total), role ratio, and consecutive role ratio. When the inspection machine 320 has completed calculation of the various game play history information, it causes the display unit 328 to display the calculated various game play history information.

The inspector can check whether legitimate play was performed during the inspection period by checking the various game play history information displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x, so that the inspection machine 320 can receive ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x.

For example, if the configuration of this embodiment were not adopted, and a configuration were adopted in which ball entry information is output via the main CPU 62x to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, and if the main CPU 62x has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering may affect the ball entry information output to the inspection device 320. Furthermore, the reliability of the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x may be low due to the influence of a malfunction or illegal tampering of the main CPU 62x.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 without going through the main CPU 62x. Therefore, even if the main CPU 62x has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the ball entry information output to the inspection machine 320 is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering. As a result, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can execute processing based on ball entry information that is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 can calculate game history information based on ball entry information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the pachinko machine 10 can confirm the game history information that is not affected by the main CPU 62x by the inspection machine 320, even if the main CPU 62x may have a malfunction or has been illegally tampered and the reliability of the game history information calculated and displayed by the main CPU 62x is low. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 using a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which the ball entry information is output using a parallel transmission method, for example, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 that passes the ball entry information to the inspection device 320 can be simplified, and the configuration of the inspection device 320 that receives the ball entry information can be simplified.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports is output by a parallel transmission method, the inspection terminal 65 needs to have an output section (e.g., output bits) corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry ports. Similarly, the inspection machine 320 needs to have an input section (e.g., input bits) corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry ports. In addition, since the number of ball entry ports provided in a pachinko machine 10 differs for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10, it becomes necessary to prepare an inspection machine 320 with a different number of input sections for each type (model) of pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c is provided with a means for outputting ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports to the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 by a serial transmission method, so that the inspection terminal 65 may be configured to have at least one output section capable of outputting ball entry information by a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the configuration of the inspection terminal 65 can be simplified. Similarly, the inspection device 320 may be configured to have at least one input section capable of inputting the ball entry information output by a serial transmission method, regardless of the number of ball entry ports provided in the pachinko machine 10, so that the configuration of the inspection device 320 can be simplified. Furthermore, even if the inspection device 320 is connected to a pachinko machine 10 with a different number of ball entry ports, the inspection device 320 can input ball entry information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry ports by a serial transmission method. In other words, the inspection device 320 can be used for other pachinko machines 10 with a different number of ball entry ports. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of the inspection machine 320.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry information to the inspection device 320 only when it receives a Hi level signal from the inspection device 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, so it is possible to prevent the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being output to the outside except when it receives the Hi level signal. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

<Aspect 51>
In the above-mentioned aspect 50, in the entrance gate information setting mode of the inspection machine 320, the inspector operates the operation unit 327 to manually input the entrance gate information into the inspection machine 320, but instead of this configuration, the inspection machine 320 may receive the entrance gate information from the pachinko machine 10 and set it.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 transitions to the ball entrance information setting mode, it transmits a signal requesting the transmission of ball entrance information (ball entrance information transmission request command) to the ball entrance detection IC 62c via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. The ball entrance detection IC 62c, which receives the signal (ball entrance information transmission request command), transmits the ball entrance information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. The inspection machine 320 sets the ball entrance information received from the ball entrance detection IC 62c for each ball entrance and ends the ball entrance information setting mode.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c outputs ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) to the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65, thereby eliminating the need to manually input ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) to the inspection machine 320 and preventing incorrect ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information) from being input to the inspection machine 320. As a result, the inspection machine 320 is able to calculate game history information based on the ball entry information and accurate ball entry port information (number of prize balls information and type information).

In this embodiment, the ball entry detection IC 62c is configured to transmit ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 upon receiving a predetermined signal (ball entry information transmission request command). Alternatively, the ball entry detection IC 62c may transmit ball entry information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection device 320 when the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 (i.e., when it detects that the connection cable 329 of the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65). With this configuration, the inspection device 320 can quickly execute a process that requires the ball entry information after the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entrance detection IC 62c is configured to transmit the ball entrance information to the inspection device 320, but instead of this configuration, the main CPU 62x may read the ball entrance information stored in the main ROM 63 and transmit it to the inspection device 320.

<Aspect 52>
In the above-mentioned aspect 50, the IC 62c for detecting a ball is configured to output the ball-entering information by serial transmission communication through the inspection terminal 65 only during the period when it is determined that a Hi-level signal is input to the output permission determination bit 62d, but other configurations may be adopted instead of this configuration. For example, the IC 62c for detecting a ball may be configured to output the ball-entering information by serial transmission communication through the inspection terminal 65 only during the period when it is determined that a signal of a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. Also, for example, the IC 62c for detecting a ball may be configured to output the ball-entering information by serial transmission communication through the inspection terminal 65 when it is determined that a signal of a predetermined pattern is input to the output permission determination bit 62d. In addition, for example, a specified switch may be provided on the inspection terminal 65, and when it is determined that a cable terminal of a specified shape is connected to the inspection terminal 65 and the specified switch is pressed down, the ball entry detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entry information via the inspection terminal 65 by communication using a serial transmission method.

<Aspect 53>
In the above-mentioned aspects 50 to 52, the inspection device 320 may be configured to switch to the ball entry information receiving mode after the ball entry information setting mode is completed. With such a configuration, the type of each ball entry is set at the time of switching to the ball entry information receiving mode, so that the type of each ball entry and the number of balls that have entered the ball entry can be displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection device 320 during the ball entry information receiving mode.

As a result, the inspector can ascertain which type of ball entry port the game ball entered even during the ball entry information receiving mode. Furthermore, the inspector can confirm whether the ball entry information output from the ball entry detection IC 62c is authentic by checking whether the information displayed on the display unit 328 (type of ball entry port and number of balls that entered) matches the number of game balls that actually entered each ball entry port as confirmed by visual inspection.

<Aspect 54>
In the above aspects 50 to 53, the inspection machine 320 may be configured to transition to a game history information receiving mode, which is a mode for receiving game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10, when the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and then transition to the above-mentioned ball entrance information setting mode, ball entrance information receiving mode, and game history information calculation mode.

Specifically, for example, when the inspection machine 320 detects that the connection cable 329 is connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, it transitions to the game history information reception mode. When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information reception mode, it transmits a signal requesting the transmission of game history information (game history information transmission request command) to the master CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. The master CPU 62x that receives the signal (game history information transmission request command) transmits the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. When the inspection machine 320 stores the game history information received from the master CPU 62x in the RAM 326, it ends the game history information reception mode and transitions to the ball entrance information setting mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the ball inlet information setting mode, it sends a signal requesting the transmission of ball inlet information (ball inlet information transmission request command) to the main CPU 62x via the connection cable 329 and the inspection terminal 65. The main CPU 62x, which receives the signal (ball inlet information transmission request command), transmits the ball inlet information of the pachinko machine 10 to the inspection machine 320 via the inspection terminal 65 and the connection cable 329. When the inspection machine 320 sets the ball inlet information received from the main CPU 62x for each ball inlet, it ends the ball inlet information setting mode and transitions to the ball inlet information receiving mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the ball entry information receiving mode, it receives ball entry information corresponding to the eight ball entry ports at predetermined intervals, and measures (counts) and stores the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port. The inspection machine 320 then displays information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port that has been measured (counted) on the display unit 328. That is, each time a game ball enters each ball entry port as the player or inspector plays a game, 1 is added to the information indicating the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port that is displayed on the display unit 328. As a result, the number of game balls that have entered each ball entry port after transitioning to the ball entry information receiving mode is displayed on the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320.

After a sufficient inspection period has elapsed (e.g., about 10 hours), the inspector operates the operation unit 327 of the inspection machine 320 to end the ball entry information reception mode, and the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game play history information calculation mode.

When the inspection machine 320 transitions to the game history information calculation mode, it calculates the various game history information described above based on the number of game balls entering each entrance measured (counted) in the ball entry information receiving mode and the type information and number of winning balls information set in the ball entry information setting mode. For example, the inspection machine 320 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (total), role ratio, and consecutive role ratio. When the inspection machine 320 has completed the calculation of the various game history information, it causes the display unit 328 to display the various game history information calculated in the game history information calculation mode and the various game history information received in the game history information receiving mode (game history information stored in the flash memory 64x). That is, the display unit 328 of the inspection machine 320 displays game history information covering the inspection period during which the connection cable 329 of the inspection machine 320 was connected to the pachinko machine 10 and received winning ball information in the winning ball information receiving mode, and game history information covering a predetermined period in the past that is calculated by the main CPU 62x of the pachinko machine 10 and stored in the flash memory 64x.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the inspection machine 320 connected to the inspection terminal 65 can receive and display the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as the first game history information) stored in the flash memory 64x. In addition, the inspection machine 320 can execute processing based on the ball entry information received during the inspection period. Specifically, the inspection machine 320 can calculate the game history information based on the ball entry information received during a predetermined inspection period connected to the inspection terminal 65 of the pachinko machine 10, and display the game history information (hereinafter also referred to as the second game history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector inspecting the pachinko machine 10 can compare the first game history information stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 with the second game history information based on the ball entry information received by the inspection machine 320 during the predetermined inspection period.

If a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 10 or unauthorized modifications (e.g., nail tampering) are made to the pachinko machine 10, causing a change in the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10, a difference may occur between the first game history information (game history information calculated by the main CPU 62x based on ball entry information during a specified period in the past) stored in the flash memory 64x of the pachinko machine 10 and the second game history information calculated by the inspection machine 320 based on ball entry information during a specified inspection period. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether a malfunction or unauthorized modifications (e.g., nail tampering) have occurred in the pachinko machine 10 by focusing on the difference between the two pieces of game history information.

The inspection machine 320 may be configured to receive and set the entrance information in the entrance information setting mode described above, and then transition to a game history information receiving mode to receive the game history information. The inspection machine 320 may be configured to calculate the game history information for the inspection period in the game history information calculation mode described above, and then transition to a game history information receiving mode to receive the game history information stored in the flash memory 64x.

<Aspect 55>
In the above-mentioned aspects 50 to 54, the number of ball entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is not limited to eight, and may be nine or more, or seven or less. The ball entrance detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entrance information corresponding to the number of ball entrances. For example, when the number of ball entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is seven or less, the ball entrance detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entrance information using the first half of the eight bits output by the serial transmission method. Also, for example, when the number of ball entrances provided in the pachinko machine 10 is nine or more, the ball entrance detection IC 62c may be configured to output ball entrance information corresponding to nine or more ball entrances by executing the eight-bit output by the serial transmission method multiple times. Also, the ball entrance detection IC 62c may be configured to be able to output 16-bit, 32-bit, or other ball entrance information at once by the serial transmission method.

<Aspect 56>
In the above-mentioned aspect 23, the main CPU 62x executes the game history process as one process included in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23: step S10616), but instead of this configuration, the CPU 62x may execute the game history process during the remaining time of the above-mentioned main process, rather than during the timer interrupt process. A specific description will be given below.

Figure 34 is a flow chart showing an example of main processing executed by the master CPU 62x in aspect 56. In step S11001, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device associated with power-on and a determination of the validity of data stored in RAM 64 are executed. After executing step S11001, the process proceeds to step S11002, where interrupt permission is set to allow timer interrupt processing (Figure 13) to occur.

After executing step S11002, the process proceeds to the remaining processing of steps S11003 to S11007. That is, the main CPU 62x is configured to periodically execute timer interrupt processing as described above, but there will be a remaining time between one timer interrupt processing and the next timer interrupt processing. This remaining time will vary depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt processing, but this irregular time (remaining time) is used to repeatedly execute the processing (remaining processing) of steps S11003 to S11007.

In step S11003, interrupt prohibition is set to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. Then, the process proceeds to step S11004, where a random number initial value update process is executed to update the random number initial value counter CINI, and to step S11005, where a fluctuation counter update process is executed to update the fluctuation type counter CS. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is added by 1, after which the counter from which it was read is overwritten. In this case, when the counter value reaches its maximum value, it is cleared to "0". Then, the process proceeds to step S11006.

In step S11006, the above-mentioned game history process (FIG. 29) is executed. As described above, the game history process includes a number of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in FIG. 29) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of the game history information. The master CPU 62x executes some of the tasks in one execution of the game history process included in the remaining process. That is, the master CPU 62x executes the game history process multiple times to complete the calculation of the game history information set as the calculation target. After executing step S11006, the process proceeds to step S11007, where interrupt permission is set to switch from a state in which the occurrence of timer interrupt processing is prohibited to a state in which it is permitted. After executing the process of step S11007, the process returns to step S11003, and the processes of steps S11003 to S11007 are repeated.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the remaining processes including the game history process are repeatedly executed during the remaining time in the main process (the period from the end of execution of one timer interrupt process to the start of execution of the next timer interrupt process), so that it is possible to prevent the execution of the remaining processes including the game history process from starting even though the execution of one timer interrupt process has not ended. In other words, while giving priority to the execution of the timer interrupt process, it is possible to quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining processes including the game history process during the period when the timer interrupt process is not being executed.

Furthermore, if the configuration of this embodiment were not adopted, and a configuration in which the game history processing is included in the timer interrupt processing and executed was adopted, the time required from start to finish of one execution of the timer interrupt processing would be longer. For example, even though a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt processing and it is time to start execution of the next timer interrupt processing, the execution of the first timer interrupt processing has not yet finished, and it may not be possible to start execution of the next timer interrupt processing until the execution of the first timer interrupt processing has finished. In this case, there is a risk of a malfunction occurring in the progress of the game due to the delay in starting the execution of the next timer interrupt processing.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the game history process is executed as part of the remaining process, so that the time required from start to end of one execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the game history process is executed as part of the timer interrupt process. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has passed since the start of execution of one timer interrupt process, and the timing for starting execution of the next timer interrupt process has arrived, but the execution of the first timer interrupt process has not yet ended, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which execution of the next timer interrupt process cannot be started until the execution of the first timer interrupt process ends. In this way, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to efficiently and quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining process including the game history process during the period in which the timer interrupt process is not being executed, while preventing the occurrence of problems in the progress of the game due to a delay in the start of execution of the next timer interrupt process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the game history process includes a plurality of tasks (task 1 and task 2 in step S10814 in FIG. 29) that are executed sequentially to complete the calculation of the game history information, and the master CPU 62x executes some of the tasks in one execution of the game history process. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which all of the tasks are executed in one execution of the game history process, for example, the time required from the start to the end of one execution of the game history process can be shortened. Specifically, for example, even if a condition for starting the execution of the timer interrupt process is satisfied during the execution of the game history process, the game history process being executed ends in a short time, so the time from the satisfaction of the condition to the start of the execution of the timer interrupt process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the game history information by repeatedly executing the remaining process while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions caused by a delay in the start of the execution of the timer interrupt process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the length of the remaining time changes depending on the length of time required from the start to the end of the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, if the length of one timer interrupt process is longer, the remaining time from the end of that timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process is shorter, whereas if the length of one timer interrupt process is shorter, the remaining time from the end of that timer interrupt process to the start of the next timer interrupt process is longer. If the remaining time is short, the number of times the game history process is executed can be reduced, whereas if the remaining time is long, the number of times the game history process is executed can be increased. In other words, the number of times the game history process is executed can be changed depending on the length of the remaining time.

<Aspect 57>
In the first embodiment and each of the above aspects, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to have a plurality of settings with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, for example, even in the same low probability mode, the main control device 60 may be configured to have six levels of lottery settings ("lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6") with different probabilities of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery. This will be specifically described below.

The main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is provided with six types of win/lose tables for the low probability mode corresponding to each of the six lottery settings from "lottery setting 1" to "lottery setting 6". The main control device 60 then executes the jackpot lottery by referring to the win/lose table corresponding to the set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1 and the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the main control device 60 executes the jackpot lottery by referring to the win/lose table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1.

In this embodiment, the hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 1 has five values, 0 to 4, set as values that win the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 2 has six values, 0 to 5, set as values that win the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 3 has seven values, 0 to 6, set as values that win the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 4 has eight values, 0 to 7, set as values that win the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. The hit/miss table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 5 has nine values, 0 to 8, set as values that win the jackpot among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 from 0 to 1199. In addition, in the win/lose table for the low probability mode of lottery setting 6, 10 values from 0 to 9 are set as the winning values for the jackpot out of the jackpot random number counter C1 values from 0 to 1199.

In other words, in this embodiment, the larger the number following "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning the jackpot lottery in low probability mode.

In this embodiment, regardless of which of the six lottery settings is set, the same win/lose table is referenced in the high probability mode to execute the jackpot lottery. In other words, in the high probability mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery is the same regardless of the lottery setting. However, as another embodiment, the high probability mode may be configured such that the larger the number following the "lottery setting", the higher the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the six-stage lottery setting change is configured to be executable when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. This will be explained in detail below.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings and a button for changing settings. When an administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 wants to change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, he or she first inserts a key for changing settings into the keyhole while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is OFF. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the inserted key turned to the setting change side (for example, clockwise), the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode.

When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, information indicating the current lottery setting (hereinafter also referred to as setting information) is displayed on the game history information display section 45z described above. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1," "1" is displayed on the game history information display section 45z. Then, each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the game history information display section 45z switches in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"...

When the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is at the administrator's desired value, if the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the lottery setting will be changed to the lottery setting that corresponds to the setting information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z. Specifically, for example, when the administrator presses the setting change button and "6" is displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, and then turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will be changed to "lottery setting 6."

In this manner, according to this embodiment, by changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10, the probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery can be changed. As a result, even with the same pachinko machine 10, the probability that the variable winning device 36 as a special electric role will be activated as a result of the jackpot lottery is changed, so that the above-mentioned role ratio and consecutive role ratio values calculated as the game history information will converge to values corresponding to the new changed lottery settings. In other words, by changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10, the game history information of the pachinko machine 10, such as the role ratio and consecutive role ratio, will change. In other words, the characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 can be changed by a simple method such as changing the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in each aspect described below, the information that serves as the basis for calculating the above-mentioned game history information, such as ball entry information for each entry port, information on the number of balls that have entered, and the prize ball tally, is also referred to as "game history basic information."

<Aspect 58>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), when the lottery settings in the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic game history information stored in various memories (main RAM 64, flash memory 64x, etc.) before the lottery settings are changed may be erased, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information stored in various memories after the lottery settings are changed.

The reason for this configuration will be explained below. When the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 (the setting of the probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery) is changed, the probability that the variable winning device 36 acting as the special electric device will operate is changed, so the values of the above-mentioned device ratio and consecutive device ratio calculated as the game history information will converge to values corresponding to the new changed lottery setting. In other words, the values to which the device ratio and consecutive device ratio should converge will change before and after the change in the lottery setting.

If a configuration were adopted in which the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting was changed is not erased even after the lottery setting is changed, and the game history basic information acquired after the lottery setting is changed is stored, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed will have an effect when calculating the game history information, and it may take some time for the original characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 after the lottery setting is changed to be reflected in the game history information.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the lottery settings are changed, the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings are changed is erased, and the game history information is calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings are changed.

According to this embodiment, the game history information such as the ratio of the role and the ratio of consecutive roles quickly converges to a value corresponding to the changed lottery setting, and the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can quickly confirm the game history information corresponding to the lottery setting currently set in the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 59>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), even after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic game history information stored in various memories before the lottery settings are changed is not erased, but the basic game history information acquired after the lottery settings are changed is added to and stored in various memories, and the game history information is calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information stored in various memories regardless of whether the lottery settings are changed or not.

According to this embodiment, it is possible to calculate and display game history information that includes the effects of changing the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether the total game history information, including the effects of the change in the lottery settings, falls within an appropriate range as a result of the change in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 being operated in the gaming hall.

<Aspect 60>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), when the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the basic information of the game history stored before the change in the lottery settings is erased, and the basic information of the game history obtained after the change in the lottery settings is stored, and the game history information is calculated and displayed based on the stored basic information of the game history.

In such a configuration, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are accumulated to a predetermined amount, information indicating that the lottery settings were changed within a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed.

Specifically, for example, if the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the basic playing history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1000, short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting was changed in a short period of time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the playing history information display unit 45z. Also, for example, an LED lamp for displaying the short-term change information may be provided on the playing history information display unit 45z, and the LED lamp may be illuminated when the short-term change information is recorded.

According to this embodiment, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether a change to the lottery settings has been made in a short period of time on the pachinko machine 10 by checking whether short-term change information is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from intentionally changing the lottery settings.

Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 may change the lottery settings again and erase the basic game history information and the game history information stored in the pachinko machine 10, even though not many games are being played on the pachinko machine after the winning probability is changed. However, according to this embodiment, if the lottery settings are changed again in a short period of time even though not many games are being played on the pachinko machine 10 after the lottery settings are changed, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the lottery settings may have been changed in a short period of time with the fraudulent intention of erasing the basic game history information and the game history information. As a result, it is possible to suppress the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery settings with the fraudulent intention.

In addition, if the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before a predetermined time has elapsed since the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed, information indicating that the lottery setting was changed in a short period of time (short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. With this configuration, even if no play is performed on the pachinko machine 10 between changes to the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the short-term change information is not displayed if a predetermined time has elapsed between the changes to the lottery setting. Therefore, even if the time between changes to the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is relatively long, but the pachinko machine 10 is simply not played between the changes, it is possible to suppress the inspector's misconception that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time with fraudulent intent.

<Aspect 61>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the big win lottery), the basic game history information and the game history information for the most recent multiple periods with the past lottery setting changed as the boundary may be stored and displayed. When the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the basic game history information and the game history information for the oldest period of the most recent multiple periods already stored may be erased, and the basic game history information acquired after the current lottery setting change may be stored.

In such a configuration, if the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed again before the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are accumulated to a predetermined amount, information indicating that the lottery settings were changed within a short period of time (hereinafter also referred to as short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed.

Specifically, for example, if the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the basic playing history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed reaches 1000, short-term change information indicating that the lottery setting was changed in a short period of time is recorded, and the short-term change information is displayed on the playing history information display unit 45z. Also, for example, an LED lamp for displaying the short-term change information may be provided on the playing history information display unit 45z, and the LED lamp may be illuminated when the short-term change information is recorded.

According to the above-described embodiment, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of the most recent periods bounded by past changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the game history information was not within the appropriate range during the process in which the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed in the past.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether or not a change has been made to the lottery settings in a short period of time in the pachinko machine 10 by checking whether or not short-term change information is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from intentionally changing the lottery settings.

Specifically, for example, before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 may repeatedly change the lottery settings in a short period of time, erasing the basic game history information and game history information for the most recent periods of the pachinko machine 10. However, according to this embodiment, when the lottery settings are repeatedly changed in a short period of time, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the lottery settings may have been changed in a short period of time with fraudulent intent. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery settings with fraudulent intent.

In addition, if the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed again before a predetermined time has elapsed since the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 was changed, information indicating that the lottery setting was changed in a short period of time (short-term change information) may be recorded and the short-term change information may be displayed. With this configuration, even if no play is performed on the pachinko machine 10 between changes to the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the short-term change information is not displayed if a predetermined time has elapsed between the changes to the lottery setting. Therefore, even if the time between changes to the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is relatively long, but the pachinko machine 10 is simply not played between the changes, it is possible to suppress the inspector's misconception that the lottery setting may have been changed in a short period of time with fraudulent intent.

<Aspect 62>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the game history basic information that is the basis for calculating the game history information is accumulated to a sufficient amount as statistical data, and the game history basic information stored before the lottery settings were changed may be saved (retained) without being erased.

Furthermore, until the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data, the game history information calculated based on the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed may be displayed in a flashing manner on the game history information display unit 45z, and after the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed is accumulated to a sufficient amount as statistical data, the game history information may be calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information may be displayed in a lit manner on the game history information display unit 45z.

Specifically, for example, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed is stored without being erased until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed reaches 60,000. Then, until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed reaches 60,000, the game history information calculated based on the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed is displayed in a blinking manner on the game history information display unit 45z. After the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed reaches 60,000, the game history basic information stored before the lottery setting is changed is erased, the game history information is calculated based on the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed, and the calculated game history information is displayed in a lit manner on the game history information display unit 45z.

According to this aspect, it is possible to prevent the basic game history information stored before the lottery setting is changed from being intentionally erased by changing the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the basic game history information acquired and stored before the lottery setting is changed is erased immediately after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, there is a possibility that the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 will change the lottery setting and erase the basic game history information and the game history information stored before the lottery setting is changed before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector. In contrast, according to this aspect, the basic game history information stored before the lottery setting is changed is not erased until the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed has accumulated to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data, so that it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine from changing the lottery setting with fraudulent intentions.

Furthermore, by checking whether the game history information displayed on the game history information display unit 45z is flashing or lit, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can easily determine whether the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings have been changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data.

In addition, various criteria other than the total number of winning balls can be used as the conditions for erasing the basic game history information stored before the lottery settings were changed and for switching from a flashing display to a lit display. For example, the total number of game balls that have passed through the discharge passage (the number of game balls that have been launched onto the game board 30) may be used as the criterion.

<Aspect 63>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (configuration capable of changing the lottery setting of the big win lottery), the game history basic information and the game history information for the most recent multiple periods with the past lottery setting changed as a boundary may be stored and displayed. And, when the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the game history basic information and the game history information for the oldest period among the most recent multiple periods already stored are not erased until the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data, and the game history basic information and the game history information for the oldest period among the most recent multiple periods already stored are erased after the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed is accumulated to a sufficient predetermined amount as statistical data.

Specifically, for example, when the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed, the game history basic information and game history information for the oldest period among the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored may not be erased until the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed reaches 60,000, and the game history basic information and game history information for the oldest period among the most recent multiple periods that have already been stored may be erased after the total number of prize balls in the prize ball tally value as the game history basic information acquired and stored after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are changed reaches 60,000.

According to this embodiment, the inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check the game history information for each of the most recent periods bounded by past changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10. In other words, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the game history information was not within the appropriate range during the process in which the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed in the past.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the basic game history information and game history information for the most recent periods bounded by past changes in the lottery settings from being intentionally erased due to repeated changes in the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

For example, if a configuration were adopted in which the basic game history information and game history information for the oldest of the most recent periods bounded by past lottery setting changes were erased immediately after the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 were changed, there is a possibility that the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 may repeatedly change the lottery settings before the pachinko machine 10 is inspected by an inspector, thereby erasing the basic game history information and game history information for the most recent periods of the pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the basic game history information and the game history information for the oldest of the most recent periods bounded by past lottery setting changes are not erased until the basic game history information acquired and stored after the lottery setting is changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount sufficient as statistical data, thereby preventing the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from changing the lottery setting with fraudulent intent.

<Aspect 64>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57 (a configuration in which the lottery settings for the jackpot lottery can be changed), the acquired basic game history information may be stored separately for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of acquisition, and the game history information may be calculated and displayed for each lottery setting.

Specifically, for example, when the game history basic information is stored in various memories, information capable of identifying the lottery setting at the time when the game history basic information was acquired is added and stored. Then, when calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history basic information may be extracted for each lottery setting, and the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed.

As another specific configuration, various memories may be provided with memory areas corresponding to each lottery setting, and the acquired basic game history information may be stored in the memory area corresponding to the currently set lottery setting. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1, the acquired basic game history information is stored in the memory area corresponding to lottery setting 1, and when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 2, the acquired basic game history information is stored in the memory area corresponding to lottery setting 2. When calculating and displaying the game history information, the game history information for each lottery setting may be calculated and displayed based on the basic game history information stored in each memory area.

According to this configuration, an inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check each piece of game history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, such as game history information calculated based on game history basic information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 1, and game history information calculated based on game history basic information acquired when the pachinko machine 10 is set to lottery setting 2. The inspector can then check whether or not there is a lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 whose game history information does not fall within the appropriate range by checking whether or not each piece of game history information calculated for each lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 falls within the appropriate range.

<Aspect 65>
In the above-mentioned aspect 57, the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 are displayed on the game history information display unit 45z, but a lottery setting display unit that displays the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 may be provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 separately from the game history information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 66>
In each of the above-mentioned aspects, the calculated numerical value of the gaming history information itself is displayed on the gaming history information display unit 45z, but the numerical value of the gaming history information itself may not be displayed, and information indicating whether or not the numerical value of the gaming history information is within a predetermined range may be displayed on the gaming history information display unit 45z or another display unit. For example, whether or not the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio as the gaming history information are within a predetermined range may be displayed by the color of the emitted LED lamp.

<Aspect 67>
In each of the above aspects, the game history information display unit 45z provided on the back of the pachinko machine 10 may be configured with four seven-segment displays arranged adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Note that the game history information display unit 45z not only displays the game history information, but also displays setting information instead of the game history information during a setting change mode in which the lottery setting is changed, and therefore will be simply referred to as the "information display unit 45z" below.

Figure 35 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the information display unit 45z in aspect 67. The information display unit 45z is configured by arranging four seven-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 adjacent to each other in a horizontal row. Each of the seven-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4 has seven segment light-emitting units A to G and a DP light-emitting unit that indicates a decimal point, and various numbers, letters, symbols, etc. such as "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", "8", "9", "0", "b", "L.", and "6." can be displayed depending on the combination of whether or not these light-emitting units are illuminated. In this aspect, the seven segment light-emitting units A to G and the DP light-emitting unit are configured with red LEDs (light-emitting diodes).

In the following, the 7-segment display 45z1 located at the left end is also referred to as the left end 7-segment display 45z1, the 7-segment display 45z2 located adjacent to the right side of the left end 7-segment display 45z1 is also referred to as the left middle 7-segment display 45z2, the 7-segment display 45z3 located adjacent to the right side of the left middle 7-segment display 45z2 is also referred to as the right middle 7-segment display 45z3, and the 7-segment display 45z4 located adjacent to the right side of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 and located at the right end is also referred to as the right end 7-segment display 45z4.

As shown in FIG. 35, when displaying game history information, the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 and the left-center seven-segment display 45z2 are used as an area (type information display area) that displays type information, which is information for identifying the type of game history information to be displayed. In addition, the right-center seven-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 are used as an area (numeric information display area) that displays numerical information of the game history information corresponding to the type displayed in the type information display area. Below, a specific example of game history information being displayed on the information display unit 45z is described.

Figure 36 is an explanatory diagram showing how game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z. Note that in Figure 36, lit segment light-emitting units and DP light-emitting units are shown filled in with black, while unlit segment light-emitting units and DP light-emitting units are shown as white instead of filled in with black. The same is true for Figure 37 and subsequent figures.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control unit 60 always displays the game history information on the information display unit 45z in a state other than the setting change mode in which the lottery setting is changed. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control unit 60 calculates the above-mentioned ball payout rate (in normal mode) as the game history information, and displays the calculated ball payout rate (in normal mode) on the information display unit 45z. The definition of the ball payout rate (in normal mode) is as follows.
・Ball payout rate (in normal mode)
= Total number of game balls paid out as prize balls during normal mode / Number of game balls shot onto the game board 30 during normal mode (= Number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode))
As mentioned above, the normal mode refers to a mode that is not a high probability mode, not a high frequency support mode, and not a mode that is based on a big win. In the following, the ball output rate (in the normal mode) is also called the "base (in the normal mode)".

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the main control device 60 divides the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT into sections each time the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N OUT reaches 60,000, and calculates the base (in normal mode) for each section. The information display unit 45z then alternately displays two types of bases (in normal mode) that are different for the sections that are the subject of the calculation. Specifically, the information display unit 45z of this embodiment displays the following two types of bases (in normal mode).

・"bL": Base being measured (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate calculated in the current section until the number of balls passing through the discharge passage currently being measured N _OUT reaches 60,000 (in normal mode)
・"b6": Measured base (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section immediately preceding the section currently being measured in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT has reached 60,000.

In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, the information display unit 45z alternates between "base being measured (in normal mode)" and "base already measured (in normal mode)" every 5 seconds.

When the information display unit 45z displays "base being measured (in normal mode)", "bL." is displayed in the category information display area, and the numeric value of "base being measured (in normal mode)" is displayed in two digits in the numeric information display area. Specifically, when "bL." is displayed in the category information display area, the segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are illuminated, and the segment light emitting units D, E, F and DP light emitting unit of the left center 7-segment display 45z2 are illuminated. The right center 7-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 that constitute the numeric information display area display the numeric information of "base being measured (in normal mode)". In this embodiment, the integer part of the numeric value obtained by rounding the calculated value of "base being measured (in normal mode)" to the third decimal place and multiplying it by 100 is displayed in the numeric information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.35", which means that the value of the "base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded off to the nearest hundredths is "0.35". Also, if the value of the "base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded off to the nearest hundredths is "1.00" or greater, multiplying this by 100 will result in a value of 100 or greater, so in this case the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.99.".

When the information display unit 45z displays "measured base (in normal mode)", "b6." is displayed in the category information display area, and the value of "measured base (in normal mode)" is displayed in two digits in the numerical information display area. Specifically, when "b6." is displayed in the category information display area, the segment light emitting units C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 are illuminated, and the segment light emitting units A, C, D, E, F, G and DP light emitting unit of the left center seven-segment display 45z2 are illuminated. The numerical information of "measured base (in normal mode)" is displayed on the right center seven-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4, which constitute the numerical information display area. In this embodiment, the integer part of the value obtained by rounding the calculated value of "measured base (in normal mode)" to the third decimal place and multiplying it by 100 is displayed in the numerical information display area. In the example shown in FIG. 36, the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.35", which means that the value of the "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded off to the nearest hundredths is "0.35". Also, if the value of the "measured base (in normal mode)" rounded off to the nearest hundredths is "1.00" or greater, multiplying it by 100 will result in a value of 100 or greater, so in this case the information display unit 45z displays information such as "b6.99."

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the information display unit 45z displays the game history information, even if the number to be displayed in the numerical information display area is a single digit value, the right center seven-segment display 45z3 displays a "0" to display the number in two digits. For example, if the value of the "Base during measurement (in normal mode)" rounded off to the third decimal place is "0.07", multiplying this by 100 gives a value of 7, so in this case the information display unit 45z displays information such as "bL.07".

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game history information is displayed, "bL." and "b6." are displayed alternately in the category information display area of the information display unit 45z, and no category information other than these two is displayed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the game history information is displayed, the following light-emitting parts of the left-end 7-segment display 45z1 and the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 that constitute the category information display area are not used (do not emit light).
[Light-emitting portion of type information display area not used when displaying game history information]
Segment light emitting sections A, B and DP light emitting section of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 Segment light emitting section B of the center left 7-segment display 45z2

In other words, when displaying the game history information, only the following light-emitting portions of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left center 7-segment display 45z2 that constitute the category information display area are used (illuminated).
[Light-emitting portion of type information display area used when displaying game history information]
Segment light emitting sections C, D, E, F, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1
- Segment light-emitting sections A, C, D, E, F, G and DP light-emitting section of left center 7-segment display 45z2.For reference, Figure 36 shows the light-emitting sections of the type information display area used when displaying game history information in a cross-hatched manner.

Next, the display mode of the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode in which the lottery settings described above are changed will be described. In this mode, during the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays setting information, which is information indicating the current lottery settings or information indicating the lottery settings after the change. A specific description will be given below.

Figures 37 and 38 are explanatory diagrams showing how setting information is displayed in the information display section 45z during the setting change mode. These figures show how "1" to "6" are displayed as setting information (numerical information) indicating the lottery setting in the numerical information display area of the information display section 45z.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the current lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator presses the setting change button, the information display unit 45z displays numerical information indicating the changed lottery setting in the numerical information display area. Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the setting change mode ends, and the information display unit 45z again displays the game history information in the numerical information display area.

In this embodiment, during the setting change mode, "-- (two hyphens)" is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, and any of the setting information "1" to "6" is displayed in the numerical information display area. The display pattern "-- (two hyphens)" displayed in the type information display area during the setting change mode is not displayed when information related to the type of game history information is displayed.

Specifically, during the setting change mode, the segment light emitting section G of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1 constituting the type information display area of the information display section 45z emits light, and the segment light emitting section G of the center left seven-segment display 45z2 emits light. That is, during the setting change mode in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, only the light emitting section used when displaying the game history information is used. In other words, the light emitting section not used when displaying the game history information is not used during the setting change mode either.

In addition, in this embodiment, of the right center 7-segment display 45z3 and the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 that constitute the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the right center 7-segment display 45z3 is not used, and only the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 is used to display numerical information indicating the lottery setting. In other words, the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z is capable of displaying two-digit numerical information, but during the setting change mode, the right center 7-segment display 45z3 for the first digit is turned off instead of displaying "0", and only the rightmost 7-segment display 45z4 for the second digit displays numerical information of any one of "1" to "6" indicating the lottery setting.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the category information display area is clearly different when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information of the lottery setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the light-emitting parts in the type information display area that are not used when displaying game history information (segment light-emitting parts A, B and the DP light-emitting part of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1, and segment light-emitting part B of the left-center seven-segment display 45z2) are not used even during the setting change mode, so that the type information display area has light-emitting parts that are not used (hereinafter, unused light-emitting parts). Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in an unused light-emitting part of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected if a malfunction occurs in a light-emitting part of the type information display area.

In addition, for example, since the light-emitting element (LED) that is the unused light-emitting portion does not need to emit light, the components required to make the light-emitting element emit light can be omitted. Therefore, the cost of the information display unit 45z can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value differs when the numerical information display area displays numerical information related to game history information and when the numerical information display area displays numerical information related to lottery settings. Therefore, even if a malfunction occurs in the display of the type information display area, the administrator can clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or setting information. In other words, when a two-digit number is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z, the administrator can determine that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information, and when a one-digit number is displayed in the numerical information display area, the administrator can determine that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is setting information.

<Aspect 68>
In the above-mentioned aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to display a lit "- - (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode. However, instead of this configuration, the information display unit 45z may be configured to display a flashing "- - (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode.

With this configuration, the display mode of the category information display area becomes even more clearly different between when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to make the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 more clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information of the lottery setting.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode in which the numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, "-- (two hyphens)" flashes in the type information display area, alerting the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 that this is an important state in which the lottery setting should be changed with caution.

<Aspect 69>
In the above-mentioned aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light up and display "-- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, it may be configured so that nothing is displayed in the type information display area during the setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

Figures 39 and 40 are explanatory diagrams showing the state in which setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode. These figures 39 and 40 show that "1" to "6" are displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z as numerical information indicating the lottery setting. Also, as shown in Figure 39, in this embodiment, during the setting change mode, all of the segment light emitting units and DP light emitting units of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 and the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 that constitute the type information display area of the information display unit 45z are turned off. In other words, as described above, during the setting change mode, nothing is displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the category information display area is clearly different between when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information of the lottery setting.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting parts (segment light-emitting parts A to G, etc.) constituting the category information display area do not emit light, the display mode of the category information display area will be different when displaying game history information and when displaying lottery setting information, as long as there is no serious malfunction in which all of the light-emitting parts do not emit light. Therefore, according to this aspect, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting parts (LEDs) constituting the category information display area do not emit light, as long as there is no serious malfunction in which all of the light-emitting parts do not emit light, the administrator can distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information or lottery setting information. In other words, the administrator can determine that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is game history information when at least some of the light-emitting parts in the category information display area are emitting light, and can determine that the numerical value displayed in the numerical information display area is lottery setting information only when all of the light-emitting parts constituting the category information display area are turned off.

<Aspect 70>
In the above-mentioned aspect 67, the information display unit 45z is configured to light up and display "-- (two hyphens)" in the type information display area during the setting change mode, but instead of this configuration, it may be configured to switch between a plurality of display patterns in a short period of time (e.g., every 0.5 seconds) in the type information display area during the setting change mode. This will be specifically described below.

Figure 41 is an explanatory diagram showing the state in which setting information is displayed in the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode. In the example shown in Figure 41, "1" is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z as numerical information indicating the lottery setting. In this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10, during the setting change mode, the type information display area of the information display unit 45z alternates between the following two types of display patterns, which are switched every 0.5 seconds.

Display pattern A of type information display area:
Display pattern in which the segment light emitting sections C, D, E, and G of the leftmost 7-segment display unit 45z1 are lit (illuminated), and all light emitting sections of the left center 7-segment display unit 45z2 are turned off. Display pattern B of the type information display area:
A display pattern in which all light-emitting parts of the leftmost 7-segment display 45z1 are turned off and the segment light-emitting parts C, D, E, and G of the left-center 7-segment display 45z2 are turned on (illuminated).

The above-mentioned display pattern A and display pattern B are display patterns that are not displayed in the type information display area when displaying game history information. Furthermore, in display pattern A and display pattern B, only the light-emitting parts that are used when displaying game history information are used. In other words, in display pattern A and display pattern B, the light-emitting parts that are not used when displaying game history information are not used.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the category information display area is clearly different between when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z and when the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible for the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z or the numerical information of the lottery setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the numerical information display area for the numerical information of the game history information and the numerical information of the lottery setting.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, during the setting change mode in which numerical information regarding the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, the display pattern in the type information display area changes dynamically, so that the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can be alerted that this is an important state in which the lottery setting should be changed with caution.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the light-emitting parts in the type information display area that are not used when displaying game history information (segment light-emitting parts A, B and the DP light-emitting part of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1, and segment light-emitting part B of the left-center seven-segment display 45z2) are not used even during the setting change mode, so that the type information display area has unused light-emitting parts (hereinafter, unused light-emitting parts). Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in an unused light-emitting part of the type information display area, the display mode in the type information display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected if a malfunction occurs in a light-emitting part of the type information display area.

In addition, since the light-emitting elements (LEDs) that are unused light-emitting sections do not need to emit light, the components required to make the light-emitting elements emit light can be omitted. This allows the cost of the information display section 45z to be reduced.

In this embodiment, in the setting change mode, two types of display patterns are alternately displayed in the type information display area of the information display unit 45z, but three or more types of display patterns may be displayed in a repeated manner by switching between them in sequence.

<Aspect 71>
In each of the above aspects, if the "number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, for example, "bL." in the type information display area may be displayed in a flashing manner, and if it is 6000 or more, the display may be lit up. With such a configuration, a person who sees the flashing display of "bL." in the type information display area can recognize that the "number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, and that the value displayed in the numerical information display area is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated in a state in which a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated.

In addition, the "bL." in the category information display area may be displayed as a light, and if the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, the number in the numerical information display area may be displayed as a flashing number, and if it is 6000 or more, the number may be displayed as a light. With this configuration, a person who sees the flashing number in the numerical information display area can recognize that the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, and that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated.

Also, if the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, for example, "bL." in the category information display area and the number in the numerical information display area may be displayed flashing, and if it is 6000 or more, they may be displayed lit up. With this configuration, a person who sees the flashing display of "bL." in the category information display area and the number in the numerical information display area can recognize that the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage during normal mode (number of outs during normal mode)" being measured is less than 6000, and that the number displayed in the numerical information display area is the "base during measurement (during normal mode)" calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has not been accumulated.

In addition, various basic game history information can be used as the criterion for determining whether to flash or light the display. For example, the "number of game balls that passed through the discharge passage (total number of outs)" during measurement may be used.

<Aspect 72>
In each of the above aspects, during the setting change mode, when the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is displayed in the numerical information display area, all of the light-emitting parts constituting the right middle seven-segment display 45z3 are turned off and not used, and only the rightmost seven-segment display 45z4 is used to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in one digit, but instead of this configuration, the right middle seven-segment display 45z3 may also be used to display the numerical information indicating the lottery setting in two digits. For example, if the numerical information indicating the lottery setting is only one digit, the right middle seven-segment display 45z3 may be configured to display "0".

<Aspect 73>
In each of the above aspects, the number of lottery settings is not limited to six types, 1 to 6, and the number of lottery settings may be five or less or seven or more. The number of seven-segment displays constituting the information display unit 45z is not limited to four, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. The number of seven-segment displays constituting the type information display area of the information display unit 45z is not limited to two, and may be one, or may be three or more. The number of seven-segment displays constituting the numerical information display area of the information display unit 45z is not limited to two, and may be one, or may be three or more. The information display unit 45z may be composed of light-emitting elements other than LEDs, such as organic EL, or may be composed of display elements (display elements) that do not emit light. For example, the information display unit 45z may be composed of liquid crystal or display elements that employ an electrophoretic method used in electronic paper.

<Aspect 74>
42 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the aspect 74 of the first embodiment. In this aspect 74, the game history management chip 300 is not provided, and the main CPU 62x is configured to calculate the above-mentioned game history information. Below, the details of the various components of the main control device 60 are described, and the other components are given the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment and each aspect described above, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 42, the main ROM 63 includes a program storage means 63a and a program data storage means 63b. The main RAM 64 includes a data storage means 64a and a stack means 64b.

The main CPU 62x includes a register set 62x1, and performs various processes by combining and executing a number of different programs stored in the program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63. Each program is composed of a combination of a number of pre-reserved instructions, such as arithmetic instructions, transfer instructions, rotate instructions, shift instructions, jump instructions, call instructions, and return instructions, and the main CPU 62x executes the instructions sequentially in the order defined in the program.

The register set 62x1 includes an A register (accumulator register), an F register (flag register), a general-purpose register, and a stack pointer (SP). The A register and the general-purpose register are formed to have a size of 1 byte (8 bits), and the stack pointer (SP) is formed to have a size of 2 bytes (16 bits). The register set 62x1 may also include other registers, such as an index register, an interrupt register, a refresh register, and a program counter.

The A register stores the data (value) that is the subject of an arithmetic instruction and the result of the arithmetic operation.

The state of the F register changes automatically depending on the results of calculations performed by arithmetic instructions or the results of execution of specific instructions such as load instructions.

General-purpose registers are used in the same way as variables in general programs, specifically to temporarily store data (values), form counters, and specify memory addresses.

The stack pointer (SP) stores a stack pointer reference address for accessing the first stack area 64b1 (see FIG. 44 described later) and the second stack area 64b2 (see FIG. 44 described later) of the stack means 64b configured in the main RAM 64. Specifically, the stack pointer (SP) stores the address SP1 for reference to the first stack area when accessing the first stack area 64b1, and stores the address SP2 for reference to the second stack area when accessing the second stack area 64b2.

Figure 43 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main ROM 63. As described above, the main ROM 63 includes a program storage means 63a and a program data storage means 63b.

The program storage means 63a has a first program control area 63a1 that stores a first program 63p1, and a second program control area 63a2 that is an area different from the first program control area 63a1 and stores a second program 63p2.

The first program 63p1 includes a game progress program, a storage program, and a change program. The master CPU 62x executes the game progress program to perform game progress processing that controls the progress of the game, executes the storage program to perform storage processing, and executes the change program to perform change processing. Details of the game progress processing, storage processing, and change processing will be described later.

The second program 63p2 includes a game history information calculation and display program, a save program, and a return program. The master CPU 62x executes the game history information calculation and display program to perform the game history information calculation and display process that calculates and displays the above-mentioned game history information, executes the save program to perform the save process, and executes the return program to perform the return process. Details of the game history information calculation and display process, the save process, and the return process will be described later.

The program data storage means 63b has a first program data area 63b1 that stores various data required when executing the first program 63p1, and a second program data area 63b2 that is an area different from the first program data area 63b1 and stores various data required when executing the second program 63p2. The first program data area 63b1 stores data such as a win/lose table and an allocation table used in the jackpot lottery process described above, and the second program data area 63b2 stores various fixed value data used in the game history information calculation and display process, for example.

As described above, the first program control area 63a1 that stores the first program 63p1 and the first program data area 63b1 that stores data required to execute the first program 63p1, the second program control area 63a2 that stores the second program 63p2 and the second program data area 63b2 that stores data required to execute the second program 63p2 are each configured in different areas of the main ROM 63.

Figure 44 is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the main RAM 64. As described above, the main RAM 64 includes a data storage means 64a and a stack means 64b.

The data storage means 64a has a first data storage area 64a1 corresponding to a first program 63p1 capable of updating data, and a second data storage area 64a2, which is an area different from the first data storage area 64a1 and corresponds to a second program 63p2 capable of updating data. The first data storage area 64a1 stores, for example, various data (various flags such as a high probability mode flag) that are updated in the game progress process, and the second data storage area 64a2 stores, for example, various data that are updated in the game history information calculation and display process.

The stack means 64b has a first stack area 64b1 accessible by a first stack area reference address SP1 stored in a stack pointer (SP), and a second stack area 64b2 that is an area different from the first stack area 64b1 and accessible by a second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP). The first stack area 64b1 corresponds to the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area 64b2 corresponds to the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation and display program, save program, return program).

As described above, the first stack area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1, in which data can be updated and referenced by processing by the first program 63p1 (game progress program, storage program, change program), and the second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2, in which data can be updated and referenced by processing by the second program 63p2 (game history information calculation and display program, save program, return program), are configured in different areas of the main RAM 64. Note that the data in the second stack area 64b2 and the second data storage area 64a2 cannot be updated by processing by the first program 63p1, but can be referenced, and the data in the first stack area 64b1 and the first data storage area 64a1 cannot be updated by processing by the second program 63p2, but can be referenced.

Figure 45 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a memory map of the main control unit 60. As shown in Figure 45, in the memory space in this embodiment, an internal ROM area corresponding to the main ROM 63 and an internal RAM area corresponding to the main RAM 64 are allocated in this order. In this embodiment, in the internal ROM area, the first program control area 63a1, the first program data area 63b1, an unused area, the second program control area 63a2, and the second program data area 63b2 are allocated in this order, and in the internal RAM area, the first data memory area 64a1, the first stack area 64b1, the second data memory area 64a2, the second stack area 64b2, and the unused area are allocated in this order.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x in aspect 74 of the first embodiment. Note that in this aspect, the timer interrupt processing is executed at a cycle of 4 msec, as in the first embodiment.

The processes shown on the left side of FIG. 46 are performed by the main CPU 62x executing the first program 63p1 stored in the first program control area 63a1, and the processes shown on the right side of FIG. 46 are performed by the main CPU 62x executing the second program 63p2 stored in the second program control area 63a2.

In step S11101, the master CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1 to perform game progress processing, which is processing for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress processing, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27 described above is performed. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes a storage program included in the first program 63p1 to perform storage processing. In the storage processing, a push command (PUSH) is used to store the values of the A register and the F register, among the multiple registers, in the first stack area 64b1 that can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, a single push command (PUSH AF) using a special code AF that specifies the A register and the F register as the transfer target stores the values of the A register and the F register in the first stack area 64b1.

After executing step S11102, the primary CPU 62x executes the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2 to perform evacuation processes 1, 2, and 3 shown in steps S11103 to S11105. A detailed explanation is given below.

In the save process 1 shown in step S11103, the load command (LD (W21), SP) stores the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the area specified by the address W21 in the second data storage area 64a2. At this time, the load command changes the state of the TZ flag in the F register, which may change the value of the F flag. After performing the save process 1 in step S11103, proceed to step S11104.

In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the load command (LD SP, fixed value) stores the address SP2 for referencing the second stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer (SP). The address SP2 for referencing the second stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time save process 2 is performed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in save process 2 is the address value indicating the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. After performing save process 2 in step S11104, proceed to step S11105.

In the save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the area specified by address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by multiple load commands (LD (W22), register). Note that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load command using a special code that specifies the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register as the transfer target. After performing the process of step S11105, proceed to step S11106.

In step S11106, the master CPU 62x performs a gaming history information calculation and display process by executing a gaming history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. In the gaming history information calculation and display process, the gaming history information described above is calculated, and a process is performed to display the calculated gaming history information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, in the gaming history information calculation and display process, the process group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register change in the gaming history information calculation and display process.

After carrying out the game history information calculation and display process in step S11106, the master CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2 to carry out return processes 1 and 2 shown in steps S11107 and S11108. A detailed explanation is given below.

In the return process 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to the values stored in the area specified by the address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by multiple load commands (LD register, (W22)). Note that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by a single load command using a special code. In this return process 1, if the value of the F register has changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register. After performing the process of step S11107, proceed to step S11108.

In the return process 2 shown in step S11108, the load command (LD SP, (W21)) stores the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the area specified by the address W21 of the second data memory area 64a2 by the save process 1 (step S11103) in the stack pointer (SP), and the main CPU 62x ends the execution of the second program 63p2. After performing the process of step S11108, proceed to step S11109.

In step S11109, the master CPU 62x executes the change program included in the first program 63p1 to perform the change process. In the change process, the pop command (POP) changes the values of the A register and the F register, among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register whose values are set in the return process 1 (step S11107), to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102) by a single pop command (POP AF) using a special code. At this time, even if a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register in the return process 1 (step S11107), the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process is completed. After performing the process of step S11109, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, according to this embodiment, save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46) and restore process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 46) are performed, so that when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1, it is possible to avoid problems occurring due to the values of the registers used in the first program 63p1 having changed.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the state of the F register may change before the save process 3 is performed (for example, when a load command is executed in the save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46)). However, before the save process 1 is performed, the values of the A register and the F register are stored in the storage process (step S11102 in FIG. 46) by the storage program included in the first program 63p1, and after the processing by the second program 63p2 is completed, the values of the A register and the F register are changed to the values stored in the storage process in the change process (step S11109 in FIG. 46) by the change program included in the first program 63p1. Therefore, for example, even if the state of the F register changes in the save process 1, the state of the F register returns to the same state as immediately after the end of the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46) by the first program 63p1, so there is no risk of affecting the processing performed after returning from the processing by the second program 63p2. As a result, it is possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, by simply adding a game history information calculation and display program for performing the game history information calculation and display process (step S11106 in FIG. 46) to the second program 63p2, the game history information calculation and display process can be added without affecting the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 46) that controls the progress of the game. Therefore, the game history information calculation and display program can be easily created independent of the game progress program for performing the game progress process.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45, the memory space used by the processing by the first program 63p1 and the memory space used by the processing by the second program 63p2 are arranged independently of each other, so that it is possible to prevent the two memory spaces from physically interfering with each other and, for example, to prevent fraudulent actions performed on one process (memory space) from affecting the other process (memory space).

In addition, according to this aspect, in the save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 46), instead of storing all the values of each register in the second stack area 64b2 by a single push command (PUSH ALL), the values of each register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a load command, so that only the registers that were being used can be stored in the second data storage area 64a2. Therefore, the storage capacity required to store the values of each register in the save process 3 can be reduced. In addition, according to this aspect, instead of storing the values of each register in the second stack area 64b2, the values of each register are stored in the second data storage area 64a2, so that the storage capacity of the second stack area 64b2 in the main RAM 64 can be reduced and the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 can be expanded.

In addition, for example, if the amount of data to be stored in the stack area by a push command (PUSH) exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area of the main RAM 64, and a reset process is performed to erase all data stored in the stack area, if the save process 3 is configured to store the values of each register in the second stack area 64b2 by a push command (PUSH), there is a risk that the reset process will be performed. Furthermore, if the save process 3 is configured to store all the values of each register in the second stack area 64b2 by a single push command (PUSH ALL), the possibility of the reset process being performed will be even higher. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the save process 3 does not use a push command (PUSH ALL) and stores the values of each register in the second data storage area 64a2 by a load command (LD), so the risk of the stack area being reset can be avoided.

<Aspect 75>
In the configuration shown in the above aspect 74, the timer interrupt process described below may be executed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x in aspect 75 of the first embodiment. The same processes as those included in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 46 are given the same step numbers. The main differences from the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 46 are that the save processing 1 shown in step S11103 in Figure 46 is omitted, and the contents of the restore processing 2 shown in step S11108 in Figure 46 are different. A detailed explanation is given below.

In step S11101, the master CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1 to perform game progress processing, which is processing for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress processing, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27 described above is performed. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes a storage program included in the first program 63p1 to perform storage processing. In the storage processing, a push command (PUSH) is used to store the values of the A register and the F register, among the multiple registers, in the first stack area 64b1 that can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, a single push command (PUSH AF) using a special code AF that specifies the A register and the F register as the transfer target stores the values of the A register and the F register in the first stack area 64b1.

After executing step S11102, the primary CPU 62x executes the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2 to perform evacuation processes 2 and 3 shown in steps S11104 and S11105. That is, in this embodiment, the primary CPU 62x does not execute the evacuation process 1 of step S11103 described above. The details are explained below.

In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the load command (LD SP, fixed value) stores the address SP2 for referencing the second stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer (SP). The address SP2 for referencing the second stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time save process 2 is performed, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in save process 2 is the address value indicating the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. After performing save process 2 in step S11104, proceed to step S11105.

In the save process 3 shown in step S11105, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are stored in the area specified by address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by multiple load commands (LD (W22), register). Note that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by a single load command using a special code that specifies the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register as the transfer target. After performing the process of step S11105, proceed to step S11106.

In step S11106, the master CPU 62x performs a gaming history information calculation and display process by executing a gaming history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. In the gaming history information calculation and display process, the gaming history information described above is calculated, and a process is performed to display the calculated gaming history information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, in the gaming history information calculation and display process, the process group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register change in the gaming history information calculation and display process.

After carrying out the game history information calculation and display process of step S11106, the master CPU 62x executes the return program included in the second program 63p2 to carry out return process 1 and return process A shown in steps S11107 and S11108a. That is, in this embodiment, the master CPU 62x carries out return process A shown in step S11108a instead of return process 2 of step S11108 described above. A detailed explanation is given below.

In the return process 1 shown in step S11107, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register are set to the values stored in the area specified by the address W22 of the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by multiple load commands (LD register, (W22)). Note that the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by the save process 3 (step S11105) by a single load command using a special code. In this return process 1, if the value of the F register has changed in the save process 1 (step S11103), a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register. Alternatively, the values of the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register may be set to the values stored in the second data storage area 64a2 by multiple load commands without using a special code. After performing the process of step S11107, proceed to step S11108a.

In the return process A shown in step S11108a, the load command (LD SP, fixed value) stores the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value that has been stored in advance in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. This fixed value is described below.

In this embodiment, when all of the processes (steps S10601 to S10615) that make up the game progress process (step S11101) have been completed, there is no data stored in the first stack area 64b1, so the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Thereafter, when the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts execution of the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, immediately after the primary CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) becomes an address value that specifies a position that is moved a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

And because the amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by executing the storage process (step S11102) and starting execution of the second program 63p2 is the same every time (every timer interrupt process), the amount of movement of the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area is also the same every time. Therefore, the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) is the same address value every time.

The fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer each time immediately after the storage process (step S11102) ends and execution of the second program 63p2 starts (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). As a result, even if the above-mentioned save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) is omitted, the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment can restore the value of the stack pointer (SP) to the value immediately after the storage process (step S11102) ends and execution of the second program 63p2 starts (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47).

The main CPU 62x ends the processing of step S11108a described above, ends the execution of the second program 63p2, starts the execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the master CPU 62x executes the change program included in the first program to carry out the change process. In the change process, the pop command (POP) changes the values of the A register and the F register, among the A register, the F register, and the general-purpose register, whose values are set by the return process 1 (step S11107), to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, a single pop command (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A register and the F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, even if the value of the F register has changed after the storage process (step S11102) is carried out and a value different from that immediately after the game progress process is completed is stored in the F register in the return process 1 (step S11107), the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process is completed. After carrying out the process of step S11109, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, this embodiment can achieve the following effects in addition to those described in embodiment 74 above.

In this embodiment, when all of the processes (steps S10601 to S10615) constituting the game progress process (step S11101) are completed, the first stack area 64b1 is configured to have no data stored therein, so the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1. Therefore, the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at the time immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and starts executing the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) becomes the same address value every time the timer interrupt process is performed. Therefore, since a fixed value can be stored in the stack pointer (SP) by the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment, the evacuation process 1 shown in embodiment 74 can be omitted. As a result, the processing of the main CPU 62x can be simplified, and the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required to save the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) can be reduced.

<Aspect 76>
Instead of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 47, the timer interrupt processing described below may be performed.

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 62x in aspect 76 of the first embodiment. The same processes as those included in the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 47 are given the same step numbers. The main differences from the timer interrupt processing shown in Figure 47 are that the save processing 3 shown in step S11105 of Figure 47 is omitted, the return processing 1 shown in step S11107 of Figure 47 is omitted, and a process of setting the values of all registers to 0 is added after the processing shown in steps S11102 and S11108a of Figure 48. A detailed explanation is given below.

In step S11101, the master CPU 62x executes the game progress program included in the first program 63p1 to perform game progress processing, which is processing for progressing the game. Specifically, in the game progress processing, the process group shown in steps S10601 to S10615 in FIG. 27 described above is performed. After performing the process of step S11101, the process proceeds to step S11102.

In step S11102, the main CPU 62x executes a storage program included in the first program 63p1 to perform storage processing. In the storage processing, a push command (PUSH) is used to store the values of the A register and the F register, among the multiple registers, in the first stack area 64b1 that can be accessed by the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, a single push command (PUSH AF) using a special code AF that specifies the A register and the F register as the transfer target stores the values of the A register and the F register in the first stack area 64b1. After performing the processing of step S11102, the process proceeds to step S11102-2.

In step S11102-2, the main CPU 62x executes the first clear program included in the first program 63p1 to perform the first clear process. In the first clear process, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose registers are set to 0 by multiple load commands (LD register, 0). Note that a configuration in which the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose registers are set to 0 by a single load command using a special code may also be used.

After executing step S11102-2, the primary CPU 62x executes the evacuation program included in the second program 63p2 to perform evacuation process 2 shown in step S11104. That is, in this embodiment, the primary CPU 62x does not execute the above-mentioned evacuation process 1 in step S11103 and evacuation process 3 in step S11105. A detailed explanation is given below.

In the save process 2 shown in step S11104, the load command (LD SP, fixed value) stores the second stack area reference address SP2, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer (SP). The second stack area reference address SP2 stored in the stack pointer (SP) at this time is, for example, a fixed value stored in advance in the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. In this embodiment, since no data is stored in the second stack area 64b2 at the time of performing the save process 2, the fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the save process 2 is the address value indicating the bottom of the second stack area 64b2. After performing the save process 2 in step S11104, the process proceeds to step S11106. That is, in this embodiment, the main CPU 62x does not perform the save process 3 in step S11105 described above.

In step S11106, the master CPU 62x performs a gaming history information calculation and display process by executing a gaming history information calculation and display program included in the second program 63p2. In the gaming history information calculation and display process, the gaming history information described above is calculated, and a process is performed to display the calculated gaming history information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, in the gaming history information calculation and display process, the process group shown in steps S10802 to S10812 in FIG. 29 described above is performed. At this time, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose register change in the gaming history information calculation and display process.

After performing the game history information calculation and display process of step S11106, the master CPU 62x executes the second clear program included in the second program 63p2 to perform the second clear process shown in step S11107a. In other words, in this embodiment, the master CPU 62x does not perform the return process 1 of step S11107 described above.

In the second clear process shown in step S11107a, the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose registers are set to 0 by multiple load commands (LD register, 0). Note that a configuration may also be adopted in which the values of the A register, F register, and general-purpose registers are set to 0 by a single load command using a special code.

After performing the second clear process in step S11107a, the primary CPU 62x performs the recovery process A shown in step S11108a by executing the recovery program included in the second program 63p2.

In the return process A shown in step S11108a, the load command (LD SP, fixed value) stores the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer (SP). At this time, the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) is a fixed value that has been stored in advance in, for example, the second program data area 63b2 of the main ROM 63. This fixed value is described below.

In this embodiment, when all of the processes (steps S10601 to S10615) that make up the game progress process (step S11101) have been completed, there is no data stored in the first stack area 64b1, so the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

Then, when the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts execution of the second program 63p2, a predetermined amount of data is stored in the first stack area 64b1. As a result, immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47), the first stack area reference address SP1 stored in the stack pointer (SP) is an address value that specifies a position moved a predetermined amount from the bottom of the first stack area 64b1.

The amount of data stored in the first stack area 64b1 by executing the storage process (step S11102), the first clear process (step S11102-2), and starting execution of the second program 63p2 is the same each time (for each timer interrupt process), so the amount of movement of the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area is also the same each time. Therefore, the address SP1 for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer (SP) immediately after the main CPU 62x executes the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) and starts execution of the second program 63p2 (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47) is the same address value each time.

The fixed value stored in the stack pointer (SP) in the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment is set to the same address value as the address value stored in the stack pointer each time at the point immediately after the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) are completed and the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47). As a result, even if the above-mentioned save process 1 (step S11103 in FIG. 46) is omitted, the return process A (step S11108a) of this embodiment can restore the value of the stack pointer (SP) to the value immediately after the storage process (step S11102) and the first clear process (step S11102-2) are completed and the execution of the second program 63p2 is started (timing TX1 shown in FIG. 47).

The main CPU 62x ends the processing of step S11108a described above, ends the execution of the second program 63p2, starts the execution of the first program 63p1, and proceeds to step S11109.

In step S11109, the master CPU 62x executes the change program included in the first program to perform the change process. In the change process, a pop command (POP) changes the values of the A register and the F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, a single pop command (POP AF) using a special code changes the values of the A register and the F register to the values stored in the first stack area 64b1 by the storage process (step S11102). At this time, even if the value of the F register has changed after the storage process (step S11102) has been performed, the value of the F register can be changed to the same value as immediately after the game progress process has ended. After the process of step S11109 is performed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, this embodiment can achieve the following effects in addition to the effects described in the above-mentioned embodiments 74 and 75.

According to this aspect, the first clear process (step S11102-2 in FIG. 48) is performed by the first program 63p1, and the second clear process (step S11107a in FIG. 48) is performed by the second program 63p2. Therefore, without performing the above-mentioned save process 3 (step S11105 in FIG. 47) and restore process 1 (step S11107 in FIG. 47), the register value immediately before the start of execution of the second program 63p2 and the register value immediately after the end of execution of the second program 63p2 can be made to match. Therefore, when returning from the second program 63p2 to the first program 63p1, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a problem caused by the value of the register used in the first program 63p1 having changed. And, since the above-mentioned save process 3 and restore process 1 can be omitted, the storage capacity of the second data storage area 64a2 required for the save process 3 and restore process 1 can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, in one timer interrupt process, the first clear process is performed after all of the various processes included in the game progress process (step S11101 in FIG. 48) have been completed, and the game progress process is not performed after the first clear process, so it is possible to avoid a malfunction occurring in the game progress process by setting the register value to 0 by the first clear process.

<Aspect 77>
In the storage process of step S11102 in the above aspects 74, 75, and 76, the values of the specific registers (A register, F register) may be stored in the first data storage area 64a1 by a load command. In this case, in the change process of step S11109, the values of the specific registers (A register, F register) may be changed to the values stored in the first data storage area 64a1 in the storage process by a load command. Also, the specific register that is the target of the storage process of step S11102 and the change process of step S11109 may be only the F register.

In addition, in the above aspect 74, the game progress processing by the first program 63p1 (step S11101 in FIG. 46) may be interrupted midway, and the process from the storage process in step S11102 to the change process in step S11109 may be interrupted and then the interrupted game progress processing may be resumed.

In addition, in the above aspect 76, the first clear process (step S11102-2) may be performed after the game progress process (step S11101) and before the storage process (step S11102) is performed. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as the above aspect 76 can be achieved.

<Aspect 78>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, various aspects can be adopted as a method of starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode and an operating method in the setting change mode. Specific explanations will be given below.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing settings and the above-mentioned RAM clear button, but is not provided with the above-mentioned setting change button. When an administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 changes the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, first, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF. Then, the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are opened, and a setting change key is inserted into the setting change keyhole. The inserted key is then turned to the setting change side (for example, clockwise). In this state, if the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM clear button is pressed, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in setting change mode.

That is, when the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is turned on, it starts up in the setting change mode if all of the following conditions 1 to 3 are satisfied.
Condition 1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition 2: The keyhole for changing the settings is located on the setting change side. Condition 3: The RAM clear button is pressed. Note that when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if condition 3 is met but either condition 1 or 2 is not met, the pachinko machine 10 will not start up in the setting change mode, and will execute a process to initialize the main RAM 64.

When the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, information (setting information) indicating the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display section 45z described above. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1," then "1" is displayed on the information display section 45z. Then, each time the administrator presses the RAM clear button, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z switches in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"...

When the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is set to the administrator's desired value, the administrator causes a game ball to enter a specified ball entrance (e.g., the exit entrance 43) and causes a specified ball entrance detection sensor (e.g., the discharge passage detection sensor 44h) to detect the game ball, and the change to the lottery setting corresponding to the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is confirmed. Specifically, for example, when the setting information "6" is displayed on the information display unit 45z and a game ball is detected by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h, the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is changed to "lottery setting 6". Then, when the administrator turns the setting change key from the setting change side to the original position, the pachinko machine 10 ends the setting change mode.

In this way, according to this embodiment, the setting change button can be omitted, thereby reducing the manufacturing costs of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when changing the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 must be in the open state. Therefore, even if a person without the authority to change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter also referred to as an unauthorized person) attempts to illegally change the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, the lottery settings cannot be changed unless the person has the means to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14. Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Even if an unauthorized person were to open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14, when the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are opened, a warning sound or warning voice (e.g., "The door is open") is output from the speaker 46 of the pachinko machine 10, so the administrator can easily notice that an unauthorized person is attempting to change the lottery settings. Therefore, unauthorized persons can be prevented from changing the lottery settings.

In this embodiment, one of the conditions for the pachinko machine 10 to start in the setting change mode is that both the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open. However, one of the conditions for the pachinko machine 10 to start in the setting change mode may also be that either the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14 is open.

In addition, in this embodiment, the detection of a game ball by the discharge passage detection sensor 44h is used as a condition for confirming the change in the lottery settings, but this is not limited to the configuration, and the detection of a game ball by another ball entry detection sensor may be used as a condition for confirming the change in the lottery settings. For example, the detection of a game ball by the first winning opening detection sensor 44d may be used as a condition for confirming the change in the lottery settings. Note that the first winning opening detection sensor 44d is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first winning opening 32a, which is the general winning opening.

In addition, in this embodiment, each time the administrator presses the RAM clear button in the setting change mode, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is switched in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"... However, this is not limited to the above configuration. For example, a setting change button may be provided in addition to the RAM clear button, and each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z may be switched in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"...

In addition, in this embodiment, a keyhole for changing the settings is provided, but a keyhole for changing the settings may not be provided. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to start up in the setting change mode when the above conditions 1 and 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on. Also, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to execute a selection mode in which the administrator selects whether to start up in the setting change mode or to execute a RAM clear process to initialize the main RAM 64 when the above conditions 1 and 3 are satisfied when the power is turned on. In the selection mode, the administrator may select whether to start up in the setting change mode or to execute a RAM clear process by pressing the RAM clear button, and the selection may be confirmed by pressing the RAM clear button for a predetermined time. In addition, in the selection mode, the administrator may select to start up in the setting change mode only when a game ball is entered into a predetermined ball entry port (e.g., the outlet port 43) and detected by a predetermined ball entry detection sensor (e.g., the discharge passage detection sensor 44h). Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent persons other than the administrator from illegally changing the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 79>
Of the above aspects, in a configuration in which the setting change mode can be executed, a configuration may be adopted in which, during the setting change mode, a notification is given that the setting change mode is in progress. Specific explanations will be given below.

In this embodiment, when the main control device 60 starts the setting change mode, it sends a setting change mode start command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started.

When the voice-emission control device 90 receives a setting change mode start command, it outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "setting change mode in progress." In addition, when the voice-emission control device 90 receives a setting change mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice-emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode in progress." The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode in progress." In addition, when the voice-emission control device 90 receives a setting change mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting change mode, it sends a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress as described above.

In this manner, according to this embodiment, the setting change mode is notified by the speaker 46, the pattern display device 41, and various lamps 47, so that the manager of the pachinko machine 10 can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting change mode. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person switches the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode unauthorizedly, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the user that the setting change mode is in the setting change mode by the speaker 46 and the pattern display device 41, so that surrounding players and managers can notice that the pachinko machine 10 has been placed in the setting change mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from changing the lottery settings.

Furthermore, when the main control device 60 starts the setting change mode, it transmits information indicating that the setting change mode has started to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting change mode on the management screen. Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting change mode, it transmits information indicating that the setting change mode has ended to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal.

With this configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not near the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting change mode through the management screen of the hall computer. Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in setting change mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in setting change mode through the management screen of the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from changing the lottery settings.

<Aspect 80>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the information stored in the main RAM 64 may be initialized after the setting change mode ends, except for information regarding the game state. A specific description will be given below.

In this embodiment, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized except for information regarding the game status, and when the setting change mode ends without changing the lottery setting in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is not initialized and the game progresses to a game progress mode in which the game can progress. Note that in this embodiment, the "information regarding the game status" that is not initialized is the state of the high probability mode flag, the state of the high frequency support mode flag, and the state of the flag indicating whether or not the game is in the open/close execution mode (during a jackpot).

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode, the main RAM 64 is initialized, so that it is possible to prevent an inconsistency from occurring between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery setting is changed, which would cause a malfunction in the progress of the game.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, even if the lottery setting is changed in the setting change mode and the main RAM 64 is initialized, the information stored in the main RAM 64 that is related to the game state is not erased, so that it is possible to change the lottery setting in the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a game state that is advantageous to the player, for example.

In this embodiment, the main RAM 64 is initialized after the setting change mode ends, but if an operation to start the setting change mode is received when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, the main RAM 64 may be initialized, excluding information regarding the game status, before starting the setting change mode. Even with this configuration, it is possible to prevent inconsistencies from occurring between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery setting was changed, which would cause problems in the progress of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is initialized, information related to the game status is not erased, but it may be configured to initialize all information stored in the main RAM 64 (including information related to the game status).

In addition, the "information regarding the game state" that is not initialized is not limited to the above, and may include, for example, pending information.

<Aspect 81>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, when an inconsistency occurs in the information stored in the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like and the main RAM 64 is initialized, the configuration may be such that the game transitions to the setting change mode before returning to the game progress mode in which the game can be progressed. This will be specifically described below.

In this embodiment, the main control device 60 executes a monitoring process in which it monitors whether or not an abnormality such as inconsistency has occurred in the information stored in the main RAM 64 during the timer interrupt process. Specifically, for example, the monitoring process monitors whether or not a value in a range that should not be stored has been stored in each area of the main RAM 64. If the monitoring process determines that an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 64, it stops the process related to the progress of the game and forcibly initializes the main RAM 64. After the initialization of the main RAM 64 is completed, the main control device 60 transitions to the setting change mode described above before transitioning to a game progress mode in which the game can progress. Note that examples of causes of abnormalities such as inconsistency in the information stored in the main RAM 64 include noise from electromagnetic waves, and a player with dishonest intentions bringing a magnet or the like close to the pachinko machine 10.

As in the above-mentioned aspect 79, if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to notify the user that it is in the setting change mode, the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can notice that the pachinko machine 10 has transitioned to the setting change mode. The administrator can then determine the lottery settings for the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the pachinko machine 10 will then transition to the game progress mode.

The reason for this configuration will be explained. In the event that the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the setting information for the lottery setting may have been rewritten to setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. If the setting information for the lottery setting is not initialized (changed) even when the main RAM 64 is initialized, there is a risk that the setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator will still be maintained. Therefore, as in this embodiment, if the setting change mode is configured to switch to a game progress mode in which the game can be progressed when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the administrator can correct the setting information for the lottery setting to the setting information originally intended before the pachinko machine 10 returns to the game progress mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the above-mentioned information regarding the game status may be configured not to be initialized. With such a configuration, even if the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, the information regarding the game status is not initialized (deleted), so the player can resume playing while maintaining the game status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the forcible initialization of the main RAM 64 due to noise or the like.

In this embodiment, the setting change mode is entered after the main RAM 64 is initialized. However, instead of entering the setting change mode after the main RAM 64 is initialized, the lottery setting may be set to an initial value (e.g., "lottery setting 1") and the game may be entered into a game progress mode in which game play can proceed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the information regarding the game status is not erased when the main RAM 64 is initialized, but the information regarding the game status may also be erased when the main RAM 64 is initialized.

<Aspect 82>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, a configuration may be adopted in which it is notified whether the lottery setting has been changed or not in the setting change mode. Specific explanations will be given below.

In this embodiment, when the lottery settings are changed in the setting change mode, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 notifies the user that the lottery settings have been changed by outputting a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the lottery settings have been changed and displaying text indicating that the lottery settings have been changed on the pattern display device 41.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions to the setting change mode, it saves the setting information of the current lottery setting in a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, it compares the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode with the saved setting information of the lottery setting before the change, and if these setting information differ, it sends a setting change command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed.

When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a setting change command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound that indicates that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The lottery setting has been changed." In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a setting change command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information that indicates that the lottery setting has been changed. Specifically, for example, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The lottery setting has been changed," and the display control device 100, having received the command, causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The lottery setting has been changed." In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives a setting change command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

On the other hand, when the setting change mode is ended with the lottery settings remaining unchanged, the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player that the lottery settings have been maintained unchanged by outputting a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the lottery settings have been maintained unchanged and displaying text indicating that the lottery settings have been maintained unchanged on the pattern display device 41.

Specifically, for example, when the main control device 60 transitions to the setting change mode, it saves the setting information of the current lottery setting in a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, it compares the setting information of the lottery setting newly determined in the setting change mode with the saved setting information of the lottery setting before the change, and if these setting information match, it transmits a setting maintenance command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed.

When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound that suggests that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The lottery setting has not been changed." In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information that suggests that the lottery setting has been maintained without being changed. Specifically, for example, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The lottery setting has not been changed," and the display control device 100 that receives the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The lottery setting has not been changed." In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting maintenance command, it controls the various lamps 47 to light up instead of flashing.

In this way, according to this embodiment, when the lottery settings are changed in the setting change mode, a notification is issued that the lottery settings have been changed, so that the administrator or player can check whether the lottery settings have been changed.

In particular, in the above-mentioned aspect 81, in the setting change mode after the main RAM 64 is forcibly initialized due to noise or the like, it is expected that the player who is playing on the pachinko machine 10 will become suspicious as to whether the lottery setting has been changed by the administrator. However, according to this aspect, when the lottery setting has been changed, the fact that the lottery setting has been changed is notified, so the player can check whether the lottery setting has been changed. More specifically, the player can be made to understand only whether the lottery setting has been changed in the setting change mode, without being made to understand what setting information the current lottery setting is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the player must resume playing in a state of anxiety without knowing whether the lottery setting has been changed by the administrator.

In this embodiment, if the lottery setting has not been changed, a notification is given that the lottery setting has been maintained without change. However, if the lottery setting has not been changed, no notification may be given, or a different notification may be given than when the lottery setting has been changed, such as "setting change mode will be terminated." Even with this configuration, if there is no notification such as "lottery setting has been changed," the player can determine that the lottery setting has not been changed, and this prevents the player from having to resume play with anxiety.

<Aspect 83>
In the above aspect 82, the main control device 60 may be configured to include setting information of the changed lottery setting in a setting change command, which is a command indicating that the lottery setting has been changed. The sound and light emission control device 90 may be configured to sequentially store the setting information of the changed lottery setting in a RAM as a storage means provided in the main control device 60 each time it receives a setting change command including the setting information of the changed lottery setting. The sound and light emission control device 90 may be configured to display the history of changes to the lottery setting on the pattern display device 41 when a predetermined operation is received from the administrator of the pachinko machine 10.

With this configuration, it is possible to store the history of changes to the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 without using the limited storage capacity of the main RAM 64 of the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10, and the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 can easily check how the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 have been operated by looking at the history of changes to the lottery settings displayed on the pattern display device 41.

<Aspect 84>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode, a configuration capable of executing a setting confirmation mode in which the lottery setting cannot be changed but the administrator or the like can confirm the current lottery setting may be also used. A specific description will be given below.

When a specific operation is performed under specific conditions, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment stops the game so that game progress is not possible, and then transitions to the setting confirmation mode.

In this embodiment, "under specific conditions" refers to a state in which all of the following conditions are met.
Condition 1: The special pattern is not changing in the special pattern unit 37.Condition 2: The normal pattern is not changing in the normal pattern unit 38.Condition 3: The variable winning device 36 as a special electric device is not operating.Condition 4: The electric device 34a as a normal electric device is not operating.Condition 5: A predetermined time (e.g., 20 seconds) has passed since the last time the game ball was fired.In other words, under certain conditions, the outcome of the game is not affected even if the progress of the game is stopped (interrupted).

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific operation is the operation of pressing the RAM clear button located on the back of the pachinko machine 10.

In other words, when the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment detects that the RAM clear button has been pressed during the game progress mode in which game play can proceed, it determines whether or not the specific conditions described above are met, and if it determines that the specific conditions are met, it transitions to the setting confirmation mode. Then, when it detects that the RAM clear button has been released again, it ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which game play can proceed.

During the setting confirmation mode, the main control device 60 executes random number update processing to update the jackpot random number counter and power supply monitoring processing, but does not execute other processing necessary for the progress of the game (such as various ball entry processing in timer interrupt processing), and puts the game in a stopped state (a state in which the game cannot progress), and then displays setting information indicating the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. For example, if the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 is "lottery setting 1," it displays "1" on the information display unit 45z.

Furthermore, in a pachinko machine 10 equipped with a device that continues a certain operation (a predetermined operation) regardless of the result of the jackpot lottery or the result of the electric device release lottery during the game progress mode (hereinafter also referred to as a constantly operating device), the main control device 60 continues the operation of the constantly operating device even when the game progress mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, after switching to the setting confirmation mode, the main control device 60 is configured to continue executing the control process of the constantly operating device in addition to the random number update process and power supply monitoring process. Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which game progress is possible, it resumes the execution of other processes necessary for game progress that were avoided.

With this configuration, the operation of the constantly operating device continues at a constant rate without stopping or changing even when the game progress mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode and when the setting confirmation mode is returned to the game progress mode. This prevents, for example, a player from obtaining an unfair advantage by firing a game ball at a time when the operation of the constantly operating device stops or changes.

In this embodiment, the operation of the constantly operating role continues even during the setting confirmation mode, but the operation of the constantly operating role may be temporarily stopped when the game progress mode is switched to the setting confirmation mode, and the operation of the constantly operating role that was stopped may be resumed when the game progress mode is returned to from the setting confirmation mode. This configuration simplifies the processing compared to a configuration in which the operation of the constantly operating role continues. It is also possible to ensure that the operation of the constantly operating role is continuously connected during the game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Furthermore, with this configuration, when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, the operation of the constantly operating device is resumed from the same state as when the game progress mode was switched to the setting confirmation mode. This avoids the situation where the operation of the constantly operating device is resumed from a state different from the state when the game progress mode was switched to the setting confirmation mode (for example, a state that is disadvantageous or advantageous to the player) when returning from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode, and the player has to resume play from a state different from the state when the game was stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the specific operation for transitioning to the setting confirmation mode is the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, but various operations can be used as the specific operation. For example, the specific operation may be the operation of inserting a setting change key into a setting change keyhole and turning it to the setting change side. With this configuration, a setting change key is required to check the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10, so it is possible to prevent a person without a setting change key from being able to check the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 85>
In the above-mentioned aspect 84, the operation of the constantly operating role is continued even during the setting confirmation mode, but when the setting confirmation mode is entered, the constantly operating role may be moved to a predetermined initial state (or moved to an initial position) and then stopped. This will be specifically described below.

When the main control device 60 of the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment transitions from the game progress mode to the setting confirmation mode, it continues the control process of the constantly operating part until the constantly operating part transitions to its initial state (or moves to its initial position). Then, when the main control device 60 detects that the constantly operating part has transitioned to its initial state (or moved to its initial position), it stops the execution of the control process of the constantly operating part and stops the operation of the constantly operating part. After that, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode and returns to the game progress mode in which game progress is possible, it resumes the control process of the constantly operating part and the execution of other processes necessary for game progress that were avoided.

When the main control device 60 returns from the setting confirmation mode to the game progress mode before detecting that the constantly operating role has transitioned to the initial state (or moved to the initial position), the control process of the constantly operating role continues as is. In other words, in this embodiment, the constantly operating role is configured not to stop operating in a state other than the initial state (or in a position other than the initial position).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent malfunctions, for example, in constantly operating devices that may malfunction if their operation is stopped in a state other than the initial state (or in a position other than the initial position).

<Aspect 86>
Of the above aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting check mode, a configuration may be adopted in which, during the setting check mode, a notification is given that the setting check mode is in progress. Specific examples will be described below.

In this embodiment, when the main control device 60 starts the setting check mode, it sends a setting check mode start command to the audio and light emission control device 90, which is a command indicating that the setting check mode has started.

When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it outputs from the speaker 46 a sound indicating that the setting check mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "setting check mode in progress." In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting check mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting check mode in progress." The display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting check mode in progress." In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting confirmation mode, it sends a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the above-mentioned setting confirmation mode is in progress.

In this manner, according to this embodiment, the speaker 46, the pattern display device 41, and the various lamps 47 notify the user that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode, so that the manager of the pachinko machine 10 can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode. Even if an unauthorized person fraudulently switches the pachinko machine 10 to the setting confirmation mode, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the user that the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by the speaker 46, the pattern display device 41, and the various lamps 47, so that surrounding players and managers can notice that the pachinko machine 10 has been placed in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized people from checking the lottery settings.

Furthermore, when the main control device 60 starts the setting check mode, it transmits information indicating that the setting check mode has started to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting check mode on the management screen. Then, when the main control device 60 ends the setting check mode, it transmits information indicating that the setting check mode has ended to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal.

With this configuration, even if the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 is not near the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to recognize the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode through the management screen of the hall computer. Therefore, for example, even if the pachinko machine 10 is in the setting confirmation mode by an unauthorized person, the administrator can recognize the presence of the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode through the management screen of the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized persons from checking the lottery settings.

<Aspect 87>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in the configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the configuration may be such that the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode cannot be executed unless the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned OFF. In other words, the configuration may be such that the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when a predetermined operation is performed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned OFF and then turned ON. The specific description will be given below.

In addition, in this embodiment and the embodiments described below, the "keyhole for changing settings" and "key for changing settings" in each of the above embodiments are also referred to simply as the "keyhole for changing settings" and the "key for changing settings", respectively, because they are used not only when transitioning to a setting change mode for changing the lottery settings, but also when transitioning to a setting confirmation mode for confirming the lottery settings.

In this embodiment, the main control board 61 located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a power switch, a RAM clear button, a keyhole for settings, a button for changing settings, and an information display section 45z. The pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that after the power switch is operated to turn the power ON and execution of a game progress mode in which the game can progress is started, the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode cannot be entered until the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned OFF. Then, if a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is executed.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the setting change mode when all of the following conditions A1 to A3 are satisfied when the power is turned on (ON).
Condition A1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition A2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side. Condition A3: The RAM clear button is pressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment executes the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on (ON) and all of the following conditions B1 to B3 are satisfied.
Condition B1: The inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are in the open state. Condition B2: The setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side. Condition B3: The RAM clear button is not pressed.

Below, we will explain an example of the work process that an administrator of the pachinko machine 10 performs to transition the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode after the game progress mode has started, and then we will explain an example of the processing that is executed on the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 49 is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator changes the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

In step W101, the administrator inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 for which the lottery settings are to be changed and turns it to the open side, rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11 to open it, and rotating the front door frame 14 relative to the inner frame 13 to open it. By rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operating units provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, proceed to step W102, where the administrator operates the power switch provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn the power OFF. Next, proceed to step W103.

In step W103, the administrator inserts the setting key into the setting keyhole on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the setting change side (hereinafter also referred to as the ON side). Next, proceeding to step W104, the administrator operates the power switch while pressing the RAM clear button on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 ON. Then, after starting up, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to setting change mode (step W105), and the setting information of the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W106). Specifically, for example, if the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1", "1" is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Next, proceed to step W107.

In step W107, the administrator changes the setting information by pressing a setting change button provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, each time the administrator presses the setting change button, the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z changes in the following order: "1" → "2" → "3" → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2"... and the administrator presses the setting change button until the setting information displayed on the information display section 45z becomes the desired setting information. Next, proceed to step W108.

In step W108, the administrator confirms that the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the desired setting information, and then presses the RAM clear button on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 to confirm the changed setting information. Next, proceeding to step W109, the administrator returns the setting key to the OFF side and removes the key from the setting keyhole. Then, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a game progress mode in which the game can proceed (step W110), and the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W111). Next, proceeding to step W112, the administrator closes the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 and removes the key from the cylinder lock 17. Through these steps, the administrator can change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 50 is a process diagram showing the work process when an administrator checks the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

In step W201, the administrator inserts a key into the cylinder lock 17 of the pachinko machine 10 for which the lottery settings are to be checked and turns it to the open side, rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11 to open it, and rotating the front door frame 14 relative to the inner frame 13 to open it. By rotating the inner frame 13 relative to the outer frame 11, the administrator can access various operating units provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10. Next, the process proceeds to step W202, where the administrator operates the power switch provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 to turn the power OFF. Next, the process proceeds to step W203.

In step W203, the administrator inserts a setting key into a setting keyhole provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 and turns it to the ON side. Next, proceeding to step W204, the administrator operates the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 ON. Then, after starting up, the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a setting confirmation mode (step W205), and the setting information of the current lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W206). Specifically, for example, if the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 is "1", "1" is displayed flashing on the information display unit 45z. The administrator can check the current setting information of the pachinko machine 10 by checking the setting information flashing on the information display unit 45z. Next, proceed to step W207.

In step W207, the administrator checks the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z, then turns the setting key to the OFF side and removes the key from the setting keyhole. The pachinko machine 10 then transitions to a game progress mode in which play can proceed (step W208), and game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z (step W209). Next, proceeding to step W210, the administrator closes the inner frame 13 and front door frame 14 and removes the key from the cylinder lock 17. Through these steps, the administrator can check the current lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, we will explain the processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of this embodiment of the pachinko machine 10.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11201, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S11202, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11203, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11203, the process proceeds to step S11204.

In step S11204, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11204: YES), the process proceeds to step S11205, where a RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11206, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64 or not. If it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11206: YES), the process proceeds to step S11208, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11204 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11204: NO), and if it is determined in step S11206 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11206: NO), the process proceeds to step S11207, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11207, the process proceeds to step S11208.

In step S11208, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11208 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11208: NO), the process proceeds to step S11209, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11209 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11209: NO), proceed to step S11210 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S11210, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11210: NO), the process proceeds to step S11211, where a power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11211, the process proceeds to step S11212, where the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing of the timer interrupt processing described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11210 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11210: YES), the process proceeds to step S11213, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11213, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, the ball entry process for the starting hole and the game number control process, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not executed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player cannot progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode will not be entered. In this state, the administrator can turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11209 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11209: YES), proceed to step S11214 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S11214, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11214: NO), the process proceeds to step S11215, where a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S11215, the process proceeds to step S11216, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to return to the state when the power was last turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11217, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By allowing the timer interrupt process to be interrupted and executing the timer interrupt process described above, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11214 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11214: YES), the process proceeds to step S11218, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11218, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power outage monitoring process) are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, the ball entry process for the starting hole and the game number control process, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player cannot progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator can turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11208 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11208: YES), proceed to step S11219 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11219 that at least one of the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch is not ON (step S11219: NO), proceed to step S11220 to determine whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11220: NO), proceed to step S11221.

In step S11221, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it outputs a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46. After executing step S11221, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11220: YES), the process proceeds to step S11222, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a voice indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11222, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power outage monitoring process) are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, the ball entry process for the starting hole and the game number control process, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player cannot progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator can turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11219 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11219: YES), proceed to step S11223 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11223: NO), the process proceeds to step S11224, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11225, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11225, the process transitions to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11223 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11223: YES), the process proceeds to step S11226, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11226, the process proceeds to step S11227.

In step S11227, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process for erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information and various control information indicating the game state, the setting information of the lottery setting is also erased. Here, the reason for executing the second RAM clear process, which erases the setting information, instead of the first RAM clear process, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be explained. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal, for example, it may be rewritten to setting information unintended by the administrator due to noise, or a number outside the predetermined range may be stored even though the setting information can only take a number within a predetermined range (for example, a number from 1 to 6). In addition, in the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second RAM clear process. Then, the process proceeds to step S11228, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. After executing step S11228, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of steps S11225 and S11228 in Figure 51.

In step S11301, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it outputs a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it causes a sound such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the settings" to be repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice and light emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the settings" on the pattern display device 41, and the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress. Please change the settings." In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S11301, the process proceeds to step S11302.

In step S11302, control is started to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11303, where it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". In step S11303, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305. On the other hand, in step S11303, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than a numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S11304, where the setting information is changed to an initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the setting information. Then proceed to step S11305.

In step S11305, it is determined whether the RAM clear button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11305 that the RAM clear button has not been pressed (step S11305: NO), the process proceeds to step S11306, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307, where the setting information of the lottery setting is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, it returns to the above-mentioned step S11303, and it is determined whether the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the processing of step S11307, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S11305 described above that the RAM clear button has been pressed (step S11305: YES), the process proceeds to step S11308, where it is determined whether or not the setting key has been turned to the OFF side. If it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key has not been turned to the OFF side (step S11308: NO), step S11308 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that the setting key has been turned to the OFF side (step S11308: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309. In other words, after the RAM clear button is pressed, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S11309, and once the setting key is turned to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step S11309.

In step S11309, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S11310.

In step S11310, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress as described above.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. Note that after executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information may display the setting information of the changed lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) in aspect 87 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S11215 in Figure 51.

In step S11401, the setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, it outputs a sound indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress." In addition, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio and light emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress," and the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress." In addition, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Furthermore, in the setting check notification start process, information indicating that the setting check mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting check mode on the management screen. After executing step S11401, the process proceeds to step S11402.

In step S11402, control is started to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11403.

In step S11403, it is determined whether the setting key has been turned OFF. If it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key has not been turned OFF (step S11403: NO), step S11403 is executed again. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11403 that the setting key has been turned OFF (step S11403: YES), the process proceeds to step S11404. In other words, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key is turned OFF, and the process does not proceed to step S11404, and once the setting key is turned OFF, the process proceeds to step S11404.

In step S11404, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S11405.

In step S11405, a setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, it ends various controls for notifying that the above-mentioned setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via the external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11405, this setting confirmation process ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on (power ON), the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting change mode if the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear switch is ON, and on the other hand, when the power is turned on (power ON), the pachinko machine 10 executes the setting confirmation mode if the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear switch is OFF. In other words, in this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 that has already been started (for example, while the game progress mode is being executed) cannot be switched to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode while the power is ON, and in order to switch the started pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the power of the pachinko machine 10 must be turned OFF once, and then turned ON again while performing the above-mentioned specified operation.

In general, gaming halls are equipped with equipment that prevents anyone other than the administrator from operating the power switch located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, even if there is a person (hereinafter referred to as an unauthorized person) who tries to change or check the lottery settings of the pachinko machine 10 with the intent of obtaining an illegal advantage, it is difficult for an unauthorized person who is not the administrator to operate the power switch located on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from illegally switching the pachinko machine 10 to setting change mode or setting check mode.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON, a voice or alarm sound is output from the speaker 46 indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up, making it even more difficult for an unauthorized person to change or check the lottery settings without being noticed by those around. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from unauthorizedly changing or checking the lottery settings.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to transition the pachinko machine 10 to the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 must be in the open state, making it even more difficult for an unauthorized person to change or confirm the lottery settings without being noticed by those around. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized person from unauthorizedly changing or confirming the lottery settings.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during the start-up process from when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on until the execution of the game progress mode is started (the period during which the processes from step S11201 to step S11228 in FIG. 51 are being executed), the game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is executed. In other words, during the start-up process, the game history information is not displayed on the information display unit 45z, and only the setting information of the lottery setting can be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the administrator from being confused as to whether the information displayed on the information display unit 45z is the setting information of the lottery setting or the game history information during the start-up process, and it is also possible to prevent the administrator from misunderstanding and recognizing the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z as the game history information.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if an operation to execute the setting check mode is performed when the power is turned on, it is determined whether the RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is normal or not, and if it is determined that the RAM judgment value is not normal, the setting check mode is not executed, and after notifying the player that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, the game is not transitioned to a game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting check mode and game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change mode includes the operation of pressing the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 executes a RAM clear process (first RAM clear process or second RAM clear process) when executing the setting change mode. That is, to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode, the administrator operates the RAM clear button, and the pachinko machine 10 also executes the RAM clear process when executing the setting change mode. Generally, the administrator who manages the pachinko machine 10 is aware that the RAM clear process will be executed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM clear button pressed. Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, it is possible to make the administrator strongly aware that when the setting change mode is executed by operating the RAM clear button, not only is the setting change mode executed, but also the RAM clear process is executed. As a result, for example, if the administrator wishes to restart the pachinko machine 10 while maintaining a game state such as a high probability mode and resume the game progress mode from the state it was in the last time the power was turned off, i.e., if the RAM clear process should not be executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started, the administrator can reliably determine that the setting change mode, which involves the execution of a RAM clear process, should not be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is possible to execute a first RAM clear process that does not erase the setting information for the lottery setting among the information stored in the main RAM 64, and a second RAM clear process that erases the setting information as well, so that it is possible to realize a processing process that corresponds to both a processing process in which the setting information should be left and the other information should be erased among the information stored in the main RAM 64, and a processing process in which the setting information should be erased as well. For example, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the first RAM clear process is executed in a processing process in which the setting information is normal and therefore should be maintained, while the other information should be erased, and the second RAM clear process is executed in a processing process in which the setting information may have become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, if it determines that the power recovery flag is not ON or that the RAM determination value is not normal, it notifies the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal and does not transition to a game progress mode in which play can proceed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off once and then turned on again, the game progress mode in which play can proceed is not executed unless an operation to execute the setting change mode is performed and the setting change mode is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving the possibility that the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode is executed, a RAM clear process is executed, so that it is possible to prevent an inconsistency from occurring between the information stored in the main RAM 64 after the lottery setting is changed and the information stored in the main RAM 64 before the lottery setting is changed, which would cause problems in the progress of the game.

In this embodiment, the first RAM clear process is executed in step S11224 of FIG. 51, and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. However, instead of this configuration, the first RAM clear process may be executed after the setting change process (setting change mode). With such a configuration, it is possible to erase various flag information and various control information indicating the game state stored in the main RAM 64 while maintaining the setting information of the lottery setting set by the setting change process. Furthermore, if it is determined in step S11223 of FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the first RAM clear process is executed after the setting change process (setting change mode), and if the setting key is turned to the OFF side and removed from the setting keyhole without changing the lottery setting in the setting change process (setting change mode) (or without confirming the changed setting information), the game progress mode may be switched to without executing the first RAM clear process. With this configuration, even if the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed by turning the power ON while pressing the RAM clear button with the setting key turned ON accidentally and unintentionally, the setting information of the lottery setting is not changed (or the changed setting information is not confirmed), so it is possible to avoid the execution of the first RAM clear process and resume the game progress mode from the state it was in the last time the power was turned OFF.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first RAM clear process is executed in step S11224 of FIG. 51, and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11225. However, instead of this configuration, the setting change process (setting change mode) may be executed after the second RAM clear process is executed. Even with this configuration, the lottery setting can be erased by the second RAM clear process and an initial value (e.g., "1") is stored as the setting information, and then the lottery setting can be changed to the desired setting information by the setting change process, so that it is possible to avoid the game progress mode being executed with the setting information of the lottery setting at its initial value (e.g., "1").

In addition, in this embodiment, the second RAM clear process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51, and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. However, instead of this configuration, the first RAM clear process may be executed after the setting change process (setting change mode). With such a configuration, various information stored in the main RAM 64 determined to be abnormal can be erased while maintaining the setting information of the lottery setting set by the setting change process.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second RAM clear process is executed in step S11227 of FIG. 51, and then the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed in step S11228. However, instead of this configuration, the setting change process (setting change mode) may be executed after the first RAM clear process is executed. With this configuration, even if the setting information for the lottery setting is an abnormal value and remains abnormal even after the first RAM clear process is executed, the setting information for the lottery setting can be reset to an appropriate value by the setting change process (setting change mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, if it is determined in steps S11210, S11214, and S11220 in FIG. 51 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, a RAM abnormality notification process is executed and the game progress mode is not entered. However, instead of this configuration, if it is determined in steps S11210, S11214, and S11220 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality notification process may be executed, and then a second RAM clear process may be executed to set the setting information for the lottery setting to an initial value (e.g., "1"), and then the game progress mode may be entered.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed in step S11215 in FIG. 51, the power recovery process is executed in step S11216, and the power recovery flag is turned OFF in step S11217. However, instead of this configuration, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) may be executed after the power recovery process and the process of turning OFF the power recovery flag are executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting information is updated when the setting change button is pressed in step S11306 of FIG. 52, and the setting information is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed in step S11305. However, the operation of updating and confirming the setting information is not limited to this, and for example, the setting information may be updated when the RAM clear button is pressed, and the setting information may be confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed for a predetermined time or more. With this configuration, the setting change button can be omitted, and the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Also, the setting information may be confirmed when the setting key is turned OFF, or when a game ball is detected by a ball entry sensor installed at a predetermined ball entry port.

In addition, in this embodiment, the conditions for executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 being in an open state, but the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 being in an open state are not essential to the conditions. For example, the conditions may include the inner frame 13 being in an open state and the front door frame 14 being in an open state, or the conditions may include the front door frame 14 being in an open state and the inner frame 13 being in an open state, or the conditions may not include either the inner frame 13 or the front door frame 14.

In addition, in this embodiment, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode is a lit display, and the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting confirmation mode is a blinking display, but the display mode of the setting information in each mode is not limited to this, and for example, the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting change mode may be a blinking display, and the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z during the setting confirmation mode may be a lit display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game progress mode is executed immediately after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated. However, instead of this configuration, the game progress mode is not executed after the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are terminated, and the game progress mode can be executed when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF and then turned ON without performing the specified operation to execute the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S11302 of the setting change process (FIG. 52), the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 (e.g., the setting information at the time of the previous power OFF) is displayed by lighting on the information display unit 45z. However, instead of this configuration, the setting information for the lottery setting may be set to an initial value (e.g., "1") at the start of the setting change process, regardless of the value of the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64, and the setting information set to the initial value may be displayed by lighting on the information display unit 45z. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a RAM clear process that erases (clears to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information for the lottery setting, before executing the setting change process.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the inner frame 13 is in the open state, the system may be configured to continue to notify the user that the inner frame 13 is in the open state, regardless of whether the setting change process (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The inner frame is open" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. Similarly, while the front door frame 14 is in the open state, the system may be configured to continue to notify the user that the front door frame 14 is in the open state, regardless of whether the setting change process (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is being executed. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "The door is open" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. With this configuration, it is possible to make it even more difficult for an unauthorized person to execute the setting change process (setting change mode) or the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) on the pachinko machine 10 without being noticed by those around.

<Aspect 88>
In the above-mentioned aspect 87, when the power is turned on, if the power recovery flag is not ON and if the RAM determination value is not normal, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, and does not transition to the game progress mode in which the game can proceed. However, instead of this configuration, when the power is turned on, if the power recovery flag is not ON and if the RAM determination value is not normal, even if no operation is performed to execute the setting change mode, the pachinko machine 10 may be configured to notify the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, execute the setting change mode, and then transition to the game progress mode. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 88 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11501, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S11502, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11503, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11503, the process proceeds to step S11504.

In step S11504, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11504: YES), the process proceeds to step S11505, where the RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11506, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64 or not. If it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11506: YES), the process proceeds to step S11507.

In step S11507, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11507 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11507: NO), the process proceeds to step S11508, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

In step S11508, if it is determined that at least one of the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch is not ON (step S11508: NO), the process proceeds to step S11509, where a power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11509, the process proceeds to step S11510, where the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By allowing the timer interrupt process to be interrupted and executing the timer interrupt process described above, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11508 that the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON (step S11508: YES), the process proceeds to step S11511, where the setting confirmation process is executed. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those shown in FIG. 53 of the above-mentioned mode 87. After executing step S11511, the process proceeds to step S11512, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state when the power was last turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11513, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) described in each of the above-mentioned modes are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11507 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11507: YES), proceed to step S11514 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11514 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step S11514: NO), proceed to step S11515.

In step S11515, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it outputs a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46. After executing step S11515, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

If it is determined in step S11514 above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11514: YES), the process proceeds to step S11516, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11517, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11517k, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11504: NO), and if it is determined in step S11506 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11506: NO), the process proceeds to step S11518, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11518, the process proceeds to step S11519.

In step S11519, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process for erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the setting information of the lottery setting is also erased in addition to various flag information and various control information indicating the game state. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S11520, and the setting change process is executed. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned embodiment 87. After executing step S11520, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game process.

As described above, according to this embodiment, even if no operation is performed to execute the setting change mode when the power is ON, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON, and if it is determined that the RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is normal or not and it is determined that the RAM judgment value is not normal, it notifies the user that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, executes the second RAM clear process and the setting change mode to confirm the setting information, and then transitions to a game progress mode in which the game can proceed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

For example, even if an operation to execute the setting check mode has been performed when the power is ON, if it is determined that the power recovery flag is not ON, and if it is determined that the RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is not normal after determining whether it is normal, the setting check mode is not executed, a notification is issued that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, and the second RAM clear process and the setting change mode are executed to confirm the setting information, and then the game progress mode is entered in which the game can proceed. This makes it possible to prevent the game progress mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 has become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator.

<Aspect 89>
In the main process (FIG. 51) in the above aspect 87, after determining whether the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11208), it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (steps S11209 and S11219), but instead of this configuration, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, and then determine whether the RAM clear button is pressed. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 89 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11601, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S11602, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11603, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11603, the process proceeds to step S11604.

In step S11604, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11604: YES), the process proceeds to step S11605, where a RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11606, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64 or not. If it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11606: YES), the process proceeds to step S11608, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11604 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11604: NO), and if it is determined in step S11606 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11606: NO), the process proceeds to step S11607, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11607, the process proceeds to step S11608.

In step S11608, it is determined whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. The frame opening switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13. If it is determined in step S11608 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step S11608: NO), the process proceeds to step S11609, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON.

If it is determined in step S11609 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11609: NO), proceed to step S11610 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S11610, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11610: NO), the process proceeds to step S11611, where a power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11611, the process proceeds to step S11612, where the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11610 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11610: YES), the process proceeds to step S11613, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11613, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power outage monitoring process) are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, the ball entry process for the starting hole and the game number control process, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt permission setting is not performed. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player cannot progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode will not be entered. In this state, the administrator can turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11609: YES), the process proceeds to step S11614, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11614: NO), the process proceeds to step S11615.

In step S11615, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it outputs a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46. After executing step S11615, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11614 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11614: YES), the process proceeds to step S11616 and RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11616, the process proceeds to the normal game processing described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update processing and the power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) are executed, but other processing necessary for the progress of the game (for example, ball entry processing for the starting hole and game number control processing, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player cannot progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator can turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11608 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11608: YES), proceed to step S11617 and determine whether the RAM clear button is ON.

If it is determined in step S11617 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11617: YES), the process proceeds to step S11618, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S11618, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11618: NO), the process proceeds to step S11619, where a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. That is, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53 of the above-mentioned mode 87. After executing step S11619, the process proceeds to step S11620, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11621, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power failure monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-mentioned modes are executed. By allowing the timer interrupt process to be interrupted and executing the timer interrupt process described above, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11618 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11618: YES), the process proceeds to step S11622, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in the setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11622, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the random number update process and the power supply monitoring process (power outage monitoring process) are executed, but other processes necessary for the progress of the game (for example, the ball entry process for the starting hole and the game number control process, etc.) are not executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the timer interrupt is not permitted. Therefore, although it appears to be the same as the normal game progress mode, the player cannot progress in the game. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode is not entered. In this state, the administrator can turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it ON, and then turn the power ON while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode.

If it is determined in step S11217 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11217: YES), proceed to step S11223 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11623: NO), the process proceeds to step S11624, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S11625, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which the administrator, etc. can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned mode 87. After executing step S11625, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game process.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11623 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11623: YES), the process proceeds to step S11626, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11626, the process proceeds to step S11627.

In step S11627, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process for erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information and various control information indicating the game state, the setting information of the lottery setting is also erased. Here, the reason for executing the second clear process, which erases the setting information, instead of the first clear process, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be explained. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal, for example, it may be rewritten to setting information not intended by the administrator due to noise, or a number outside the specified range may be stored even though the setting information can only take a number within a specified range (for example, a number from 1 to 6). In addition, in the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second clear process. Then, the process proceeds to step S11628, and the setting change process is executed. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned aspect 87. After executing step S11628, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

The configuration of this aspect described above can achieve the same effect as aspect 87. In addition, the various modified configurations described in aspect 87 can also be applied to this aspect.

<Aspect 90>
In the main process (FIG. 54) in the above aspect 88, after determining whether the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11507), it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (steps S11508 and S11514), but instead of this configuration, it may be configured to determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON, and then determine whether the RAM clear button is pressed. This will be explained in detail below.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing a part of the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 90 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S11701, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S11702, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11703, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11703, the process proceeds to step S11704.

In step S11704, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11704: YES), the process proceeds to step S11705, where the RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11706, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64 or not. If it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11706: YES), the process proceeds to step S11707.

In step S11707, it is determined whether the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON. The frame opening switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door opening switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13. If it is determined in step S11707 that at least one of the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch is not ON (step S11707: NO), the process proceeds to step S11708, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON.

In step S11708, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11708: NO), the process proceeds to step S11709, where a power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11709, the process proceeds to step S11710, where the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update processing, and power supply monitoring processing (power outage monitoring processing) of the timer interrupt processing described in each of the above-mentioned aspects are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt processing and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

On the other hand, in the above-mentioned step S11708, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11708: YES), the process proceeds to step S11711, and the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64, except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11711, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game process.

If it is determined in step S11707 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11707: YES), the process proceeds to step S11712, where it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON.

In step S11712, if it is determined that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11712: NO), the process proceeds to step S11713, where the setting confirmation process is executed. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those shown in FIG. 53 of the above-mentioned mode 87. After executing step S11713, the process proceeds to step S11714, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state when the power was last turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S11715, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to normal game processing. Specifically, for example, the interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, random number update process, and power supply monitoring process (power outage monitoring process) of the timer interrupt process described in each of the above-mentioned modes are executed. By permitting the interrupt of the timer interrupt process and executing the above-mentioned timer interrupt process, the game can proceed (the game progress mode is started).

If it is determined in step S11712 above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11712: YES), the process proceeds to step S11716, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11717, where the setting change process is executed. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of aspect 87 described above. After executing step S11717, the process proceeds to the normal game process described above.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11704 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11704: NO), and if it is determined in step S11706 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11706: NO), the process proceeds to step S11718, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11718, the process proceeds to step S11719.

In step S11719, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process for erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, when the second RAM clear process is executed, the setting information of the lottery setting is also erased in addition to various flag information and various control information indicating the game state. In the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S11720, and the setting change process is executed. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52 of the above-mentioned embodiment 87. After executing step S11720, the process proceeds to the above-mentioned normal game process.

The configuration of this embodiment described above can achieve the same effect as embodiment 88. In addition, the various modified configurations described in embodiment 88 can also be applied to this embodiment.

<Aspect 91>
In the setting change process (FIG. 52) in each of the above aspects, the setting information for the lottery setting is confirmed when the RAM clear button is pressed (step S11305), but instead of this configuration, the setting information for the lottery setting may be confirmed when the setting key is turned OFF. This will be specifically described below.

Figure 57 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 91 of the first embodiment. The same steps as those included in the setting change process shown in Figure 52 are given the same step numbers. The main difference from the setting change process shown in Figure 52 is that in Figure 52, the process for confirming the changed setting information is pressing the RAM clear button (step S11305), whereas in this aspect, the process for confirming the changed setting information is turning the setting key to the OFF side (step S11305a), and therefore the process of step S11308 in Figure 52 is omitted. A specific explanation is given below.

In step S11301, the setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it outputs a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it causes a sound such as "setting change mode in progress" to be repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice and light emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode in progress", and the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode in progress". In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S11301, the process proceeds to step S11302.

In step S11302, control is started to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the setting information of the lottery setting is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S11303, where it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". In step S11303, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11305a. On the other hand, in step S11303, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S11303: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than a numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S11304, where the setting information is changed to an initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the setting information. Then proceed to step S11305a.

In step S11305a, it is determined whether the setting key has been turned OFF. If it is determined in step S11305a that the setting key has not been turned OFF (step S11305a: NO), the process proceeds to step S11306, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. If it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has been pressed (step S11306: YES), the process proceeds to step S11307, where the setting information for the lottery setting is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". After that, it returns to the above-mentioned step S11303, and it is determined whether the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11306 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S11306: NO), the process returns to step S11303 described above without executing the processing of step S11307, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S11305a described above that the setting key has been turned to the OFF side (step S11305a: YES), the process proceeds to step S11309, where control for displaying the setting information for the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S11310.

In step S11310, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode is in progress as described above.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S11310, this setting change process ends. Note that after executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information may display the setting information of the changed lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

According to the configuration of this aspect described above, the operation of pressing the RAM clear button to confirm the changed setting information can be omitted, simplifying the work process required for the administrator to change the setting information.

<Aspect 92>
Among the above-mentioned modes, in a configuration in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode can be executed, during execution of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main display unit 45 may be configured to display a display pattern (display mode) that is not displayed during execution of the game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Specific explanations will be given below.

As described above, the main display unit 45 is composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements. Specifically, the main display unit 45 is composed of a first pattern display unit 37a consisting of a plurality of segment light-emitting elements, a second pattern display unit 37b consisting of a plurality of segment light-emitting elements, a first reserved display unit 37c consisting of a plurality of LED lamps, a second reserved display unit 37d consisting of a plurality of LED lamps, a general pattern unit 38 consisting of a plurality of LED lamps, and a round display unit 39 consisting of a plurality of LED lamps.

The main display unit 45 controls each light-emitting element so that the display mode reflects the progress of the game while the game progress mode is in progress. However, in this mode, while the game progress mode is in progress, all the light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 do not light up at the same time, nor do all the light-emitting elements flash in sync.

In this embodiment, the main display unit 45 executes control to simultaneously light up all light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 during execution of a setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed, and executes control to synchronously blink all light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 during execution of a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be confirmed.

This configuration allows the administrator, etc., to identify whether the pachinko machine 10 is currently in game progress mode, setting change mode, or setting confirmation mode. Furthermore, this configuration does not require the addition of a new light-emitting unit for displaying the mode to the main display unit 45 in order to identify the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, so the configuration can be changed to one that allows the administrator, etc., to identify the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 by simply changing the control program of the pachinko machine 10, without changing the hardware configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main display unit 45 may be configured to execute control to cause all light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 to blink in synchronization during execution of a setting change mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be changed, and execute control to cause all light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 to light up simultaneously during execution of a setting confirmation mode in which the setting information of the lottery setting can be confirmed.

In addition, the display mode displayed by the main display unit 45 during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode may be any other display mode (lighting pattern) that is not displayed during the game progress mode, and is not limited to a configuration in which all light-emitting elements constituting the main display unit 45 are lit or blinking.

In addition, a light-emitting unit (e.g., an LED) for displaying the mode may be added to the main display unit 45, and the light-emitting unit may be turned off when the game progress mode is being executed, turned on when the setting change mode is being executed, and flashed when the setting confirmation mode is being executed. This configuration allows the manager or the like to clearly recognize the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, and can simplify the configuration compared to a configuration in which the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 is notified using the sound and light-emitting control device 90, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41.

In addition, two light-emitting units (e.g., LEDs) for displaying the mode (first and second light-emitting units) may be added to the main display unit 45, and both the first and second light-emitting units may be turned off during the game progress mode, the first light-emitting unit may be turned on and the second light-emitting unit may be turned off during the setting change mode, and the second light-emitting unit may be turned on and the first light-emitting unit may be turned off during the setting confirmation mode. With this configuration, it is possible to allow the administrator or the like to clearly recognize the current mode of the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to realize a simplified configuration compared to a configuration in which the current mode of the pachinko machine 10 is notified using the sound and light-emitting control device 90, the display control device 100, and the pattern display device 41. Furthermore, since it is only necessary to control the two light-emitting units added to the main display unit 45, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity due to the addition of a control program or a lighting pattern.

<Aspect 93>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration in which the information display unit 45z is equipped with four 7-segment displays 45z1 to 45z4, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, all of the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z may be configured to be lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) and then to flash synchronously for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds).

According to this configuration, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to check whether there is any light-emitting part that does not light up due to a malfunction such as a broken wire among the light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z, and whether there is any light-emitting part that is constantly lit and does not turn off due to a malfunction. For example, if the segment light-emitting part G and the segment light-emitting part D of the right-center 7-segment display 45z3 do not light up due to a malfunction, even if control is being executed to display "3" on the right-center 7-segment display 45z3, the segment light-emitting part G and the segment light-emitting part D will not light up, and "7" will be displayed on the right-center 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the manager may misinterpret the numerical information of the game history information. In contrast, according to the configuration of this aspect, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to check whether there is any light-emitting part that does not light up due to a malfunction such as a broken wire among the light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z, and it is possible to check whether there is any light-emitting part that is constantly lit and does not turn off due to a malfunction, so that such misinterpretation can be suppressed.

Furthermore, an information display unit inspection button for inspecting the information display unit 45z may be provided, and when the information display unit inspection button is pressed, all of the light-emitting units constituting the information display unit 45z may be configured to light up for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) and then flash synchronously for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds).

With this configuration, even when the pachinko machine 10 is not powered on, by pressing the information display unit inspection button, it is possible to check whether any of the light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire, and to check whether any of the light-emitting units are constantly lit due to a malfunction and do not go out. In other words, it is not necessary to turn the power of the pachinko machine 10 OFF and then ON again to check whether any malfunction has occurred in the information display unit 45z, which improves the work efficiency of the administrator.

In addition, in a configuration in which the above-mentioned base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored and the stored base (during normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, the main control unit 60 may be configured to divide the number of pieces N _OUT that have passed through the discharge passage into sections each time the measured number N OUT reaches 60,000, calculate and store the base (during normal mode) for each section, and the information display unit 45z may be configured to switch between and display multiple types of bases (during normal mode) for different sections that are the subject of the calculation.

Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment calculates and stores the bases (during normal mode) for up to seven intervals, and the information display unit 45z switches between and displays the bases (during normal mode) corresponding to up to seven intervals. The seven intervals are as follows:

・"bL": Base being measured (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate calculated in the current section until the number of balls passing through the discharge passage currently being measured N _OUT reaches 60,000 (in normal mode)
"b1": Base already measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section immediately preceding the section currently being measured in which the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT has reached 60,000.
・"b2": Base already measured in the previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section two sections before the section currently being measured in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
・"b3": Base already measured in the third previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section three sections before the section currently being measured in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
"b4": Base already measured in the fourth previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section four sections before the section currently being measured in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.
・"b5": Base measured in the 5th previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section where the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000 balls and is 5 sections before the section currently being measured.
"b6": Base measured in the 6th previous section (in normal mode)
The ball discharge rate (in normal mode) calculated in the section 6 before the section currently being measured in which the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches 60,000.

In the initial state where the game history basic information such as the number of balls entering each entry section is not stored, the measurement of the section corresponding to "bL" is started, and the base (in normal mode) in the section corresponding to "bL" is calculated at a predetermined timing. When the number of balls passing through the discharge passage during measurement N _OUT reaches 60,000, the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "bL" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b1", and the measurement of the section corresponding to "bL" is started. Then, when the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches 60,000 in the section corresponding to "bL" where the measurement is started, the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "b1" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b2", the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "bL" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b1", and the measurement of the section corresponding to "bL" is started. In this way, the game history basic information for each section is shifted every time the number of balls passing through the discharge passage during measurement N _OUT reaches 60,000, and the game history basic information is stored up to the section corresponding to "b6" at the maximum. Then, when the number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 while the game history basic information is stored as the section corresponding to "b6", the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "b6" is erased, and the game history basic information stored as the section corresponding to "b5" is shifted to the section corresponding to "b6".

That is, in this embodiment, the basic game history information is accumulated and stored until the maximum number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage (60,000 balls×7 sections) is measured.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 45z switches between and displays the bases (in normal mode) of the multiple sections stored every 5 seconds. Specifically, for example, if the bases (in normal mode) of five sections, "bL", "b1", "b2", "b3", and "b4", are stored, the information display unit 45z repeatedly displays the bases (in normal mode) of each section by switching between them every 5 seconds in the following order: "bL.31" → "b1.31" → "b2.30" → "b3.31" → "b4.30" → "bL.31" → "b1.31"...

With this configuration, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine can compare the base (during normal mode) for each section by checking the display on the information display unit 45z. As a result, for example, if the base (during normal mode) value becomes abnormal due to a malfunction or fraud occurring in the pachinko machine 10, it becomes possible to predict at what point in the past the malfunction occurred.

In this embodiment, the section is divided every time the measured number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage reaches 60,000, the base (in normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section, and the base (in normal mode) stored for each section is switched every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) to be displayed on the information display unit 45z, but instead of this configuration, an RTC 96 may be provided, the section is divided every date, the base (in normal mode) is calculated and stored for each section divided by date, and the base (in normal mode) stored for each date (each section) is switched every predetermined time (for example, every 5 seconds) to be displayed on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, for example, "bL" is defined as the section of the current day, "b1" as the section of one day ago, "b2" as the section of two days ago, "b3" as the section of three days ago, "b4" as the section of four days ago, "b5" as the section of five days ago, and "b6" as the section of six days ago.

With this configuration, an inspector or manager of the gaming machine can compare the base (during normal mode) for each section divided by date by checking the display on the information display unit 45z. As a result, for example, if a malfunction or fraud occurs in the pachinko machine 10 and the base (during normal mode) value becomes abnormal, it becomes possible to predict the date on which the malfunction or other problem occurred.

In addition, in a configuration in which basic game history information such as the number of balls entering each entry section and game history information such as the base (during normal mode) are stored in the main RAM 64, and the basic game history information and game history information are erased (cleared) by a RAM clear process executed by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed, after the basic game history information and game history information are erased, until the measured number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaches a predetermined number (for example, 300 balls), when the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z, type information of the game history information is displayed but numerical information of the game history information is not displayed.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which a base (during normal mode) is calculated and stored as game history information and the stored base (during normal mode) is displayed on the information display unit 45z, after the game history basic information and game history information are erased by a RAM clear process, the type information display area of the information display unit 45z _may be configured to display "bL." and the numerical information display area may be configured to display "-- (two hyphens)" until the measured number N OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage reaches 300.

According to this configuration, when "bL.--" is displayed on the information display section 45z, the inspector or manager of the gaming machine can recognize that the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT measured after the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information are erased or after the pachinko machine 10 is shipped from the manufacturer's factory has not reached 300. Also, for example, when the manufacturer ships the pachinko machine 10, the operation may be checked by having several gaming balls enter each entrance section. In this case, the number of gaming balls that enter each entrance section is measured in a situation that is not a legitimate game, so that, for example, until the initially measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches 300, the basic gaming history information and the gaming history information may be significantly affected by the manufacturer's check. Therefore, according to the configuration of this embodiment, until the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaches 300, the information display unit 45z displays "bL.--" and does not display the base (normal mode) numerical information. This prevents the administrator from checking the numerical values that are heavily influenced by the manufacturer's checks and misunderstanding that a malfunction or the like has occurred in the pachinko machine 10.

<Aspect 94>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in the configuration in which the gaming history information is calculated for each of a plurality of sections, after the gaming history basic information corresponding to the section is stored up to an upper limit and the gaming history information is calculated and stored, the gaming history basic information that was the basis for the calculation of the gaming history information for that section may be erased. Specifically, for example, after the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT during measurement reaches 60,000 and the gaming history information is calculated and stored, the gaming history basic information that was the basis for the calculation of the gaming history information may be erased. With such a configuration, the storage capacity required for storing the gaming history basic information can be reduced.

<Aspect 95>
Among the above aspects, in a configuration in which the information display unit 45z switches and sequentially displays a plurality of bases (in normal mode) corresponding to each of a plurality of sections, a configuration may be adopted in which, at the time of the switching, all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and the DP light-emitting unit) of the seven-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off for a predetermined time. The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

Figure 58 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z. In this Figure 58, the bases (during normal mode) of the three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and an example is shown in which the bases (during normal mode) of these three sections are switched and displayed by the information display unit 45z.

In this embodiment, the information display unit 45z repeatedly displays the bases (in normal mode) in a cyclical manner going back to the past intervals. More specifically, the information display unit 45z displays "bL", which is the base (in normal mode) being measured that corresponds to the most recent interval, until a predetermined display duration (e.g., 5000 ms) has elapsed, and then displays the bases (in normal mode) in a sequential order going back to the previous interval. After displaying the base (in normal mode) that corresponds to the oldest interval among the intervals stored in the main RAM 64, the information display unit 45z again displays "bL", which is the base (in normal mode) that corresponds to the most recent interval being measured.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the information display unit 45z starts displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one of the multiple sections and the display duration of the base (in normal mode) has elapsed (e.g., 5000 ms), it turns off all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and DP light-emitting unit) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z for a predetermined time (e.g., 300 ms), and then starts displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the previous section. In other words, in this embodiment, when switching the display of the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to the display of the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section, it turns off all light-emitting units (segment light-emitting units A to H and DP light-emitting unit) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z for a predetermined time (e.g., 300 ms).

In the example shown in FIG. 58, the information display unit 45z displays "bL", which is the base being measured (in normal mode) corresponding to the currently measured section, in a display mode such as "bL.31" for 5000 ms, and then turns off all the light-emitting units for 300 ms. Then, the information display unit 45z displays "b1", which is the measured base (in normal mode) corresponding to the previous section, in a display mode such as "b1.30" for 5000 ms, and then turns off all the light-emitting units for 300 ms. Then, the information display unit 45z displays "b2", which is the measured base (in normal mode) corresponding to the previous section, in a display mode such as "b2.31" for 5000 ms, and then turns off all the light-emitting units for 300 ms. Then, the information display unit 45z displays "bL", which is the base being measured (in normal mode) corresponding to the currently measured section, in a display mode such as "bL.31" for 5000 ms. In this way, the information display unit 45z repeatedly displays the base (during normal mode) for each section stored in the main RAM 64, with a 300 ms period in between when the lights are completely off.

Next, a case where the number N _OUT of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 will be described.

Fig. 59 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z when the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. Fig. 59 shows an example in which the bases (during normal mode) of three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 while the information display unit 45z is displaying "b1".

In this embodiment, when the number _NOUT of passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while a base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z ends the display of the base (in normal mode) being displayed even before the display duration (5,000 ms) of the base being displayed (in normal mode) has elapsed. Then, a display in a display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of passing through the discharge passage in the measured section reaching 60,000 is started, and the display mode is continued for a predetermined time (e.g., 2,000 ms). In this embodiment, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as the display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of passing through the discharge passage in the measured section reaching 60,000. Then, during the period until a specified period (e.g., 2000 ms) during which the four hyphens are lit has elapsed, the main CPU 62x of the main control device 60 executes a process of calculating the final value of "bL", which is the base (during normal mode) corresponding to the section currently being measured, and a process of shifting the base (during normal mode) corresponding to each section one by one to the previous section, and then begins a process of measuring the number of game balls that have entered each entrance in the current section to calculate a new "bL", and a process of calculating the current value of "bL".

In the example shown in FIG. 59, while "b1" is being displayed, the number _NOUT of pieces passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 pieces before the display duration of 5,000 ms for "b1" has elapsed, so the information display unit 45z ends the display of "b1" and starts a display mode in which four hyphens are lit, and continues this display mode for 2,000 ms.

In this embodiment, the display then starts cyclically from "bL" which has just started to be measured, based on the fact that a predetermined time (e.g., 2000 ms) has elapsed since the display mode in which the four hyphens are lit has started. In other words, after the display mode in which the four hyphens are lit has ended, the display resumes from "bL" which has just started to be measured, regardless of the base (in normal mode) section in which the display was interrupted.

In this embodiment, if the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before 300 ms has elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off, the information display unit 45z ends the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements are turned off, and transitions to the display mode in which the four hyphens are lit as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the information display unit 45z switches from a display mode that displays a base (during normal mode) corresponding to one of the multiple sections (for example, a display mode that displays "bL") to a display mode that does not display any base (during normal mode) (for example, a display mode in which all segment light-emitting units are turned off), and then switches to a display mode that displays a base (during normal mode) corresponding to another section (for example, a display mode that displays "b1"). Therefore, according to this embodiment, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can be made to clearly recognize that the base (during normal mode) displayed on the information display unit 45z has been switched to a base (during normal mode) corresponding to another section. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager or inspector from mistakenly recognizing the section of the displayed base (during normal mode) without noticing that the section of the displayed base (during normal mode) has been switched. In particular, in this embodiment, even if the interval of the base (in normal mode) is different, there is a situation where the numerical value of the base (in normal mode) itself is the same, and in this situation, when the interval of the displayed base (in normal mode) is switched, only the display of the second letter (e.g., L, 1, 2, etc.) indicating the interval of the base (in normal mode) changes. If a display mode that displays the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one interval is directly shifted to a display mode that displays the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another interval, it would be difficult for the administrator, etc., to notice that the interval of the displayed base (in normal mode) has been switched. In contrast, in this embodiment, before switching from a display mode that displays a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to a display mode that displays a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section, the display mode switches to a display mode that does not display any base (in normal mode) (for example, a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off), so that even if the numerical value of the base (in normal mode) itself before and after the switch is the same, the administrator, etc., can clearly recognize that the base (in normal mode) displayed on the information display unit 45z has switched to the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section.

In this embodiment, the transition mode when switching from a display mode displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to a display mode displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section is a transition mode in which all light-emitting units are turned off for 300 ms. On the other hand, the transition mode when switching the display mode based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000 is a transition mode in which four hyphens are turned on for 2000 ms. In other words, in this embodiment, the transition mode when switching from a display mode displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to a display mode displaying a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section is different from the transition mode when switching the display mode based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode is to be changed to a display mode that displays the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section, or whether the display mode is to be changed based on the number of balls passing through the discharge passage _{N OUT in} the section being measured reaching 60,000, by recognizing the difference in the transition mode. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager or the like from continuing the confirmation work of the base (in normal mode) without noticing that the base (in normal mode) of each section has shifted to the previous section by one because the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N OUT in the section being measured has reached 60,000.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 while the base (in normal mode) is being displayed, even before the display duration of the displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed, the display mode is switched to a display mode (a display mode in which four hyphens are lit) corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can be made to quickly recognize that the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured has reached 60,000. Furthermore, according to this embodiment, it is possible to quickly display the base (during normal mode) for each section after a shift has been made due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, so that the manager or the like can quickly check the base (during normal mode) for each section after a shift has been made due to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, thereby improving the efficiency of inspection of the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000, the display mode (the display mode in which four hyphens are lit) corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 is continued for a predetermined time (2000 ms in this embodiment), so that the period until the predetermined time has elapsed can be used to secure time for the master CPU 62x to execute the process of calculating the final value of "bL" and the process of shifting the base (in normal mode) corresponding to each section to the previous section one by one. Furthermore, if the game history basic information that was the basis for the calculation of "bL" is erased after the final value of "bL" is calculated, the storage capacity required for storing the game history basic information can be reduced.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display switches between a plurality of bases (in normal mode) corresponding to each of the plurality of sections in a predetermined order, such as going back to the previous section, and when the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT in the section being measured reaches 60,000, the display starts from "bL", which is the base (in normal mode) corresponding to the most recent section in which the measurement has just started, regardless of which section the next base (in normal mode) to be displayed in the predetermined order is. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can recognize that the number of balls passing through the discharge passage N _OUT in the section being measured has reached 60,000, and can check it preferentially from "bL".

In this embodiment, a display mode in which all segment light emitting units are turned off is used as a display mode between a display mode that displays a base (in normal mode) corresponding to one of the multiple sections and a display mode that displays a base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section. However, other display modes may be used as long as they do not display the base (in normal mode) of any section. For example, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit or a display mode in which four hyphens flash may be used. This configuration allows the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to more clearly recognize that the base (in normal mode) displayed on the information display unit 45z has been switched to the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section.

In addition, in this embodiment, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, but other display modes may be adopted. For example, a display mode in which four hyphens flash may be adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. Also, for example, a display mode in which all light-emitting parts (segment light-emitting parts _A to H and the DP light-emitting part) of the seven-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off may be adopted as a display mode corresponding to the number N OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000.

In addition, in this embodiment, the transition mode in which four hyphens are lit for 2000 ms is adopted as the transition mode when the display mode is changed based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, but other transition modes may be adopted. For example, the transition mode in which all light-emitting parts (segment light-emitting parts A to H and DP light-emitting part) of the 7-segment display constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off for 300 _ms may be adopted as the transition mode when the display mode is changed based on the number N OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000. With this configuration, the transition mode when the display mode is changed from the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to one section to the display mode displaying the base (in normal mode) corresponding to another section can be made the same as the transition mode when the display mode is changed based on the number N _OUT passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaching 60,000, so that the display mode can be changed without giving a sense of incongruity to the administrator, etc.

In addition, in this embodiment, the game history information is configured to display the base (in normal mode), but the game history information to be displayed is not limited to the base (in normal mode), and various game history information shown in the first embodiment (for example, the ratio of roles and the ratio of consecutive roles) may be displayed.

In this embodiment, the section is divided based on the number of pieces passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaching 60,000, but the section may be divided based on the satisfaction of other predetermined conditions. For example, the section may be divided based on the number of pieces passing through the discharge passage N _OUT reaching 10,000, or based on a change in the date.

<Aspect 96>
In the above-mentioned aspect 95, when the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while a base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z is configured to end the display of the base (in normal mode) being displayed even before the display duration (5,000 ms) of the base (in normal mode) has elapsed, and to start displaying in a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000. However, instead of this configuration, when the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while a base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z may be configured to start displaying in a display mode corresponding to the number N _OUT of passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000 after the display duration (5,000 ms) of the base (in normal mode) has elapsed. The configuration of this aspect will be specifically described below.

Fig. 60 is a time chart showing an example of a change in the display mode of the information display unit 45z when the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000. In Fig. 60, the bases (during normal mode) of three sections "bL", "b1", and "b2" are calculated and stored in the main RAM 64, and an example is shown in which the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage during measurement reaches 60,000 while the information display unit 45z is displaying "b1".

As described above, in this embodiment, when the number _{NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaches 60,000 while the base (in normal mode) corresponding to any section is being displayed, the information display unit 45z starts displaying in a display mode corresponding to the number NOUT of} particles passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000 after the display duration (5,000 ms) of the displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed. In this embodiment, a display mode in which four hyphens are lit is adopted as the display mode corresponding to the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the currently measured section reaching 60,000.

In the example shown in Fig. 60, while "b1" is being displayed, the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before the display duration of "b1" of 5,000 ms has elapsed, and the information display unit 45z starts displaying the "b1" in a display mode with four hyphens lit after the display duration of "b1" (5,000 ms) has elapsed, and continues this display mode for 2,000 ms. Thereafter, as in mode 95 described above, cyclic display starts from "bL" which has just started measurement.

In this embodiment, if the number _NOUT of particles passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 before 300 ms has elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements constituting the information display unit 45z are turned off, the information display unit 45z transitions to a display mode in which the above-mentioned four hyphens are lit after 300 ms has elapsed since the start of the display mode in which all of the light-emitting elements are turned off.

As explained above, in this embodiment, even if the number N _OUT of balls passing through the discharge passage in the section being measured reaches 60,000 while the base (in normal mode) is being displayed, the display of the base (in normal mode) continues until the display duration of the displayed base (in normal mode) has elapsed. This prevents, for example, a situation in which the display of the base (in normal mode) ends just as the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 checks the displayed base (in normal mode) and attempts to transfer it to an inspection sheet, making it impossible to transfer the base (in normal mode) to the inspection sheet.

<Aspect 97>
The following process flow may be adopted as a process flow for realizing the configuration described in the above-mentioned aspect 93 in which all the light-emitting parts (segment light-emitting parts A to G and the DP light-emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) when the power is turned on, and then are synchronously blinked for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). A specific description will be given below.

Figures 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 97 of the first embodiment when the power is ON. The main difference from the main processing shown in Figure 51 is that after the power recovery processing is executed, a process is executed to light and blink all the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z (lighting and blinking process).

In step S11801, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S11802, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11803, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is transmitted to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11803, the process proceeds to step S11804.

In step S11804, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S11804 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11804: YES), the process proceeds to step S11805, where a RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11806, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64 or not. If it is determined in step S11806 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11806: YES), the process proceeds to step S11808, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11804 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11804: NO), and if it is determined in step S11806 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11806: NO), the process proceeds to step S11807, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11807, the process proceeds to step S11808.

In step S11808, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11808 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11808: NO), the process proceeds to step S11809, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11809 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11809: NO), proceed to step S11810 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S11810, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11810: NO), the process proceeds to step S11811, where a power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11811, the process proceeds to step S11812, where the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11812-2, where a lighting and blinking process is executed to light and blink all the light-emitting parts (segment light-emitting parts A to G and DP light-emitting part) that constitute the information display part 45z. In the lighting and blinking process, all of the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then synchronously blink for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S11812-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11810 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11810: YES), the process proceeds to step S11813, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S11813, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11809 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11809: YES), the process proceeds to step S11814, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11814: NO), the process proceeds to step S11815, where the setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, so the explanation is omitted. After executing step S11815, the process proceeds to step S11816, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11817, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11817-2, where the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process is executed. After executing step S11817-2, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11814 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11814: YES), the process proceeds to step S11818, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S11818, the process proceeds to step S11829 (Figure 62) described below.

If it is determined in step S11808 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11808: YES), proceed to step S11819 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11819 that at least one of the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch is not ON (step S11819: NO), the process proceeds to step S11820, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11820: NO), the process proceeds to step S11821.

In step S11821, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is sent to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it outputs a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46. After executing step S11821, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11820 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11820: YES), the process proceeds to step S11822, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S11822, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described below.

If it is determined in step S11819 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11819: YES), proceed to step S11823 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11823: NO), the process proceeds to step S11824, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11825, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11825, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11823 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11823: YES), the process proceeds to step S11826, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11826, the process proceeds to step S11827.

In step S11827, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process for erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information and various control information indicating the game state, the setting information of the lottery setting is also erased. Here, the reason for executing the second RAM clear process, which erases the setting information, instead of the first RAM clear process, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be explained. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal, for example, it may be rewritten to setting information unintended by the administrator due to noise, or a number outside the predetermined range may be stored even though the setting information can only take a number within a predetermined range (for example, a number from 1 to 6). In addition, in the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second RAM clear process. Then, the process proceeds to step S11828, where the setting change process is executed. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, so the explanation is omitted. After executing step S11828, the process proceeds to step S11829 (FIG. 62), which will be described later.

In the processing after step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, and power outage monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) are executed, and the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is also executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the game progress mode in which the game can progress is entered. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, various random number update processing and power outage monitoring processing are executed, but the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting is not executed, so the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) is not executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode in which the game can progress is not entered. In this state, the administrator can turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it to the ON side, and turn on the power while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. The process from step S11829 onwards is explained in detail below.

In step S11829 shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11829: NO), the process proceeds to step S11830, where an interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S11831, where an interrupt prohibition setting is executed to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S11832, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11829 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11829: YES), the process proceeds to step S11832 without executing the processes of steps S11830 and S11831.

In step S11832, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is added by 1. Then, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with the added numerical information. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with 0. After executing step S11832, the process proceeds to step S11833.

In step S11833, a power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage falls below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned OFF or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM judgment value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, without proceeding to step S11834 described later, an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the above-mentioned RAM judgment value in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S11833 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S11834.

In step S11834, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11834: NO), the process proceeds to step S11835 described above, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11831 described above, where an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11834 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11834: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11835 where the interrupt permission setting is performed, but returns to step S11832 where various random number update processes are performed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process is executed, so that it is possible to check whether there is a light-emitting part that does not light due to a malfunction such as a broken wire among the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z, and to check whether there is a light-emitting part that is constantly lit due to a malfunction and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light-emitting part G and the segment light-emitting part D of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 do not light due to a malfunction, even if control is executed to display "3" on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3, the segment light-emitting part G and the segment light-emitting part D do not light up, so that "7" is displayed on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3. As a result, the administrator may misinterpret, for example, the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z. In contrast, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to check whether there is a light-emitting part that does not light due to a malfunction such as a broken wire among the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z, and to check whether there is a light-emitting part that is constantly lit due to a malfunction and does not turn off, so that such misinterpretation can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the lighting and blinking process is executed in response to the execution of the power recovery process. Therefore, when the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 turns the power switch of the pachinko machine 10, which is powered ON, OFF once and then ON again, the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed, and the lighting and blinking process is executed in response to the execution of the power recovery process. In other words, the manager or inspector can cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the lighting and blinking process by the simple operation of turning the power switch OFF and ON. Furthermore, when the manager or inspector turns the power switch OFF and ON to cause the pachinko machine 10 to execute the lighting and blinking process, the power recovery process is executed in the pachinko machine 10, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (such as the state of the high probability mode flag) is also maintained. Therefore, according to this embodiment, even if a player is playing the pachinko machine 10, the lighting and flashing process can be executed without causing any disadvantage to the player, and the manager or inspector can inspect whether there are any light-emitting elements that do not light up or turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 98>
The following process flow may be adopted as a process flow for realizing the configuration described in the above-mentioned aspect 93 in which all the light-emitting parts (segment light-emitting parts A to G and the DP light-emitting part) constituting the information display part 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) when the power is turned on, and then are synchronously blinked for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). A specific description will be given below.

Figures 63 and 64 are flowcharts showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of aspect 98 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on. The main difference from the main processing shown in Figures 61 and 62 is that the lighting blinking processing is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed, rather than the lighting blinking processing being executed in response to the execution of the power recovery processing.

In step S11901, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S11902, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S11903, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11903, the process proceeds to step S11904.

In step S11904, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the registers of the main CPU 62x is saved to a specified area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for restoring the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S11904 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S11904: YES), the process proceeds to step S11905, where a RAM judgment value of the main RAM 64 is calculated. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S11906, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64 or not. If it is determined in step S11906 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S11906: YES), the process proceeds to step S11908, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11904 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S11904: NO), and if it is determined in step S11906 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S11906: NO), the process proceeds to step S11907, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF or when the power recovery flag is ON but the RAM judgment value is not normal, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal. After executing step S11907, the process proceeds to step S11908.

In step S11908, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S11908 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S11908: NO), the process proceeds to step S11909, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. The frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is open relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is open relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S11909 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S11909: NO), proceed to step S11910 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11910: NO), the process proceeds to step S11911, where power recovery processing is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Specifically, in the power recovery processing, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S11911, the process proceeds to step S11912, where the power recovery flag of the main RAM 64 is set to OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11910 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11910: YES), the process proceeds to step S11913, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S11913, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11909 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11909: YES), the process proceeds to step S11914, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11914: NO), the process proceeds to step S11915, where a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which the administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) are the same as those of the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 53, so an explanation is omitted. After executing step S11915, the process proceeds to step S11916, where the above-mentioned power recovery process is executed to restore the state at the time of the previous power OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11917, where the power recovery flag is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11914 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11914: YES), the process proceeds to step S11918, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal to be output from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11918, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64) described later.

If it is determined in step S11908 described above that the RAM clear button is ON (step S11908: YES), proceed to step S11919 and determine whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON.

If it is determined in step S11919 that at least one of the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch is not ON (step S11919: NO), the process proceeds to step S11920, where it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11920: NO), the process proceeds to step S11921.

In step S11921, the first RAM clear process is executed. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased and the setting information is maintained as is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound such as "RAM has been cleared." After executing step S11921, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11920 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11920: YES), the process proceeds to step S11922, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S11922, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (Figure 64) described later.

If it is determined in step S11919 described above that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S11919: YES), proceed to step S11923 and determine whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

If it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11923: NO), the process proceeds to step S11924, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S11925, where the setting change process is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as those of the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted. After executing step S11925, the process proceeds to step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11923 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11923: YES), the process proceeds to step S11926, where a RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "There is a RAM abnormality" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S11926, the process proceeds to step S11927.

In step S11927, the second RAM clear process is executed. The second RAM clear process is a process for erasing (clearing to 0) all information stored in the main RAM 64, including the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the second RAM clear process is executed, in addition to various flag information and various control information indicating the game state, the setting information of the lottery setting is also erased. Here, the reason for executing the second RAM clear process, which erases the setting information, instead of the first RAM clear process, when the RAM abnormality flag is ON will be explained. When the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 may not be normal, for example, it may be rewritten to setting information unintended by the administrator due to noise, or a number outside the predetermined range may be stored even though the setting information can only take a number within a predetermined range (for example, a number from 1 to 6). In addition, in the second RAM clear process of this embodiment, after the setting information is erased, "1" is stored as the initial value of the setting information. In addition, the RAM abnormality flag is also turned OFF by the second RAM clear process. Then, proceed to step S11928 and execute the setting change process. The details of the setting change process (setting change mode) are the same as the setting change process shown in FIG. 52, so the explanation will be omitted. After executing step S11928, proceed to the processing of step S11928-2 (FIG. 64) described later.

In step S11928-2 shown in FIG. 64, a lighting and blinking process is executed, which is a process for lighting and blinking all the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) that make up the information display unit 45z. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then synchronously blinked for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S11928-2, proceed to step S11929.

In the processing from step S11929 onwards, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting, interrupt prohibition setting, various random number update processing, and power failure monitoring processing (power supply monitoring processing) are executed, and the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described above is also executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the game progress mode in which the game can progress is entered. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, various random number update processing and power failure monitoring processing are executed, but the timer interrupt processing interrupt permission setting is not executed, so the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 27) described above is not executed. That is, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the game progress mode in which the game can progress is not entered. In this state, the administrator can turn off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, insert the setting key into the setting keyhole and turn it to the ON side, and turn on the power while holding down the RAM clear button to start the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. Below, the processing from step S11929 onwards will be specifically explained.

In step S11929 shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11929: NO), the process proceeds to step S11930, where an interrupt permission setting is executed to permit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S11931, where an interrupt prohibition setting is executed to prohibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. Then, the process proceeds to step S11932, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11929 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11929: YES), the process proceeds to step S11932 without executing the processes of steps S11930 and S11931.

In step S11932, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64, and the read numerical information is added by 1. Then, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with the added numerical information. If the read numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, the counter from which the information was read is overwritten with 0. After executing step S11932, the process proceeds to step S11933.

In step S11933, a power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage falls below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned off or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, a RAM judgment value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, without proceeding to step S11934 described later, an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. Note that the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main control device 60 even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time during which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the RAM judgment value described above in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S11933 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S11934.

In step S11934, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S11934: NO), the process proceeds to step S11935 described above, where an interrupt permission setting is performed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Thereafter, the process returns to step S11931 described above, where an interrupt prohibition setting is performed to prohibit timer interrupt processing from occurring. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11934 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S11934: YES), the process does not proceed to step S11935 where the interrupt permission setting is performed, but returns to step S11932 where various random number update processes are performed.

As described above, according to this embodiment, the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process is executed, so that it is possible to check whether there is a light-emitting part that does not light due to a malfunction such as a broken wire among the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z, and to check whether there is a light-emitting part that is constantly lit due to a malfunction and does not turn off. For example, if the segment light-emitting part G and the segment light-emitting part D of the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 do not light due to a malfunction, even if control is being executed to display "3" on the right middle 7-segment display 45z3, the segment light-emitting part G and the segment light-emitting part D will not light up, and the right middle 7-segment display 45z3 will display "7". As a result, the administrator may misinterpret, for example, the numerical information of the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z. In contrast, according to the configuration of this embodiment, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, it is possible to check whether there is a light-emitting part that does not light due to a malfunction such as a broken wire among the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z, and to check whether there is a light-emitting part that is constantly lit due to a malfunction and does not turn off, so that such misinterpretation can be suppressed.

In addition, in this embodiment, one of the multiple branched processing flows is executed based on the operation mode of each operation unit (RAM clear switch, setting key) when the power switch is turned ON and the supply of power from the outside is started. For example, if the RAM clear switch is ON, the setting key is on the ON side, and the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 are open when the power is turned ON, a processing flow including a setting change process is executed. And in this embodiment, the lighting flashing process is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed. Therefore, according to this embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to execute the lighting flashing process regardless of the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned ON. Specifically, for example, when a manufacturer ships a pachinko machine 10, the manufacturer may turn on the RAM clear switch, turn on the setting key, and open the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 before turning on the power to perform a setting change process (setting change mode) on the pachinko machine 10 to check whether the lottery setting can be changed. Even in this case, the pachinko machine 10 performs the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process after performing the setting change process (setting change mode), so that the manufacturer's manager can check whether there is a light-emitting unit that does not light up or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 after checking the operation in the setting change mode. Therefore, the inspection efficiency at the time of shipping the pachinko machine 10 can be dramatically improved. In this way, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether there is a light-emitting unit that does not light up or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z, regardless of the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on. In other words, it is possible to prevent situations where the test cannot be performed depending on the operation mode accepted by each operation unit when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the power switch is turned ON and the supply of power from the outside is started, the process group from step S11901 to step S11928-2 of the main process (FIGS. 63 and 64) including the lighting and blinking process is executed, and after the execution of the process group is completed, the interrupt permission setting is executed to repeatedly execute the process group included in the timer interrupt process, so that the lighting and blinking process can be executed only once after the supply of power from the outside is started. If the lighting and blinking process were configured to be included in the process group of the timer interrupt process, the lighting and blinking process would be executed repeatedly, which would increase the processing load of the pachinko machine 10. Furthermore, if the lighting and blinking process is executed repeatedly, there is a risk that the period during which various information can be displayed on the information display unit 45z will be shortened. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the lighting and blinking process can be executed only once after the supply of external power has begun, which reduces the processing load on the pachinko machine 10 and allows the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 to check whether any of the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are not lit or not turned off due to a malfunction.

According to this embodiment, after the power switch is turned on and the supply of power from the outside is started, the lighting and blinking process is executed before the timer interrupt process (FIG. 27) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting. Therefore, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether there is a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z before the game can proceed on the pachinko machine 10. If the lighting and blinking process is executed after the timer interrupt process is started, the player can start playing on the pachinko machine 10 before the manager or inspector can inspect the information display unit 45z. In this case, after the player starts playing on the pachinko machine 10, the manager or inspector may inspect the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 and discover a malfunction in the light-emitting part of the information display unit 45z. If an administrator or inspector finds a problem with the light-emitting part of the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10, it becomes necessary to have the player suspend or stop playing in order to repair or replace the information display unit 45z. This may result in the player feeling very uncomfortable. In contrast, according to this embodiment, the administrator or inspector can inspect the information display unit 45z of the pachinko machine 10 before the player is able to start playing on the pachinko machine 10, which makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable by having to suspend or stop playing.

In addition, according to this embodiment, after the lighting and blinking process is executed, the interrupt permission setting is executed to execute the game history process included in the timer interrupt process (step S10616 in FIG. 27). That is, in this embodiment, the lighting and blinking process is executed before the game history information of the base (in normal mode) etc. is displayed on the information display unit 45z, so that the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether there is a light-emitting unit that does not light or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z before the game history information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from checking the game history information displayed on the information display unit 45z without noticing that there is a light-emitting unit that does not light or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z.

In this embodiment, the lighting and blinking process (step S11928-2 in FIG. 64) is executed after the setting change process (setting change mode) (steps S11925 and S11928 in FIG. 63). However, instead of this configuration, the lighting and blinking process may be executed before the setting information of the lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting change process (setting change mode). Specifically, for example, the lighting and blinking process in step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting and blinking process may be executed prior to the processing of step S11908 in FIG. 63 (processing for determining the state of the RAM clear button). With this configuration, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can inspect whether there is any light-emitting part that does not light up or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the information display unit 45z before the setting information is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to prevent a user from checking the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z without realizing that one of the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z is not operating normally due to a malfunction. Similarly, with this configuration, the lighting and blinking process is executed before the setting information for the lottery setting is displayed on the information display unit 45z in the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), so it is possible to prevent a user from checking the setting information displayed on the information display unit 45z without realizing that one of the multiple light-emitting units that make up the information display unit 45z is not operating normally due to a malfunction.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lighting blinking process is executed in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64, regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed, but this is not limited to this configuration, and other configurations may be adopted to execute the lighting blinking process regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed. For example, the lighting blinking process in step S11928-2 of FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting blinking process may be executed prior to the execution of the processing in step S11908 of FIG. 63 (processing for determining the state of the RAM clear button). Also, for example, the lighting blinking process in step S11928-2 in FIG. 64 may be omitted, and the lighting blinking process may be performed between step S11909 and step S11910 in FIG. 63, between step S11909 and step S11914 in FIG. 63, between step S11919 and step S11920 in FIG. 63, and between step S11919 and step S11923 in FIG. 63.

<Aspect 99>
In the above-mentioned aspects 97 and 98, the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process is adopted as an inspection process for an administrator or inspector to check whether there is a light-emitting part that does not light or does not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting parts that constitute the information display unit 45z. However, the inspection process is not limited to the lighting and blinking process, and various control modes can be adopted. For example, as the inspection process, control for turning on and off all the light-emitting parts that constitute the information display unit 45z at the same time may be executed without executing control for turning on and off the light-emitting parts, and then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, control for turning on and off all the light-emitting parts at the same time may be executed. Also, for example, as the inspection process, control for turning on and off all the light-emitting parts that constitute the information display unit 45z in sequence may be executed. In other words, as the inspection process, control for turning on and off all the light-emitting parts that constitute the information display unit 45z at least once each from an unlit state to a lit state and then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, switching to an unlit state may be executed. By executing an inspection process for this type of control, the manager or inspector of the pachinko machine 10 can check whether there are any light-emitting elements that do not light up or do not turn off due to a malfunction among the multiple light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z.

<Aspect 100>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting check mode, various main processes and timer interrupt processes can be adopted. Specific explanations will be given below.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) of the first embodiment mode 100 when the power is turned on.

In step S12001, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emitting control device 90, display control device 100, payout control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. Then, the process proceeds to step S12002, where an internal function register setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12003, where a process is executed to notify that the power has been turned on and the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, a start command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has started up is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. When the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the start command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up. Specifically, for example, a voice such as "starting up" or a predetermined alarm sound is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12003, the process proceeds to step S12004.

In step S12004, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12004: YES), the process proceeds to step S12005, where a RAM judgment value is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S12006, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S12006: YES), the process proceeds to step S12007.

In step S12007, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6", it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range. On the other hand, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than a numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. In step S12007, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: YES), the process proceeds to step S12008.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the above-mentioned step S12004 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), if it is determined in the above-mentioned step S12006 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S12006: NO), or if it is determined in the above-mentioned step S12007 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12015, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM judgment value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Below, we will explain the process flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, and then we will explain the process flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S12008, it is determined whether the setting change in progress flag is ON. The setting change in progress flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting change process (setting change mode) described below is started, and is set OFF when the setting change process (setting change mode) is ended. Here, a situation in which the setting change in progress flag is ON in step S12008 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described below was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on, and the setting change in progress flag remains ON because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting change process (setting change mode) was being executed.

If it is determined in step S12008 that the setting change in progress flag is ON (step S12008: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12008 that the setting change in progress flag is not ON (step S12008: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009.

In step S12009, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12009 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12009: NO), the process proceeds to step S12010, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. Note that "setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and positioned on the ON side. In addition, the frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S12010 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12010: NO), proceed to step S12011.

In step S12011, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described below starts, and is set OFF when the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, a situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12011 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described below was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on, and the setting confirmation flag remains ON because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was being executed.

If it is determined in step S12011 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12011: NO), the process proceeds to step S12013, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12010 that the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON (step S12010: YES), and if it is determined in step S12011 that the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12011: YES), the process proceeds to step S12012. That is, if the RAM clear button is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON, and if the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on and the setting confirmation flag remains ON because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred during the execution of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the process proceeds to step S12012.

In step S12012, a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12012, the process proceeds to step S12013.

In step S12013, a power restoration process is executed to restore the state when the power was last turned off. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S12013, the process proceeds to step S12014, where the power restoration flag of the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12009 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12009: YES), the process proceeds to step S12017, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step S12017 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S12017: YES), the process proceeds to step S12018, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12017 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. In step S12019, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process proceeds to step S12020 and executes the first RAM clear process. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased and the setting information is maintained as it is. In addition, in this embodiment, in the first RAM clear process, a first RAM clear process execution command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is transmitted to the sound and light emission control device 90. When the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the first RAM clear process execution command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it outputs a sound such as "RAM has been cleared" from the speaker 46. After executing step S12020, proceed to step S12022, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process proceeds to step S12021, where the RAM abnormality notification process is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification process, a RAM abnormality command, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, for example, a sound such as "RAM abnormal. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12021, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this explanation, since the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the process does not proceed to step S12021.

In step S12022, a lighting and blinking process is executed, which is a process for lighting and blinking all the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) that make up the information display unit 45z. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then synchronously blinked for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S12022, proceed to step S12023.

In step S12023, an interrupt permission setting is executed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After that, an infinite loop is repeated while waiting, and the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, we will explain the process flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015.

As described above, if it is determined in step S12004 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12004: NO), if it is determined in step S12006 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S12006: NO), or if it is determined in step S12007 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12015, where the RAM abnormality flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S12016.

In step S12016, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12016: YES), the process proceeds to step S12017, where it is determined whether the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step S12017 that the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON (step S12017: YES), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned step S12018, where the above-mentioned setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12016 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12016: NO), and if it is determined in step S12017 that at least one of the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch is not ON (step S12017: NO), the process proceeds to step S12019.

In step S12019, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12019: NO), the process proceeds to step S12020, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. After executing step S12020, the process proceeds to step S12022. However, in the flow of this explanation, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to step S12020.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12019 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12019: YES), the process proceeds to step S12021, where the RAM abnormality notification process described above is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12022.

In step S12022, the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process is executed. After executing step S12022, the process proceeds to step S12023, where an interrupt permission setting is executed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Thereafter, the process waits by repeating an infinite loop process, and the timer interrupt process described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to turn the power switch ON with the RAM clear switch pressed (ON state) and with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON. Also, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is to turn the power switch ON with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF state) and with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON. Also, the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is to turn the power switch ON with the RAM clear switch pressed (ON state) and with any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch turned OFF.

Below is a summary of an example of the process flow that is realized by executing the main process described above.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, and S12007). If an operation has been performed to execute the setting change process (setting change mode), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step S12018) regardless of whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and regardless of the state of the setting checking flag.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met and the setting change flag is ON (step S12008: YES), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step S12018) regardless of whether an operation for executing a setting change process (setting change mode), an operation for executing a setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), or an operation for executing a first RAM clear process has been performed.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12008: NO) and an operation has been performed to execute the first RAM clear process (step S12009: YES, step S12017: NO, step S12019: NO), and the first RAM clear process is executed (step S12020) regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12008: NO). If an operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12009: NO, step S12010: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12008: NO). Even if no operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12011: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12012).

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015), the first RAM clear process is not executed and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed (step S12021) even if an operation for executing the first RAM clear process has been performed.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12004, S12006, S12007). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015), even if an operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not executed and a RAM abnormality notification process is executed (step S12021).

Next, we will explain the details of the setting change process shown in step S12018 of Figure 65.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S12018 in Figure 65.

In step S12101, the setting change in progress flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting change in progress flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, and is also a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. After executing step S12101, proceed to step S12102.

In step S12102, the initial setting process at the start of the setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. In this embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. After executing step S12102, the process proceeds to step S12103.

In step S12103, a setting change notification start process is executed. In the setting change notification start process, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has been started, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. When the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it outputs a sound indicating that the setting change mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it causes a sound such as "setting change mode in progress" to be repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the voice and light emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode in progress", and the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "setting change mode in progress". In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification start process, information indicating that the setting change mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12103, proceed to step S12104.

In step S12104, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is copied to an update setting information storage area, which is an area other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S12104, proceed to step S12105.

In step S12105, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control is started to display the read update setting information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the update setting information is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12106, and it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". In step S12106, if it is determined that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12106: YES), the process proceeds to step S12108. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12106 that the update setting information is not within the predetermined range (step S12106: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information, or if information other than a number is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S12107, where the update setting information is changed to its initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S12108.

In step S12108, it is determined whether the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a high level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and a signal indicating a low level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from a high level to a low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has become the OFF side. In step S12108, if it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: NO), the process proceeds to step S12109, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. In step S12109, if it is determined that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12109: YES), the process proceeds to step S12110, where the update setting information is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the updated setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the updated setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". Thereafter, the process returns to step S12106 described above, and it is determined whether the updated updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12109 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S12109: NO), the process returns to step S12106 described above without executing the processing of step S12110, and it is determined whether the updated setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S12108 described above that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12108: YES), proceed to step S12111.

In step S12111, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S12111, the process proceeds to step S12112, where control for displaying the update setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12113.

In step S12113, a setting change notification end process is executed. In the setting change notification end process, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the setting change mode described above is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting change notification end process, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended displays information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12113, proceed to step S12114. Note that after executing the setting change notification end process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information may display the setting information of the changed lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

In step S12114, a first RAM clear process is executed. In the first RAM clear process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clear process is executed, the setting change in progress flag described above is also erased (turned OFF). After executing step S12114, this setting change process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12012 of Figure 65.

Figure 67 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S12012 in Figure 65.

In step S12201, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and is also a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. After executing step S12201, proceed to step S12202.

In step S12202, the setting confirmation notification start process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification start process, a setting confirmation mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has been started, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, it outputs a sound indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress from the speaker 46. Specifically, for example, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress." In addition, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress. Specifically, for example, the audio and light emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress," and the display control device 100 that has received the command causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting confirmation mode is in progress." In addition, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

Furthermore, in the setting check notification start process, information indicating that the setting check mode has started is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has started displays information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting check mode on the management screen. After executing step S12202, the process proceeds to step S12203.

In step S12203, control is started to display the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the setting information for the lottery setting is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12204.

In step S12204, it is determined whether the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a High level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and a signal indicating a Low level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from a High level to a Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. In step S12204, if it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: NO), step S12204 is executed again. On the other hand, in step S12204, if it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12204: YES), proceed to step S12205. In other words, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S12205. When the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON side to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step S12205.

In step S12205, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, proceed to step S12206.

In step S12206, a setting confirmation notification end process is executed. In the setting confirmation notification end process, a setting confirmation mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. When the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting confirmation mode end command, it ends the various controls for notifying that the above-mentioned setting confirmation mode is in progress.

Furthermore, in the setting confirmation notification end process, information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended is sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. The hall computer, which has received the information indicating that the setting confirmation mode has ended, displays information indicating that the setting confirmation mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12206, the process proceeds to step S12207, where the setting change in progress flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Thereafter, this setting confirmation process ends.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x).

Figure 68 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 100 of the first embodiment. In this aspect, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes the timer interrupt process at a cycle of 4 ms.

In step S12301, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64 (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, etc.), a process is executed to add 1 to the read numerical information, and then a process is executed to overwrite the read-out counter with the added numerical information. Note that if the read-out numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process is executed to overwrite the read-out counter with 0. After executing step S12301, proceed to step S12302.

In step S12302, a power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage falls below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned OFF or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, the process does not proceed to step S12303 described later, but an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and becomes inoperable. In addition, the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control device 60, even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the above-mentioned RAM judgment value in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S12302 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S12303.

In step S12303, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12303: NO), the process proceeds to step S12304. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12303 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12303: YES), the process from step S12304 onwards is not executed and this timer interrupt process is terminated. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process from step S12304 onwards to enable game progress is not executed, and the system is configured not to transition to a game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Below, the process from step S12304 onwards, which is the process to enable game progress, is explained.

In step S12304, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the large prize opening 36a to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when information is set to switch the electric role 34a of the second start opening 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the electric role drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, proceed to step S12305.

In step S12305, a read process is executed. In the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes. Then, the process proceeds to step S12306.

In step S12306, the signals received from each goal detection sensor 44a to 44h are read, and goal detection processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. The goal detection processing is the same as the goal detection processing shown in FIG. 28, so a detailed explanation is omitted. After executing step S12306, proceed to step S12307.

In step S12307, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S12308, where a prize ball command output setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12309.

In step S12309, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S12309, the process proceeds to step S12310.

In step S12310, a ball entry process for the through gate is executed in response to the entry (passage) of a game ball into the through gate 35. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variable type counter CS is obtained based on the determination that a game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35, and the obtained counter value is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S12310, the process proceeds to step S12311.

In step S12311, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery is performed, and display control of the first symbol display unit 37a and the second symbol display unit 37b is performed. After executing step S12311, the process proceeds to step S12312.

In step S12312, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. In the game state transition process, a process is executed to transition the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S12312, the process proceeds to step S12313.

In step S12313, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role 34a is to be opened (electric role opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role 34a is to be opened, the electric role 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12313, the process proceeds to step S12314.

In step S12314, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process is executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operating handle 25. After executing step S12314, the process proceeds to step S12315.

In step S12315, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step S12315, proceed to step S12316.

In step S12316, a game history process is executed to calculate and display game history information. The game history process is the same as the game history process shown in FIG. 29, so a detailed description is omitted. After step S12316 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

As explained above, this embodiment has the following advantages in addition to those explained in the other embodiments above.

According to this embodiment, the setting change mode is started based on the reception of an operation to execute the setting change mode, the setting change flag is set to ON when the setting change mode is started, and the setting change flag is transitioned to OFF when the setting change mode is terminated. The main RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting change flag even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, the setting change flag stored in the main RAM 64 is maintained in ON state.

According to this aspect, the setting change mode is started based on the determination that the setting change in progress flag is ON when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside (step S12008 in FIG. 65). That is, according to this aspect, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed, the setting change mode will be started even if an operation to execute the setting change mode has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, the administrator can eliminate the trouble of having to perform operations to execute the setting change mode again after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed in order to start the setting change mode again on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, there is a possibility that the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will be in a state that the administrator did not intend. However, according to this embodiment, when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is resumed, the setting change mode is started without the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 performing any operation to execute the setting change mode again, so it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from being overlooked and left in a state that the administrator did not intend.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the setting check mode is started based on the reception of an operation to execute the setting check mode, the setting check flag is set to ON when the setting check mode is started, and the setting check flag is transitioned to OFF when the setting check mode is terminated. The main RAM 64 can maintain the state of the setting check flag even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting check mode is being executed because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, the setting check flag stored in the main RAM 64 is maintained in ON state.

According to this aspect, the setting check mode is started based on the determination that the setting check flag is ON when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started from the outside (step S12011 in FIG. 65). That is, according to this aspect, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off while the setting check mode is being executed, and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed, the setting check mode will be started even if an operation to execute the setting check mode has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off from the outside while the setting check mode is being executed, the administrator can avoid the trouble of having to perform operations to execute the setting check mode again after the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed in order to start the setting check mode again on the pachinko machine 10.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when the setting change mode is started, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the same information as the setting information is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 as update setting information. Then, by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button, the setting information for update stored in the setting information for update of the main RAM 64 is updated, and when the setting change mode is terminated, the same information as the setting information for update is stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 as setting information. Therefore, even if the supply of power from the outside is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 can be maintained at the value before the setting change mode is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the supply of power from the outside being cut off during the execution of the setting change mode. A specific description will be given below.

If a configuration is adopted in which update setting information is not used while the setting change mode is being executed, and the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is directly changed by accepting the operation of pressing the setting change button, if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the setting information is a value different from that intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting change mode is being executed, the setting information for the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 will have a value different from that intended by the administrator.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is not changed until the setting change mode ends, and the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is changed. Therefore, even if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the update setting information is a value different from the value intended by the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 during the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is maintained at the value before the setting change mode was started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the external power supply being cut off during the setting change mode.

In addition, according to this embodiment, while the setting change mode is being executed, the update setting information stored in the update information storage area of the main RAM 64 is displayed on the information display section 45z, so that the administrator can press the setting change button while checking the update setting information displayed on the information display section 45z.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, when the supply of external power is started, it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON, and the game progress process (the process from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) that allows the game to proceed is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed while the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, which would cause a malfunction in the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 10. As a result, it is possible to prevent, for example, unexpected losses from being caused to players or managers.

Furthermore, according to this aspect, when the supply of power from the outside is started, it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON, and the first RAM clear process is not executed even if an operation to execute the first RAM clear process is received. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a malfunction caused by the first RAM clear process being executed when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. This will be explained in detail below.

If a configuration is adopted in which the first RAM clear process is executed even when it is determined that the setting information is not within the specified range, even the RAM abnormality flag, which is information indicating that it has been determined that the setting information is not within the specified range, will be erased (turned OFF) from among the various information stored in the main RAM 64, and even though the setting information is not within the specified range, after the first RAM clear process is executed, a game progress process (the process from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) that assumes that the setting information is within the specified range will be executed, which may result in a malfunction.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the first RAM clear process is not executed even if an operation to execute the first RAM clear process is received, so that it is possible to prevent the first RAM clear process from being executed even when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, and to prevent the game progress process from being executed on the assumption that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions caused by the first RAM clear process being executed when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

In addition, according to this aspect, when the supply of power from the outside is started, it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range, and if it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the setting confirmation mode is not executed even if an operation to execute the setting confirmation mode is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation mode that displays the setting information from being executed even if the setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

Also, according to this embodiment, when the supply of power from the outside is cut off, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group (including the setting information in this embodiment) stored in the main RAM 64, and a RAM judgment value (hereinafter also referred to as the first RAM judgment value) that is the result of the predetermined calculation is stored in the main RAM 64. Then, when the supply of power from the outside is started, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group (including the setting information in this embodiment, but not including the first RAM judgment value) stored in the main RAM 64, and it is determined whether or not the RAM judgment value (hereinafter also referred to as the second RAM judgment value) that is the result of the predetermined calculation matches the first RAM judgment value stored in the main RAM 64. Furthermore, in this embodiment, if it is determined that the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match, it is determined whether or not the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. If it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006 in FIG. 65: YES) and that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007 in FIG. 65: YES), the RAM abnormality flag is not turned ON, and the game progress process (the process from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is executed. In other words, if it is determined that the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match (step S12006 in FIG. 65: YES) but that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12007 in FIG. 65: NO), the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON (step S12015 in FIG. 65), and the game progress process (the process from step S12304 to step S12316 in FIG. 68) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed even if the second RAM determination value and the first RAM determination value match but the setting information is not within the specified range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction caused by the game progress process being executed even if the setting information is not within the specified range. The details are explained below.

If the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match, it is highly likely that the contents of the specified information group stored in the main RAM 64 when the external power supply is started are the same as the contents of the specified information group stored in the main RAM 64 when the previous power supply was cut off, and it is highly likely that the specified information group stored in the main RAM 64 was maintained normally even when the external power supply was cut off. However, even if the specified information group stored in the main RAM 64 is not maintained normally, the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value may coincidentally match.

For this reason, if a configuration were adopted in which it was determined whether the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value matched each other but whether the setting information was a numerical value within a predetermined range was not determined, even if the setting information was a numerical value within the predetermined range, the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value could coincidentally match, and game progress processing could be executed. This could result in a fatal malfunction in the progress of the game.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the game progress process is executed based on the determination that the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match and that the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In other words, when the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match but the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, the game progress process is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress process from being executed even when the second RAM judgment value and the first RAM judgment value match but the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions caused by the game progress process being executed even when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of the transition of the setting key (keyhole) from the ON state to the OFF state while the setting change mode is being executed (step S12108 in FIG. 66: YES), so it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from ending immediately after it has started. This will be explained in detail below.

For example, a description will be given of a case where a configuration different from the present embodiment is adopted, in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state. In the case where this configuration is adopted, if the setting change mode is initiated based on an operation for starting the setting change mode, including the setting key (keyhole) being in the ON state, the setting change mode continues until the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON state to the OFF state. However, if the setting change mode is initiated based on the setting change flag being ON when power supply is initiated, the setting change mode may be initiated with the setting key (keyhole) in the OFF state. In this case, immediately after the setting change mode is initiated, it is detected that the setting key (keyhole) is in the OFF state, and the setting change mode is terminated. In other words, the setting change mode is terminated immediately after it is initiated, making it difficult to change the setting information of the lottery setting in the setting change mode.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of the transition of the setting key (keyhole) from the ON state to the OFF state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is started with the setting key (keyhole) in the OFF state, the setting change mode will continue until the administrator of the pachinko machine 10 transitions the setting key (keyhole) from the OFF state to the ON state, and then transitions it from the ON state to the OFF state again. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is started with the setting key (keyhole) in the OFF state, it is possible to avoid the setting change mode being terminated immediately after it is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being terminated immediately after it is started, making it difficult to change the setting information of the lottery setting.

In addition, according to this embodiment, even if the setting change mode is started because the setting change flag is ON when power supply is started, only a person who has the setting key can end the setting change mode. Therefore, the security of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, according to this embodiment, the setting change mode is not only started based on an operation to start the setting change mode, including the setting key (keyhole) being in the ON state, but also based on the setting change flag being ON when power supply is started. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the setting key (keyhole) is in the ON state, but also when the setting key (keyhole) is not in the ON state.

In this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change mode is to press the RAM clear switch (to the ON state), turn the power switch ON with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON, but various operations can be used for executing the setting change mode. For example, the operation for executing the setting change mode can be to press the RAM clear switch (to the ON state), turn the setting key (keyhole) ON, and turn the power switch ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting check mode is to turn on the power switch with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF state) and with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON, but various operations can be used as the operation for executing the setting check mode. For example, the operation for executing the setting check mode can be to turn on the power switch with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF state) and with the setting key (keyhole) turned ON.

In addition, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is to turn the power switch ON while the RAM clear switch is pressed (ON state) and any one of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch is OFF, but various operations can be used as the operation for executing the first RAM clear process. For example, the operation for executing the first RAM clear process may be to turn the power switch ON while the RAM clear switch is pressed (ON state) and the setting key (keyhole) is OFF.

In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is such that the setting information is included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum value), but instead of this configuration, the configuration may be such that the setting information is not included in the calculation of the RAM judgment value (checksum value).

In addition, in this embodiment, the RAM judgment value (checksum value) calculated when the power supply is cut off is stored in the main RAM 64. However, instead of this configuration, the RAM judgment value (checksum value) calculated when the power supply is cut off may be stored in a non-volatile storage means other than the main RAM 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode is started, the same information as the setting information stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored as update setting information in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, but the information stored as update setting information does not have to be exactly the same as the setting information, as long as it corresponds to the setting information. For example, if the setting information is "1", "A" may be stored as update setting information as a value corresponding to the setting information, and if the setting information is "2", "B" may be stored as update setting information as a value corresponding to the setting information.

Similarly, in this embodiment, when the setting change mode is terminated, the same information as the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is stored as setting information in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64, but the information stored as setting information does not have to be completely the same as the update setting information, as long as it corresponds to the update setting information. For example, if the update setting information is "A", "1" may be stored as the setting information as the value corresponding to the setting information, and if the update setting information is "B", "2" may be stored as the setting information as the value corresponding to the update setting information.

<Aspect 101>
Among the above-mentioned aspects, in a configuration capable of executing the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the audio and light emission control device 90 may be configured to include an RTC 97 (real-time clock) capable of measuring the current date and time. This will be described in detail below.

Figure 69 is a block diagram showing mainly the electrical configuration of the audio and light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

The audio/light emission control board 91 provided in the audio/light emission control device 90 is equipped with an MPU 92, which is a calculation device that controls the entire audio/light emission control device 90, and an RTC 97 (real-time clock) that can output current date and time information that can identify the current date and time. The MPU 92 and RTC 97 are connected via a signal line so that they can communicate with each other.

The MPU 92 is an element that incorporates a CPU 92x, a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like. The CPU 92x executes various control programs stored in the main ROM 63. The ROM 93 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 92x, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a portion of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with various table storage areas that store performance pattern tables, and the like. The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data, and the like, when the CPU 92x executes a control program. For example, a portion of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a in which various flags are stored, and a startup date and time information storage area 94b in which startup date and time information, which will be described later, is stored. It is not essential that the CPU 92x, the ROM 93, and the RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The RTC 97 has the function of measuring the current date and time, and includes an RTC control unit 97a, a register 97b, and an RTC power supply 97c.

The RTC control unit 97a uses (controls) the register 97b to perform various controls, such as keeping track of the current date and time. The register 97b has a register table made up of multiple registers, and this register table includes a timekeeping register 97b1 and a startup date and time information storage area 97b2.

The clock register 97b1 is a register for clocking the current date and time, and the register value as the current date and time information is updated every second. In this embodiment, the current date and time information in the clock register 97b1 includes information that can identify the current "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second".

The start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 is a storage area in which the current date and time information kept by the clock register 97b1 is written immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is started. Hereinafter, the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 and written to the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 is referred to as start-up date and time information. In this embodiment, the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 includes information that can identify the "year", "month", "day", "hour", "minute", and "second" at a predetermined timing after the above-mentioned pachinko machine 10 is started. The process of writing the current date and time information kept by the clock register 97b1 to the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 as start-up date and time information will be described in detail later.

The RTC power supply 97c is a power supply dedicated to the RTC 97, separate from the power supply of the pachinko machine 10, and can supply power to the RTC control unit 97a and register 97b even when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. Therefore, the clock register 97b1 can update the current date and time information even when the power supply is cut off, and the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 can hold the stored startup date and time information even when the power supply is cut off. In this embodiment, a button battery is used for the RTC power supply 97c.

The audio and light emission control board 91 is provided with input and output ports. The main control device 60 and the performance operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the audio and light emission control board 91, and the MPU 92 receives various commands from the main control device 60 and receives predetermined signals from the performance operation button 24. The speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the audio and light emission control board 91, and the display control device 100 is also connected.

The display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 is equipped with an MPU 102, which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are integrated into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 102 analyzes the various commands received from the audio and light emission control device 90 or performs predetermined calculations based on the various commands received, and controls the VDP 105 (specifically, generates internal commands for the VDP 105).

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for the background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device that serves as a liquid crystal display driver built into the pattern display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is made into an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 mediates the reading and writing of data by adjusting the timing of the MPU 102, video RAM 107, etc., and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the pattern display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as the designs displayed on the design display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap image data of various display designs, a color palette table that is referenced when determining the color to be displayed at each dot in the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide multiple character ROMs 106 and have each character ROM 106 store image data and the like. It is also possible to configure the character ROM 106 to store JPEG image data for background images stored in the program ROM 103.

Video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on pattern display device 41, and the display content of pattern display device 41 is changed by rewriting the contents of video RAM 107.

In the following, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are also referred to as the audio/light side MPU 92, audio/light side ROM 93, and audio/light side RAM 94, respectively, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also referred to as the display side MPU 102.

Figure 70 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment when the power is turned on.

In step S12401, the initial setting process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and a wait process is executed for, for example, about one second to wait for the sub-side control devices (audio/light-emission control device 90, display control device 100, dispensing control device 70, etc.) to become operable. Then, access to the main RAM 64 is permitted. After that, the process proceeds to step S12402, where the internal function register setting process is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step S12403.

In step S12403, it is determined whether the power recovery flag is ON.

Now, the power recovery flag will be explained. In this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF or a power outage occurs, various information (information indicating the game status, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (e.g., a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After the power supply from the commercial power source is cut off, the power supply is switched to a backup power source such as a capacitor. In this way, the power recovery flag is a flag for identifying whether or not information for returning to the state at the time of the previous power OFF is stored in the main RAM 64 when the power is turned on.

If it is determined in step S12403 that the power recovery flag is ON (step S12403: YES), the process proceeds to step S12404, where a RAM judgment value is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined group of information stored in the main RAM 64. In this embodiment, the checksum value of the main RAM 64 is calculated as the RAM judgment value. Then, the process proceeds to step S12405, where it is determined whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) is normal or not, that is, whether the calculated RAM judgment value (checksum value) matches the RAM judgment value (checksum value) stored in the main RAM 64. If it is determined in step S12405 that the RAM judgment value is normal (step S12405: YES), the process proceeds to step S12406.

In step S12406, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read, and it is determined whether the setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so if the setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6", it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range. On the other hand, if "0" or "7" is stored as the setting information, or if information other than a numerical value is stored due to noise or the like, it is determined that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range. In step S12406, if it is determined that the setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12406: YES), the process proceeds to step S12407.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the above-mentioned step S12403 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12403: NO), if it is determined in the above-mentioned step S12405 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S12405: NO), or if it is determined in the above-mentioned step S12406 that the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12406: NO), the process proceeds to step S12415, where the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON. In other words, the RAM abnormality flag is a flag that is set to ON when the power recovery flag is OFF, when the RAM judgment value is not normal, or when the setting information is not a numerical value within the predetermined range, and is a flag that indicates that the information stored in the main RAM 64 is not normal.

Below, we will explain the process flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, and then we will explain the process flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is ON.

In step S12407, it is determined whether the setting change in progress flag is ON. The setting change in progress flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting change process (setting change mode) described below is started, and is set OFF when the setting change process (setting change mode) is ended. Here, a situation in which the setting change in progress flag is ON in step S12407 means that the setting change process (setting change mode) described below was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on, and the setting change in progress flag remains ON because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting change process (setting change mode) was being executed.

If it is determined in step S12407 that the setting change flag is ON (step S12407: YES), the process proceeds to step S12418, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. In the setting change process (setting change mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the lottery setting on the information display unit 45z, and a process is executed to accept changes to the setting information of the lottery setting. In other words, the setting change mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can change the setting information of the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting change process (setting change mode) will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12407 that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO), the process proceeds to step S12408.

In step S12408, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12408 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12408: NO), the process proceeds to step S12409, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. Note that "setting key is ON" means that the setting key is inserted into the setting keyhole and is positioned on the ON side. In addition, the frame open switch is a switch that is ON when the inner frame 13 is in an open state relative to the outer frame 11, and the door open switch is a switch that is ON when the front door frame 14 is in an open state relative to the inner frame 13.

If it is determined in step S12409 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12409: NO), proceed to step S12410.

In step S12410, it is determined whether the setting confirmation flag is ON. The setting confirmation flag is a flag that is set ON when the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described below starts, and is set OFF when the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) ends. Here, a situation in which the setting confirmation flag is ON in step S12410 means that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) described below was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on, and the setting confirmation flag remains ON because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred while the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was being executed.

If it is determined in step S12410 that the setting confirmation flag is not ON (step S12410: NO), the process proceeds to step S12411, where a normal startup command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. The normal startup command is a command indicating that the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 60) has started up in a normal state in which the RAM is not determined to be abnormal and none of the setting change process, setting confirmation process, or first RAM clear process described below is executed. As described below, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the normal startup command, it executes a process to notify that the pachinko machine 10 has started up in a normal state. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "Starting normally" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12411, the process proceeds to step S12413 described below.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12409 that the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON (step S12409: YES), and if it is determined in step S12410 that the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12410: YES), the process proceeds to step S12412. That is, if the RAM clear button is OFF when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON, and if the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) was executed when the pachinko machine 10 was last powered on and the setting confirmation flag remains ON because the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 was turned OFF or a power outage occurred during the execution of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), the process proceeds to step S12412.

In step S12412, a setting confirmation process is executed. In the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), a process is executed to display the setting information of the current lottery setting on the information display unit 45z. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is a mode in which an administrator or the like can confirm the setting information of the current lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10. Details of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) will be described later. After executing step S12412, the process proceeds to step S12413.

In step S12413, a power restoration process is executed to restore the state when the power was last turned off. Specifically, in the power restoration process, the value of the stack pointer saved in the main RAM 64 is written to the stack pointer of the main CPU 62x, and the data saved in the main RAM 64 is restored to the register of the main CPU 62x, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main CPU 62x to the state before the power was cut off. After executing step S12413, the process proceeds to step S12414, where the power restoration flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12408 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12408: YES), the process proceeds to step S12417, where it is determined whether the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step S12417 that the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON (step S12417: YES), the process proceeds to step S12418, where the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12423, which will be described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12417 that at least one of the setting key, frame open switch, and door open switch is not ON (step S12417: NO), the process proceeds to step S12419.

In step S12419, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. In step S12419, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12419: NO), the process proceeds to step S12420 and executes the first RAM clear process. The first RAM clear process is a process of erasing (clearing to 0) the information stored in the main RAM 64 except for the setting information of the lottery setting. That is, when the first RAM clear process is executed, various flag information and various control information indicating the game state are erased, but the setting information of the lottery setting is not erased, and the setting information is maintained as it is. After executing step S12420, the process proceeds to step S12421 and transmits a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, to the sound and light emission control device 90. As will be described later, when the sound and light emission control device 90 receives the RAM clear command, it outputs a sound indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed from the speaker 46. Specifically, in this embodiment, a sound such as "The RAM of the main control device has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S12421, proceed to step S12423, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12419: YES), the process proceeds to step S12422, where a RAM abnormality command is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal. As described below, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it outputs a sound from the speaker 46 indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The RAM of the main control device is abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S12422, the process proceeds to step S12423. However, in the flow of this description, since the RAM abnormality flag is not ON, the process does not proceed to the above-mentioned step S12422.

In step S12423, a lighting and blinking process is executed, which is a process for lighting and blinking all the light-emitting elements (segment light-emitting elements A to G and DP light-emitting element) that make up the information display unit 45z. In the lighting and blinking process, all the light-emitting elements that make up the information display unit 45z are lit for a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds), and then synchronously blinked for a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds). After executing step S12423, proceed to step S12424.

In step S12424, an interrupt permission setting is executed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. After that, an infinite loop is repeated while waiting, and the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

Next, we will explain the process flow that is executed when the RAM abnormality flag is set to ON in step S12415.

As described above, if it is determined in step S12403 that the power recovery flag is not ON (step S12403: NO), if it is determined in step S12405 that the RAM judgment value is not normal (step S12405: NO), or if it is determined in step S12406 that the setting information is not a numerical value within a predetermined range (step S12406: NO), the process proceeds to step S12415, where the RAM abnormality flag is set ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S12416.

In step S12416, it is determined whether the RAM clear button is ON. If it is determined in step S12416 that the RAM clear button is ON (step S12416: YES), the process proceeds to step S12417, where it is determined whether the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON. If it is determined in step S12417 that the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON (step S12417: YES), the process proceeds to the above-mentioned step S12418, where the above-mentioned setting change process (setting change mode) is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12422. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12416 that the RAM clear button is not ON (step S12416: NO), and if it is determined in step S12417 that at least one of the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch is not ON (step S12417: NO), the process proceeds to step S12419.

In step S12419, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag described above is ON. If it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12419: NO), the process proceeds to step S12420, where the first RAM clear process described above is executed. After executing step S12420, the process proceeds to step S12421, where a RAM clear command, which is a command indicating that the first RAM clear process has been executed, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. After executing step S12421, the process proceeds to step S12422. However, in the flow of this explanation, since the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process does not proceed to the above-mentioned step S12420.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12419 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12419: YES), the process proceeds to step S12422, where a RAM abnormality command is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90, which is a command indicating that the main RAM 64 is abnormal. As described below, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the RAM abnormality command, it causes the speaker 46 to output a sound indicating that the RAM is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, it causes the speaker 46 to repeatedly output a sound such as "The RAM of the main control device is abnormal. Please start in setting change mode." After executing step S12422, the process proceeds to step S12423.

In step S12423, the above-mentioned lighting and blinking process is executed. After executing step S12423, the process proceeds to step S12424, where an interrupt permission setting is executed to allow timer interrupt processing to occur. Thereafter, an infinite loop process is repeated while waiting, and the timer interrupt processing described below is executed periodically (every 4 ms in this embodiment).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation for executing the setting change process (setting change mode) is to turn the power switch ON with the RAM clear switch pressed (ON state) and with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON. Also, the operation for executing the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is to turn the power switch ON with the RAM clear switch not pressed (OFF state) and with the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch all turned ON. Also, the operation for executing the first RAM clear process is to turn the power switch ON with the RAM clear switch pressed (ON state) and with any of the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch turned OFF.

Below is a summary of an example of the process flow that is realized by executing the main process described above.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406), but if an operation has been performed to execute the setting change process (setting change mode), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed (step S12418) regardless of whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met and the setting change flag is ON (step S12407: YES), the setting change process (setting change mode) is executed regardless of whether an operation for executing a setting change process (setting change mode), an operation for executing a setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), or an operation for executing a first RAM clear process has been performed (step S12418).

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO). If an operation has been performed to execute the first RAM clear process (step S12408: YES, step S12417: NO, step S12419: NO), the first RAM clear process is executed (step S12420) and a RAM clear command is sent (step S12421) regardless of the state of the setting confirmation flag.

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO). If an operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) (step S12408: NO, step S12409: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12412).

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406). If it is determined that the conditions for turning the RAM abnormality flag ON are not met, it is determined that the setting change flag is not ON (step S12407: NO). Even if no operation has been performed to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode), if the setting confirmation flag is ON (step S12410: YES), the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S12412).

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is set ON (step S12415), even if an operation to execute the first RAM clear process has been performed, the first RAM clear process is not executed and a RAM abnormality command is sent (step S12422).

- When power supply is started, it is determined whether the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met (steps S12403, S12405, S12406). If it is determined that the conditions for setting the RAM abnormality flag ON are met and the RAM abnormality flag is set ON (step S12415), even if an operation to execute the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has been performed, the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) is not executed and a RAM abnormality command is sent (step S12422).

Next, we will explain the details of the setting change process shown in step S12418 of Figure 70.

Figure 71 is a flowchart showing the setting change process executed by the master MPU 62 (master CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. This setting change process is executed as a subroutine of step S12418 in Figure 70.

In step S12501, a setting change mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has started, is sent to the voice and light emission control device 90. As described later, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it executes a process of notifying that the setting change mode has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, it outputs a voice such as "The setting change mode has started" from the speaker 46, and then repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" from the speaker 46. In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress. Specifically, in this embodiment, the voice and light emission control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress", and the display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress". In addition, when the voice and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

In addition, after the setting change mode start command is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has started may be configured to display information about the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode on the management screen. After executing step S12501, proceed to step S12502.

In step S12502, the setting change in progress flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting change in progress flag is a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has started, and is also a flag indicating that the setting change process (setting change mode) has not yet ended. After executing step S12502, proceed to step S12503.

In step S12503, the initial setting process at the start of the setting change is executed. In the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, the initial settings required to start the setting change process are executed. In this embodiment, in the initial setting process at the start of the setting change, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON, and if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the RAM abnormality flag is turned OFF. After executing step S12503, the process proceeds to step S12504.

In step S12504, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as update setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read setting information is copied to an update setting information storage area, which is an area other than the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S12504, proceed to step S12505.

In step S12505, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and control is started to display the read update setting information on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the update setting information is lit and displayed on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12506, and it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. In this embodiment, the setting information set in the pachinko machine 10 has six levels from "1" to "6", so it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within the range from "1" to "6". In step S12506, if it is determined that the update setting information is a numerical value within the predetermined range (step S12506: YES), the process proceeds to step S12508. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12506 that the update setting information is not within the predetermined range (step S12506: NO), for example, if "0" or "7" is stored as the update setting information, or if non-numeric information is stored due to noise or the like, the process proceeds to step S12507, where the update setting information is changed to its initial value. In this embodiment, "1" is stored as the initial value in the update setting information. Then, the process proceeds to step S12508.

In step S12508, it is determined whether the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a High level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and a signal indicating a Low level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from a High level to a Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has become the OFF side. In step S12508, if it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12508: NO), the process proceeds to step S12509, where it is determined whether the setting change button has been pressed. In step S12509, if it is determined that the setting change button has been pressed (step S12509: YES), the process proceeds to step S12510, where the update setting information is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the numerical information stored as the update setting information. However, if the setting change button is pressed when the numerical information stored as the update setting information is "6", the numerical information is updated to "1". Thereafter, the process returns to step S12506 described above, and it is determined whether the updated update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12509 that the setting change button has not been pressed (step S12509: NO), the process returns to step S12506 described above without executing the processing of step S12510, and it is determined whether the update setting information is a numerical value within a predetermined range.

If it is determined in step S12508 described above that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12508: YES), proceed to step S12511.

In step S12511, the update setting information stored in the main RAM 64 is read and saved as setting information. Specifically, in this embodiment, the update setting information stored in the update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is read, and the read update setting information is copied to the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64. After executing step S12511, the process proceeds to step S12512, where control for displaying the update setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12513.

In step S12513, a first RAM clear process is executed. In the first RAM clear process, information other than the setting information of the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 is erased. When this first RAM clear process is executed, the setting change in progress flag described above is also erased (turned OFF). After executing step S12513, proceed to step S12514.

In step S12514, a setting change mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting change mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. As described below, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting change mode end command, it executes a process to notify that the setting change mode has ended. Specifically, in this embodiment, it ends the output of audio such as "You are in setting change mode" from the speaker 46, and causes the speaker 46 to output audio such as "The setting change mode has ended." It also ends the control of notifying that the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 are in the setting change mode.

In addition, after sending the setting change mode end command to the audio and light emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting change mode has ended may be configured to display information indicating that the setting change mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen.

After executing step S12514, this setting change process is terminated. Note that after executing the setting change notification termination process, the setting information of the changed lottery setting may be transmitted to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal, and the hall computer that receives the information may be configured to display the setting information of the changed lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10 on the management screen.

Next, we will explain the details of the setting confirmation process shown in step S12412 of Figure 70.

Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the setting confirmation process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. This setting confirmation process is executed as a subroutine of step S12412 in Figure 70.

In step S12601, a setting check mode start command, which is a command indicating that the setting check mode has started, is sent to the audio/light-emitting control device 90. As described below, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it executes a process of notifying that the setting check mode has started. Specifically, in this embodiment, it outputs a voice such as "The setting check mode has started" from the speaker 46, and then repeatedly outputs a voice such as "The setting check mode is in progress" from the speaker 46. In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it causes the pattern display device 41 to display information indicating that the setting check mode is in progress. Specifically, in this embodiment, the audio/light-emitting control device 90 transmits a command to the display control device 100 to cause the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting check mode is in progress", and the display control device 100, which has received the command, causes the pattern display device 41 to display a character string such as "The setting check mode is in progress". In addition, when the audio/light-emitting control device 90 receives the setting check mode start command, it controls the various lamps 47 to alternately flash between lighting at maximum brightness and turning off.

In addition, after sending the setting check mode start command to the audio and light emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting check mode has started may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has started may be configured to display information about the pachinko machine 10 that is in the setting check mode on the management screen. After executing step S12601, proceed to step S12602.

In step S12602, the setting confirmation flag in the main RAM 64 is turned ON. As described above, the setting confirmation flag is a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has started, and is also a flag indicating that the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation mode) has not yet ended. After executing step S12602, proceed to step S12603.

In step S12603, control is started to display the setting information for the lottery setting stored in the setting information storage area of the main RAM 64 on the information display unit 45z. Specifically, the setting information for the lottery setting is displayed in a blinking manner on the information display unit 45z. Then, the process proceeds to step S12604.

In step S12604, it is determined whether the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. Specifically, in this embodiment, a signal indicating a High level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the ON side, and a signal indicating a Low level is monitored during the period when the setting key (keyhole) is on the OFF side, and when a falling edge of the signal falling from a High level to a Low level is detected, it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side. In step S12604, if it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has not shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12604: NO), step S12604 is executed again. On the other hand, in step S12604, if it is determined that the setting key (keyhole) has shifted from the ON side to the OFF side (step S12604: YES), proceed to step S12605. In other words, an infinite loop is repeated until the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON side to the OFF side, and the process does not proceed to step S12605. When the setting key (keyhole) transitions from the ON side to the OFF side, the process proceeds to step S12605.

In step S12605, control for displaying the lottery setting information on the information display unit 45z is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S12606.

In step S12606, the setting change in progress flag in the main RAM 64 is turned OFF. Then, the process proceeds to step S12607.

In step S12607, a setting check mode end command, which is a command indicating that the setting check mode has ended, is sent to the audio and light emission control device 90. As described below, when the audio and light emission control device 90 receives the setting check mode end command, it executes a process to notify that the setting check mode has ended. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of audio such as "You are in setting check mode" from the speaker 46 is ended, and audio such as "The setting check mode has ended" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control of notifying that the setting check mode is in the pattern display device 41 and various lamps 47 is ended.

In addition, after sending the setting check mode end command to the audio and light emission control device 90, information indicating that the setting check mode has ended may be sent to the hall computer of the gaming hall via an external terminal. In this case, the hall computer that receives the information indicating that the setting check mode has ended may be configured to display information indicating that the setting check mode of the pachinko machine 10 has ended on the management screen. After executing step S12607, this setting check process ends.

Next, we will explain the timer interrupt processing executed by the main MPU 62 (CPU 62x).

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. In this aspect, the main MPU 62 (main CPU 62x) executes the timer interrupt process at a cycle of 4 ms.

In step S12701, various random number update processes are executed. In the various random number update processes, the current numerical information is read from each counter in the main RAM 64 (jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, electric role release counter C4, etc.), a process is executed to add 1 to the read numerical information, and then a process is executed to overwrite the read-out counter with the added numerical information. Note that if the read-out numerical information is the maximum value of the counter, a process is executed to overwrite the read-out counter with 0. After executing step S12701, proceed to step S12702.

In step S12702, a power failure monitoring process is executed. In the power failure monitoring process, the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is monitored, and when it is determined that the drive voltage falls below a predetermined value (for example, 10 volts), it is determined that the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 has been turned OFF or a power failure has occurred, and various information (information indicating the game state, control information, etc.) stored in the register of the main CPU 62x is saved to a predetermined area of the main RAM 64. Then, when the saving of this information to the main RAM 64 is completed, the power recovery flag is turned ON, and a RAM judgment value (for example, a checksum value) is calculated by performing a predetermined calculation based on a predetermined information group stored in the main RAM 64, and the calculated RAM judgment value is stored in the main RAM 64. After that, the process does not proceed to step S12703 described later, but an infinite loop process is repeated until the supplied drive voltage drops and the device becomes inoperable. In addition, the power supply device 85 of this embodiment is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control device 60, even if the drive voltage supplied to the main control device 60 drops below a predetermined value. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to execute the process of storing the above-mentioned RAM judgment value in the main RAM 64.

On the other hand, if the power outage monitoring process in step S12702 determines that the drive voltage supplied from the power supply device 85 to the main control device 60 is not below the predetermined value, the process proceeds directly to step S12703.

In step S12703, it is determined whether the RAM abnormality flag is ON. If it is determined in step S12703 that the RAM abnormality flag is not ON (step S12703: NO), the process proceeds to step S12704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12703 that the RAM abnormality flag is ON (step S12703: YES), the process from step S12704 onwards is not executed and this timer interrupt process is terminated. In other words, if the RAM abnormality flag is ON, the process from step S12704 onwards to enable game progress is not executed, and the system is configured not to transition to a game progress mode in which game progress is possible. Below, the process from step S12704 onwards, which is the process to enable game progress, is explained.

In step S12704, port output processing is executed. In the port output processing, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt processing, processing is executed to output corresponding to the output information to the various drive units 36c, 34b. For example, when information is set to switch the large prize opening 36a to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the variable prize opening drive unit 36c is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. In addition, when information is set to switch the electric role 34a of the second start opening 34 to an open state, the output of a drive signal to the electric role drive unit 34b is started, and when information is set to switch to a closed state, the output of the drive signal is stopped. Then, proceed to step S12705.

In step S12705, a read process is executed. In the read process, signals other than the ball-entering signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processes. Then, the process proceeds to step S12706.

In step S12706, the signals received from each goal detection sensor 44a to 44h are read, and goal detection processing is executed to perform processing corresponding to the read information. The goal detection processing is the same as the goal detection processing shown in FIG. 28, so a detailed explanation is omitted. After executing step S12706, proceed to step S12707.

In step S12707, a timer update process is executed to collectively update the numerical information of a predetermined timer counter provided in the main RAM 64. Then, the process proceeds to step S12708, where a prize ball command output setting process is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S12709.

In step S12709, a ball entry process for the start port is executed in response to the entry of the game ball into the first start port 33 and the second start port 34. In the ball entry process for the start port, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are obtained based on the determination that the game ball has entered the first start port 33 or the second start port 34, and the obtained counter values are stored in the pending information storage area 64b of the RAM 64. After executing step S12709, the process proceeds to step S12710.

In step S12710, a ball entry process for the through gate is executed in response to the entry (passage) of a game ball into the through gate 35. In the ball entry process for the through gate, the value of the variable type counter CS is obtained based on the determination that a game ball has entered (passed) through the through gate 35, and the obtained counter value is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S12710, the process proceeds to step S12711.

In step S12711, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery is performed, and display control of the first and second symbol display sections 37a and 37b is performed. After executing step S12711, the process proceeds to step S12712.

In step S12712, a game state transition process is executed to transition the game state. In the game state transition process, a process is executed to transition the game state to an open/close execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. After executing step S12712, the process proceeds to step S12713.

In step S12713, an electric role support process is executed to control the electric role 34a. In the electric role support process, a determination is made as to whether or not the electric role 34a is to be opened (electric role opening lottery), and if it is determined that the electric role 34a is to be opened, the electric role 34a is driven and controlled. After executing step S12713, the process proceeds to step S12714.

In step S12714, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a process is executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operating handle 25. After executing step S12714, the process proceeds to step S12715.

In step S12715, an external information setting process is executed to control the start and end of the output of an external signal according to the results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process. After executing step S12715, proceed to step S12716.

In step S12716, a game history process is executed to calculate and display game history information. The game history process is the same as the game history process shown in FIG. 29, so a detailed description is omitted. After step S12716 is executed, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON and the pachinko machine 10 starts up, one of the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound and light emission control device 90. The sound and light emission control device 90, which receives one of these five commands, can determine in what manner the main control device 60 started up (what type of start-up process was executed) based on the type of the received command. In other words, the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, are commands that indicate the type of start-up process executed by the main control device 60, and therefore these five commands are collectively referred to as "start-up type commands."

Next, we will explain the processing performed by the MPU 92 of the audio and light emission control device 90.

Figure 74 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the audio/optical side MPU 92 (audio/optical side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. In step S12801, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, initial setting processing associated with power-on and a determination of whether the audio/optical side RAM 94 is functioning normally are executed. After executing step S12801, the process proceeds to step S12802.

In step S12802, a startup date and time information acquisition process is executed. In the startup date and time information acquisition process, the startup date and time information is read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 and stored in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the main RAM 64. Details of the startup date and time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S12802, proceed to step S12803.

In step S12803, the start-up type notification process is executed. In the start-up type notification process, the start-up type of the main control unit 60 is notified based on the start-up type command received from the main MPU 62 of the main control unit 60. Details of the start-up type notification process will be described later. After executing step S12803, proceed to step S12804.

In step S12804, timer interrupt permission is set. This allows execution of the timer interrupt process described below. After that, the process enters an infinite loop.

Next, we will explain the details of the startup date and time information acquisition process shown in step S12802 of Figure 74.

Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the start date and time information acquisition process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in mode 101 of the first embodiment. In step S12901, it is determined whether or not a start type command has been received from the main side MPU 62. Specifically, in this mode, it is determined whether or not any of the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step S12901, if it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received (step S12901: YES), the process proceeds to step S12902. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the five commands described above has been received (step S12901: NO) in step S12901, the process returns to step S12901 again. That is, the process waits until it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received, and if it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received, the process proceeds to step S12902.

In step S12902, it is determined whether the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is either a normal startup command or a RAM abnormality command. In step S12902, if it is determined that the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is either a normal startup command or a RAM abnormality command (step S12902: YES), the process proceeds to step S12903. Here, if the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is a normal startup command or a RAM abnormality command, this means that when the supply of power from the outside is started, none of the operations for executing the setting change process (setting change mode), the operation for executing the setting check process (setting check mode), and the operation for executing the first RAM clear process has been accepted. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S12903.

In step S12903, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. Then, the process proceeds to step S12905, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12902 that the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is neither a normal startup command nor a RAM abnormality command (step S12902: NO), that is, if the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is either a RAM clear command, a setting change mode start command, or a setting check mode start command, proceed to step S12904. Here, if the command received as the startup type command from the main MPU 62 is either a RAM clear command, a setting change mode start command, or a setting check mode start command, this mainly means that when the supply of power from the outside is started, any of the following operations has been accepted: an operation for executing a setting change process (setting change mode), an operation for executing a setting check process (setting check mode), and an operation for executing a first RAM clear process. In such a case, proceed to step S12904.

In step S12904, it is determined whether or not the start-up date and time information is stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. Here, when the start-up date and time information is stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, it means that the date and time can be read from the information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2. On the other hand, when the start-up date and time information is not stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, it means, for example, when the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko machine 10, or when the information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 is destroyed by noise or the like and the date and time cannot be read normally. In step S12904, when it is determined that the start-up date and time information is stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S12904: YES), the process of step S12903 described above (the process of overwriting the current date and time information as the start-up date and time information) is not executed (avoided) and the process proceeds to step S12905.

In step S12905, the startup date and time information is read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the read startup date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94. Thereafter, this startup date and time information acquisition process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S12904 that no startup date and time information is stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S12904: NO), the process of step S12903 described above (process of reading the current date and time information and overwriting it with the startup date and time information) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step S12905 described above. The reason for this is that if the process proceeds to step S12905 described above without any startup date and time information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, a problem will occur in which there is no startup date and time information to be written to the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the audio/light side RAM 94.

Next, we will explain the details of the startup type notification process shown in step S12803 of Figure 74.

Figure 76 is a flowchart showing the startup type notification process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. In step S13001, it is determined whether the command received as the startup type command from the main side MPU 62 is a normal startup command. In step S13001, if it is determined that the command received as the startup type command from the main side MPU 62 is a normal startup command (step S13001: YES), the process proceeds to step S13002.

In step S13002, normal startup notification processing is executed. In the normal startup notification processing, the main RAM 64 is not determined to be abnormal, and processing is executed to notify that the pachinko machine 10 (main control device 60) has started up in a normal state in which none of the above-mentioned setting change processing, setting confirmation processing, or first RAM clear processing is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a sound such as "Starting normally" is output from the speaker 46. After executing step S13002, this startup type notification processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13001 that the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is not a normal startup command (step S13001: NO), the process proceeds to step S13003, where it is determined whether the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM abnormality command. If it is determined in step S13003 that the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM abnormality command (step S13003: YES), the process proceeds to step S13004.

In step S13004, RAM abnormality notification processing is executed. In the RAM abnormality notification processing, processing is executed to notify that the main RAM 64 is abnormal. Specifically, in this embodiment, control is performed so that a voice such as "The RAM of the main control device is abnormal. Please start in setting change mode" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46, and an infinite loop is entered. In other words, in the RAM abnormality notification processing, notification of the type that should be started next in the pachinko machine 10 continues until the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned OFF and the power supply is cut off.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13003 that the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is not a RAM abnormality command (step S13003: NO), the process proceeds to step S13005, where it is determined whether the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM clear command. If it is determined in step S12005 that the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is a RAM clear command (step S13005: YES), the process proceeds to step S13006.

In step S13006, a RAM clear notification process is executed. In the RAM clear notification process, a process is executed to notify the user that a RAM clear process has been executed on the main RAM 64. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The RAM of the main control device has been cleared" is output from the speaker 46. Thereafter, this activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13005 that the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is not a RAM clear command (step S13005: NO), the process proceeds to step S13007, where it is determined whether the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is a setting change mode start command. If it is determined in step S13007 that the command received as the startup type command from the master MPU 62 is a setting change mode start command (step S13007: YES), the process proceeds to step S13008.

In step S13008, a setting change mode start notification process is executed. In the setting change mode start notification process, a process of notifying that the setting change mode has started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The setting change mode has started" is output from the speaker 46, and then a voice such as "The setting change mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, in the setting change mode start notification process, information indicating that the setting change mode is in progress is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, in this embodiment, a command for displaying a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress" on the pattern display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 that has received the command displays a character string such as "The setting change mode is in progress" on the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the setting change mode start notification process, the various lamps 47 are controlled to alternately flash between lighting and turning off at maximum brightness. Then, the process proceeds to step S13009, and it is determined whether or not a setting change mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S13009 that the setting change mode end command has been received (step S13009: YES), the process proceeds to step S13010. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13009 that the setting change mode end command has not been received (step S13009: NO), the process returns to step S13009. In other words, the process waits until it is determined that the setting change mode end command has been received, and if it is determined that the setting change mode end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S13010.

In step S13010, a setting change mode end notification process is executed. In the setting change mode end notification process, a process is executed to notify that the setting change mode has ended. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of a voice such as "You are in setting change mode" from the speaker 46 is terminated, and a voice such as "The setting change mode has ended" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control of notifying that the pattern display device 41 and the various lamps 47 are in the setting change mode is terminated. After that, this activation type notification process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13007 that the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is not a setting change mode start command (step S13007: NO), in other words, if the command received as the activation type command from the master MPU 62 is a setting check mode start command, proceed to step S13011.

In step S13011, a setting check mode start notification process is executed. In the setting check mode start notification process, a process of notifying that the setting check mode has started is executed. Specifically, in this embodiment, a voice such as "The setting check mode has started" is output from the speaker 46, and then a voice such as "The setting check mode is in progress" is repeatedly output from the speaker 46. In addition, in the setting check mode start notification process, information indicating that the setting check mode is in progress is displayed on the pattern display device 41. Specifically, in this embodiment, a command for displaying a character string such as "The setting check mode is in progress" on the pattern display device 41 is transmitted to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 that has received the command displays a character string such as "The setting check mode is in progress" on the pattern display device 41. In addition, in the setting check mode start notification process, the various lamps 47 are controlled to alternately flash between lighting and turning off at maximum brightness. Then, the process proceeds to step S13012, and it is determined whether or not a setting check mode end command has been received. If it is determined in step S13012 that the setting check mode end command has been received (step S13012: YES), the process proceeds to step S13013. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13012 that the setting check mode end command has not been received (step S13012: NO), the process returns to step S13012. In other words, the process waits until it is determined that the setting check mode end command has been received, and if it is determined that the setting check mode end command has been received, the process proceeds to step S13013.

In step S13013, a setting check mode end notification process is executed. In the setting check mode end notification process, a process is executed to notify that the setting check mode has ended. Specifically, in this embodiment, the output of a voice such as "You are in setting change mode" from the speaker 46 is terminated, and a voice such as "The setting change mode has ended" is output from the speaker 46. In addition, the control of notifying that the pattern display device 41 and the various lamps 47 are in the setting check mode is terminated. After that, this activation type notification process is terminated.

Figure 77 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment. The timer interrupt process is executed repeatedly at a relatively short cycle (2 msec in this aspect). The process of each step executed in the timer interrupt process is described below.

In step S13101, a command storage process is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing a received command in the audio/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main MPU 62. The audio/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer that enables the storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and the commands received from the main MPU 62 are stored sequentially in the ring buffer and are read out sequentially in the order in which they were stored. After executing step S13101, proceed to step S13102.

In step S13102, the RTC effect processing is executed. In the RTC effect processing, processing is performed to execute an RTC effect for a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 5 minutes) at predetermined time intervals (in this embodiment, every hour) after the pachinko machine 10 is started (after power supply is started). Details of the RTC effect processing will be described later. After executing step S13102, proceed to step S13103.

In step S13103, processing for game round presentation is executed. In the processing for game round presentation, processing is performed for presentation to be executed in the game round from when the pattern change starts to when it stops. After executing step S13103, proceed to step S13104.

In step S13104, processing for the opening and closing execution mode presentation is executed. In the opening and closing execution mode presentation processing, processing related to the presentation during the opening and closing processing period, and the presentation during the ending period is performed. After executing step S13104, proceed to step S13105.

In step S13105, a customer waiting process is executed. In the customer waiting process, a process is executed to display a demo video on the symbol display device 41 if a game round has not been played for a predetermined period of time. After executing step S13105, the process proceeds to step S13106.

In step S13106, a light emission control process is executed to control the light emission of the various lamps 47. In the light emission control process, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read out in each of the performance processes described above. After executing step S13106, the process proceeds to step S13107.

In step S13107, an audio output control process is executed to control the audio output of the speaker 46. In the audio output control process, audio output control of the speaker 46 is executed based on the audio data read in the above-mentioned BGM process and each performance process. After executing step S13107, this timer interrupt process is terminated.

Next, we will explain the details of the RTC performance processing shown in step S13102 of Figure 77.

Figure 78 is a flowchart showing the RTC performance process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) in aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

In step S13201, it is determined whether the RTC performance execution flag stored in the main RAM 64 is ON. The RTC performance execution flag is a flag for determining whether the RTC performance described below is being executed or not, and is set ON when the RTC performance starts and set OFF when the RTC performance ends. If it is determined in step S13201 that the RTC performance execution flag is not ON (step S13201: NO), i.e., if the RTC performance is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S13202.

In step S13202, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. Then, the process proceeds to step S13203, where the elapsed time from the start-up date and time to the current date and time is calculated based on the read current date and time information and the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 94b of the sound and light side RAM 94. Specifically, for example, if the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 indicates "December 15, 2017, 11:53:45", and the start-up date and time information stored in the sound and light side RAM 94 indicates "December 15, 2017, 08:42:35", the start-up elapsed time is "3 hours 11 minutes 10 seconds". Note that if the calculated start-up elapsed time exceeds 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, a value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted from the start-up elapsed time until the start-up elapsed time becomes a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds or less. For example, if the calculated elapsed time since startup is "51 hours, 35 minutes, 24 seconds," the value corresponding to 24 hours, 00 minutes, 00 seconds is subtracted twice to obtain a new elapsed time since startup of "3 hours, 35 minutes, 24 seconds." The reason for adopting such processing will be described later. After executing step S13203, proceed to step S13204.

In step S13204, the RTC performance execution judgment table stored in the sound/light side ROM 93 is referenced to judge whether it is time to start the RTC performance in step S13205. The RTC performance execution judgment table stores the elapsed time since startup and the type of RTC performance in association with each other.

79 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the RTC performance execution judgment table. As described above, the RTC performance execution judgment table stores the elapsed time from startup in association with the type of RTC performance. Specifically, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 79, a different type of RTC performance is set for each hour of the elapsed time from startup. For example, "RTC performance A" is set corresponding to the elapsed time from startup of "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", and "RTC performance B" is set corresponding to the elapsed time from startup of "2 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds". As described above, in this embodiment, when the elapsed time from startup exceeds a value of 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, a value corresponding to 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds is subtracted from the elapsed time from the elapsed time from startup until the elapsed time from startup is equal to or less than 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds. Therefore, since the RTC performance execution judgment table does not need to correspond to the part of the elapsed time from startup exceeding 24 hours 00 minutes 00 seconds, the storage capacity of the sound/light side ROM 93 required to store the RTC performance execution judgment table can be reduced.

Returning to FIG. 78 for explanation, in step S13205, it is determined whether it is the timing to start an RTC performance. Specifically, if the elapsed time from startup calculated in step S13203 matches the elapsed time from startup set in the RTC performance execution determination table, it is determined that it is the timing to start an RTC performance, and if they do not match, it is determined that it is not the timing to start an RTC performance. For example, if the elapsed time from startup calculated in step S13203 is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", it is determined that it is the timing to start RTC performance A.

If it is determined in step S13205 that it is not the time to start the RTC performance (step S13205: NO), the RTC performance process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13205 that it is the time to start the RTC performance (step S13205: YES), the process proceeds to step S13206.

In step S13206, the RTC performance corresponding to the elapsed time from startup set in the RTC performance execution judgment table is set to start. For example, if the elapsed time from startup is "1 hour 00 minutes 00 seconds", control of the speaker 46 and various lamps 47 is started so that the performance mode corresponding to RTC performance A is achieved, and a command to start displaying a video corresponding to RTC performance A is sent to the display control device 100. In this embodiment, RTC performance A is a performance in which character A appears and sings song A for five minutes. Other RTC performances set in the RTC performance execution judgment table are performances in which other characters appear and sing other songs for five minutes. In other words, the characters and songs that appear differ for each type of RTC performance. Then, proceed to step S13207.

In step S13207, the RTC performance execution flag is turned ON. Then, the process proceeds to step S13208, where the timer counter Tr for the RTC performance is set to "150000". The timer counter Tr for the RTC performance is a counter for managing the remaining time of the RTC performance, and as described below, is decremented by 1 each time this timer interrupt process is executed. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt process is executed every 2 ms, so the "150000" set in the timer counter Tr for the RTC performance corresponds to 5 minutes. Then, this RTC performance process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S13201 above that the RTC performance execution flag is ON (step S13201: YES), that is, if the process proceeds to this step S13201 in the timer interrupt process after the RTC performance execution flag is set ON in step S13207 above, the process proceeds to step S13209.

In step S13209, 1 is subtracted from the value set in the timer counter Tr for RTC performance. Then, proceed to step S13210 and determine whether the value of the timer counter Tr for RTC performance is 0 or not. In step S13210, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter Tr for RTC performance is not 0 (step S13210: NO), that is, if it is determined that it is not yet time to end the RTC performance, this RTC performance processing is terminated. On the other hand, in step S13210, if it is determined that the value of the timer counter Tr for RTC performance is 0 (step S13210: YES), that is, if it is determined that it is time to end the RTC performance, proceed to step S13211 and set the ongoing RTC performance to end. Then, proceed to step S13212, turn off the RTC performance execution flag, and terminate this RTC performance processing.

As explained above, this embodiment has the following advantages in addition to those explained in the other embodiments above.

Before describing the effects of this embodiment, an amusement hall in which multiple pachinko machines 10 are installed will be described. In general, in an amusement hall, power supply to multiple pachinko machines 10 starts all at once (at the same time). Specifically, for example, multiple pachinko machines 10 are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and when the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) is turned on, power supply starts all at once (at the same time) to the multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility.

According to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the pachinko machine 10, and executes a process of storing the read current date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 as startup date and time information (the process shown in step S12903 of FIG. 75, hereinafter also referred to as the "startup date and time information storage process"). Then, based on the startup date and time information including the date and time when the startup date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, the startup elapsed time, which is the time elapsed since the startup date and time information storage process was executed, is calculated (step S13203 of FIG. 78), and starts the execution of the RTC performance based on the calculated startup elapsed time (steps S13204 to S13206 of FIG. 78). The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

We will now explain a case where the RTC performance is started based on the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, rather than the elapsed time since the start date and time information storage process was executed (for example, the RTC performance is started when the time included in the current date and time information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the current date and time information of each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the current date and time information of pachinko machine 10A is 11:00:00, and the time included in the current date and time information of pachinko machine 10B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the RTC performance starts will differ for each pachinko machine 10, which can cause a sense of discomfort to players who were expecting the RTC performance to start simultaneously (at the same time) on all pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, when the supply of power from an external source to the pachinko machine 10 is started, each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment reads the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and executes a startup date and time information storage process to store the read current date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 as startup date and time information. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power switch, the supply of power starts simultaneously (at the same time) to the multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment, and each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment simultaneously (at the same time) executes a startup date and time information storage process.

According to this embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment calculates the elapsed time since the start-up date and time information storage process was executed based on the start-up date and time information including the date and time when the start-up date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. As described above, each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment executes the start-up date and time information storage process simultaneously (simultaneously), so the elapsed time since the start-up date and time information storage process was executed calculated by each pachinko machine 10 will be the same (or approximately the same) even if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the current date and time information clocked in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 of each pachinko machine 10.

And according to this embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment starts the RTC performance based on the calculated elapsed time from startup, so it is possible to simultaneously start the RTC performance on each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to retain the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 even during a power-off state in which the supply of external power is cut off, and the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 is configured to avoid executing the above-mentioned start-up date and time information storage process when the type of start-up process executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 is a specific start-up process (step S12902 in FIG. 75). Specifically, in this embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 avoids executing the above-mentioned start-up date and time information storage process when it receives a start-up type command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, which is a RAM clear command, a setting change mode start command, or a setting check mode command. The effects of adopting this configuration will be described.

We will now explain a case where a configuration that does not have the function of avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned start date and time information storage process is adopted. In this configuration, when the supply of power to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility is started all at once (at the same time), each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility executes the start date and time information storage process all at once (at the same time). After that, the manager of the game hall may turn off the power switch of one of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility in order to execute a specific start-up process (for example, a setting change mode, a setting check mode, a RAM clear process) on that one pachinko machine 10, and then turn on the power switch of that one pachinko machine 10 to execute the specific start-up process with that one pachinko machine 10 in a state in which the specific start-up process is executed (for example, a state in which the operation to execute the setting change mode, the setting check mode, or the RAM clear process is accepted). In this case, that one pachinko machine 10 executes the start date and time information storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the supply of power is started. This causes the start-up elapsed time calculated in that one pachinko machine 10 to differ from the start-up elapsed time calculated in the other pachinko machines 10, and the timing at which the RTC effect starts in that one pachinko machine 10 to differ from the timing at which the RTC effect starts in the other pachinko machines 10, creating an issue of discomfort for the player playing on that one pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to cut off the power, the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 of the pachinko machine 10 is retained. After that, when the manager turns on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 to set the specific start-up process to a state in which the specific start-up process is executed, the start-up date and time information storage process is avoided, so that the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 of the pachinko machine 10 is not overwritten, and the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage process executed when the power supply to the other pachinko machines 10 is started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the start-up elapsed time calculated for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment including the pachinko machine 10 is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC performance based on the calculated startup elapsed time, so it is possible to simultaneously start the RTC performance on all pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility, including pachinko machines 10 whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again.

In addition, according to this embodiment, when a specific startup process is executed by the main control device 60, information regarding the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started is notified. Specifically, in this embodiment, when a startup process including a process for sending a RAM abnormality command (step S12422 in FIG. 70) is executed by the main control device 60, the audio and light emission control device 90 repeatedly outputs a voice such as "RAM abnormality. Please start in setting change mode" from the speaker 46. Therefore, the administrator can know the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started, and after terminating the power supply to the pachinko machine 10, when starting the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 again, the notified type of startup process (setting change mode in this embodiment) can be executed.

In particular, in this embodiment, if the power supply to a pachinko machine 10 for which the RAM abnormality flag is ON in step S12415 in Fig. 70 is terminated and the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is started again without executing the startup process (setting change mode) of the notified type, the RAM is determined to be abnormal again and the main control unit 60 sends a RAM abnormality command to the sound and light emission control unit 90 (step S12422 in Fig. 70). In this case, the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control unit 90 executes the startup date and time information storage process (step S12903 in Fig. 75) again, and the start timing of the RTC effect executed in the pachinko machine 10 differs from the start timing of the RTC effect executed in the other pachinko machines 10. However, in this embodiment, information regarding the type of startup process to be executed the next time power supply is started is notified, so the administrator can be prevented from causing the pachinko machine 10 to execute a different type of startup process, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of the start of the RTC performance in the pachinko machine 10 from being out of sync with multiple other pachinko machines 10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the notification of information regarding the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started is configured to continue until the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off (for example, until the power switch is turned off). The effects of this configuration are explained below.

If the notification of information regarding the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started were configured to end after a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), for example, in a large amusement hall, after an administrator turns on the island power switch of the island equipment and starts the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10, the notification may end before the administrator reaches the pachinko machine 10, and the administrator may not be able to know the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the notification of information regarding the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started continues until the external power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which the notification ends before the administrator reaches the pachinko machine 10 and the administrator is unable to know the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started.

In this embodiment, in step S12905 of FIG. 75, the startup date and time information is read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the read startup date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the audio-visual RAM 94. However, the processing of step S12905 may be omitted. In this case, in step S13203 of FIG. 78, the startup elapsed time, which is the elapsed time from the date and time when the startup date and time information storage processing was performed to the current date and time, may be calculated based on the current date and time information read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 and the startup date and time information read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. However, the processing of step S12905 can be executed to reduce the frequency of access to the RTC 97 by the audio-visual MPU 92, thereby reducing the processing load of the audio-visual MPU 92.

In addition, in this embodiment, in step S13202 of FIG. 78, the current date and time is ascertained by reading the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. However, instead of this configuration, the current date and time information may be read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 when the pachinko machine 10 is started, and thereafter, the current date and time may be ascertained by counting the elapsed time from the current date and time information read at the time of start-up based on the internal clock. With such a configuration, the frequency of access to the RTC 97 can be reduced, thereby reducing the processing load on the sound/light side MPU 92.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution of the start date and time information storage process is avoided not only when the setting change mode is executed based on the reception of an operation to execute the setting change mode, but also when the setting change mode is executed based on the setting change flag being ON. However, the execution of the start date and time information storage process may be avoided only when the setting change mode is executed based on the reception of an operation to execute the setting change mode. With this configuration, when the manager of the game hall turns on the island power switch and power is supplied to multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), it is possible to prevent the pachinko machines 10 with the setting change flag being ON from avoiding the execution of the start date and time information storage process, even though each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment should execute the start date and time information storage process all at once (simultaneously).

Similarly, the configuration may be such that the execution of the start date and time information storage process is avoided only when the setting check mode is executed based on the receipt of an operation to execute the setting check mode. With such a configuration, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch and power is supplied to multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), it is possible to prevent a pachinko machine 10 with the setting check flag set to ON from avoiding the execution of the start date and time information storage process, even though each pachinko machine 10 installed on the island equipment should all at once (simultaneously).

<Aspect 102>
The startup date and time information acquisition process shown in Fig. 75 in the above aspect 101 may be replaced with the startup date and time information acquisition process shown in Fig. 79 below. Specific explanation will be given below.

Figure 80 is a flowchart showing the start date and time information acquisition process executed by the sound/light side MPU 92 (sound/light side CPU 92x) of mode 102 of the first embodiment. In step S13301, it is determined whether or not a start type command has been received from the main side MPU 62. Specifically, in this mode, it is determined whether or not any of the five commands described above, the normal start command, the RAM abnormal command, the RAM clear command, the setting change mode start command, and the setting check mode start command, has been received from the main side MPU 62. In step S13301, if it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received (step S13301: YES), the process proceeds to step S13302. On the other hand, if it is determined that none of the five commands described above has been received (step S13301: NO) in step S13301, the process returns to step S13301 again. That is, the process waits until it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received, and if it is determined that any of the five commands described above has been received, the process proceeds to step S13302.

In step S13302, it is determined whether or not the start-up date and time information is stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. Here, when the start-up date and time information is stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, it means that it is possible to read the date and time from the information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2. On the other hand, when the start-up date and time information is not stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, it means, for example, when the power is turned on for the first time in the pachinko machine 10, or when the information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 is destroyed by noise or the like and the date and time cannot be read normally. In step S13302, when it is determined that the start-up date and time information is stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S13302: YES), the process proceeds to step S13303.

In step S13303, the startup date and time information is read from the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97, and the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97. Then, it is determined whether the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is 30 minutes or more after the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information. Specifically, for example, if the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is "December 8, 2017, 8:12:32" and the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information is the next day, "December 9, 2017, 8:15:11," it is determined that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is 30 minutes or more after the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information. On the other hand, if the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is "December 8, 2017, 08:12:32" and the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information is "December 8, 2017, 08:25:21" on the same day, it is determined that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is not 30 minutes or more after the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information. If it is determined in step S13303 that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is 30 minutes or more after the date and time indicated by the activation date and time information (step S13303: YES), proceed to step S13304.

In step S13304, the current date and time information is read from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, and the read current date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97. Then, the process proceeds to step S13305, which will be described later. In other words, if the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is 30 minutes or more after the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information, information indicating the date and time when the pachinko machine 10 was started (current date and time information) is stored as startup date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2. Then, the process proceeds to step S13305, which will be described later.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S13303 that the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is not more than 30 minutes after the date and time indicated by the startup date and time information (step S13303: NO), the process of step S13304 described above (the process of reading the current date and time information and overwriting it as startup date and time information) is not executed (avoided) and the process proceeds to step S13305.

In step S13305, the startup date and time information stored in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is read, and the read startup date and time information is written (stored) in the startup date and time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM. After that, this startup date and time information acquisition process is terminated.

In the above-mentioned step S13302, if it is determined that the start-up date and time information is not stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 (step S13302: NO), the above-mentioned step S13303 processing (processing to determine whether the current date and time indicated by the current date and time information is 30 minutes or more after the date and time indicated by the start-up date and time information) is avoided and the processing proceeds to step S13304. The reason for this is that if the above-mentioned step S13303 is proceeded to while the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is in a state where the start-up date and time information is not stored, a problem occurs in that there is no start-up date and time information to be compared with the current date and time information. Also, the reason for executing the processing of step S13304 is that if the above-mentioned step S13305 is proceeded to while the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 is in a state where the start-up date and time information is not stored, a problem occurs in that there is no start-up date and time information to be written to the start-up date and time information storage area 94b of the sound/light side RAM 94.

As explained above, this embodiment provides the following advantages in addition to the advantages explained in the other embodiments above.

According to this aspect, the pachinko machine 10 reads the current date and time information from the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 based on the start of the supply of power from the outside to the pachinko machine 10, and executes a process of storing the read current date and time information in the startup date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 as startup date and time information (the process shown in step S13304 of FIG. 79, hereinafter also referred to as the "startup date and time information storage process"). Then, based on the startup date and time information including the date and time when the startup date and time information storage process was executed and the current date and time information clocked by the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97, the startup elapsed time, which is the elapsed time since the startup date and time information storage process was executed, is calculated (step S13203 of FIG. 78), and the execution of the RTC performance is started based on the calculated startup elapsed time (steps S13204 to S13206 of FIG. 78). The effect of adopting this configuration is the same as the effect described in the above aspect 102, so the description will be omitted.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured to be able to retain the activation date and time information stored in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 even during a power outage, and the MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 is configured to avoid executing the activation date and time information storage process described above when, upon receiving an activation type command from the MPU 62 of the main control device 60, the date and time included in the current date and time information in the clock register 97b1 of the RTC 97 is not a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment) from the date and time included in the activation date and time information stored in the activation date and time information storage area 97b2 (step S13303 in FIG. 79). The effects of adopting this configuration will be explained below.

We will now explain a case where a configuration that does not have the function of avoiding the execution of the above-mentioned start date and time information storage process is adopted. In this configuration, when the supply of power to each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts all at once (at the same time), each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility executes the start date and time information storage process all at once (at the same time). After that, for various reasons, the manager of the game hall may turn off the power switch of one of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility once, and then turn on the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 again. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the setting change mode and change the lottery setting of the pachinko machine 10, the manager may turn off the power switch of one of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the island facility once, and then turn on the power switch of the one pachinko machine 10 so that the one pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is accepting an operation to execute the setting change mode, and execute the setting change mode. In this case, the one pachinko machine 10 executes the start-up date and time information storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the supply of power is started. This causes the start-up elapsed time calculated in the one pachinko machine 10 to differ from the start-up elapsed time calculated in the other pachinko machines 10, and the timing at which the RTC performance starts in the one pachinko machine 10 to differ from the timing at which the RTC performance starts in the other pachinko machines 10, creating a problem in that this gives a strange feeling to the player playing on the one pachinko machine 10.

In contrast, according to this embodiment, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 and cuts off the power, the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 of the pachinko machine 10 is retained. If the manager then turns on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 within a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment), the start-up date and time information storage process is avoided, so that the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97 of the pachinko machine 10 is not overwritten, and the start-up date and time information stored in the start-up date and time information storage process executed when the power supply to the other pachinko machines 10 is started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the start-up elapsed time calculated for each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island equipment including the pachinko machine 10 is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this embodiment, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility starts the RTC performance based on the calculated elapsed time since startup, so it is possible to simultaneously start the RTC performance on each pachinko machine 10 installed in the island facility, including a pachinko machine 10 whose power switch has been turned OFF and then ON again.

In other words, the administrator turns on the island power switch of the island equipment to start supplying power to the multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and then within a predetermined time (30 minutes in this embodiment), turns off the power switch of one of the multiple pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment for which the lottery setting is to be changed, and then turns on the power switch of that one pachinko machine 10 to execute the setting change mode, with the pachinko machine 10 in a state where it is accepting operations to execute the setting change mode. This makes it possible to change the lottery setting of that one pachinko machine 10, and also makes it possible to start the RTC performance all at once (simultaneously) on all pachinko machines 10 installed on the island equipment, including the one pachinko machine 10 whose power switch was turned off and then turned on again.

In this embodiment, in step S13303 of FIG. 80, the time criterion for determining whether or not to avoid execution of the startup date and time information storage process (step S13304) was set to 30 minutes, but the length of the criterion may be made changeable. With such a configuration, the length of the criterion can be changed appropriately depending on the number and size of the pachinko machines 10 installed in the gaming hall, so that it is possible to prevent, for example, the occurrence of a situation in which the criterion passes before the lottery setting change work for multiple pachinko machines 10 installed in the gaming hall is completed.

<Aspect 103>
At least some of the various functions described in each of the above aspects (for example, a function for storing the number of game balls entering each ball entrance, a function for calculating the number of game balls paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering each ball entrance, a function for storing the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, a function for calculating game history information such as a ratio of game balls, a function for storing the calculated game history information, a function for displaying the stored game history information, a function for erasing various information stored in various storage means such as a RAM or a flash memory, etc.) may be realized by the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), or the inspection machine 320. Also, the game history management chip 300, the main CPU 62x (the main MPU 62 excluding the game history management chip 300), and the inspection machine 320 may share or cooperate to realize at least some of these various functions.

<Aspect 104>
The first embodiment and the other aspects described above can be applied not only to the pachinko machine 10 but also to other types of gaming machines. For example, they can be applied to reel-type gaming machines such as pachinko-type slot machines. Specifically, for example, the ratio between the number of gaming medals won during a bonus, the number of gaming medals obtained by a child role drawn during a normal period, and the number of gaming medals obtained during an advantageous period (AT, ART) other than the bonus is calculated, and the ratio is displayed on a liquid crystal display device, or the ratio is output to an inspection machine and displayed on the display unit of the inspection machine.

<Aspect 105>
In the first embodiment and other aspects, some or all of the functions realized by software (by the CPU executing a program) may be realized by hardware. For example, the gaming history management chip 300 may be configured to include dedicated hardware designed to execute arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information. With such a configuration, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing for calculating gaming history information, and to prevent the occurrence of fraud, such as the program for tampering with the calculations leading to incorrect calculation of gaming history information. The hardware may be configured by digital circuits or analog circuits. If it is configured by analog circuits, it is possible to speed up the arithmetic processing even more than with digital circuits.

<Aspect 106>
A configuration may be adopted in which one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 105 are appropriately replaced or combined. Also, one or more configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 105 may be combined with one or more configurations included in an embodiment other than the first embodiment. Also, among the configurations included in the first embodiment and aspects 1 to 105, non-essential configurations can be omitted as appropriate without departing from the spirit of the invention.

B. Application to other configurations:
The present invention can also be applied to other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric device opens a predetermined number of times when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines in which a right is generated and a jackpot is awarded when a gaming ball enters a specific area of a special device, pachinko machines equipped with other devices, arrange ball machines, mahjong ball machines, and other gaming machines.

The present invention can also be applied to non-pinball gaming machines, such as slot machines, which have multiple reels with multiple types of symbols circumferentially attached, and which start the rotation of the reels by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and which, after the reels stop when a stop switch is operated or a predetermined time has passed, award the player with a special privilege, such as a medal payout, if a specific symbol or combination of specific symbols appears on a winning line visible through a display window.

The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, in which the gaming machine body is supported on an outer frame so that it can be opened and closed, has a storage section and an intake device, and the reels start to rotate when a start lever is operated after a predetermined number of gaming balls stored in the storage section have been taken in by the intake device.

In addition, some of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

C. Regarding the inventions extracted from the above embodiments:
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, the effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in each of the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
The group of features A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
An information storage means (register 304, memory for storing calculation results 309) that is stored inside the cabinet of the gaming machine main body and stores in a non-volatile manner the detection information obtained based on the detection by the detection means;
A transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature A1, the processing execution means includes information storage means for non-volatilely storing detection information, which is information acquired based on detection by the detection means. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the game ball in the executed game, the detection information differs for each game machine and is information specific to the game machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the game machine. According to feature A1, the detection information, which is information that reflects the characteristics of the game machine, is stored in the information storage means of the processing execution means stored inside the housing of the game machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the game machine, the characteristics of the game machine can be inspected by acquiring the detection information from the game machine main body itself. When the game machine is installed in a game hall, information on the characteristics of the game machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the game hall. However, since game machines are circulated from one place to another, there are cases where they are not connected to the hall computer, in which case, conventional game machines cannot retain information on the characteristics of the game machine. The gaming machine of Feature A1 stores detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in the information storage means of the processing execution means housed inside the cabinet of the gaming machine main body, so that the detection information can be acquired from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, the gaming machine of Feature A1 can always keep the gaming machine and the detection information linked one-to-one, regardless of the state of the gaming machine (the state of being installed in an amusement hall or the state of circulation), and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to feature A1,
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of a game is provided.
The processing execution means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature A2, the process execution means operates on the same power source as the control means. Therefore, for example, when the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall and a hall computer is acquiring information about the characteristics of the gaming machine, even if a malfunction occurs in the power supply system of the hall computer or in the processing of the hall computer, the detection information can be acquired as long as power is being supplied to the gaming machine. If the control means and the process execution means operate on different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the process execution means will result in a malfunction in which the detection information cannot be acquired even though a game is being played by the gaming machine. In contrast, according to feature A2, the control means and the process execution means operate on the same power source, so that the detection information can always be acquired as long as a game can be played. This improves the reliability of the detection information.

[Feature A3]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period until a specified number (500) of gaming balls are detected by a predetermined detection means (discharge passage detection sensor 44h).

According to feature A3, since detection information for each period until a specified number of game balls is detected by a specified detection means is stored, even if there is variation in the time until a specified number of game balls is detected by each gaming machine, it is possible to obtain detection information that is not affected by the variation in time. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency at which game balls are released, it is possible to obtain highly accurate detection information that is not easily affected by this.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each preset specified period (every hour).

According to feature A4, the information storage means stores the detection information for each predetermined period, and the detection information can be used to perform statistical processing using the concept of time.

[Feature A5]
A gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
The information storage means stores the detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine is started to when the power is cut off.

According to feature A5, the information storage means stores detection information for each period from when power supply to the gaming machine starts to when power is cut off. For example, if the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, it is possible to obtain detection information for each business day of the amusement hall.

[Feature A6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) paid out from the payout means as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A calculation execution means (CPU 308) that executes a predetermined calculation based on the detection information and the winning ball number information;
Equipped with
The information storage means stores calculation result information which is information regarding the calculation result (such as the ratio of game elements) by the calculation execution means.

According to feature A6, the processing execution means stores calculation result information. The calculation result information is information calculated based on the detection information and the prize ball number information, and therefore reflects information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine. Therefore, according to feature A6, it is possible to obtain the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the prize balls paid out. As a result, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine related to the prize balls paid out.

<Characteristics Group B>
The group of features B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of a game;
A calculation execution means (CPU 308) for executing a calculation process based on first information acquired based on a game that has been executed and second information that has been set in advance, and acquiring third information;
an information storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results) for storing the third information in a non-volatile manner;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine, wherein the calculation execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature B1, the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, and the third information is information acquired based on the first information. Thus, the third information includes information on the executed game. Therefore, since the information storage means stores the third information including information on the executed game, it is possible to acquire information on the games executed in the past using the third information stored in the information storage means. Thus, by using the third information, it is possible to manage the characteristics of the game of the gaming machine. And since the calculation execution means and the information storage means are operated by the same power source as the control means, the third information can be acquired if the gaming machine is supplied with power. If the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by different power sources, if there is a problem with the power supply of the calculation execution means and the information storage means, a problem occurs in which the third information cannot be acquired even though the gaming machine is executing a game. In contrast, according to feature B2, since the calculation execution means, the information storage means, and the control means are operated by the same power source, the third information can be acquired without fail if the game is executable. Thus, the reliability of the third information can be improved. As a result, the reliability of gaming machine inspections can be improved, and the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine according to feature B1,
A gaming machine comprising a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature B2, a transmission means is provided for transmitting the third information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the gaming machine, so that it is possible to use the specified device to manage the characteristics related to the gaming machine's play using the third information.

[Feature B3]
A gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
Equipped with
the first information is information acquired based on detection by the detection means,
The second information is information regarding the number of game balls (number of prize balls) paid out from the payout means as prize balls set in each of the plurality of detection means,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the third information is information regarding the number of winning balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game.

According to feature B3, the third information is information regarding the number of prize balls paid out by the gaming machine in the executed game. Therefore, the third information stored in the information storage means can be used to manage the characteristics of the gaming machine regarding the prize balls actually paid out.

<Characteristics Group C>
The group of features C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the execution of a game;
An information storage means (register 304, memory for storing calculation results 309) for non-volatilely storing first information acquired based on a game that has been executed;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a seal sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature C1, the information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, when the information storage means is physically touched, traces of opening the cabinet are left. Therefore, if the first information stored in the information storage means is altered through physical contact with the information storage means, it is possible to know that the alteration has been made from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the first information. Since some gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution. However, since the information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the first information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the gaming machine is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the first information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine using the first information. Therefore, according to feature C1, unauthorized alteration of the first information reflecting the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine can be prevented, and the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature C2]
A gaming machine according to feature C1,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is operated by the same power source as the control means.

According to feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the first information can be acquired as long as power is being supplied to the gaming machine. If the information storage means and the control means were operated by different power sources, a malfunction in the power supply to the information storage means would result in a malfunction in which the first information cannot be acquired even though a game is being played by the gaming machine. In contrast, according to feature C2, since the information storage means and the control means are operated by the same power source, the first information can be acquired without fail as long as a game can be played. This makes it possible to improve the reliability of the first information. As a result, it is possible to improve the reliability of inspections of gaming machines and improve the soundness of play.

[Feature C3]
A gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
A gaming machine comprising: a transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the first information to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature C3, a transmission means is provided for transmitting the first information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the gaming machine, so that it is possible to use the specified device to manage and inspect the characteristics related to play of the gaming machine using the first information.

<Feature D group>
The group of features D is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A first prize ball number information storage means (main ROM 63) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information acquisition means for acquiring the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means;
A second prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing the prize ball number information acquired by the prize ball number information acquisition means;
A number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of prize balls) which is information relating to a game history by performing calculations based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the second prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

The number of prize balls information set for gaming machines is generally set to a different value for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature D1, the processing execution means acquires the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, so that even if different prize ball number information is set for each type (model) of gaming machine, the processing execution means can calculate correct gaming history information using the prize ball number information set for each type of gaming machine.

If a gaming machine has been illegally tampered with, the calculated gaming history information may have unnatural values that differ from expected values. Therefore, by checking the gaming history information, an inspector of the gaming machine can properly determine whether or not the gaming machine has been illegally tampered with. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine according to feature D1,
a prize ball number information transmission means (CPU 62x) for transmitting a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means to the processing execution means;
A gaming machine characterized in that the acquisition means acquires the prize ball number information by receiving the signal transmitted from the prize ball number information transmission means.

According to feature D2, a signal including the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number information storage means is transmitted to the processing execution means, so that even in a configuration in which the processing execution means is unable to access the first prize ball number storage means or in which the processing execution means is unable to grasp the storage location (memory address) of the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means, the processing execution means is able to obtain the prize ball number information stored in the first prize ball number storage means.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine according to feature D1 or feature D2,
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature D3, the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to a specified device, which is then capable of displaying the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature D4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature D4, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

[Feature D5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the launching means is configured such that it cannot execute the launch of gaming balls until the processing execution means has completed storing the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means.

According to feature D5, the game balls are not released until the storage of the prize ball number information in the second prize ball number information storage means is completed, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls from being omitted from the calculation of the game history information by the calculation execution means.

<Features Group E>
The group of features E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information ( _such as a ratio of game devices) which is information relating to a game history, by executing calculations based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means each time the number of game balls (the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage N OUT ) detected by a predetermined detection means (the discharge passage detection sensor 44 h) stored in the number information storage means reaches a specified value (500 balls);
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature E1, game history information is calculated each time the number of game balls detected by a specified detection means reaches a specified value. Therefore, even if there is variation in the time it takes for the number of game balls detected by each gaming machine to reach the specified value, game history information that is not affected by the variation in time can be calculated. In other words, even if there is a difference in the frequency with which game balls are detected, highly accurate game history information that is less affected by this can be calculated. As a result, an inspector of the gaming machine can confirm highly accurate game history information and can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine according to feature E1,
a first calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63) for storing information regarding the predetermined detection means (the discharge passage detection sensor 44h) and the specified value (500 pieces) as a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation;
The process execution means includes:
an operation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the operation execution condition stored in the first operation execution condition storage means;
a second calculation execution condition storage means (a calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the obtained calculation execution condition;
Equipped with
The operation execution means executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage means is established.

Differing types (models) of gaming machines have different game characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing the calculations to calculate the gaming history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature E2, the process execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, and can execute a calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are met.

[Feature E3]
A gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2,
The process execution means includes:
a deletion means for deleting information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means after the calculation execution means executes the calculation.

According to feature E3, after the calculation execution means executes a calculation, the information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means is erased, so that it becomes possible to store information regarding the number of game balls in the number information storage means again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the number information storage means.

[Feature E4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature E4, the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to a specified device, which is then capable of displaying the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature E5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature E5, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group F>
The group of features F is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of game devices) which is information relating to a game history by performing calculations based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means every time a predetermined time (one hour) has elapsed;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature F1, the gaming history information is calculated every time a predetermined time has elapsed, so that the gaming machine inspector can check the gaming history information calculated by statistical processing using the concept of time, and can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with in any way. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
a first calculation execution condition storage means (main ROM 63) for storing information on a time interval for executing the calculation as a calculation execution condition that is a condition for executing the calculation;
The process execution means includes:
a calculation execution condition acquisition means for acquiring the calculation execution conditions stored in the calculation execution condition storage means;
a second calculation execution condition storage means (a calculation execution condition storage memory 307) for storing the obtained calculation execution condition;
Equipped with
The operation execution means executes the operation when the operation execution condition stored in the second operation execution condition storage means is established.

Differing types (models) of gaming machines have different game characteristics, and therefore the optimal conditions for executing the calculations to calculate the gaming history information also differ. For this reason, different calculation execution conditions are stored for each type (model) of gaming machine.

According to feature F2, the process execution means acquires the calculation execution conditions stored in the first calculation execution condition storage means, and can execute a calculation when the calculation execution conditions set for each type (model) of gaming machine are met.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
A measuring means for measuring an elapsed time since the execution of the calculation;
A determination means for determining whether or not a game is being played by a player;
Equipped with
The measuring means interrupts measurement of the elapsed time during a period during which the determining means determines that a game is not being played.

According to feature F3, during the period when it is determined that no play is being performed, measurement of the elapsed time since the calculation is performed is suspended, so that the game history information can be calculated only for the period when the game is actually being performed.

[Feature F4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature F4, the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to a specified device, which makes it possible for the specified device to display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature F5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature F5, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature Group G>
The group of features G is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A monitoring means (power failure monitoring circuit 86) for monitoring the occurrence of a power interruption;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
a calculation execution means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of game devices) which is information relating to a game history, by executing calculations based on information relating to the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the number of prize balls information stored in the number of prize balls information storage means when the monitoring means detects a power interruption;
a game history information storage means (a calculation result storage memory 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature G1, the gaming history information is calculated when a power interruption is detected, so that the gaming history information can be calculated based on the number of gaming balls detected during the period from when power is supplied to the gaming machine to when a power interruption occurs. In other words, the gaming history information is calculated for each period from when the amusement hall opens to when it closes, so that the gaming history information is calculated for each business day of the amusement hall. Therefore, an inspector of the gaming machine can easily determine whether there has been a change in the characteristics of the gaming history information across business days of the amusement hall, making it possible to properly determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature G2]
A gaming machine according to feature G1,
A gaming machine comprising a supply means (capacitor) for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after a power interruption occurs.

According to feature G2, since a supply means is provided for supplying power to the calculation execution means even after a power interruption occurs, it is possible to reliably complete the calculation of the game history information by the calculation execution means and the storage of the game history information in the game history information storage means.

[Feature G3]
A gaming machine according to feature G1 or feature G2,
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature G3, the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to a specified device, which is then able to display the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature G4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature G4, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Feature H Group>
The group of features H is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A notification means for notifying in a predetermined case;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A number information storage means (register 304) for storing information regarding the number of game balls detected by the detection means;
A calculation means (CPU 308) for calculating game history information (such as a ratio of game features) which is information regarding a game history based on information regarding the number of game balls stored in the number information storage means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means;
a game history information storage means (a memory for storing calculation results 309) for storing the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
Equipped with
The notification means issues a notification when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature H1, an alert is issued when the gaming history information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, so that a gaming machine inspector can easily find a gaming machine whose gaming history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature H2]
A gaming machine according to feature H1,
The notification means is configured to provide a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

According to feature H2, an alert is issued when a specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing a gaming machine inspector to easily find a gaming machine whose specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature H3]
A gaming machine according to feature H2,
The notification means determines a notification mode (color of an LED lamp) according to a deviation degree of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature H3, the manner of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp the degree to which a specific value included in the gaming history information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature H4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to feature H4, since a display means is provided that displays a predetermined display as a notification, an inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

[Feature H5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
A gaming machine comprising: a gaming history information transmitting means (CPU 308) for transmitting the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine.

According to feature H5, the gaming history information of the gaming machine is transmitted to a specified device, which is then capable of displaying the gaming history information of the gaming machine. Then, an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information displayed on the specified device.

[Feature H6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means.

According to feature H6, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

<Characteristics Group I>
The group I of features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A payout means (payout device 71) that pays out game balls as prize balls based on the game balls detected by the detection means;
A processing execution means (game history management chip 300) for executing a predetermined process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
A prize ball number information storage means (a prize ball number data storage memory 306) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
A ball entry information storage means (a ball entry information storage memory 309b) for sequentially storing ball entry information, which is information indicating that a game ball has been detected by the detection means, each time the game ball is detected by the detection means;
a transmission means (CPU 308) for transmitting the winning ball information stored in the winning ball information storage means and the number of winning balls information stored in the number of winning balls information storage means to a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) connected to the gaming machine;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature I1, ball entry information and prize ball count information are transmitted to a specified device, so that the specified device can calculate gaming history information, which is information about the gaming history, within any range based on the ball entry information and prize ball count information. Therefore, a gaming machine inspector can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine calculated within any range by the specified device, and can properly determine whether the gaming machine has been tampered with or not. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
A time and date information acquisition unit (RTC 96) is provided for acquiring time and date information, which is information related to time and date;
A gaming machine characterized in that, when storing the ball entry information, the ball entry information storage means stores the ball entry information by adding the date and time information corresponding to the date and time when the gaming ball was detected by the detection means.

According to feature I2, a specified device that receives ball entry information with date and time information attached can specify a date and time range and calculate game history information. Therefore, a gaming machine inspector can perform a detailed inspection based on the game history information with a specified date and time range. Furthermore, if the specified device is configured to display the ball entry information with date and time information attached, the gaming machine inspector can also know the date and time when the gaming ball was detected by each detection means.

[Feature I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the winning information stored in the winning information storage means.

According to feature I3, the winning ball information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that the person inspecting the gaming machine can check the winning ball information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the winning ball information.

<Characteristics Group J>
The group of features J is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A prize ball number information storage means (main ROM 63) for storing prize ball number information (prize ball number data) which is information regarding the number of game balls (prize ball number) to be paid out as prize balls set for each of the plurality of detection means;
a processing execution means (main CPU 62x) which executes a game progress process (a big win lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a variable display process of the symbols on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means, and which executes a process of calculating game history information (role ratio, etc.) which is information on the history of the game by performing a calculation based on the detection information of the game ball detected by the detection means and the prize ball number information stored in the prize ball number information storage means;
A game history information storage means (main RAM 64, flash memory 64x) that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine main body and stores the game history information calculated by the processing execution means;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature J1, the gaming machine is provided with a gaming history information storage means for storing gaming history information. Since the gaming history information is information that correlates with the behavior of the gaming ball in a game, the gaming history information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to the gaming machine. In other words, the gaming history information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature J1, the gaming history information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in a gaming history information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by acquiring the gaming history information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in a gaming hall, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine can be acquired by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, there are cases where the gaming machine is not connected to the hall computer, in which case, with a conventional gaming machine, information on the characteristics of the gaming machine cannot be acquired. A gaming machine with feature J1 stores gaming history information, which is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a gaming history information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the gaming history information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, feature J1 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the gaming history information one-to-one, and to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature J1, a single processing execution means executes the game progress processing and the processing for calculating the game history information, so there is no need to provide a separate arithmetic chip or the like for executing the calculation processing, and the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine can be reduced.

[Feature J2]
A gaming machine according to feature J1,
The process execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second mode, the gaming progress process is not executed even if the gaming ball passes through the specified area.

According to feature J2, it is possible to execute a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even when the game ball passes through a specified area, so that it is possible to execute in the second mode processes that are undesirable to execute in parallel with game progress processing or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. In addition, according to feature J2, since game progress processing is not executed in the second mode, when developing a program for processing to be executed in the second mode, it is not necessary to consider measures to be taken in the event that game progress processing is executed in parallel, so that it is possible to significantly improve the development efficiency of programs for processing to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J2,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode for outputting the gaming history information.

The game history information is information whose contents change when a game ball is detected and game progress processing is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process for outputting game history information is executed in parallel with the game progress processing, the game progress processing may be executed while an inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine using the game history information, causing the contents of the game history information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, according to feature J3, the game history information is output in a second mode in which the game progress processing is not executed even if a game ball has passed through a specified area, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the game history information from changing while it is being output. As a result, an inspector of the gaming machine can carry out the inspection smoothly.

[Feature J4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
The process execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
a gaming machine configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode when the first condition is met during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time has arrived), and when the second condition is met (when the game progress processing has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as when the processing of the variable display of patterns has ended, or when all processing of each game progress processing being executed has been completed).

According to feature J4, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is switched to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. This can reduce the occurrence of processing errors when switching to the second mode, compared to a configuration in which the first mode is switched to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode is switched to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not, if the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the variable display process of the pattern is being executed as the game progress process in the first mode is satisfied, the mode will be switched to the second mode in the middle of the variable display of the pattern, making it difficult to control the timing of the stop of the pattern and the variable time of the pattern. In contrast, according to feature J4, for example, if the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the variable display process of the pattern is being executed as the game progress process in the first mode is satisfied, the mode will be switched to the second mode at the timing when the second condition that the variable display process of the pattern is not being executed is satisfied, that is, after the variable display of the pattern has stopped. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing malfunctions such as making it difficult to control the timing of the stop of the pattern and the variable time of the pattern.

[Feature J5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J4,
The process execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
a gaming machine configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode when a third condition is met during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since transitioning to the inspection mode), even if a transition operation (an operation of pressing a mode switching button, an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a mode switching button) for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed.

According to feature J5, when the third condition is met during the second mode, even if the transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not performed, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the transition operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the transition operation after transitioning to the second mode, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature J6]
A gaming machine according to feature J5,
The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the third condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point in time (10 minutes has elapsed from the point in time when the mode was changed to the inspection mode).

According to feature J6, when a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time during the second mode, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode even if a transition operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed, so that it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the transition operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, even if an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform a transition operation after transitioning to the second mode, the system will return to the first mode when a predetermined time has passed from a predetermined point in time, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature J7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J6,
A game progress processing information storage means (main RAM 64) that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means based on the execution of an erasing operation (an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a RAM clear button) for erasing the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means;
Equipped with
The process execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
The erasing means is configured not to erase the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means even if the erasing operation is executed in a state after transition to the second mode and before transition to the first mode (a state during the inspection mode, or a state in which the power is turned off after transition to the inspection mode).

According to feature J7, even if an erase operation is performed to erase information stored in the game progress processing information storage means after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is not erased. Therefore, even if an erase operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to transition to the first mode after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information can be prevented from being mistakenly erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the erase operation for erasing information stored in the game progress processing information storage means is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erase button, and the operation for transitioning between the first mode and the second mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, there is a risk that when trying to transition from the second mode to the first mode by pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, the player may mistakenly press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature J7, even if the operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button is performed after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being mistakenly erased.

More specifically, for example, in a configuration in which the game progress processing being executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the second mode is stored in the game progress processing information storage means, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to return from the second mode to the first mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for resuming the game progress processing is erased, and the game progress processing cannot be resumed after returning to the second mode, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. In contrast, according to feature J7, even if the player accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button to transition to the first mode after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, the information stored in the game progress processing information storage means can be prevented from being erroneously erased, thereby preventing a disadvantage to the player.

[Feature J8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J7,
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the gaming history information.

According to feature J8, the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the gaming history information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the gaming history information.

[Feature J9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J8,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game history information storage means is composed of a non-volatile memory (flash memory 64x) that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature J9, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the gaming history information is retained. Therefore, no matter what state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power, etc.), it is possible to always keep the gaming machine and the gaming history information linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature J10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J9,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the game history information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a sealing sticker affixed) that retains traces of opening and closing.

According to feature J10, the gaming history information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, when physical contact is made with the gaming history information storage means, traces of opening the cabinet are left. Therefore, if the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means is altered through physical contact with the gaming history information storage means, it is possible to know that the alteration has been made from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information. Since some gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution, but since the gaming history information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the gaming machine is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the gaming history information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine using the gaming history information. Therefore, according to feature J10, unauthorized alteration of the gaming history information reflecting the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine is prevented, so that the gaming machine can be properly managed and inspected. As a result, the quality of the game can be improved.

[Feature J11]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J10,
a notification means for notifying a player when the game history information stored in the game history information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature J11, an alert is issued when the gaming history information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, so that a gaming machine inspector can easily find a gaming machine whose gaming history information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J12]
A gaming machine according to feature J11,
The notification means is configured to provide a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the gaming history information stored in the gaming history information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

According to feature J12, an alert is issued when a specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing a gaming machine inspector to easily find a gaming machine whose specific value included in the gaming history information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the gaming history information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature J13]
A gaming machine according to feature J12,
The notification means determines a notification mode (color of an LED lamp) according to a deviation degree of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature J13, the manner of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp the degree to which a specific value included in the gaming history information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature J14]
A gaming machine according to any one of features J11 to J13,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to feature J14, since a display means is provided that displays a predetermined display as a notification, an inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the gaming history information of the gaming machine does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

<Feature K group>
The group of features K is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a big win lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a variable display process of the symbols on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a certain condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a certain time has arrived, or when a certain signal has been received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in the second mode, the gaming progress process is not executed even if the gaming ball passes through the specified area.

According to feature K1, it is possible to execute a second mode in which game progress processing is not executed even if the game ball passes through a specified area, so that it is possible to execute in the second mode processes that are undesirable to be executed in parallel with game progress processing or processes that are likely to cause malfunctions when executed in parallel with game progress processing. In addition, according to feature K1, since game progress processing is not executed in the second mode, when developing a program for processing to be executed in the second mode, it is not necessary to consider measures to be taken in the event that game progress processing is executed in parallel, so that it is possible to significantly improve the development efficiency of programs for processing to be executed in the second mode.

[Feature K2]
A gaming machine according to feature K1,
The gaming machine includes a storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results, a memory 309a for storing the number of balls that have entered, a memory 309b for storing ball information, a main RAM 64, and a flash memory 64x) for storing detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

According to feature K2, the detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the gaming ball in a game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to the gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature K2, the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in a storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in a gaming hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, there are cases where the gaming machines are not connected to the hall computer, in which case, with conventional gaming machines, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine cannot be obtained. A gaming machine with Feature K2 stores detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature K2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the detection information is information whose contents change when a gaming ball is detected and a game progress process is executed. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which a process for outputting detection information is executed in parallel with a game progress process, the game progress process may be executed while an inspector of the gaming machine is inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information, causing the contents of the detection information to change from time to time, making it difficult to carry out the inspection smoothly. In contrast, according to feature K2, the detection information is output in a second mode in which the game progress process is not executed even if the gaming ball has passed through a specified area, so that it is possible to prevent the contents of the detection information from changing while the detection information is being output. As a result, an inspector of the gaming machine can carry out the inspection smoothly.

[Feature K3]
A gaming machine according to feature K2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature K3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature K4]
A gaming machine according to feature K2 or feature K3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls, memory 309b for storing scoring information, and flash memory 64x) that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature K4, the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, no matter what state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power, etc.), it is possible to always keep the gaming machine and the detection information linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature K5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K4,
The gaming machine, wherein the memory means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a seal sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature K5, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, when the storage means is physically touched, traces of opening the cabinet are left. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to know that the alteration has been made from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution. However, since the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the gaming machine is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature K5, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature K6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K2 to K5,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for providing a notification when the detection information stored in the memory means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature K6, an alert is issued when the detection information does not satisfy a specified condition, so that a gaming machine inspector can easily find a gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the specified condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature K7]
A gaming machine according to feature K6,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the memory means falls outside a predetermined range.

According to feature K7, an alert is issued when a specific value contained in the detection information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing an inspector of a gaming machine to easily find a gaming machine in which a specific value contained in the detection information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature K8]
A gaming machine according to feature K7,
The notification means determines a notification mode (color of an LED lamp) according to a deviation degree of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature K8, the manner of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature K9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features K6 to K8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to feature K9, a display means is provided that displays a specified message as a notification, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy a specified condition.

<Feature L group>
The group of features L is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes a game progress processing (a big win lottery processing, an electric role release lottery processing, a prize ball payout processing, a variable display processing of the pattern on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) which is a processing for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
a gaming machine configured to transition from the first mode to the second mode when the first condition is met during execution of the game progress processing in the first mode (when the operation of pressing the mode switching button is performed, when the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the mode switching button is performed, when an inspection machine 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time has arrived), and when the second condition is met (when the game progress processing has been completed up to a predetermined processing stage, such as when the processing of the variable display of patterns has ended, or when all processing of each game progress processing being executed has been completed).

According to feature L1, when the first condition is satisfied in the first mode, the first mode is switched to the second mode at the timing when the second condition is satisfied. This can reduce the occurrence of processing errors when switching to the second mode, compared to a configuration in which the first mode is switched to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the first mode is switched to the second mode immediately after the first condition is satisfied, regardless of whether the second condition is satisfied or not, if the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the variable display process of the pattern is executed as the game progress process in the first mode is satisfied, the mode will be switched to the second mode in the middle of the variable display of the pattern, making it difficult to control the timing of the stop of the pattern and the variable time of the pattern. In contrast, according to feature L1, for example, if the first condition that a predetermined operation is executed during the period in which the variable display process of the pattern is executed as the game progress process in the first mode is satisfied, the mode will be switched to the second mode at the timing when the second condition that the variable display process of the pattern is not executed is satisfied, that is, after the variable display of the pattern stops. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of processing malfunctions such as difficult to control the timing of the stop of the pattern and the variable time of the pattern.

[Feature L2]
A gaming machine according to feature L1,
The gaming machine includes a storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results, a memory 309a for storing the number of balls that have entered, a memory 309b for storing ball information, a main RAM 64, and a flash memory 64x) for storing detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

According to feature L2, the detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that has a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to the gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature L2, the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in a storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in a gaming hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, there are cases where the gaming machines are not connected to the hall computer, in which case, with conventional gaming machines, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine cannot be obtained. The gaming machine of feature L2 stores detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, feature L2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature L3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine according to feature L2 or feature L3,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls, memory 309b for storing scoring information, and flash memory 64x) that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature L4, the detection information is retained even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. Therefore, no matter what state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power, etc.), it is possible to always keep the gaming machine and the detection information linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature L5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L4,
The gaming machine, wherein the memory means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a seal sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature L5, the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, when the storage means is physically touched, traces of opening the cabinet are left. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to know that the alteration has been made from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution. However, since the storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the gaming machine is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature L5, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature L6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L2 to L5,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for providing a notification when the detection information stored in the memory means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature L6, an alert is issued when the detection information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, so that a gaming machine inspector can easily find a gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L7]
A gaming machine according to feature L6,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the memory means falls outside a predetermined range.

According to feature L7, an alert is issued when a specific value contained in the detection information is no longer within a predetermined range, so that an inspector of a gaming machine can easily find a gaming machine in which a specific value contained in the detection information is no longer within the predetermined range. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature L8]
A gaming machine according to feature L7,
The notification means determines a notification mode (color of an LED lamp) according to a deviation degree of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature L8, the manner of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature L9]
A gaming machine according to any one of features L6 to L8,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to feature L9, a display means is provided that displays a predetermined display as a notification, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

<Feature M group>
The group of features M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes a game progress processing (a big win lottery processing, an electric role release lottery processing, a prize ball payout processing, a variable display processing of the pattern on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing processing of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) which is a processing for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a first condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a predetermined time arrives, or when a predetermined signal is received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
The gaming machine is configured such that when a second condition is met during the second mode (when 10 minutes have passed since the transition to the inspection mode), the gaming machine transitions from the second mode to the first mode even if a predetermined operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode (an operation of pressing a mode switching button, an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a mode switching button) has not been performed.

According to feature M1, when the second condition is met during the second mode, even if the specified operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode is not performed, the system is configured to transition from the second mode to the first mode, so that it is possible to prevent a situation in which the specified operation is not performed and the system does not return to the first mode. For example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform the specified operation after transitioning to the second mode, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M2]
A gaming machine according to feature M1,
The gaming machine according to the present invention, wherein the second condition is that a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point in time (10 minutes has elapsed from the point in time when the mode was changed to the inspection mode).

According to feature M2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point during the second mode, the second mode is configured to transition to the first mode even if a predetermined operation for transitioning from the second mode to the first mode has not been performed, so that it is possible to reliably prevent a situation in which the predetermined operation is not performed and the first mode is not returned to. For example, even if an administrator or inspector of the gaming machine forgets to perform a predetermined operation after transitioning to the second mode, the first mode will be returned to once a predetermined time has elapsed from a predetermined point, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the gaming machine does not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M3]
A gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
The gaming machine includes a storage means (a memory 309 for storing calculation results, a memory 309a for storing the number of balls that have entered, a memory 309b for storing ball information, a main RAM 64, and a flash memory 64x) for storing detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and role ratio information) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means,
The gaming machine, wherein the second mode is a mode in which the detection information is output.

According to feature M3, the detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that correlates with the behavior of the gaming ball in a game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to the gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature M3, the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in a storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in a gaming hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the gaming hall. However, since gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, there are cases where they are not connected to the hall computer, in which case, with conventional gaming machines, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine cannot be obtained. A gaming machine with Feature M3 stores detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, Feature M3 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to feature M3, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which an inspector of a gaming machine inspects the characteristics of the gaming machine using the detection information output in the second mode, and then forgets to perform a specified operation, causing the gaming machine to not return to the first mode in which game progress processing can be performed, and the player is unable to play on the gaming machine.

[Feature M4]
A gaming machine according to feature M3,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature M4, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature M5]
A gaming machine according to feature M3 or feature M4,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the storage means is composed of non-volatile memory (memory 309 for storing calculation results, memory 309a for storing the number of scoring balls, memory 309b for storing scoring information, and flash memory 64x) that can retain memory even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature M5, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the detection information is retained. Therefore, no matter what state the gaming machine is in (for example, a distribution state where the gaming machine is not supplied with power), it is possible to always keep the gaming machine and the detection information linked one-to-one, and the characteristics of the gaming machine can be managed and inspected.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5,
The gaming machine, wherein the memory means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a seal sticker affixed) that shows signs of opening and closing.

According to feature M6, the storage means is stored inside the housing that leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, when the storage means is physically touched, traces of opening the housing are left. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the storage means is altered through physical contact with the storage means, it is possible to know that the alteration has been made from the traces on the housing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution. However, since the storage means is stored inside the housing that leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the gaming machine is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature M6, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information that reflects the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature M7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M6,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for providing a notification when the detection information stored in the memory means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature M7, an alert is issued when the detection information does not satisfy a specified condition, so that a gaming machine inspector can easily find a gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the specified condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M8]
A gaming machine according to feature M7,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the memory means falls outside a predetermined range.

According to feature M8, an alert is issued when a specific value contained in the detection information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing an inspector of a gaming machine to easily find a gaming machine in which a specific value contained in the detection information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature M9]
A gaming machine according to feature M8,
The notification means determines a notification mode (color of an LED lamp) according to a deviation degree of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature M9, the manner of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature M10]
A gaming machine according to any one of features M7 to M9,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to feature M10, a display means is provided that displays a predetermined display as a notification, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

<Feature N group>
The group of N features is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
A launching means (a game ball launching mechanism 81) for launching a game ball toward a game area;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A game progress processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that executes game progress processing (a big win lottery process, an electric role release lottery process, a prize ball payout process, a variable display process of the symbols on the main display unit 45, an opening and closing process of the opening and closing door 36b and the electric role 34a, etc.) which is a process for progressing the game based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means;
A storage means (main RAM 64) that is stored in the cabinet of the gaming machine main body and stores information related to the game progress processing;
an erasing means for erasing information stored in the storage means based on a predetermined operation (an operation of pressing a power button while pressing a RAM clear button);
Equipped with
The game progress processing execution means includes:
A first mode (game mode) in which the game progress process can be executed;
A second mode (inspection mode) is executed when a certain condition is met (when the mode switching button is pressed, when the power button is pressed while the mode switching button is pressed, when the inspection device 320 is connected to the inspection terminal 65, when a certain time has arrived, or when a certain signal has been received from the hall computer);
It is possible to execute
The gaming machine is characterized in that the erasing means is configured not to erase the information stored in the memory means after transition to the second mode and before transition to the first mode (a state during the inspection mode, or a state in which the power is turned off after transition to the inspection mode), even if the specified operation is performed.

According to feature N1, even if a predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is performed after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information stored in the storage means is not erased. Therefore, even if a predetermined operation is mistakenly performed in an attempt to transition to the first mode after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, the information can be prevented from being mistakenly erased.

For example, in a configuration in which the predetermined operation for erasing information stored in the storage means is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the erase button, and the operation for transitioning between the first mode and the second mode is the operation of pressing the power button while pressing the transition button, there is a risk that when the user intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to transition from the second mode to the first mode, he or she may mistakenly press the power button while pressing the erase button. However, according to feature N1, even if the operation of accidentally pressing the power button while pressing the erase button is performed after transition to the second mode but before transition to the first mode, it is possible to prevent the information from being mistakenly erased.

More specifically, for example, in a configuration in which the game progress processing being executed in the first mode is temporarily stopped when transitioning from the first mode to the second mode, and information for resuming the stopped game progress processing after returning to the second mode is stored in the storage means, if a player intends to press the power button while pressing the transition button to return from the second mode to the first mode, but accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button, the information for resuming the game progress processing is erased, and the game progress processing cannot be resumed after returning to the second mode, which may cause a disadvantage to the player. In contrast, according to feature N1, even if the player accidentally presses the power button while pressing the erase button to transition to the first mode after transitioning to the second mode but before transitioning to the first mode, the information stored in the storage means can be prevented from being erroneously erased, and therefore, it is possible to prevent a disadvantage from being caused to the player.

[Feature N2]
A gaming machine according to feature N1,
A detection information storage means is provided which is stored in the housing of the gaming machine body and stores detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and bonus item ratios) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
The second mode is a mode for outputting the detection information (game history information including ball entry information, ball number information, and bonus item ratios, etc.).

According to feature N2, the detection information can be stored and output in the second mode. Since the detection information is information that has a correlation with the behavior of the gaming ball in the game, the detection information differs for each gaming machine and is information specific to the gaming machine. In other words, the detection information is information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine. According to feature N2, the detection information that reflects the characteristics of the gaming machine is stored in a detection information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body. Therefore, for example, when inspecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, the characteristics of the gaming machine can be inspected by obtaining the detection information from the gaming machine main body itself. When the gaming machine is installed in an amusement hall, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine can be obtained by the hall computer installed in the amusement hall. However, since gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, there are cases where the gaming machines are not connected to the hall computer, in which case, with conventional gaming machines, information regarding the characteristics of the gaming machine cannot be obtained. The gaming machine of feature N2 stores detection information, which is information reflecting the characteristics of the gaming machine, in a detection information storage means stored in the housing of the gaming machine main body, so that the detection information can be obtained from the gaming machine main body even when the gaming machine is not connected to a hall computer. In other words, feature N2 makes it possible to link the gaming machine and the detection information one-to-one, and to manage and inspect the characteristics of the gaming machine. As a result, the soundness of the game can be improved.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N2,
A gaming machine comprising a display means (a symbol display device 41) for displaying the detection information output in the second mode.

According to feature N3, the detection information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can check the detection information of the gaming machine without using a dedicated device for checking the detection information.

[Feature N4]
A gaming machine according to feature N2 or feature N3,
The detection information storage means is stored inside a housing (a base box with a seal sticker affixed) that retains traces of opening and closing.

According to feature N4, the detection information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing. Therefore, when the detection information storage means is physically touched, traces of opening the cabinet are left. Therefore, if the detection information stored in the detection information storage means is altered through physical contact with the detection information storage means, it is possible to know that the alteration has been made from the traces on the cabinet. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized alteration of the detection information. Since some gaming machines are circulated from one place to another, various external contacts are made during the course of distribution. However, since the detection information storage means is stored inside the cabinet, which leaves traces of opening and closing, unauthorized alteration of the detection information by someone can be suppressed even in a situation where the gaming machine is circulated from one place to another. In addition, since the detection information is information acquired based on the executed game, it is possible to manage and inspect the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine using the detection information. Therefore, according to feature N4, it is possible to properly manage and inspect the gaming machine by preventing unauthorized alteration of the detection information reflecting the characteristics related to the game of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to improve the soundness of the game.

[Feature N5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N2 to N4,
A gaming machine comprising: a notification means for providing a notification when the detection information stored in the detection information storage means does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

According to feature N5, an alert is issued when the detection information does not satisfy a specified condition, so that a gaming machine inspector can easily find a gaming machine whose detection information does not satisfy the specified condition. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N6]
A gaming machine according to feature N5,
The notification means issues a notification when a specific value (such as a payout ratio) included in the detection information stored in the detection information storage means falls outside a predetermined range.

According to feature N6, an alert is issued when a specific value contained in the detection information falls outside of a predetermined range, allowing an inspector of a gaming machine to easily find a gaming machine in which a specific value contained in the detection information falls outside of the predetermined range. Then, by checking the detection information of the gaming machine, it becomes possible to determine whether the gaming machine has been illegally modified. As a result, the soundness of gaming can be improved.

[Feature N7]
A gaming machine according to feature N6,
The notification means determines a notification mode (color of an LED lamp) according to a deviation degree of the specific value from the predetermined range.

According to feature N7, the manner of notification is determined according to the degree of deviation of a specific value from a predetermined range, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily grasp the degree to which a specific value contained in the detection information deviates from the predetermined range.

[Feature N8]
A gaming machine according to any one of features N5 to N7,
The gaming machine, wherein the notification means includes a display means for displaying a predetermined display as the notification.

According to feature N8, a display means is provided that displays a predetermined message as a notification, so that an inspector of the gaming machine can easily know that the detection information of the gaming machine does not satisfy a predetermined condition.

The inventions of the above feature groups A to N solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, including structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the entertainment value of the game.

In addition to making games more entertaining, various technical improvements are being made to improve the integrity of games, such as by detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

For example, if a player commits fraudulent acts (so-called cheating), or if the nails on the game board of a pachinko machine are fraudulently bent and modified, the ratio of game balls that enter each entry port, such as the general entry port and the starting port, may differ from what was originally expected, and the performance and playability expected of the pachinko machine may be impaired. However, it has been very difficult to detect such fraud.

This type of fraud may be committed by a player while the amusement parlor is open. In addition, unauthorized modifications may be made by someone after the amusement parlor is open. Furthermore, unauthorized modifications may be made to gaming machines while they are being transported before they are installed in the amusement parlor. Furthermore, unauthorized modifications may be made to gaming machines before they are shipped to the amusement parlor. There is also the possibility that unauthorized modifications may be made even earlier than that.

In light of this situation, the aim is to discover fraudulent activities and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines and improve the integrity of gaming.

<Characteristic group O>
The group of features O is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
A gaming machine having a process execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
the process execution means is capable of executing a specific process (a computation process which is a process for calculating game history information) as one process included in the predetermined process;
The specific process is composed of a plurality of process steps (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29 ),
The process execution means includes:
In one execution of the predetermined process, one processing step among the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific process can be executed,
A gaming machine characterized in that all of the plurality of processing steps constituting the specific processing are executed by executing the predetermined processing a plurality of times.

According to feature O1, one of the multiple processing steps constituting the specific process can be executed in one execution of the specified process, and all of the multiple processing steps constituting the specific process are executed by executing the specified process multiple times. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the specified process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which all of the multiple processing steps constituting the specific process are executed in one execution of the specified process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the specified process from becoming longer than the specified interval for starting the execution of the specified process, which makes it impossible to execute the specified process at the specified interval.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine according to feature O1,
The specific process is composed of a series of processes whose execution order is determined,
the plurality of processing steps are obtained by dividing the series of processing steps constituting the specific processing step,
The processing execution means executes one of the plurality of processing steps (task 1 in FIG. 29) and then specifies the processing step (task 2 in FIG. 29) to be executed next to the one processing step.

According to feature O2, a series of processes with a set execution order is divided, and in one execution of the specified process, one of the multiple processing steps is executed, and then the processing step to be executed after the one processing step is specified. Therefore, even if a series of processes would take longer to execute than the specified interval when incorporated into the specified process, they can be incorporated into the specified process that is executed at the specified interval and executed.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine according to feature O2,
The process execution means is capable of executing a game progress process, which is a process related to the progress of a game, as a process included in the predetermined process;
The specific processing is processing (arithmetic processing) different from the game progress processing.

According to feature O3, even in a gaming machine configured such that when a process other than the game progress process is incorporated into a predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval, the process other than the game progress process can be incorporated into the predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval and executed. Furthermore, since the process other than the game progress process does not affect the progress of the game even if not all processing steps are executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, thereby improving the freedom of design of the gaming machine. Note that various arbitrary processes can be adopted as the process other than the game progress process, and for example, a process for calculating game history information, which is information related to the game history, or a transmission process for transmitting information related to the game status to a hall computer installed in the game hall at a predetermined timing can be adopted.

[Feature O4]
A gaming machine according to feature O3,
The specific process is a calculation process (arithmetic process) for calculating game history information, which is information relating to a game history.

According to Feature O4, even in a gaming machine configured such that when a calculation process for calculating game history information is incorporated into a predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process becomes longer than the predetermined interval, the calculation process can be incorporated into the predetermined process executed at a predetermined interval and executed. Furthermore, since the calculation process for calculating game history information does not affect the progress of the game even if not all processing steps are executed in one execution of the predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be allocated to the execution time of the game progress process included in the predetermined process, thereby improving the freedom of design of the gaming machine.

<Feature P group>
The group of features P is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
A gaming machine having a process execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The process execution means includes:
As one process included in the predetermined process, a specific process (a prize ball counting process) can be executed,
In one execution of the predetermined process, a part of the process target candidates (two bits) from among a plurality of process target candidates (eight bits in the buffer area) is set as a process target of the specific process (a prize ball counting process), and the specific process can be executed on the set process target.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process is executed for all of the plurality of process target candidates by executing the predetermined process multiple times.

According to feature P1, in one execution of a specified process, some of the multiple processing target candidates are set as processing targets for a specific process, and the specific process can be executed on the set processing targets, and the specified process is executed on all of the multiple processing target candidates by executing the specified process multiple times. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the specified process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the specific process is executed on all of the multiple processing target candidates in one execution of the specified process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the specified process from becoming longer than the specified interval for starting the execution of the specified process, making it impossible to execute the specified process at the specified interval.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine according to feature P1,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the plurality of processing target candidates are fixed in advance.

According to feature P2, since the multiple processing target candidates are fixed in advance, there is no need to execute a process for selecting the multiple processing target candidates, and the process can be simplified, thereby improving the processing speed. Furthermore, the memory capacity for storing information such as programs and parameters required for selecting the multiple processing target candidates can be reduced.

[Feature P3]
A gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The processing target setting means, when setting the part of the processing target candidates from among the plurality of processing target candidates as processing targets for the specific processing, sets the part in a predetermined order.

According to feature P3, when some of the processing target candidates from among multiple processing target candidates are set as the processing target for a specific process, they are set in a predetermined order, so there is no need to perform a determination process to determine which processing target candidate to set as the processing target for the specific process, which simplifies the process and, as a result, improves the processing speed. Furthermore, it is possible to reduce the memory capacity required to store information such as programs and parameters required to perform the determination process.

[Feature P4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3,
Equipped with multiple ball entry areas where game balls can enter,
Each of the plurality of processing target candidates corresponds to each of the plurality of ball entry portions,
Each of the candidates for processing is information (ball entry detection information stored in each bit of the buffer area) that is updated based on detection of a ball entering each of the ball entry sections,
The processing execution means is capable of executing the specific processing on all of the processing target candidates by executing the predetermined processing multiple times (four times) in a time shorter than the shortest interval (approximately 18 msec) between two gaming balls successively entering one entry section.

According to feature P4, the time required for the specific processing to be performed on all of the candidates for processing can be made shorter than the shortest interval between the detection of two consecutive game balls entering one ball entry section, so that the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry section can be stored as information updated based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. To be more specific, when two game balls enter a ball entry section in succession, even if the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the first game ball at the ball entry section is set as the processing target and a specific processing is performed, and then the remaining candidates for processing can be set as the processing targets and a specific processing is performed, all of these specific processing can be completed before the entry of the next second game ball at the ball entry section is detected. That is, at the time when the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball in the ball entry section is set as the processing target and the specific processing is executed, the specific processing for the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the first game ball in the ball entry section has already been completed, and the information updated based on the detection of the entry of the second game ball in the ball entry section can be treated as information updated based on the detection of the entry of the new first game ball in the ball entry section. Therefore, the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry section can be stored as information updated based on the detection of the entry of one game ball. As a result, for example, the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry section can be stored as binary information indicating the presence or absence of a ball entry. In this case, the memory capacity for storing the information updated based on the detection of the entry of a game ball into each ball entry section can be reduced, and the processing speed of the specific processing can be improved.

<Feature Q group>
The group of features Q is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
A process execution means (master CPU 62x) capable of executing a specific process (a process for a game history) and other processes (processes related to the progress of a game) other than the specific process;
A storage area (main RAM 64) into which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising:
the process execution means includes a storage means (register) for storing information for executing the process (register information);
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) for writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process into the memory area;
a second process (recovery process) for causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature Q1, the specific process includes a first process of writing information for executing other processes, which is information held by the holding means, into the storage area. Therefore, when the process execution means starts the specific process, if the holding means holds information for executing other processes that were executed immediately before the start of the specific process, the information for executing the other processes held by the holding means can be temporarily moved (evacuated) by writing it into the storage area. Therefore, the information for executing other processes held in the holding means can be erased, and when the process execution means executes the specific process, the information for executing the specific process can be held in the holding means. In addition, the specific process includes a second process of causing the holding means to hold the information written in the storage area in the first process. Therefore, when the specific process is terminated, the information for executing the other processes can be held again in the holding means, and the other processes that were executed before the start of the specific process can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processes other than the specific process can be executed without problems even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without modifying the program for executing other processes other than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute a specific process, it is possible to minimize design changes.

[Feature Q2]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1,
The process execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the first process included in the specific process, information for executing the other process is written to a predetermined specific area (second area) of the memory area, and the writing of information in the specific process is executed only to the specific area (second area) of the memory area.

According to feature Q2, in a first process included in a specific process, the process execution means writes information for executing other processes to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, and executes writing of information for the specific process only to the specific area of the storage area, so that information written to areas other than the specific area of the storage area can be prevented from being rewritten by the execution of the specific process. Therefore, when a process using the other area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting the process.

[Feature Q3]
A gaming machine according to feature Q1 or feature Q2,
The process execution means includes:
a first area of the memory area other than the specific area, and a second area of the memory area other than the specific area of the memory area.

According to feature Q3, writing of information in other processes is executed only to areas other than the specific area of the storage area, so that information written in the specific area of the storage area can be prevented from being rewritten by the execution of other processes. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by a process execution means using a specific area, it is possible to prevent the other processes from affecting the specific process.

[Feature Q4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Q1 to Q3,
The specific processing is different from a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game,
The gaming machine, wherein the other process is the game progress process.

According to feature Q4, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which the game progress process can be executed without any problems even if only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the process different from the game progress process. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute the process different from the game progress process, or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute the process different from the game progress process. Note that various arbitrary processes can be adopted as the process different from the game progress process, and for example, a process for calculating and displaying game history information, which is information about the game history, or a transmission process for transmitting information about the game status to a hall computer installed in the game hall at a predetermined timing can be adopted.

[Feature Q5]
A gaming machine according to feature Q4,
The specific process is a game history information related process (game history process) that calculates and displays game history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio), which is information related to the game history.

According to feature Q5, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which game progress processing can be executed without problems even if only the program for executing the gaming history information related processing is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the gaming history information related processing. As a result, it is possible to minimize design changes, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute the gaming history information related processing, or when developing a new gaming machine that does not execute the gaming history information related processing.

<Feature R group>
The group of features R is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
A process execution means (master CPU 62x) capable of executing a plurality of processes including a specific process (a process for game history);
A storage area (main RAM 64) into which information can be written;
A gaming machine comprising:
The process execution means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized in that writing of information in the specific process is executed only to a predetermined specific area (second area) of the memory area.

According to feature R1, the process execution means writes information for a specific process only to a predetermined specific area of the storage area, so that information written in areas other than the specific area of the storage area can be prevented from being rewritten by the execution of the specific process. Therefore, when a process using areas other than the specific area of the storage area is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to prevent the specific process from affecting that process.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine according to feature R1,
The process execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized in that writing of information for processes other than the specific process (processing related to the progress of the game) is executed only to an area (first area) other than the specific area of the memory area.

According to feature R2, the process execution means writes information for processes other than the specific process only to areas other than the specific area of the storage area, so that it is possible to prevent information written in the specific area of the storage area from being rewritten by the execution of the other process. Therefore, when a specific process is executed by the process execution means using the specific area, it is possible to prevent the other process from affecting the specific process.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The process execution means includes:
a storage unit (register) for storing information (register information) for executing a process, and the specific process and the other process are exclusively executed;
The specific processing is
a first process (saving process) for writing information (register information) held by the holding means for executing the other process into the specific area;
a second process (recovery process) for causing the storage unit to store the information written in the specific area in the first process;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature R3, the specific process includes the first process, so if the storage means stores information for the execution of other processes that were executed immediately before the start of the specific process when the process execution means starts the specific process, the information for the execution of the other processes stored in the storage means can be temporarily moved (evacuated) by writing it to a specific area. Thus, the information for the execution of other processes stored in the storage means can be erased, and when the process execution means executes the specific process, the information for the execution of the specific process can be stored in the storage means. In addition, since the specific process includes the second process, when the specific process is terminated, the information for the execution of the other processes can be stored again in the storage means, and the other processes that were executed before the start of the specific process can be executed again from the state immediately before the start of the specific process. Furthermore, since the first process and the second process are included in the specific process, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which processes other than the specific process can be executed without problems even if only the program for executing the specific process is deleted. In other words, it is possible to easily delete only the program for executing the specific process without modifying the program for executing other processes other than the specific process. As a result, for example, when improving the gaming machine so that it does not execute a specific process, or when developing a new gaming machine based on the gaming machine that does not execute a specific process, it is possible to minimize design changes.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features R1 to R3,
The specific processing is different from a game progress processing, which is a processing related to the progress of a game,
The gaming machine, characterized in that the processing other than the specific processing is the game progress processing.

According to feature R4, the process execution means writes information for a process other than the game progress process only to a predetermined specific area of the memory area, so that when the game progress process is executed by the process execution means, it is possible to prevent the process other than the game progress process from affecting the game progress process.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to feature R4,
The specific process is a game history information related process (game history process) that calculates and displays game history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio), which is information related to the game history.

According to feature R5, the process execution means writes information in the game history information related process only to a predetermined specific area of the memory area, so that when the game progress process is executed by the process execution means, the game history information related process can be prevented from affecting the game progress process.

<Characteristics Group S>
The group of features S is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 23 of the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A ball entry detection means (ball entry detection sensor) for detecting a game ball entering the ball entry section;
A parameter storage means (a prize ball tally buffer) for storing a predetermined parameter (a prize ball tally value);
A processing execution means (main CPU 62x) that starts execution of a predetermined process (timer interrupt process) at a predetermined interval (4 msec interval),
The process execution means includes:
As the predetermined processing,
A parameter update process (a prize ball tallying process) for updating the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means when a game ball enters the ball entry section;
A calculation process (task 1 and task 2 in FIG. 29 ) for calculating game history information, which is information related to a game history, based on the predetermined parameters stored in the parameter storage means;
It is possible to execute
The gaming machine is characterized in that, in one of the predetermined processes, when the parameter update process is executed, the calculation process is not executed.

According to feature S1, when a parameter update process is executed in one predetermined process, a calculation process is not executed. In other words, since both a parameter update process and a calculation process are not executed in one predetermined process, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for one execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, which makes it impossible to execute the predetermined process at the predetermined interval. Furthermore, according to feature S1, a parameter update process in which the ball entry status and the processing load are correlated are executed in preference to a calculation process in which the ball entry status and the processing load are not correlated, which prevents the interval between the execution of the parameter update process from becoming too long, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the processing result of the parameter update process (prize ball tally value) from being unable to accurately reflect the ball entry status.

[Feature S2]
A gaming machine according to feature S1,
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the calculation process (the process of step S10810 in FIG. 29 ),
The process execution means includes:
a parameter update process being not executed and, when the determination means determines that the calculation process is to be executed, executing the calculation process.

According to feature S2, when the parameter update process is not executed and the determination means determines that the calculation process is executed, the calculation process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute other processes independent of the parameter update process and the calculation process in the given situation (e.g., a process for determining the validity of the updated parameters or the calculation result of the calculation process, etc.) instead of the parameter update process and the calculation process without executing either the parameter update process or the calculation process in the given situation. Furthermore, if the configuration is such that when either the parameter update process or the calculation process is executed in one given process, the time required for one execution of the given process is shorter than the given interval, by executing a process with a shorter processing time than the parameter update process and the calculation process in the given situation, it is possible to reliably prevent the time required for one execution of the given process from becoming longer than the given interval.

[Feature S3]
A gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
The processing execution means is capable of calculating a plurality of types of the gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio) in the calculation process, but in the calculation process in one of the predetermined processes, executes processing (task 1 or task 2 in FIG. 29) for calculating one type of the gaming history information.

According to feature S3, although multiple types of game history information can be calculated in the calculation process, the calculation process in one predetermined process executes the process for calculating one type of game history information. Therefore, the time required for one execution of the predetermined process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the calculation process in one predetermined process executes the process for calculating multiple types of game history information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required for execution of the predetermined process from becoming longer than the predetermined interval for starting the execution of the predetermined process, making it impossible to execute the predetermined process at the predetermined interval. In addition, the storage capacity for temporarily storing the calculated game history information can be reduced.

[Feature S4]
A gaming machine according to feature S3,
The process execution means includes:
A gaming machine characterized by calculating the one type of gaming history information by executing a process for calculating the one type of gaming history information (task 1 or task 2 in Figure 29) over a plurality of the specified processes.

According to feature S4, the process for calculating one type of gaming history information is executed over multiple predetermined processes to calculate the one type of gaming history information, so the time required to execute one predetermined process can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the calculation of one type of gaming history information is completed in a calculation process in a single predetermined process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the time required to execute the predetermined process from exceeding the interval between executions of the predetermined process.

The inventions of the above feature group O to feature group S solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like the ones mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load of the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, and provide a more sound gaming experience.

<Feature T group>
The group of features T is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x of aspect 38 of the first embodiment);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball tally, handicap ratio, number of winning balls, etc.);
an operation means (a flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the operation of the operating means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine, wherein the operating means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed thereto).

According to feature T1, since the operating means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening, in order to erase information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the operating means is operated, so that traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether or not traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to know whether or not the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been erased.

If a gaming machine is illegally tampered with, the illegal tampering may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is playing a normal game (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal tampering that has been applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally tampered with.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the operating means. In that case, a trace of the opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, and even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, there will remain traces that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the gaming machine, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivation to make fraudulent modifications to the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of play.

Gaming machines may be traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a gaming machine that has already been used in play (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. If a distribution system were established in which only a person who has a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine could erase the traces of the opening of the space, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of gaming.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine according to feature T1,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature T2, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the game that was played can be retained. Therefore, for example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is not supplied during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether or not normal play was performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature T3]
A gaming machine according to feature T1 or feature T2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball tally).

According to feature T3, by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls, it is possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature T4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed thereto).

According to feature T4, since the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, and traces of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

<Characteristic U group>
The group of features U is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature U1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x of aspect 39 of the first embodiment);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball tally, handicap ratio, number of winning balls, etc.);
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receipt of a predetermined signal (erasing command signal) from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to feature U1, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on receipt of a specified signal from a specified device connected to the connection means, so that a person who has the specified device can erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the specified device.

If a gaming machine is illegally tampered with, the illegal tampering may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is playing a normal game (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal tampering that has been applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally tampered with.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a specific device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine is required. Then, by restricting who can have the specific device, it is possible to prevent information stored in the information storage means from being erased by unauthorized persons, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of motivation to make unauthorized modifications to the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Gaming machines may be traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a gaming machine that has already been used in play (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only those who wish to erase the information stored in the information storage means of a gaming machine for a legitimate reason can own the required equipment, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of gaming.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
a transmission means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature U2, a transmission means is provided for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is mistakenly erased by an operation against the will of the owner of the specified device, the information erased from the information storage means can be confirmed by the specified device.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature U3, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the game that was played can be retained. For example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is not supplied during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether or not normal play was performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature U4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball tally).

According to feature U4, by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls, it is possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature U5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed thereto).

According to feature U5, since the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, and traces of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

<Feature V Group>
The group of features V is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature V1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x of aspect 40 of the first embodiment);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball tally, handicap ratio, number of winning balls, etc.);
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device (inspection machine 320) can be connected;
an operation means (a flash memory clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation;
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The operating means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a board box with a seal attached thereto),
The erasing means comprises means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the specified operation and receiving a specified signal (erase command signal) from the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature V1, since the operating means is stored inside the space where traces of opening remain, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the operating means is operated, so that traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the erasing means includes a means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on receiving a predetermined signal from a predetermined device connected to the connection means, a person who has the predetermined device can erase the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to know whether the space of the gaming machine may have been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been erased, and it is also possible to restrict the erasure of the information by a person who does not have the predetermined device.

If a gaming machine is illegally tampered with, the illegal tampering may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is playing a normal game (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal tampering that has been applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally tampered with.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, a specific device that can be connected to the connection means of the gaming machine is required. If the persons who can have the specific device are restricted, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person. Furthermore, even if an unauthorized person has the specific device, in order to erase the information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the operation means. In that case, a trace of the opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, so that even if the information stored in the information storage means is erased, a trace will remain that indicates that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the information stored in the information storage means from being erased by an unauthorized person, and it is also possible to make it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of motivations to make fraudulent modifications to the gaming machine, and the soundness of the game can be improved.

Gaming machines may be traded and circulated, and a person wishing to distribute a gaming machine that has already been used for gaming (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system were established in which only those who wish to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason could have the required equipment and in which traces of the opening of the space could be erased, it would be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of gaming.

[Feature V2]
A gaming machine according to feature V1,
a transmission means for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to the specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature V2, a transmission means is provided for transmitting the information stored in the information storage means to a specified device connected to the connection means before the erasing means erases the information stored in the information storage means. Therefore, even if the information stored in the information storage means is erroneously erased by an operation against the will of the owner of the specified device, the information erased from the information storage means can be confirmed by the specified device.

[Feature V3]
A gaming machine according to feature V1 or feature V2,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature V3, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the game that was played can be retained. Therefore, for example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is not supplied during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether the game was played normally on the gaming machine.

[Feature V4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball tally).

According to feature V4, by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls, it is possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature V5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V4,
The information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed thereto).

According to feature V5, since the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, and traces of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

<Feature W group>
The group of features W is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature W1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x of aspect 46 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used for game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as the prize ball tally, the ratio of roles, and the number of winning balls, stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the executed game;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
said erasing means further comprising means for erasing said first information stored in said information storage means when erasing said second information stored in said information storage means.

According to feature W1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the first information, which is information used to control the execution of the game, is not erased but is maintained as is even though the second information, which is information acquired based on the executed game, has been erased.

Specifically, for example, the second information, which is information acquired based on an executed game, is information that serves as a guarantee for judging the fairness of the game executed on the gaming machine, so when the second information is erased, it is preferable to erase the first information (e.g., information on a high probability mode flag or a high frequency support mode flag that indicates the game state) used to control the execution of the game on the gaming machine to initialize the game state of the gaming machine. According to this feature, since the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information when erasing the second information, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game state of the gaming machine is maintained as it is because the first information is not erased even though the second information that serves as a guarantee for judging the fairness of the game has been erased.

[Feature W2]
A gaming machine according to feature W1,
the erasing means comprises means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means.

According to feature W2, the erasing means includes a means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means, so that it is possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of the game, while leaving the second information, which is information obtained based on the executed game.

Specifically, for example, when a problem occurs in controlling the execution of a game or when an amusement parlor starts or closes its business hours, there is a desire to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed. With this feature, it is possible to initialize the control of the gaming machine by erasing the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, while leaving the second information, which is information acquired based on the game that has been executed.

<Characteristics Group X>
The group of features X is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature X1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x of aspect 42 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used for game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as the prize ball tally, the ratio of roles, and the number of winning balls, stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the executed game;
A first operation means (a RAM clear button and a power switch) for accepting a first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM clear button is pressed);
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means, based on the first operation means accepting the first operation.

According to feature X1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information and not erasing the second information among the information stored in the information storage means based on the first operation being received by the first operating means, so that it is possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of the game, while leaving the second information, which is information obtained based on the executed game.

Specifically, for example, when a malfunction occurs in controlling the execution of a game or when an amusement parlor starts or closes its business hours, there is a desire to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, and initialize the control of the gaming machine, but not to erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the executed game. According to this feature, by operating the first operating means, it is possible to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of a game, while leaving the second information, which is information acquired based on the executed game, and initialize the control of the gaming machine.

[Feature X2]
A gaming machine according to feature X1,
a second operation means (a second RAM clear button) for accepting a second operation (an operation of pressing the second RAM clear button for a predetermined period of time while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is ON);
the erasing means comprising means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the second operation being accepted by the second operation means.

According to feature X2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the second operation being accepted by the second operating means, so that the second information that cannot be erased by operating the first operating means can be erased by operating the second operating means.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X2,
The second operating means (second RAM clear button) is stored inside a space that shows signs of being opened (inside a board box with a seal sticker affixed thereto).

According to feature X3, since the second operating means is stored inside the space where traces of opening remain, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine, the space of the gaming machine is opened and the second operating means is operated, and traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to know whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the second information stored in the information storage means may have been erased.

If a gaming machine is illegally tampered with, the illegal tampering may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a game is being played normally on a gaming machine (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal tampering that has been applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally tampered with.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase the second information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to open the space of the gaming machine and operate the second operating means. In that case, a trace of the opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine, so even if the second information stored in the information storage means is erased, there will remain traces that the information may have been erased to conceal fraud. This makes it difficult to conceal fraudulent modifications made to the gaming machine, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make fraudulent modifications to the gaming machine, thereby improving the soundness of play.

Gaming machines may be traded and circulated, and a person who wishes to distribute a gaming machine that has already been used for gaming (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only a person who has a legitimate request to erase the second information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine can erase the traces of the opening of the space, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of gaming.

<Characteristic Group Y>
The group of features Y is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x in aspects 43 and 44 of the first embodiment);
an information storage means (main RAM 64) for storing first information (information used for game progress processing stored in a first area of the main RAM 64) which is information used for controlling the execution of the game by the control means, and second information (game history information such as prize ball tally, role ratio, number of winning balls, etc. stored in a second area of the main RAM 64) which is information acquired based on the executed game;
Operation means for accepting predetermined operations (RAM clear button and power switch);
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is
The first information stored in the information storage means is erased based on the fact that the operation means has accepted a first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a RAM clear button, and causing the RAM clear button to not be pressed within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on),
A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a means for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting a second operation different from the first operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing a RAM clear button, and continuing to hold the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined period of time).

According to feature Y1, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means receiving a first operation, and for erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means receiving a second operation different from the first operation, so that by executing different operations on the operation means, it becomes possible to select information to be erased from among the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, since it is possible to select information to be erased without providing another operation means for selecting information to be erased, the structure of the gaming machine can be simplified.

Specifically, for example, if it is desired to erase the first information, which is information used to control the execution of games, and initialize the control of the gaming machine when a malfunction occurs in the control of the execution of games or when the business hours of the gaming hall are opened or closed, a first operation is executed, whereas if it is desired to erase the second information, which is information acquired based on the executed games, and to newly distribute the gaming machine, a second operation is executed. In this way, by executing different operations on the operating means, it is possible to select the information to be erased from the information stored in the information storage means.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means accepting the second operation (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing the RAM clear button and continuing to hold the RAM clear button pressed for a predetermined period of time).

According to feature Y2, the erasing means includes means for erasing the first information in addition to erasing the second information stored in the information storage means based on the operation means receiving a second operation, so that both the first information and the second information can be erased by executing the second operation on the operation means.

<Characteristics Group Z>
The group of features Z is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
A control means for controlling the execution of a game (master CPU 62x of aspect 41 of the first embodiment);
An information storage means (flash memory 64x) for storing information acquired based on the executed game (game history information such as prize ball tally, handicap ratio, number of winning balls, etc.);
an erasing means (an IC chip for erasing) for erasing the information stored in the information storage means;
A reception means for receiving authentication information (a personal identification number);
A gaming machine comprising:
the erasing means comprising means for erasing the information stored in the information storage means based on the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfying a predetermined condition.

According to feature Z1, the erasing means includes means for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the fact that the authentication information accepted by the accepting means satisfies a predetermined condition, so that a person who has authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition can erase the information stored in the information storage means. In other words, it is possible to restrict the erasure of the information by a person who does not have authentication information that satisfies the predetermined condition.

If a gaming machine is illegally tampered with, the illegal tampering may affect the game that is played, and may also affect the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine. A person who inspects whether a gaming machine is playing a normal game (hereinafter also referred to as an "inspector") can discover any illegal tampering that has been applied to the gaming machine by checking the information stored in the information storage means. For this reason, there may be a person (hereinafter also referred to as an "illegal person") who wishes to erase the information in order to prevent the inspector from discovering that the gaming machine has been illegally tampered with.

However, according to this feature, in order to erase information stored in the information storage means, it is necessary to have authentication information that satisfies the specified conditions. Then, by restricting those who can have authentication information that satisfies the specified conditions, it is possible to prevent information stored in the information storage means from being erased by unauthorized persons, which in turn makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of motivation to make unauthorized modifications to gaming machines, thereby improving the soundness of gaming.

Gaming machines may be traded and circulated, and a person who wishes to distribute a gaming machine that has already been used in play (a so-called used gaming machine) may have a legitimate request to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine before distributing it. Therefore, if a distribution system is established in which only those who wish to erase the information stored in the information storage means of the gaming machine for a legitimate reason can obtain authentication information that satisfies the specified conditions, it will be possible to promote the smooth distribution of gaming machines while ensuring the soundness of gaming.

[Feature Z2]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1,
The gaming machine, wherein the information storage means is capable of retaining stored information even when the power supply is cut off.

According to feature Z2, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, the information acquired based on the game that was played can be retained. For example, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is not supplied during the distribution process, it is possible to check whether or not normal play was performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The information acquired based on the executed game includes information regarding the number of game balls already paid out as prize balls (a prize ball tally).

According to feature Z3, by using information regarding the number of game balls that have already been paid out as prize balls, it is possible to check whether normal play has been performed on the gaming machine.

[Feature Z4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The information storage means is stored inside a space that shows signs of having been opened (inside a base box with a sealing sticker affixed thereto).

According to feature Z4, since the information storage means is stored inside a space that leaves traces of opening, in order to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, the space of the gaming machine must be opened, and traces of opening will remain in the space of the gaming machine. In other words, based on whether traces of opening remain in the space of the gaming machine, it is possible to grasp whether the space of the gaming machine has been opened and the information stored in the information storage means may have been unauthorizedly changed. This makes it difficult to conceal unauthorized changes made to the information stored in the information storage means, and ultimately makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of motivations to make unauthorized changes to the information stored in the information storage means, thereby improving the soundness of the game.

The inventions of the above feature groups T to Z solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and simplifying the structure.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load of the gaming machine, optimize processing, simplify control, simplify the structure, and provide a more sound game experience.

<Feature αA group>
The group of features αA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputting judgment information (ball entry information) based on the judgment;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αA1, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specific device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if the configuration of this characteristic were not adopted, but rather a configuration were adopted in which judgment information was output via a control means to a specific device connected to the connection means, and if the control means had a malfunction or was tampered with illegally, there is a risk that the malfunction or tampering would affect the judgment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to the specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that even if the control means has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering will not affect the judgment information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on judgment information that is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is provided with a means for judging whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry points based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry points, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αA2, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output by a parallel transmission method, for example, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device, and also to simplify the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must have an output section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must have an input section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections provided in a gaming machine differs for each type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, so the connection means may be configured to include at least one output section that can output judgment information by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the specified device may be configured to include at least one input section that can input judgment information output by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, so the configuration of the specified device can be simplified. Furthermore, even if the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections by a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used for other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αA3]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1 or feature αA2,
The connection means is configured to be capable of connecting to the specified device capable of calculating gaming history information (gaming history information such as device ratios), which is information regarding the history of gaming, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αA3, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on judgment information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check game history information that is not affected by the control means using the specified device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

<Feature αB group>
The group of features αB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
A plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter;
A plurality of signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting signals based on balls entering each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) for judging whether or not a game ball has entered each of the plurality of ball entry sections based on the signals output from each of the plurality of signal output means, and outputting judgment information (ball entry information) based on the judgment and corresponding to each of the plurality of ball entry sections;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the judgment information output means includes means for outputting the judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αB1, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output by a parallel transmission method, for example, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device, and also to simplify the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must have an output section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must have an input section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections provided in a gaming machine differs for each type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, so the connection means may be configured to include at least one output section that can output judgment information by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the specified device may be configured to include at least one input section that can input judgment information output by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, so the configuration of the specified device can be simplified. Furthermore, even if the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections by a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used for other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αB2]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1,
The connection means is configured to be capable of connecting to the specified device capable of calculating gaming history information (gaming history information such as device ratios), which is information regarding the history of gaming, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αB2, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on judgment information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check game history information that is not affected by the control means using the specified device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to feature αB1 or feature αB2,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αB3, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specific device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if the configuration of this characteristic were not adopted, but rather a configuration were adopted in which judgment information was output via a control means to a specific device connected to the connection means, and if the control means had a malfunction or was tampered with illegally, there is a risk that the malfunction or tampering would affect the judgment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to the specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that even if the control means has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering will not affect the judgment information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on judgment information that is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering.

<Feature αC Group>
The group of features αC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputting judgment information (ball entry information) based on the judgment;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is equipped with an output control means for outputting the judgment information to the specified device only when the relationship with the specified device connected to the connection means satisfies a specified condition (when a Hi level signal is input from the inspection machine 320).

According to feature αC1, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means only when the relationship with the specific device satisfies a specific condition, so that it is possible to prevent the judgment information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside in cases other than when the specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the judgment information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

[Feature αC2]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes receiving a predetermined signal from the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

Feature αC2 makes it possible to prevent the judgment information of the gaming machine from being output to the outside when certain conditions, including receiving a certain signal from a certain device connected to the connection means, are not met. This makes it possible to prevent the judgment information of the gaming machine from being analyzed and misused by malicious individuals.

[Feature αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter; and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is provided with a means for judging whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry points based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry points, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αC3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output by a parallel transmission method, for example, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device, and also to simplify the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections is output by a parallel transmission method, the connection means must have an output section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must have an input section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections provided in a gaming machine differs for each type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device with a different number of input sections for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, so the connection means may be configured to include at least one output section that can output judgment information by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the specified device may be configured to include at least one input section that can input judgment information output by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, so the configuration of the specified device can be simplified. Furthermore, even if the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections by a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used for other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αC4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
The connection means is configured to be capable of connecting to the specified device capable of calculating gaming history information (gaming history information such as device ratios), which is information regarding the history of gaming, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αC4, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on judgment information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check game history information that is not affected by the control means using the specified device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αC5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC4,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αC5, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specific device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if the configuration of this characteristic were not adopted, but rather a configuration were adopted in which judgment information was output via a control means to a specific device connected to the connection means, and if the control means had a malfunction or was tampered with illegally, there is a risk that the malfunction or tampering would affect the judgment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to the specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that even if the control means has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering will not affect the judgment information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on judgment information that is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering.

<Feature αD group>
The group of features αD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputting judgment information (ball entry information) based on the judgment;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further comprises:
A gaming machine comprising a prize ball number information output means for outputting prize ball number information, which is information capable of identifying the number of gaming balls to be paid out as prize balls when one gaming ball enters the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD1, a prize ball number information output means is provided that outputs prize ball number information to a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby eliminating the need to manually input prize ball number information to the specified device and preventing incorrect prize ball number information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device is able to execute processing based on the judgment information and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αD2]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine comprising a type information output means for outputting type information, which is information capable of identifying the type of the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD2, a type information output means is provided that outputs type information to a specified device connected to the connection means, which eliminates the need to manually input type information to the specified device and prevents incorrect type information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device is able to execute processing based on the judgment information output from the judgment information output means and the accurate type information output from the type information output means. The type of ball entry section is, for example, the type of ball entry section that is provided with signal output means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h), such as the first start port, the second start port, the big prize port, and the discharge passage.

[Feature αD3]
A gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
a plurality of ball entry sections into which game balls can enter; and a plurality of signal output means for outputting a signal based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the judgment information output means is provided with a means for judging whether or not a gaming ball has entered each of the multiple ball entry points based on the signals output from each of the multiple signal output means, and for outputting the judgment information (ball entry information), which is information based on the judgment and corresponds to each of the multiple ball entry points, to the specified device connected to the connection means via a serial transmission method.

According to feature αD3, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to a specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method. Therefore, compared to a configuration in which judgment information is output by a parallel transmission method, for example, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the connection means that routes the judgment information to the specified device, and also to simplify the configuration of the specified device that receives the judgment information.

Specifically, if a configuration is adopted in which judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections is output using a parallel transmission method, the connection means must have an output section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Similarly, the specified device must have an input section corresponding to the number of the multiple ball entry sections. Furthermore, since the number of ball entry sections provided in a gaming machine differs for each type (model) of gaming machine, it becomes necessary to prepare a specified device with a different number of terminals for each type (model) of gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections to the specified device connected to the connection means by a serial transmission method, so the connection means may be configured to include at least one output section that can output judgment information by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine. Therefore, the configuration of the connection means can be simplified. Similarly, the specified device may be configured to include at least one input section that can input judgment information output by a serial transmission method regardless of the number of ball entry sections included in the gaming machine, so the configuration of the specified device can be simplified. Furthermore, even if the specified device is connected to a gaming machine with a different number of ball entry sections, the specified device can input judgment information corresponding to each of the multiple ball entry sections by a serial transmission method. In other words, the specified device can be used for other gaming machines with a different number of ball entry sections. As a result, it is possible to increase the versatility of the specified device.

[Feature αD4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting the prize ball number information based on receiving a specified signal (a ball entrance information transmission request command) from the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD4, the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting prize ball number information based on receiving a specified signal from a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby preventing prize ball number information from being output to the outside in inappropriate circumstances or at inappropriate times.

[Feature αD5]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting the prize ball number information when the specified device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD5, the prize ball number information output means includes a means for outputting prize ball number information when a specific device is connected to the connection means, so that the specific device can quickly obtain the prize ball number information after being connected to the connection means. Therefore, for example, after being connected to the connection means, the specific device can quickly execute a process that requires the prize ball number information.

[Feature αD6]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD5,
The connection means is configured to be capable of connecting to the specified device capable of calculating gaming history information (gaming history information such as device ratios), which is information regarding the history of gaming, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αD6, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on judgment information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check game history information that is not affected by the control means using the specified device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αD7]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αD1 to αD6,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αD7, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specific device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if the configuration of this characteristic were not adopted, but rather a configuration were adopted in which judgment information was output via a control means to a specific device connected to the connection means, and if the control means had a malfunction or was tampered with illegally, there is a risk that the malfunction or tampering would affect the judgment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to the specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that even if the control means has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering will not affect the judgment information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on judgment information that is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering.

[Feature αD8]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2,
The type information output means comprises a means for outputting the type information based on receiving a specified signal (entrance information transmission request command) from the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD8, the type information output means includes a means for outputting type information based on receiving a specified signal from a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby making it possible to prevent type information from being output to the outside in inappropriate circumstances or at inappropriate times.

[Feature αD9]
A gaming machine according to feature αD2 or feature D8,
The gaming machine, wherein the type information output means comprises means for outputting the type information when the specified device is connected to the connection means.

According to feature αD9, the type information output means includes means for outputting type information when a specific device is connected to the connection means, so that the specific device can quickly obtain type information after being connected to the connection means. Therefore, for example, the specific device can quickly execute a process that requires the type information after being connected to the connection means.

<Feature αE group>
The group of features αE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A signal output means (each of the ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for outputting a signal based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry section;
a judgment information output means (ball entry detection IC 62c) for judging whether or not a game ball has entered the ball entry section based on the signal, and outputting judgment information (ball entry information) based on the judgment;
A control means (main CPU 62x) for controlling the progress of the game based on the judgment information;
A calculation means (main CPU 62x, game history management chip 300) for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio) which is information related to a game history based on the judgment information;
A storage means (flash memory 64x, gaming history management chip 300) for storing the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means;
a connection means (terminals for inspection 65) to which a predetermined device can be connected;
A gaming machine comprising:
the determination information output means includes means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means,
The gaming machine further comprises:
a game history information output means for outputting the game history information stored in the storage means to the predetermined device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αE1, the device is provided with a means for outputting game history information stored in the storage means and a means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means, so that the specific device connected to the connection means can receive the game history information stored in the storage means and can execute processing based on the judgment information.

Specifically, for example, a specified device can display the gaming history information (hereinafter also referred to as the first gaming history information) stored in the storage means of the gaming machine. In addition, the specified device can calculate the gaming history information based on the judgment information received during a specified inspection period when connected to the connection means of the gaming machine, and display the gaming history information (hereinafter also referred to as the second gaming history information). Therefore, for example, an inspector inspecting the gaming machine can compare the first gaming history information stored in the storage means provided in the gaming machine with the second gaming history information based on the judgment information received by the specified device during the specified inspection period.

If a malfunction occurs in the gaming machine or unauthorized modifications (e.g., tampering with the nails) are made to the gaming machine, causing a change in the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, a difference may occur between the first gaming history information stored in the memory means provided in the gaming machine (the gaming history information calculated by the calculation means based on the judgment information for a specified period in the past) and the second gaming history information calculated by a specified device based on the judgment information for a specified inspection period. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the gaming machine can inspect whether a malfunction or unauthorized modifications (e.g., tampering with the nails) have occurred in the gaming machine by focusing on the difference between the two pieces of gaming history information.

[Feature αE2]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1,
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a prize ball number information output means for outputting prize ball number information, which is information that can identify the number of gaming balls to be paid out as prize balls when one gaming ball enters the ball entry section, to the specified device connected to the connection means.

According to feature αE2, a prize ball number information output means is provided that outputs prize ball number information to a specified device connected to the connection means, thereby eliminating the need to manually input prize ball number information to the specified device and preventing incorrect prize ball number information from being input to the specified device. As a result, the specified device is able to execute processing based on the judgment information output from the judgment information output means and the accurate prize ball number information output from the prize ball number information output means.

[Feature αE3]
A gaming machine according to feature αE1 or αE2,
The connection means is configured to be capable of connecting to the specified device capable of calculating gaming history information (gaming history information such as device ratios), which is information regarding the history of gaming, based on the judgment information.

According to feature αE3, a specified device connected to the connection means can calculate game history information based on judgment information that is not affected by the control means. Therefore, an inspector who inspects the performance of the gaming machine can check game history information that is not affected by the control means using the specified device. As a result, the soundness of the game can be ensured.

[Feature αE4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αE1 to αE3,
The gaming machine, wherein the determination information output means comprises means for outputting the determination information to the predetermined device connected to the connection means without going through the control means.

According to feature αE4, the judgment information output means includes a means for outputting judgment information to a specific device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that the specific device can receive judgment information that is not affected by the control means.

For example, if the configuration of this characteristic were not adopted, but rather a configuration were adopted in which judgment information was output via a control means to a specific device connected to the connection means, and if the control means had a malfunction or was tampered with illegally, there is a risk that the malfunction or tampering would affect the judgment information output to the specific device.

In contrast, according to this feature, the judgment information output means includes means for outputting judgment information to the specified device connected to the connection means without going through the control means, so that even if the control means has a malfunction or has been illegally tampered with, the malfunction or illegal tampering will not affect the judgment information output to the specified device. As a result, the specified device connected to the connection means can execute processing based on judgment information that is not affected by the malfunction or illegal tampering.

<Feature αF group>
The group of features αF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
a first process group execution means for repeatedly executing a first process group (a remaining process of the main process);
a second process group execution means for interrupting the first process group and executing a second process group (a game progress process including a game number control process, etc.) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the previous execution of the second process group);
A gaming machine comprising:
the first process group execution means includes means for repeatedly executing the first process group during a period (a remaining time) from the end of execution of one of the second process groups to the start of execution of the next of the second process group;
The first processing group includes a gaming history information related process (processing for gaming history) which is a process related to the calculation of gaming history information (role ratio, consecutive role ratio, etc.), which is information regarding the gaming history.

According to feature αF1, the first process group including the gaming history information related processing is repeatedly executed in the period from the end of execution of one second process group to the start of execution of the next second process group, so that it is possible to prevent the first process group including the gaming history information related processing from being started even though the execution of one second process group has not been completed. In other words, while prioritizing the execution of the second process group, it is possible to quickly calculate the gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first process group including the gaming history information related processing in the period when the second process group is not being executed.

Furthermore, if this characteristic configuration were not adopted, and a configuration were adopted in which the game history information-related processing is included in the second process group and executed, the time required from start to finish of one execution of the second process group would be long, and for example, the execution of one second process group may not have finished when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second process group is met, and it may not be possible to start execution of the next second process group until the execution of the one second process group finishes. In this case, there is a risk of a malfunction occurring due to the delay in starting the execution of the next second process group.

In contrast, according to this feature, the game history information related processing is executed as part of the first processing group, so the time required from start to finish of one execution of the second processing group can be shortened compared to a configuration in which the game history information related processing is executed as part of the second processing group. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of one second processing group has not yet finished at the timing when a predetermined condition that triggers the start of execution of the next second processing group is met, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the next second processing group cannot be started until the execution of the one second processing group is finished. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions due to a delay in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

As described above, this feature makes it possible to efficiently and quickly calculate gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, which includes gaming history information-related processing, during periods when the second processing group is not being executed, while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions caused by delays in the start of execution of the next second processing group.

[Feature αF2]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1,
The gaming machine, wherein the second process group includes a game progress process which is a process related to the progress of a game.

Feature αF2 makes it possible to prevent delays in the start of execution of the second processing group, which includes game progress processing, which is processing related to the progress of the game, and therefore makes it possible to quickly calculate game history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group, which includes game history information-related processing, during periods when the second processing group is not being executed, while preventing malfunctions from occurring in the progress of the game.

[Feature αF3]
A gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
the game history information-related process includes a plurality of processing steps (a plurality of types of tasks) that are executed in sequence to complete the calculation of the game history information;
The first process group execution means executes a part of the plurality of process steps in one execution of the game history information related process.

According to feature αF3, the first processing group execution means executes some of the multiple processing steps in one execution of the gaming history information related process, so that the time required from start to finish of one execution of the gaming history information related process can be shortened, for example, compared to a configuration in which all of the multiple processing steps are executed in one execution of the gaming history information related process. Specifically, for example, even if a predetermined condition is met during the execution of the gaming history information related process, the gaming history information related process being executed ends in a short time, so that the time from the fulfillment of the predetermined condition to the start of execution of the second processing group can be shortened. As a result, it is possible to quickly calculate the gaming history information by repeatedly executing the first processing group while suppressing the occurrence of malfunctions caused by a delay in the start of execution of the second processing group.

[Feature αF4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features αF1 to αF3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined condition includes a predetermined time having elapsed since the start of a previous execution of the second process group.

According to feature αF4, the predetermined condition includes the passage of a predetermined time from the start of the previous execution of the second process group, so that the second process group can be executed periodically. Then, during the period after the execution of the second process group is completed and before the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the execution of the second process group, the first process group including the game history information related process can be repeatedly executed, thereby quickly calculating the game history information.

The inventions of the above feature group αA to feature group αF solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the entertainment value of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like the ones mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load of the gaming machine, simplify control, and provide a more sound game experience.

<Characteristic αG group>
The group of features αG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means includes a means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods each including a boundary between the change in the winning probability,
The calculation means includes means for calculating game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods;
The display means comprises a display means for displaying information based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

According to feature αG1, an inspector of a gaming machine can check the display based on the gaming history information for each of multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was not within an appropriate range during the process in which the winning probability of the gaming machine was changed in the past.

<Characteristic αH group>
The group of features αH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a predetermined information display means for displaying predetermined information (short-term change information) when the winning probability is changed again before the detection information stored in the storage means is accumulated to a predetermined amount after the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αH1, the gaming machine inspector can check the specified information to see whether the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information has accumulated to a specified amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with fraudulent intent.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information stored before the change in the winning probability is erased based on the change in the winning probability, the manager of the gaming machine may change the winning probability again before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector, even though not many games are being played on the gaming machine after the change in the winning probability, and erase the detection information stored in the gaming machine. However, according to this embodiment, if the winning probability is changed again in a short period of time even though not many games are being played on the gaming machine after the change in the winning probability, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed in a short period of time with the fraudulent intention of erasing the detection information. As a result, it is possible to suppress changes to the winning probability based on fraudulent intentions by the manager of the gaming machine.

[Feature αH2]
A gaming machine according to feature αH1,
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
The storage means includes a means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods each including a boundary between the change in the winning probability,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
the display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods,
The erasing means comprises a means for erasing the detection information for the oldest period among the plurality of periods when the winning probability is changed.

According to feature αH2, an inspector of a gaming machine can check the display based on the gaming history information for each of multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector can check whether or not there was a situation in which the gaming history information was not within an appropriate range during the process in which the winning probability of the gaming machine was changed in the past.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the gaming machine inspector can check the specified information to see whether the winning probability has been changed again before the detection information has accumulated to a specified amount. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with fraudulent intent.

Specifically, for example, before a gaming machine is inspected by an inspector, the manager of the gaming machine may repeatedly change the winning probability in a short period of time, erasing detection information for multiple periods bounded by the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability is repeatedly changed in a short period of time, the above-mentioned short-term change information is recorded and displayed. Therefore, by checking the short-term change information, the inspector can recognize that the winning probability may have been changed in a short period of time with fraudulent intent. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with fraudulent intent.

<Feature αI group>
The group of features αI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αI1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means includes means for erasing, when the winning probability is changed, the detection information stored in the storage means before the winning probability was changed after the detection information stored in the storage means after the winning probability was changed has accumulated to a predetermined amount.

According to feature αI1, the detection information stored in the storage means before the change in the winning probability is not erased until the detection information stored in the storage means after the change in the winning probability has accumulated to a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to prevent the detection information stored before the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine from being intentionally erased by changing the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information acquired and stored before the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine is erased immediately after the change in the winning probability of the gaming machine is made, there is a possibility that the manager of the gaming machine changes the winning probability and erases the detection information stored before the change in the winning probability before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector. In contrast, according to this feature, the detection information stored before the change in the winning probability is not erased until the detection information acquired and stored after the change in the winning probability has accumulated to a predetermined amount, so that it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with improper intentions.

[Feature αI2]
A gaming machine according to feature αI1,
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means,
The storage means includes a means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods each including a boundary between the change in the winning probability,
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
the display means includes means for displaying based on the game history information for each of the plurality of periods,
The erasing means is provided with a means for erasing the detection information for the oldest period among the plurality of periods when the winning probability is changed and the detection information stored in the memory means after the winning probability is changed is accumulated to a predetermined amount.

According to feature αI2, the inspector of the gaming machine can check the display based on the gaming history information for each of multiple periods bounded by changes in the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector can check whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was not within an appropriate range during the process in which the winning probability of the gaming machine was changed in the past.

Furthermore, according to this feature, it is possible to prevent the detection information for multiple periods bounded by a change in the winning probability from being intentionally erased by repeatedly changing the winning probability of the gaming machine. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the detection information for the oldest period of multiple periods bounded by a change in the winning probability is erased immediately after the winning probability of the gaming machine is changed, there is a possibility that the manager of the gaming machine will repeatedly change the winning probability and erase the detection information for the multiple periods of the gaming machine before the gaming machine is inspected by an inspector. In contrast, according to this feature, the detection information for the oldest period of multiple periods bounded by a change in the winning probability is not erased until a predetermined amount of detection information is accumulated after the winning probability is changed, so it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from changing the winning probability with fraudulent intentions.

<Feature αJ group>
The group of features αJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αJ1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, etc.) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means includes a means for storing the detection information by distinguishing the winning probability at the time when the detection means detects the gaming ball,
the calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the winning probabilities,
The display means comprises a display means for displaying information based on the game history information for each of the winning probabilities.

According to feature αJ1, for example, when the display based on the gaming history information is the numerical value of the gaming history information itself, the inspector of the gaming machine can check whether each piece of gaming history information calculated and displayed for each winning probability falls within an appropriate range. In other words, the inspector can check whether there is a winning probability setting in the gaming machine where the gaming history information does not fall within an appropriate range.

The inventions of the above feature group αG to feature group αJ solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the entertainment value of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like the ones mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load of the gaming machine, simplify control, and provide a more sound game experience.

<Feature αK group>
The group of features αK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αK1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a first display area and a second display area constituted by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means includes:
a means for displaying, when displaying the gaming history information, information relating to a type of the gaming history information in the first display area by using the display elements, and displaying, in the second display area, numerical information of the gaming history information by using the display elements;
a means for displaying, in the first display area, a display mode that is not displayed when displaying information related to the type of the game history information, and that uses only display elements that are used when displaying information related to the type of the game history information, when changing the winning probability, and displaying, in the second display area, numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability using the display elements;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αK1, the display mode of the first display area is clearly different when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means from when the numerical information of the winning probability setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to allow the manager of the gaming machine to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information of the winning probability setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the second display area for the numerical information of the game history information or the numerical information of the winning probability setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display elements of the first display area that are not used when displaying game history information (for example, the segment light emitting units A and B and the DP light emitting unit of the leftmost seven-segment display 45z1, and the segment light emitting unit B of the left-center seven-segment display 45z2) are not used when changing the winning probability either, so the first display area has display elements that are not used (hereinafter, unused display elements). Therefore, for example, even if a malfunction occurs in an unused display element of the first display area, the display mode in the first display area is not affected. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the display mode will be affected if a malfunction occurs in a display element of the first display area.

In addition, for example, when light-emitting elements such as LEDs are used as display elements, the light-emitting elements that are unused display elements do not need to emit light, so the components required to make the light-emitting elements emit light can be omitted. This allows the cost of the display means to be reduced.

<Feature αL group>
The group of features αL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αL1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means includes:
a means for displaying information on a type of the gaming history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the gaming history information in the second display area when displaying the gaming history information;
a means for displaying nothing in the first display area and displaying numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability in the second display area when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αL1, the display mode of the first display area is clearly different when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means from when the numerical information of the winning probability setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to allow the manager of the gaming machine to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information of the winning probability setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the second display area for the numerical information of the game history information or the numerical information of the winning probability setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, for example, in a case where the first display area is composed of a plurality of light-emitting elements (LEDs), and a specific light-emitting element emits light to display specific information, and all the light-emitting elements are turned off to display nothing, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, as long as there is no serious malfunction in which all the light-emitting elements do not emit light, the display mode of the first display area will be different between when it displays game history information and when it displays numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. Therefore, according to this feature, even if a malfunction occurs in which some of the light-emitting elements constituting the first display area do not emit light, as long as there is no serious malfunction in which all the light-emitting elements do not emit light, the administrator can distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information displayed in the second display area is game history information or numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability. In other words, the administrator can determine that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is game history information when at least some of the light-emitting elements in the first display area are emitting light, and can determine that the numerical value displayed in the second display area is numerical information related to the setting of the winning probability only when all the light-emitting elements constituting the first display area are turned off.

<Feature αM group>
The group of features α M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αM1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means having a predetermined display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the predetermined display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means includes:
a display unit for displaying, in the predetermined display area, numerical information of the gaming history information with a predetermined number of digits (two digits) when the gaming history information is displayed;
a means for displaying, in the predetermined display area, numerical information regarding the setting of the winning probability with a number of digits (one digit) different from the predetermined number of digits when the winning probability is changed;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αM1, the number of digits of the displayed numerical value differs when numerical information related to game history information is displayed in the specified display area from when numerical information related to the winning probability setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to allow the manager of the gaming machine to clearly distinguish and recognize whether numerical information related to game history information or numerical information related to the winning probability setting is displayed in the specified display area of the display means. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the specified display area of the display means for numerical information related to game history information or numerical information related to the winning probability setting.

<Feature αN group>
The group of features αN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αN1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
A change means for changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from outside;
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means having a first display area and a second display area and capable of displaying predetermined information in the first display area and the second display area;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means includes:
a means for displaying information on a type of the gaming history information in the first display area and displaying numerical information of the gaming history information in the second display area when displaying the gaming history information;
a means for repeatedly displaying, in the first display area, a plurality of display modes (display pattern A and display pattern B) which are not displayed when displaying information relating to the type of the game history information, by switching between them when changing the winning probability, and displaying, in the second display area, numerical information relating to the setting of the winning probability;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αN1, the display mode of the first display area is clearly different when the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means from when the numerical information of the winning probability setting is displayed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to allow the manager of the gaming machine to clearly distinguish and recognize whether the numerical information of the game history information is displayed in the second display area of the display means or whether the numerical information of the winning probability setting is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the manager of the gaming machine from mistaking the numerical information displayed in the second display area for the numerical information of the game history information or the numerical information of the winning probability setting.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the display mode in the first display area changes dynamically while the numerical information regarding the winning probability setting is displayed in the second display area, so that the administrator of the gaming machine can be alerted to an important state in which changes to the winning probability should be made with caution.

<Characteristic αO group>
The group of features αO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αO1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the game ball detected by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
a display means for displaying (displaying type information and numerical value information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
a determination means for determining a display mode (whether to light or flash) of a display based on the game history information on the display means, based on an amount of information of the detection information (the number of game balls passing through the discharge passage during the normal mode (the number of outs during the normal mode)) that is the basis for calculating the game history information;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αO1, the manager of the gaming machine can ascertain how much detection information has been accumulated that is the basis for calculating the gaming history information by checking the display mode on the display means, and can determine, for example, whether the numerical value of the displayed gaming history information has been calculated when a sufficient amount of statistical data has been accumulated.

The inventions of the above feature αK group to feature αO group solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the entertainment value of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, and simplifying control (for example, Patent Document 1).

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like the ones mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired in order to increase the enjoyment of the game, reduce the processing load of the gaming machine, simplify control, and provide a more sound game experience.

<Characteristic αP group>
The group of features αP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αP1]
A gaming machine having a control means for controlling a game,
The control means
a CPU (main CPU 62x) including a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and executing a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
a program storage means (program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area that is an area different from the first program storage area and stores the second program;
a stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a first stack area corresponding to the first program and accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and a second stack area different from the first stack area and corresponding to the second program and accessible by a second stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer;
a data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) having a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area which is an area different from the first data storage area and corresponds to the second program capable of updating data;
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In a process by the first program, data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
In a process by the second program, data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
The CPU includes:
A first process (game progress process) is carried out by executing a program included in the first program;
After performing the first process, a storage process is performed to store the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area by executing a program included in the first program;
after carrying out the storage process, executing a program included in the second program to carry out a save process of storing the address for referring to the first stack area stored in the stack pointer in the second data storage area, storing the address for referring to the second stack area in the stack pointer, and storing the values of each of the plurality of registers in the second data storage area;
After carrying out the saving process, a second process (a game history information calculation and display process) is carried out by executing a program included in the second program;
a program included in the second program is executed after the second process is performed, thereby performing a return process in which the values of the plurality of registers are set to the values stored in the second data storage area by the save process, and the address for referring to the first stack area stored in the second data storage area by the save process is stored in the stack pointer;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after performing the return process, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a change process in which the value of the flag register, one of the multiple registers whose values were set by the return process, is changed to a value stored in the first stack area or the first data memory area by the storage process.

Feature αP1 performs save and restore processes, which makes it possible to avoid problems caused by changes to the register values used in the first program when returning from the second program to the first program.

In addition, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes after the storage process is performed but before the save process is performed, the value of the flag register is restored to the same value as immediately after the end of the first process by the first program by performing the change process, so there is no risk of affecting the process by the first program that is performed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the processing by the first program, simply by adding a program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, a program for performing the second process independently of the first program can be easily created.

In addition, for example, in a configuration in which a reset process is performed to erase all data stored in the stack area when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area, if the values of each of the multiple registers are stored in the second stack area during the evacuation process, there is a risk that the reset process will be performed. In contrast, according to this feature, the values of each of the multiple registers are stored in the second data storage area during the evacuation process, so the risk of the stack area resetting being performed can be avoided.

<Feature αQ group>
The group of features αQ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αQ1]
A gaming machine having a control means for controlling a game,
The control means
a CPU (main CPU 62x) including a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and executing a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
a program storage means (program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area that is an area different from the first program storage area and stores the second program;
a stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a first stack area corresponding to the first program and accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and a second stack area different from the first stack area and corresponding to the second program and accessible by a second stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer;
a data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) having a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area which is an area different from the first data storage area and corresponds to the second program capable of updating data;
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In a process by the first program, data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
In a process by the second program, data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
The CPU includes:
A first process (game progress process) is carried out by executing a program included in the first program;
After performing the first process, a storage process is performed to store the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area by executing a program included in the first program;
after carrying out the storage process, a program included in the second program is executed to store an address for referring to the second stack area in the stack pointer and to carry out a save process for storing the respective values of the plurality of registers in the second data storage area;
After the save process is performed, a program included in the second program is executed to perform a second process (a game history information calculation and display process);
a program included in the second program is executed after the second process is performed, thereby performing a return process in which the values of the plurality of registers are set to the values stored in the second data storage area by the save process, and the address for referring to the first stack area, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after performing the return process, a program included in the first program is executed to perform a change process in which the value of the flag register, one of the multiple registers whose values were set by the return process, is changed to a value stored in the first stack area or the first data memory area by the storage process.

Feature αQ1 performs save and restore processes, which makes it possible to avoid problems caused by changes to the register values used in the first program when returning from the second program to the first program.

In addition, according to this feature, even if the value of the flag register changes after the storage process is performed but before the save process is performed, the value of the flag register is restored to the same value as immediately after the end of the first process by the first program by performing the change process, so there is no risk of affecting the process by the first program that is performed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the processing by the first program, simply by adding a program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, a program for performing the second process independently of the first program can be easily created.

In addition, for example, in a configuration in which a reset process is performed to erase all data stored in the stack area when the amount of data to be stored in the stack area exceeds the upper limit of the storage capacity of the stack area, if the values of each of the multiple registers are stored in the second stack area during the evacuation process, there is a risk that the reset process will be performed. In contrast, according to this feature, the values of each of the multiple registers are stored in the second data storage area during the evacuation process, so the risk of the stack area resetting being performed can be avoided.

In addition, according to this feature, the address for referencing the first stack area, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer during the return process, so there is no need to save the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer to the second data storage area during the save process. This makes it possible to simplify the CPU processing and reduce the storage capacity of the second data storage area required to save the address for referencing the first stack area stored in the stack pointer.

<Feature αR group>
The group of features αR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αR1]
A gaming machine having a control means for controlling a game,
The control means
a CPU (main CPU 62x) including a plurality of registers including a flag register and a stack pointer, and executing a plurality of types of programs including a first program and a second program;
a program storage means (program storage means 63a of the main ROM 63) having a first program storage area for storing the first program and a second program storage area that is an area different from the first program storage area and stores the second program;
a stack means (stack means 64b of the main RAM 64) having a first stack area corresponding to the first program and accessible by a first stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer, and a second stack area different from the first stack area and corresponding to the second program and accessible by a second stack area reference address stored in the stack pointer;
a data storage means (data storage means 64a of the main RAM 64) having a first data storage area corresponding to the first program capable of updating data, and a second data storage area which is an area different from the first data storage area and corresponds to the second program capable of updating data;
The flag register is a register whose value changes in a predetermined case,
In a process by the first program, data in the first stack area and the first data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the second stack area and the second data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
In a process by the second program, data in the second stack area and the second data storage area can be updated and referenced, and data in the first stack area and the first data storage area cannot be updated but can be referenced,
The CPU includes:
A first process (game progress process) is carried out by executing a program included in the first program;
After performing the first process, a storage process is performed to store the value of the flag register in the first stack area or the first data storage area by executing a program included in the first program;
After the storage process is performed, a first clear process is performed in which a program included in the first program is executed to set each value of the plurality of registers to 0;
performing a first storing process of storing an address for referring to the second stack area in the stack pointer by executing a program included in the second program after performing the first clearing process;
After carrying out the first storage process, a program included in the second program is executed to carry out a second process (a game history information calculation and display process);
performing a second storing process of storing the address for referring to the first stack area, which is a fixed value, in the stack pointer by executing a program included in the second program after performing the second process;
After the second storing process is performed, a second clearing process is performed in which a value of each of the plurality of registers is set to 0 by executing a program included in the second program;
A gaming machine characterized in that, after performing the second clear process, a change process is performed by executing a program included in the first program, changing the value of the flag register to a value stored in the first stack area or the first data memory area by the storage process.

According to feature αR1, the first clear process is performed by a program included in the first program, and the second clear process is performed by a program included in the second program, so that the values of each of the multiple registers immediately before the start of execution of the second program can be made to match the values of each of the multiple registers immediately after the end of execution of the second program. Therefore, when returning from the second program to the first program, it is possible to avoid problems caused by the values of each of the multiple registers used in the first program having changed.

In addition, according to this feature, since the storage process and change process are performed, the value of the flag register is restored to the same value as immediately after the end of the first process by the first program. Therefore, there is no risk of affecting the process by the first program that is performed after returning from the process by the second program. As a result, it becomes possible to configure multiple programs independently.

Furthermore, according to this feature, the second process can be added without affecting the processing by the first program, simply by adding a program for performing the second process to the second program. Therefore, a program for performing the second process independently of the first program can be easily created.

In addition, according to this feature, in the return process, the address for referring to the first stack area, which is a fixed value, is stored in the stack pointer, so in the save process, there is no need to save the address for referring to the first stack area stored in the stack pointer to the second data storage area. This makes it possible to simplify the CPU processing and reduce the storage capacity of the second data storage area required to save the address for referring to the first stack area stored in the stack pointer.

<Characteristic αS group>
The group of features αS is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αS1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from an outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information regarding the progress of a game;
A detection means for detecting an abnormality in the storage means;
an initialization means for initializing the storage means when the detection means detects the abnormality;
A gaming machine comprising:
The change mode execution means is provided with a means for executing the change mode when the initialization is executed, even if the specified operation is not accepted.

If an abnormality in the storage means causes the storage means to be initialized, the winning probability setting information may also be rewritten to setting information different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator. Furthermore, if the winning probability setting information is configured so that it is not initialized (changed) even when the storage means is initialized, there is a risk that the setting information may still be maintained as different from the setting information originally intended by the administrator.

According to feature αS1, when the storage means is initialized due to an abnormality in the storage means, the change mode is executed, so that the manager of the gaming machine can change the winning probability setting information to the originally intended setting information in the change mode before play is resumed on the gaming machine.

[Feature αS2]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1,
The initialization means includes a means for initializing information relating to a game state among information stored in the storage means when initializing the storage means.

According to feature αS2, even if the storage means is initialized, information about the game status is not initialized, so the player can resume playing while maintaining the game status. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by the initialization of the storage means.

[Feature αS3]
A gaming machine according to feature αS1 or feature αS2,
The gaming machine further comprises a notification means for notifying a player that the winning probability has been changed when the winning probability is changed in the change mode.

When an abnormality in the storage means causes the storage means to be initialized and the change mode is executed, it is expected that a player playing on the gaming machine will become suspicious as to whether or not the winning probability has been changed by the administrator in the change mode after the initialization of the storage means. However, according to this feature, when the winning probability has been changed, the fact that the winning probability has been changed is notified, so the player can confirm whether or not the winning probability has been changed. More specifically, the player can be made to understand only whether or not the winning probability has been changed in the change mode, without being made to understand what the current setting information for the winning probability is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which a player must resume playing in a state of anxiety, not knowing whether or not the winning probability has been changed by the administrator.

<Characteristic αT group>
The group of features α T is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αT1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different probability by accepting a predetermined operation from an outside;
a notification means for notifying a user that the winning probability has been changed when the winning probability is changed in the change mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature αT1, the player can recognize that the winning probability has been changed in the change mode. Specifically, for example, the player can be made to understand only whether the winning probability has been changed in the change mode, without being made to understand what the current winning probability setting is.

[Feature αT2]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1,
a second notification means for notifying a player in a manner different from that notified by the notification means when the winning probability is not changed in the change mode.

Feature αT2 allows the player to recognize that the winning probability has not changed in the change mode.

[Feature αT3]
A gaming machine according to feature αT1 or feature αT2,
The second notification means comprises a means for notifying that the winning probability has not been changed when the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

Feature αT3 allows the player to clearly recognize that the winning probability has not been changed in the change mode.

<Feature αU group>
The group of features αU is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αU1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing the winning probability of winning a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from an outside;
an information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode in which the progress of a game is stopped and information regarding the winning probability is displayed by receiving a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
A role that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reel continues the certain operation even during the information display mode.

According to feature αU1, the action of the reel does not stop or change even when the information display mode that stops the game progress starts or ends, but continues to operate in a certain way. This prevents, for example, a player from gaining an unfair advantage by firing a game ball at a time when the action of the reel stops or changes.

<Feature αV group>
The group of features αV is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αV1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a change mode execution means for executing a change mode capable of changing a winning probability of a predetermined result in the predetermined lottery process to a different winning probability by receiving a first operation from an outside;
an information display mode execution means for executing an information display mode in which the progress of a game is stopped and information regarding the winning probability is displayed by receiving a second operation different from the first operation from the outside;
A role that continues a certain operation regardless of the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the reel is in a predetermined state and stops the fixed operation during the information display mode.

Feature αV1 makes it possible to suppress malfunctions in, for example, parts that may malfunction if their operation is stopped in a state other than a predetermined state.

The inventions of the above feature group αP to feature group αV solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

<Feature αW group>
The group of features αW is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αW1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting change mode execution means executes the setting change mode when a first condition (the setting key, the frame opening switch and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is ON) is satisfied at the time the gaming machine is powered on, but is further provided with a means for not executing the setting change mode even if the first condition is satisfied after the power is turned on.

According to feature αW1, in order to execute the setting change mode on a gaming machine that has already been turned on, it is necessary to turn the power of the gaming machine OFF once and then ON again. Generally, in an amusement parlor, it is difficult for anyone other than the manager of the gaming machine to operate the power switch on the back of the gaming machine to turn the power OFF once and then ON again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting of the gaming machine from being illegally changed by a person with illegal intentions who is not the manager of the gaming machine.

[Feature αW2]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1,
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
The setting information display mode execution means executes the setting information display mode when a second condition (the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is OFF) is satisfied at the time the gaming machine is powered on, but is further provided with a means for not executing the setting information display mode even if the second condition is satisfied after the power is turned on.

According to feature αW2, in order to execute the setting information display mode on a gaming machine that is already powered on, it is necessary to turn the power of the gaming machine OFF once and then ON again. Generally, in an amusement parlor, it is difficult for anyone other than the manager of the gaming machine to operate the power switch on the back of the gaming machine to turn the power OFF once and then ON again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting of the gaming machine from being illegally known by a person with illegal intentions who is not the manager of the gaming machine.

[Feature αW3]
A gaming machine according to feature αW1 or feature αW2,
A gaming machine comprising a notification means for notifying when the power to the gaming machine is turned on.

Feature αW3 makes it difficult for a person with fraudulent intentions who is not the administrator of the gaming machine to turn the power of the gaming machine OFF and then ON again without being noticed by those around. This makes it possible to further prevent a person with fraudulent intentions who is not the administrator of the gaming machine from changing or checking the settings of the winning probability of the gaming machine.

<Feature αX group>
The group of features αX is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αX1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information including the setting information;
a determination process execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process for calculating a RAM determination value and determining whether or not the RAM is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting information display mode execution means includes a means for not executing the setting information display mode when the result of the specified judgment process is a specified result (a result that the RAM judgment value is not normal) even if the condition for executing the setting information display mode is met.

When the result of a predetermined judgment process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. According to feature αX1, it is possible to prevent the setting information display mode from being executed while leaving open the possibility that the setting information for the winning probability stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator.

<Feature αY group>
The group of features αY are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αY1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
An operation means (RAM clear button) for accepting a predetermined operation (pressing operation);
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information regarding the progress of a game;
an erasure process execution means for executing an erasure process (RAM clear process) for erasing the information stored in the storage means when the power is turned on in a state in which the operation means has accepted the predetermined operation (a state in which the RAM clear button is pressed);
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting change mode execution means includes a means for executing the setting change mode when a predetermined condition is met, including the operation means accepting the predetermined operation (when the power is turned on, the setting key, the frame opening switch, and the door opening switch are all ON, and the RAM clear button is pressed);
The erasure process execution means comprises means for executing the erasure process before or after execution of the setting change mode when the predetermined condition is met.

In general, the administrator who manages the gaming machine is aware that when the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the operation means accepting a predetermined operation, an erasure process is executed to erase the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, according to feature αY1, it is possible to make the administrator strongly aware that when a setting change mode is executed by establishing a predetermined condition including the operation means accepting a predetermined operation, not only the setting change mode is executed but also the erasure process is executed. As a result, for example, when the administrator wants to start the gaming machine while maintaining a game state such as a high probability mode and resume playing from the state when the power was last turned off, that is, when the erasure process should not be executed when the gaming machine is started, the administrator can reliably determine that the setting change mode should not be executed. In other words, according to this feature, a gaming machine whose operation is easy for the administrator to understand can be provided.

<Feature αZ group>
The group of features αZ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature αZ1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability;
an erasing means for erasing the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasing means is
a first erasure process (first RAM clear process) for erasing information other than the setting information, without erasing the setting information, among the information stored in the storage means;
a second erasing process (second RAM clearing process) for erasing information including the setting information from among the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing the above.

According to feature αZ1, it is possible to realize a processing process that can handle both a processing process in which the setting information should be left and the other information should be deleted from the information stored in the storage means, and a processing process in which the setting information should be deleted as well. For example, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the setting information is not deleted in a processing process in which the setting information is normal and therefore should be maintained, and the setting information is not deleted in a processing process in which the setting information may have become an abnormal value unintended by the administrator, and the information including the setting information is deleted.

[Feature αZ2]
A gaming machine according to feature αZ1,
a determination process execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process for calculating a RAM determination value and determining whether or not the RAM is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means,
The erasing means is provided with a means for executing the second erasing process when the result of the predetermined judgment process is a predetermined result (a result that the RAM judgment value is abnormal).

When the result of a predetermined judgment process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. According to feature αZ2, it is possible to prevent a game from being played while leaving the possibility that the setting information for the winning probability stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristics of βA group>
The feature group βA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βA1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing information including setting information which is information regarding the setting of the lottery probability;
a determination process execution means for executing a predetermined determination process (a process for calculating a RAM determination value and determining whether or not the RAM is normal) based on the information stored in the storage means;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the setting change mode execution means is provided with a means for executing the setting change mode when a predetermined operation for executing the setting change mode (an operation of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 when the setting key, frame opening switch, and door opening switch are all ON and the RAM clear button is pressed) has not been accepted, but when the result of the predetermined judgment process is a predetermined result (a result indicating that the RAM judgment value is not normal).

If the result of a predetermined judgment process based on the information stored in the storage means is a predetermined result, there is a possibility that the setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator of the gaming machine. According to feature βA1, if the result of the predetermined judgment process is a predetermined result, a setting change mode is executed, so that the administrator can change the winning probability setting. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a game from being played while leaving the possibility that the winning probability setting information stored in the storage means has an abnormal value that is not intended by the administrator.

<Characteristic βB group>
The feature group βB is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βB1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A display means (main display unit 45) for displaying information regarding the game including the result of the predetermined lottery process;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means includes:
The gaming machine is characterized by comprising a means for displaying a first display mode (a display pattern in which all LEDs are lit) that is not displayed when displaying information related to the game while the setting change mode is being executed.

According to feature βB1, the setting change mode can be notified to an administrator or a player by using a display means that displays information about the game. Furthermore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that is equipped with a display means that displays information about the game, the configuration can be changed to one that can notify an administrator or a player that the setting change mode is being executed by simply changing the control program of the gaming machine, without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine can be reduced compared to a configuration in which a dedicated display means is additionally provided for notifying that the setting change mode is being executed.

[Feature βB2]
A gaming machine according to feature βB1,
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
The display means is
A gaming machine comprising a means for displaying a second display mode (a display mode in which all LEDs flash simultaneously) different from the first display mode and not displayed when displaying information related to the game during execution of the setting information display mode.

According to feature βB2, it is possible to notify an administrator or a player that the setting information display mode is being executed instead of the setting change mode, by using a display means that displays information about the game. Furthermore, for example, in the case of a gaming machine that is equipped with a display means that displays information about the game, it is possible to change the configuration to one that can notify an administrator or a player that the setting information display mode is being executed by simply changing the control program of the gaming machine, without changing the hardware configuration of the gaming machine. Therefore, for example, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing costs of the gaming machine compared to a configuration in which a dedicated display means is additionally provided for notifying that the setting information display mode is being executed.

<Characteristic βC group>
The group of features βC is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βC1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A control means for controlling the display means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting elements constituting the display means to be lit up when power is applied to the gaming machine.

According to feature βC1, when the gaming machine is powered on, the manager of the gaming machine can check whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the display means are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire.

[Feature βC2]
A gaming machine according to feature βC1,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting elements constituting the display means to flash when power is applied to the gaming machine.

According to feature βC2, when the gaming machine manager turns on the gaming machine, he or she can check whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the display means are constantly lit due to a malfunction and do not turn off.

<Characteristic βD group>
The group of features βD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βD1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying (displaying type information and numerical information) based on the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A control means for controlling the display means;
an operating means (information display unit inspection button) for accepting a predetermined operation from the outside;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is composed of a plurality of light emitting units,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting elements constituting the display means to be lit up based on the operation means accepting the specified operation.

According to feature βD1, the manager of the gaming machine can check at any time whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the display means are not lit due to a malfunction such as a broken wire by operating the operating means.

[Feature βD2]
A gaming machine according to feature βD1,
The control means is provided with a control means for controlling all of the plurality of light-emitting elements constituting the display means to flash on and off based on the operation means accepting the specified operation.

According to feature βD2, the manager of the gaming machine can, by operating the operating means, check at any time whether any of the light-emitting elements constituting the display means are constantly lit and do not turn off due to a malfunction.

<Characteristic βE group>
The group of features βE is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βE1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
the storage means includes means for storing the detection information for a plurality of periods with a predetermined timing as a boundary;
The calculation means includes means for calculating the game history information for each of the plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the plurality of periods,
The display means includes a means for switching between and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information for each of the plurality of periods.

According to feature βE1, an inspector of a gaming machine can check multiple pieces of gaming history information for multiple periods bounded by a predetermined timing on the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can check whether or not there was a situation in which the gaming history information was not within an appropriate range for multiple periods bounded by a predetermined timing on the gaming machine.

[Feature βE2]
A gaming machine according to feature βE1,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined timing is a timing when the date changes.

According to feature βE2, the inspector of the gaming machine can check multiple pieces of gaming history information for each date on the gaming machine. For example, the inspector can check for each date whether there was a situation in which the gaming history information was not within the appropriate range.

<Characteristic βF group>
The feature group βF is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βF1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
an erasing means for erasing the detection information stored in the storage means when a predetermined operation is received;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means includes a means for not displaying the numerical information of the game history information until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage _NOUT reaches a predetermined number) after the detection means is erased by the erasing means.

According to feature βF1, if the display means does not display numerical information of the gaming history information, the gaming machine inspector can recognize that the specified condition is not met after the detection means is erased by the erasing means.

The inventions of the above feature group αW to feature group βF solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

<Characteristics of βG group>
The group of features βG is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βG1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes a means for calculating a plurality of pieces of the game _history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the periods, the boundaries of which are determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage NOUT reaches a predetermined number);
The display means includes:
a display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods (a display mode displaying a base corresponding to the bL section) to a display mode for displaying none of the game history information (all lights off), and then to a display mode for displaying the game history information corresponding to another of the plurality of periods (a display mode displaying a base corresponding to the b1 section), when switching the display of the game history information.

According to feature βG1, when switching the display of the game history information, the display means transitions from a display mode that displays game history information corresponding to one of the multiple periods to a display mode that does not display any of the multiple game history information, and then transitions to a display mode that displays game history information corresponding to another of the multiple periods, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can clearly recognize that the game history information displayed on the display means has switched to game history information corresponding to another period. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager or the like from misidentifying the period and checking the game history information without realizing that the period of the displayed game history information has switched to another period.

<Characteristic βH group>
The group of features βH is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βH1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes a means for calculating a plurality of pieces of the game _history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the periods, the boundaries of which are determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage NOUT reaches a predetermined number);
The display means includes:
a means for transitioning the display mode in a first transition mode (a transition mode in which a transition is made with a full light-off period of 300 ms) when transitioning from a display mode (a display mode displaying bL) in which the game history information corresponding to one of the plurality of periods is displayed to a display mode (a display mode displaying b1) in which the game history information corresponding to another of the plurality of periods is displayed;
and when the display mode is to be changed based on the specified condition being satisfied, a means for changing the display mode in a second change mode (a change mode in which a hyphen is lit for 3000 ms and a change mode is made) different from the first change mode.

According to feature βH1, the transition mode when switching from a display mode that displays game history information corresponding to one period to a display mode that displays game history information corresponding to another period is different from the transition mode when switching the display mode based on the satisfaction of a specified condition, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can clearly distinguish and recognize whether the display mode is switching to a display mode that displays game history information corresponding to another period, or whether the display mode is switching based on the satisfaction of a specified condition, by recognizing the difference between the transition modes. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the manager, etc. from continuing the task of checking game history information without realizing that the specified condition has been satisfied.

<Characteristic βI group>
The feature group βI is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βI1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes a means for calculating a plurality of pieces of the game _history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the periods, the boundaries of which are determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage NOUT reaches a predetermined number);
The display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: a means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the lapse of a predetermined display duration (5000 ms), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, a means for transitioning to a display mode (hyphen lit, all lights off) corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition even before the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed.

According to feature βI1, if a predetermined condition is met while the game history information is being displayed, the display mode changes to one corresponding to the predetermined condition being met, even before the predetermined display duration of the displayed game history information has elapsed, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met. Furthermore, for example, after the display mode changes to one corresponding to the predetermined condition being met, it is possible to quickly display the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition was met. As a result, the manager or inspector can quickly check the game history information for each period after the predetermined condition was met, thereby improving the inspection efficiency of the gaming machine.

<Characteristic βJ group>
The group of features βJ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βJ1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes a means for calculating a plurality of pieces of the game _history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the periods, the boundaries of which are determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage NOUT reaches a predetermined number);
The display means includes:
A gaming machine comprising: a means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods based on the lapse of a predetermined display duration (5000 ms), and when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, a means for transitioning to a display mode (hyphen lit, all lights off) corresponding to the satisfaction of the predetermined condition after the predetermined display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed.

According to feature βJ1, even if a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game history information is being displayed, the game history information continues to be displayed until the display duration of the game history information being displayed has elapsed. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which, for example, the display of the game history information ends just as the manager or inspector of the gaming machine is about to check the game history information being displayed and transcribe it onto an inspection sheet, making it impossible to transcribe the game history information onto the inspection sheet.

<Characteristic βK group>
The group of features βK is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βK1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) for displaying the game history information calculated by the calculation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation means includes a means for calculating a plurality of pieces of the game _history information corresponding to each of a plurality of periods based on the detection information for each of the periods, the boundaries of which are determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the measured number of balls passing through the discharge passage NOUT reaches a predetermined number);
The display means includes:
a means for switching and displaying the plurality of pieces of game history information corresponding to each of the plurality of periods in a predetermined order, and a means for starting display from game history information (bL) corresponding to a specific period among the plurality of periods, regardless of the predetermined order, when the predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to feature βK1, when a specified condition is met, the display starts from the gaming history information corresponding to a specific period among multiple periods, regardless of the specified order. This allows the manager or inspector of the gaming machine to recognize that the specified condition has been met, and allows the manager or inspector of the gaming machine to prioritize checking the gaming history information corresponding to the specific period.

The inventions of the above feature group βG to feature group βK solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

<Feature βL group>
The group of features βL is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βL1]
A gaming machine,
A storage unit (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined information (various flag information, etc.) when the supply of power from the outside is cut off;
a recovery means for executing a recovery process (power restoration process) for recovering the gaming machine to a state before the power supply is cut off based on the predetermined information when the power supply from an external source is started;
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured with a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
a test process execution means for executing a test process (a lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode;
Equipped with
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process execution means comprises a means for executing the inspection process in response to execution of the return process.

According to feature βL1, the execution of the recovery process triggers the execution of the inspection process, so the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can cause the gaming machine to execute the inspection process by performing an operation to execute the recovery process on the gaming machine (for example, turning the power switch OFF and then ON again). The manager or inspector can then inspect whether any of the multiple display elements that make up the display means are malfunctioning and not operating in a specified manner.

[Feature βL2]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βL2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is any display element that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βL3]
A gaming machine according to feature βL1 or feature βL2,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βL3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that is always on and does not turn off).

<Characteristic βM group>
The group of features β M is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βM1]
An operation reception means for receiving an operation from the outside (a RAM clear button, a keyhole for settings, and a button for changing settings);
a process execution means for executing one of a plurality of branched process flows based on an operation mode accepted by the operation acceptance means when the supply of electric power from an external source is started;
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured with a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The gaming machine is characterized in that the processing execution means is provided with a means for executing an inspection process (lighting and flashing process) which is a process for operating the multiple display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner, regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed.

According to feature βM1, the inspection process is executed regardless of which of the multiple branched processing flows is executed, so that the gaming machine can be made to execute the inspection process regardless of the operation mode accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply is started. Therefore, the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means, regardless of the operation mode accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply is started. In other words, it is possible to prevent the inspection from being unable to be performed depending on the operation mode accepted by the operation acceptance means when power supply is started.

[Feature βM2]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βM2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is any display element that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βM3]
A gaming machine according to feature βM1 or feature βM2,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βM3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that is always on and does not turn off).

<Feature βN group>
The group of features βN is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βN1]
a first process group execution means for executing a first process group (the processes from step S12001 to step S12028 in FIG. 63 and FIG. 64) based on the start of the supply of electric power from an external source;
A second process group execution means for repeatedly executing a second process group (various processes included in timer interrupt processing, various random number update processes, and power outage monitoring processing) after the execution of the first process group is completed;
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured with a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The first process group executing means is provided with a means for executing an inspection process (lighting and flashing process) as one process included in the first process group, the inspection process being a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined manner.

According to feature βN1, a first process group including a test process is executed based on the start of the supply of external power, and after the execution of the first process group is completed, a second process group is repeatedly executed, so that the test process can be executed only once after the supply of external power is started. If the test process were included in the second process group, the test process would be repeatedly executed, which would increase the processing load of the gaming machine. Furthermore, if the test process is repeatedly executed, there is a risk that the period during which various information can be displayed on the display means will be shortened. In contrast, according to this feature, the test process can be executed only once after the supply of external power is started, so that the processing load of the gaming machine can be reduced, and the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can check whether there is any display element that does not operate in a predetermined manner due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means.

[Feature βN2]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βN2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is any display element that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βN3]
A gaming machine according to feature βN1 or feature βN2,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βN3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that is always on and does not turn off).

<Characteristic βO group>
The group of features βO is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βO1]
A game progress processing execution means for executing game progress processing (a ball entry detection process included in a timer interrupt process, a ball entry process for a starting hole, a game number control process, etc.) which is a process for enabling the progress of a game;
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured with a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
a test process execution means for executing a test process (a lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The inspection process execution means comprises a means for executing the inspection process after the supply of power from an external source is started and before the execution of the game progress process is started.

According to feature βO1, after the supply of external power has begun and before the execution of the game progress process begins, the inspection process is executed, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether any of the multiple display elements constituting the display means are malfunctioning and not operating in a predetermined manner before game progress can be made on the gaming machine.

If the inspection process were to be executed after the game progress process had begun, the player would be able to start playing before the manager or inspector could inspect the display means. In this case, there is a risk that after the player has started playing on the gaming machine, the manager or inspector would inspect the display means of the gaming machine and discover a defect in the display elements of the display means. If the manager or inspector discovers a defect in the display elements of the display means of the gaming machine, it will be necessary to have the player suspend or stop playing in order to repair or replace the display means. This could result in a strong sense of discomfort to the player.

In response to this, this feature allows an administrator or inspector to inspect the display means of a gaming machine before the player is able to start playing on the gaming machine, which prevents the player from having to interrupt or stop playing, causing discomfort to the player.

[Feature βO2]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βO2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is any display element that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βO3]
A gaming machine according to feature βO1 or feature βO2,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βO3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that is always on and does not turn off).

<Characteristic βP group>
The group of features βP is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βP1]
A plurality of detection means (ball entry detection sensors 44a to 44h) for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing detection information (basic game history information such as ball entry information, ball number information, and prize ball tally value) based on the detection of game balls by the detection means;
A calculation means for calculating game history information (game history information such as a combination ratio, a consecutive combination ratio, and a ball payout rate) which is information related to a game history based on the detection information;
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured with a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying various information;
a game history information display process execution means for executing a game history information display process (a game history process included in a timer interrupt process) which is a process for displaying information corresponding to the game history information on the display means;
a test process execution means for executing a test process (a lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The inspection process execution means includes a means for executing the inspection process before information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means by executing the gaming history information display process.

According to feature βP1, the inspection process is executed before the information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that does not operate in a predetermined manner due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means before the information corresponding to the gaming history information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent a player from checking the information corresponding to the gaming history information displayed on the display means without realizing that there is a display element that does not operate normally due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means.

[Feature βP2]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βP2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is any display element that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βP3]
A gaming machine according to feature βP1 or feature βP2,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βP3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that is always on and does not turn off).

<Characteristic βQ group>
The group of features βQ is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature βQ1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which a setting of a winning probability in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by receiving an external operation;
A display means (information display unit 45z) that is configured by a plurality of display elements (segment light emitting units, CP light emitting units) and is capable of displaying setting information, which is information related to the setting of the winning probability during execution of the setting change mode;
a test process execution means for executing a test process (a lighting and blinking process) which is a process for operating the plurality of display elements constituting the display means in a predetermined mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
The inspection process execution means comprises a means for executing the inspection process before the setting information is displayed on the display means by executing the setting change mode.

According to feature βQ1, the inspection process is executed before the setting information is displayed on the display means, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there are any display elements that do not operate in a predetermined manner due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means before the setting information is displayed on the display means of the gaming machine. As a result, it is possible to prevent the user from checking the setting information displayed on the display means without realizing that there is a display element that does not operate normally due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements that make up the display means.

[Feature βQ2]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode.

According to feature βQ2, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to be in the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is any display element that cannot be in the second display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting part that does not light up due to a broken wire).

[Feature βQ3]
A gaming machine according to feature βQ1 or feature βQ2,
Each of the plurality of display elements is capable of being in a first display state (off state) and a second display state (on state) different from the first display state,
The gaming machine, wherein the inspection process includes a process of controlling all of the plurality of display elements constituting the display means to alternately repeat the first display mode and the second display mode.

According to feature βQ3, the inspection process includes a process for controlling all of the multiple display elements constituting the display means to alternate between the first display mode and the second display mode, so that the manager or inspector of the gaming machine can inspect whether there is a display element that cannot transition from the second display mode to the first display mode due to a malfunction among the multiple display elements constituting the display means (for example, a light-emitting element that is always on and does not turn off).

The inventions of the above feature group βL to feature group βQ solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

<Characteristic βR group>
The group of features βR is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βR1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting change in progress flag);
an identification information transition means for setting the identification information to a first state (ON) when the setting change mode is started, and transitioning the identification information to a second state (OFF) different from the first state when the setting change mode is ended;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from an external source is cut off,
The setting change mode execution means is
A first starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the reception of a predetermined starting operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear button is pressed),
a second starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started from an external source;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature βR1, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on receipt of a predetermined starting operation, and the identification information transition means sets the identification information to a first state when the setting change mode starts and transitions the identification information to a second state when the setting change mode ends. The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed because the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off or a power outage occurs, the identification information stored in the storage means is maintained in the first state.

According to this feature, the second starting means starts the setting change mode based on determining that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside is started. In other words, according to this feature, if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting change mode is being executed, and the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting change mode will be started even if a predetermined start operation has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is being executed, the administrator can eliminate the trouble of having to perform the specified start operation again after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed in order to restart the setting change mode on the gaming machine.

In addition, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside while the setting change mode is running, the winning probability setting of the gaming machine may be in a state that the administrator did not intend. However, according to this feature, when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed from the outside, the setting change mode is started without the administrator of the gaming machine having to perform the specified start operation again, so it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting of the gaming machine from being left in a state that the administrator did not intend and being overlooked.

<Characteristic βS group>
The group of features βS is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βS1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
A storage means (main RAM 64) for storing predetermined identification information (setting confirmation flag);
an identification information transition means for setting the identification information to a first state (ON) when the setting information display mode is started, and transitioning the identification information to a second state (OFF) different from the first state when the setting information display mode is ended;
A gaming machine comprising:
The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from an external source is cut off,
The setting information display mode execution means
A first starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the reception of a predetermined starting operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 while the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear button is not pressed),
a second starting means for starting the setting information display mode based on the determination that the identification information is in the first state when the supply of power to the gaming machine is started from an external source;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature βS1, the first starting means starts the setting information display mode based on receipt of a predetermined starting operation, and the identification information transition means sets the identification information to a first state when the setting information display mode starts and transitions the identification information to a second state when the setting information display mode ends. The storage means is capable of maintaining the state of the identification information even when the supply of power to the gaming machine from the outside is cut off. Therefore, for example, if the supply of power to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting information display mode is being executed because the power switch of the gaming machine is turned off or a power outage occurs, the identification information stored in the storage means is maintained in the first state.

According to this feature, the second starting means starts the setting information display mode based on determining that the identification information is in the first state when power supply to the gaming machine is started from the outside. In other words, according to this feature, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off while the setting information display mode is being executed, and the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the setting information display mode will be started even if a predetermined start operation has not been received.

Therefore, if the power supply to the gaming machine is cut off from the outside while the setting information display mode is being executed, the administrator can eliminate the trouble of having to perform the specified start operation again after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed in order to restart the setting information display mode on the gaming machine.

<Characteristic βT group>
The feature group βT is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βT1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A first storage means (a setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) that stores setting information, which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and that can maintain the state of the setting information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off;
A second storage means (an update setting information storage area of the main RAM 64) for storing change setting information (update setting information) which is information used during execution of the setting change mode;
a change means for changing the change setting information during execution of the setting change mode;
A gaming machine comprising:
the second storage means includes means for storing information corresponding to the setting information as the change setting information when the setting change mode is started,
the change means includes means for changing the change setting information stored in the second storage means by accepting the predetermined change operation,
The first storage means comprises means for storing, as the setting information, information corresponding to the change setting information when the setting change mode is terminated.

According to feature βT1, when the setting change mode is started, the second storage means stores information corresponding to the setting information as change setting information, the change means changes the change setting information stored in the second storage means by accepting a predetermined change operation, and the first storage means stores information corresponding to the change setting information as setting information when the setting change mode is terminated. Therefore, even if the supply of external power is cut off during the execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the first storage means can be maintained at the value before the setting change mode was started. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting information of the winning probability of the gaming machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the administrator due to the supply of external power being cut off during the execution of the setting change mode. A specific explanation will be given below.

If a configuration is adopted in which change setting information is not used during execution of the setting change mode, and the setting information stored in the first storage means is directly changed by accepting a specified change operation, if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the setting information is a value different from the value intended by the manager of the gaming machine during execution of the setting change mode, the setting information of the winning probability of the gaming machine will become a value different from the value intended by the manager.

In contrast, according to this feature, the setting information stored in the first storage means itself is not changed until the setting change mode is terminated, and the change setting information stored in the second storage means is changed. Therefore, even if the external power supply is cut off at a time when the change setting information is a value different from the value intended by the manager of the gaming machine during execution of the setting change mode, the setting information stored in the first storage means is maintained at the value it had before the setting change mode was started. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the winning probability setting information of the gaming machine from becoming a value different from the value intended by the manager due to the external power supply being cut off during execution of the setting change mode.

[Feature βT2]
A gaming machine according to feature βT1,
a display means for displaying the change setting information stored in the second storage means while the setting change mode is being executed.

According to feature βT2, the display means displays the change setting information stored in the second storage means while the setting change mode is being executed, so that the administrator can carry out the specified change operation while checking the change setting information displayed on the display means.

<Characteristic βU group>
The group of features βU are extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and are mainly extracted from the first embodiment (e.g., aspect 100).

[Feature βU1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means for storing setting information, which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, capable of maintaining the state of the setting information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off (a setting information storage area of the main RAM 64);
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of electric power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65 );
A game progress processing execution means for executing a game progress processing (the processing of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68) which is a processing for progressing a game;
A gaming machine comprising:
A gaming machine characterized in that the game progress processing execution means does not execute the game progress processing when the setting information determination means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the specified condition (when the setting information is determined to be not within the specified range in step S12007 of Figure 65 and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015).

According to feature βU1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the supply of external power is cut off, and the game progress processing execution means determines whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of external power is started, and does not execute the game progress processing to progress the game if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game progress processing from being executed while the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy the predetermined condition, which would cause a malfunction in the progress of the game on the gaming machine. As a result, for example, it is possible to prevent unexpected losses from being caused to players or managers.

<Characteristic βV group>
The group of features βV is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βV1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) capable of storing various information including setting information which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off;
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of electric power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65 );
an erasure process execution means for executing an erasure process (first RAM clear process) for erasing the various information stored in the storage means except for the setting information;
A gaming machine comprising:
The erasure process execution means includes:
A means for executing the erasure process based on receipt of a predetermined erasure operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key turned off and the RAM clear button pressed);
means for not executing the erasure process when it is determined by the setting information determination means that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (when it is determined in step S12007 of FIG. 65 that the setting information is not within a predetermined range and a RAM abnormality flag is ON in step S12015), even if the predetermined erasure operation is accepted;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature βV1, the storage means maintains the state of the setting information even when the supply of external power is cut off, and the erasure process execution means determines whether the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of external power is started, and if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, does not execute the erasure process even if a predetermined erasure operation is received. Therefore, it is possible to prevent malfunctions caused by the erasure process being executed while the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. This is explained in detail below.

If a configuration is adopted in which an erasure process is executed even when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition, then, among the various information stored in the storage means, even information indicating that it has been determined that the setting information does not satisfy a predetermined condition (e.g., a RAM abnormality flag) may be erased. Even though the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, after the erasure process is executed, a process that assumes that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition (e.g., a game progress process that progresses the game) may be executed, which may result in a malfunction.

In contrast, according to this feature, if it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy the specified conditions, the erasure process is not executed even if a specified erasure operation is received. This makes it possible to prevent the erasure process from being executed even when the setting information does not satisfy the specified conditions, and to prevent processing that is based on the assumption that the setting information satisfies the specified conditions from being executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of problems caused by the erasure process being executed when the setting information does not satisfy the specified conditions.

<Characteristic βW group>
The group of features βW is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βW1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
A lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
A storage means capable of storing various information including the setting information, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off (a setting information storage area of the main RAM 64);
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of electric power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65 );
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting information display mode execution means
A means for executing the setting information display mode based on receipt of a predetermined start operation (an operation of turning on the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 with the setting key, the frame open switch, and the door open switch all ON and the RAM clear button not being pressed);
means for not executing the setting information display mode when the setting information determination means determines that the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition (when the setting information is determined to be outside the predetermined range in step S12007 of FIG. 65 and the RAM abnormality flag is turned ON in step S12015), even when the predetermined start operation is accepted;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature βW1, the storage means maintains the state of various information including the setting information even when the supply of external power is cut off, and the setting information display mode execution means does not execute the setting information display mode even if a specified start operation is received when it is determined that the setting information does not satisfy a specified condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the setting information display mode that displays the setting information from being executed even when the setting information stored in the storage means does not satisfy the specified condition.

<Characteristic βX group>
The feature βX group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βX1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A storage means (main RAM 64) capable of storing various information including setting information which is information related to the setting of the winning probability, and capable of maintaining the various information even when the supply of power from the outside is cut off;
When the supply of power from the outside is cut off, a predetermined calculation is performed based on a predetermined information group stored in the storage means, and a first calculation result, which is the result of the predetermined calculation, is stored in the storage means (a RAM determination value is calculated in the power outage monitoring process and stored in the main RAM 64). Calculation execution means;
a calculation result determination means for, when the supply of electric power from an external source is started, executing the predetermined calculation based on the predetermined information group stored in the storage means and determining whether or not a second calculation result, which is a result of the predetermined calculation, matches the first calculation result (performing the processing of steps S12005 to S12006 in FIG. 65 );
A setting information determination means for determining whether or not the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition when the supply of electric power from an external source is started (executing the process of step S12007 in FIG. 65 );
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (the process of steps S12304 to S12316 in FIG. 68, which is a process for progressing a game) based on the determination by the calculation result determination means that the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, and the determination by the setting information determination means that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature βX1, the predetermined processing execution means executes the predetermined processing based on the determination that the second calculation result matches the first calculation result and that the setting information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined processing from being executed even when the second calculation result matches the first calculation result but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a malfunction caused by the predetermined processing being executed even when the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. This is explained in detail below.

If the second calculation result and the first calculation result match, it is highly likely that the contents of the specified information group stored in the storage means when the external power supply is started are the same as the contents of the specified information group stored in the storage means when the previous power supply was cut off, and it is highly likely that the specified information group stored in the storage means was maintained normally even when the external power supply was cut off. However, even if the specified information group stored in the storage means is not maintained normally, the second calculation result and the first calculation result may coincidentally match.

For this reason, if a configuration were adopted in which it was determined whether the second calculation result and the first calculation result matched each other but whether the setting information satisfied a predetermined condition was not determined, even if the setting information did not satisfy the predetermined condition, the second calculation result and the first calculation result could coincidentally match, and a predetermined process could be executed. If the predetermined process included, for example, a process that allowed the game to proceed, there was a risk of a fatal malfunction occurring in the progress of the game.

In response to this, according to this feature, a predetermined process is executed based on the determination that the second calculation result matches the first calculation result and that the setting information satisfies a predetermined condition. In other words, when the second calculation result matches the first calculation result but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the predetermined process is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the predetermined process from being executed even when the second calculation result matches the first calculation result but the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of malfunctions caused by the predetermined process being executed even when the setting information does not satisfy the predetermined condition.

<Characteristic βY group>
The feature group βY is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment (eg, aspect 100).

[Feature βY1]
An entry section into which game balls can enter;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
an operation receiving means (a setting keyhole) that can transition from a first state (an OFF state) to a second state (an ON state) different from the first state by receiving a predetermined operation (an operation of inserting a setting key into a setting keyhole and turning it);
A gaming machine comprising:
The setting change mode execution means includes:
a termination means for terminating the setting change mode based on detection of a transition of the operation receiving means from the second state to the first state (an OFF edge falling from an ON state to an OFF state) during execution of the setting change mode.

According to feature βY1, the setting change mode execution means terminates the setting change mode based on detection of a transition of the operation acceptance means from the second state to the first state while the setting change mode is being executed, so that it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being terminated immediately after it has been started. This will be described in detail below.

For example, in a configuration in which the setting change mode is started when a first start condition including the operation acceptance means being in the second state (for example, when the setting key (keyhole), frame open switch, and door open switch are all ON and the RAM clear button is pressed, and the power switch of the pachinko machine 10 is turned ON) is met, and when a second start condition not related to whether the operation acceptance means is in the second state (for example, the setting change flag is ON when the power is ON) is met, a configuration different from this feature is adopted, in which the setting change mode is terminated when it is detected that the operation acceptance means is in the first state. In the case of adopting this configuration, when the setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the first start condition including the operation acceptance means being in the second state, the setting change mode continues until the operation acceptance means transitions from the second state to the first state. However, when the setting change mode is started based on the establishment of the second start condition not related to whether the operation acceptance means is in the second state, the setting change mode may be started while the operation acceptance means is in the first state. In this case, immediately after the setting change mode is started, the operation acceptance means is detected to be in the first state, and the setting change mode ends. In other words, the setting change mode ends immediately after it is started, making it difficult to change the winning probability setting in the setting change mode.

In contrast, according to this feature, the setting change mode is terminated based on the detection of a transition of the operation acceptance means from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is initiated by the establishment of the second start condition and the setting change mode is initiated while the operation acceptance means is still in the first state, the setting change mode will continue until an administrator of the gaming machine or the like transitions the operation acceptance means from the first state to the second state, and then transitions it again from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the setting change mode is initiated while the operation acceptance means is still in the first state, it is possible to avoid the setting change mode being terminated immediately after it is initiated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the setting change mode from being terminated immediately after it is initiated, making it difficult to change the winning probability setting.

In addition, according to this feature, even if the setting change mode is started by the establishment of the second start condition, only a person who can change the state of the operation reception means can end the setting change mode. Therefore, the security of the gaming machine can be improved.

[Feature βY2]
A gaming machine according to feature βY1,
The setting change mode execution means is
a first starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the establishment of a first starting condition including that the operation accepting means is in the second state (that is, that the setting keyhole is in an ON state);
a second starting means for starting the setting change mode based on the establishment of a second starting condition (a setting change in progress flag being ON when the power is ON) that is not related to whether the operation receiving means is in the second state or not;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature βY2, the first starting means starts the setting change mode based on the satisfaction of a first starting condition including the operation receiving means being in the second state, and the second starting means starts the setting change mode based on the satisfaction of a second starting condition that is independent of whether the operation receiving means is in the second state. Therefore, the setting change mode can be started not only when the operation receiving means is in the second state, but also when the operation receiving means is not in the second state.

The inventions of the above feature group βR to feature group βY solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

<Characteristic βZ group>
The feature βZ group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature βZ1]
A gaming machine,
A time information updating means (a time register 97b1 of the RTC 97) capable of updating time information (current date and time information) including information that can identify the time even in a power failure state in which the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine is cut off;
a start-up time information storage means (a start-up time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97) capable of storing the timekeeping information as start-up time information (start-up date and time information), and capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during the power interruption state;
a storage process execution means for executing a storage process which is a process of acquiring the timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine, and storing the acquired timing information in the startup time information storage means as the startup time information;
an elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information;
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
a startup process execution means for executing one of a plurality of types of startup processes having different process contents (a startup process including a process for transmitting a normal startup command shown in FIG. 70, a startup process including an execution of a setting change mode, a startup process including an execution of a setting check mode, etc.) based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the memory process execution means is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the memory process when the type of the startup process executed by the startup process execution means is a specific startup process among the multiple startup processes (a startup process including execution of a setting change mode, a startup process including execution of a setting confirmation mode, etc.).

Before explaining the effect of feature βZ1, we will explain an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed. Generally, in an amusement hall, power supply to multiple gaming machines starts all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, multiple gaming machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and when the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) is turned on, power supply starts all at once (simultaneously) to the multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility.

In light of the operation of gaming machines in the gaming hall described above, a gaming machine with feature βZ1 acquires timing information from a timing information update means when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started, and executes a storage process, which is a process for storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information. Then, based on the startup time information stored in the startup time information storage means, the time that has elapsed since the storage process was executed is calculated, and a predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. We will now explain the effects of adopting this configuration.

We will now explain a case where a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timing information (current date and time information) updated in the timing information update means (timing register 97b1 of RTC97) rather than the elapsed time since the storage process was executed (for example, a configuration in which a predetermined presentation is started when the time included in the timing information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine installed on the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the timing information of gaming machine A is 11:00:00 and the time included in the timing information of gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) is started will differ for each gaming machine, which will cause a problem of discomfort to players who were expecting the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) to be started simultaneously (simultaneously) on all gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

In contrast, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment acquires timing information from a timing information update means based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine, and executes a storage process which is a process of storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of an amusement hall turns on the island power switch, power begins to be supplied to multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes memory processing all at once (simultaneously).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment calculates the elapsed time since the memory process was executed based on the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means. As described above, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes the memory process simultaneously, so the elapsed time since the memory process was executed calculated by each gaming machine will be the same (or approximately the same) even if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine.

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so the manner in which the predetermined process is executed on each gaming machine can be made the same. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this characteristic includes a start-up time information storage means capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during a power outage, and an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the stored process when the type of start-up process executed by the start-up process execution means is a specific start-up process among a plurality of start-up processes. The effects of adopting this configuration are explained below.

A hypothetical example will be described in which a configuration not equipped with the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted. In this configuration, when power supply is started simultaneously (at the same time) to each gaming machine installed on an island facility, each gaming machine installed on the island facility simultaneously (at the same time) executes a storage process. After that, the manager of the gaming hall may turn off the power switch of one of the multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility in order to have the one gaming machine execute a specific startup process (for example, a startup process including execution of a setting change mode), and then turn on the power switch of the one gaming machine to place the one gaming machine in a state in which the specific startup process is executed and execute the specific startup process. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch has been turned on and the supply of power has been started. This causes the elapsed time calculated on that one gaming machine to differ from the elapsed time calculated on the other gaming machines, and the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on that one gaming machine to differ from the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on the other gaming machines, creating an awkward feeling for the player playing on that one gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the gaming machine and cuts off the power, the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means of the gaming machine is retained. If the manager then turns on the power switch of the gaming machine to put it in a state in which a specific start-up process is to be executed, the specific start-up process is executed in the gaming machine and execution of the storage process is avoided, so that the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means of the gaming machine is not overwritten, and the start-up time information stored in the storage process executed when the power supply to the other gaming machines was started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including the gaming machine, is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the manner in which the predetermined process is executed can be made the same for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic γA group>
The feature group γA is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γA1]
A gaming machine,
A time information updating means (a time register 97b1 of the RTC 97) capable of updating time information (current date and time information) including information that can identify the time even in a power failure state in which the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine is cut off;
a start-up time information storage means (a start-up time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97) capable of storing the timekeeping information as start-up time information (start-up date and time information), and capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during the power interruption state;
a storage process execution means for executing a storage process which is a process of acquiring the timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine, and storing the acquired timing information in the startup time information storage means as the startup time information;
an elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information;
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
an operation receiving means (a keyhole for setting) for receiving a predetermined operation;
Equipped with
The memory process execution means is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the memory process if the operation receiving means has received the specified operation when the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine is started.

Before explaining the effect of feature γA1, we will explain an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed. Generally, in an amusement hall, power supply to multiple gaming machines starts all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, multiple gaming machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and when the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) is turned on, power supply starts all at once (simultaneously) to the multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility.

In light of the operation of gaming machines in the gaming hall described above, a gaming machine with feature γA1 acquires timing information from a timing information update means when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started, and executes a storage process, which is a process for storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information. Then, based on the startup time information, the time that has elapsed since the storage process was executed is calculated, and a predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be explained below.

We will now explain a case where a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timing information (current date and time information) updated in the timing information update means (timing register 97b1 of RTC97) rather than the elapsed time since the storage process was executed (for example, a configuration in which a predetermined presentation is started when the time included in the timing information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine installed on the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the timing information of gaming machine A is 11:00:00 and the time included in the timing information of gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) is started will differ for each gaming machine, which will cause a problem of discomfort to players who were expecting the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) to be started simultaneously (simultaneously) on all gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

In response to this, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment acquires timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of the supply of external power to the gaming machine, and executes a storage process, which is a process for storing the acquired timing information in the startup time information storage means as startup time information. Therefore, for example, when the manager of the gaming hall turns on the island power switch, the supply of power starts simultaneously to the multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment, and each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a storage process simultaneously.

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment calculates the elapsed time since the memory process was executed based on the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means. As described above, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes the memory process simultaneously, so the elapsed time since the memory process was executed calculated by each gaming machine will be the same (or approximately the same) even if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine.

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so the manner in which the predetermined process is executed on each gaming machine can be made the same. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this feature includes a start time information storage means capable of holding the stored start time information even during a power outage, and an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the storage process if the operation acceptance means has accepted a predetermined operation when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started. The effects of adopting this configuration are explained below.

A hypothetical case where a configuration without the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted will be described. In this configuration, when power supply to each gaming machine installed on an island facility starts at the same time, each gaming machine installed on the island facility executes a storage process at the same time. After that, for various reasons, the manager of the game hall may turn off the power switch of one of the multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility, and then turn on the power switch of the one gaming machine while the one gaming machine is in a state where it accepts a predetermined operation. In this case, the one gaming machine executes a storage process again based on the fact that the power switch has been turned on and the supply of power has started. In this case, the elapsed time calculated on the one gaming machine differs from the elapsed time calculated on the other gaming machines, and the timing at which the one gaming machine starts a predetermined process (predetermined performance) differs from the timing at which the other gaming machines start a predetermined process (predetermined performance), causing a problem that the player playing on the one gaming machine feels uncomfortable.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the gaming machine in question and cuts off the power, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine in question is retained. If the manager then turns on the power switch of the gaming machine while it is in a state where it is accepting a specified operation, the execution of the storage process is avoided, so that the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine in question is not overwritten, and the start time information stored in the storage process executed when the supply of power to the other gaming machines is started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including the gaming machine in question, is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the manner in which the predetermined process is executed can be made the same for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic gamma B group>
The feature group γ B is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γB1]
A gaming machine,
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
A time information updating means (a time register 97b1 of the RTC 97) capable of updating time information (current date and time information) including information that can identify the time even in a power failure state in which the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine is cut off;
a start-up time information storage means (a start-up time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97) capable of storing the timekeeping information as start-up time information (start-up date and time information), and capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during the power interruption state;
a storage process execution means for executing a storage process which is a process of acquiring the timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine, and storing the acquired timing information in the startup time information storage means as the startup time information;
an elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information;
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
Equipped with
The setting change mode execution means is
a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined start condition is satisfied when the supply of electric power from an external source to the gaming machine is started;
a setting change mode starting means for starting the setting change mode when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The storage process execution means comprises an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage process when the setting change mode is started.

Before explaining the effect of feature γB1, we will explain an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed. Generally, in an amusement hall, power supply to multiple gaming machines starts all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, multiple gaming machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and when the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) is turned on, power supply starts all at once (simultaneously) to the multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility.

In light of the operation of gaming machines in the gaming hall described above, a gaming machine with feature γB1 acquires timing information from a timing information update means when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started, and executes a storage process, which is a process for storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information. Then, based on the startup time information, the time that has elapsed since the storage process was executed is calculated, and a predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be explained below.

We will now explain a case where a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timing information (current date and time information) updated in the timing information update means (timing register 97b1 of RTC97) rather than the elapsed time since the storage process was executed (for example, a configuration in which a predetermined presentation is started when the time included in the timing information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine installed on the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the timing information of gaming machine A is 11:00:00 and the time included in the timing information of gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) is started will differ for each gaming machine, which will cause a problem of discomfort to players who were expecting the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) to be started simultaneously (simultaneously) on all gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

In contrast, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment acquires timing information from a timing information update means based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine, and executes a storage process which is a process of storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of an amusement hall turns on the island power switch, power begins to be supplied to multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes memory processing all at once (simultaneously).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment calculates the elapsed time since the memory process was executed based on the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means. As described above, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes the memory process simultaneously, so the elapsed time since the memory process was executed calculated by each gaming machine will be the same (or approximately the same) even if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine.

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so the manner in which the predetermined process is executed on each gaming machine can be made the same. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment.

Furthermore, this gaming machine is equipped with a start time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start time information even during a power outage, and an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the storage process when the setting change mode is started. The effects of adopting this configuration are explained below.

A hypothetical case will be described where a configuration not including the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted. In this configuration, when power supply to each gaming machine installed on an island facility starts all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed on the island facility executes a storage process all at once (at the same time). After that, the manager of the game hall may turn off the power switch of one of the gaming machines installed on the island facility once in order to execute the setting change mode and change the winning probability setting of the gaming machine, and then turn on the power switch of the one gaming machine to start the setting change mode, with the starting condition for starting the setting change mode being satisfied. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch has been turned on and the supply of power has started. This causes the elapsed time calculated on that one gaming machine to differ from the elapsed time calculated on the other gaming machines, and the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on that one gaming machine to differ from the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on the other gaming machines, creating an awkward feeling for the player playing on that one gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the gaming machine, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine is maintained. Thereafter, when the manager turns on the power switch of the gaming machine with the start condition for starting the setting change mode being satisfied, the setting change mode is started in the gaming machine and the execution of the storage process is avoided, so that the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine is not overwritten, and the start time information stored in the storage process executed when the power supply to the other gaming machines was started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island equipment, including the gaming machine, is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the manner in which the predetermined process is executed can be made the same for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Characteristic γC group>
The feature group γ C is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γC1]
A gaming machine,
A ball entry means capable of entering the game ball;
a lottery process execution means for executing a predetermined lottery process based on the entry of a game ball into the ball entry means;
a setting change mode execution means for executing a setting change mode in which the winning probability setting in the predetermined lottery process can be changed by accepting a predetermined change operation (operation of pressing a setting change button) from the outside;
a setting information display mode execution means for executing a setting information display mode (setting confirmation mode) in which setting information, which is information regarding the setting of the winning probability, is displayed but the setting of the winning probability cannot be changed;
A time information updating means (a time register 97b1 of the RTC 97) capable of updating time information (current date and time information) including information that can identify the time even in a power failure state in which the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine is cut off;
a start-up time information storage means (a start-up time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97) capable of storing the timekeeping information as start-up time information (start-up date and time information), and capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during the power interruption state;
a storage process execution means for executing a storage process which is a process of acquiring the timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine, and storing the acquired timing information in the startup time information storage means as the startup time information;
an elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information;
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
Equipped with
The setting information display mode execution means
a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined start condition is satisfied when the supply of electric power from an external source to the gaming machine is started;
a setting information display mode starting means for starting the setting information display mode when the predetermined starting condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
The storage process execution means comprises an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage process when the setting information display mode is started.

Before explaining the effect of feature γC1, we will explain an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed. Generally, in an amusement hall, power supply to multiple gaming machines starts all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, multiple gaming machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and when the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) is turned on, power supply starts all at once (simultaneously) to the multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility.

In light of the operation of gaming machines in the gaming hall described above, a gaming machine with feature γC1 acquires timing information from a timing information update means when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started, and executes a storage process, which is a process for storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information. Then, based on the startup time information, the time that has elapsed since the storage process was executed is calculated, and a predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be explained below.

We will now explain a case where a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timing information (current date and time information) updated in the timing information update means (timing register 97b1 of RTC97) rather than the elapsed time since the storage process was executed (for example, a configuration in which a predetermined presentation is started when the time included in the timing information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine installed on the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the timing information of gaming machine A is 11:00:00 and the time included in the timing information of gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) is started will differ for each gaming machine, which will cause a problem of discomfort to players who were expecting the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) to be started simultaneously (simultaneously) on all gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

In contrast, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment acquires timing information from a timing information update means based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine, and executes a storage process which is a process of storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of an amusement hall turns on the island power switch, power begins to be supplied to multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes memory processing all at once (simultaneously).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment calculates the elapsed time since the memory process was executed based on the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means. As described above, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes the memory process simultaneously, so the elapsed time since the memory process was executed calculated by each gaming machine will be the same (or approximately the same) even if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine.

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so the manner in which the predetermined process is executed on each gaming machine can be made the same. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment.

Furthermore, this gaming machine is equipped with a start time information storage means capable of retaining the stored start time information even during a power outage, and an avoidance means for avoiding the execution of the storage process when the setting information display mode is started. The effects of adopting this configuration are explained below.

We will now explain a case where a configuration that does not include the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted. In this configuration, when power supply to each gaming machine installed on an island facility starts all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed on the island facility executes a storage process all at once (at the same time). After that, the manager of the game hall may turn off the power switch of one of the gaming machines installed on the island facility once in order to execute the setting information display mode and check the winning probability setting of the gaming machine, and then turn on the power switch of the one gaming machine to start the setting information display mode, with the starting condition for starting the setting information display mode being satisfied. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch has been turned on and the supply of power has started. This causes the elapsed time calculated on that one gaming machine to differ from the elapsed time calculated on the other gaming machines, and the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on that one gaming machine to differ from the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on the other gaming machines, creating an awkward feeling for the player playing on that one gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the gaming machine and cuts off the power, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine is retained. If the manager then turns on the power switch of the gaming machine after satisfying the start condition for starting the setting information display mode, the setting information display mode is started in the gaming machine and the execution of the storage process is avoided, so that the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine is not overwritten, and the start time information stored in the storage process executed when the power supply to the other gaming machines is started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed in the island equipment, including the gaming machine, is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the manner in which the predetermined process is executed can be made the same for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Feature γD group>
The group of features γD is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 102 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γD1]
A gaming machine,
A time information updating means (a time register 97b1 of the RTC 97) capable of updating time information (current date and time information) including information that can identify the time even in a power failure state in which the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine is cut off;
a start-up time information storage means (a start-up time information storage area 97b2 of the RTC 97) capable of storing the timekeeping information as start-up time information (start-up date and time information), and capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during the power interruption state;
a storage process execution means for executing a storage process which is a process of acquiring the timing information from the timing information update means based on the start of the supply of power from an external source to the gaming machine, and storing the acquired timing information in the startup time information storage means as the startup time information;
an elapsed time calculation means for calculating an elapsed time from the execution of the storage process based on the start time information;
A predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process (RTC effect) based on the elapsed time;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the memory processing execution means is provided with an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the memory processing if, when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started, the time contained in the timing information in the timing information update means is not a predetermined time (30 minutes) after the time contained in the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means.

Before explaining the effect of feature γD1, we will explain an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed. Generally, in an amusement hall, power supply to multiple gaming machines starts all at once (simultaneously). Specifically, for example, multiple gaming machines are installed in a so-called island facility with their respective power switches turned on, and when the power switch of the island facility (hereinafter also referred to as the island power switch) is turned on, power supply starts all at once (simultaneously) to the multiple gaming machines installed in the island facility.

In light of the operation of gaming machines in the gaming hall described above, a gaming machine with feature γD1 acquires timing information from a timing information update means based on the start of the supply of external power to the gaming machine, and executes a storage process, which is a process for storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information. Then, based on the startup time information, the time that has elapsed since the storage process was executed is calculated, and a predetermined process is executed based on the calculated elapsed time. The effects of adopting this configuration will be explained below.

We will now explain a case where a configuration is adopted in which a predetermined process is executed based on the timing information (current date and time information) updated in the timing information update means (timing register 97b1 of RTC97) rather than the elapsed time since the storage process was executed (for example, a configuration in which a predetermined presentation is started when the time included in the timing information becomes 11:00:00). In this configuration, if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine installed on the island equipment (for example, if at a certain moment the time included in the timing information of gaming machine A is 11:00:00 and the time included in the timing information of gaming machine B is 10:59:52), the timing at which the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) is started will differ for each gaming machine, which will cause a problem of discomfort to players who were expecting the predetermined process (predetermined presentation) to be started simultaneously (simultaneously) on all gaming machines installed on the island equipment.

In contrast, according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment acquires timing information from a timing information update means based on the start of external power supply to the gaming machine, and executes a storage process which is a process of storing the acquired timing information in a startup time information storage means as startup time information.
Therefore, for example, when the manager of an amusement hall turns on the island power switch, power begins to be supplied to multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), and each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes memory processing all at once (simultaneously).

According to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment calculates the elapsed time since the memory process was executed based on the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means. As described above, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes the memory process simultaneously, so the elapsed time since the memory process was executed calculated by each gaming machine will be the same (or approximately the same) even if there is a discrepancy in the time included in the timing information of each gaming machine.

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so the manner in which the predetermined process is executed on each gaming machine can be made the same. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment.

Furthermore, the gaming machine of this feature includes a start-up time information storage means capable of holding the stored start-up time information even during a power outage, and an avoidance means for avoiding execution of the storage process if, when the supply of external power to the gaming machine is started, the time included in the timing information in the timing information update means is less than a predetermined time (e.g., 30 minutes) after the time included in the start-up time information stored in the start-up time information storage means. The effects of adopting this configuration are explained below.

A hypothetical case will be described where a configuration not including the above-mentioned avoidance means is adopted. In this configuration, when the supply of power to each gaming machine installed on an island facility starts all at once (at the same time), each gaming machine installed on the island facility executes the storage process all at once (at the same time). After that, for various reasons, the manager of the gaming hall may turn off the power switch of one of the multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility once, and then turn on the power switch of the one gaming machine again. Specifically, for example, in order to execute the setting change mode and change the setting of the winning probability of the gaming machine, the manager may turn off the power switch of one of the multiple gaming machines installed on the island facility once, and then turn on the power switch of the one gaming machine to start the setting change mode with the starting condition for starting the setting change mode being satisfied. In this case, the one gaming machine executes the storage process again based on the fact that the power switch is turned on and the supply of power is started. This causes the elapsed time calculated on that one gaming machine to differ from the elapsed time calculated on the other gaming machines, and the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on that one gaming machine to differ from the timing at which a specific process (specific presentation) starts on the other gaming machines, creating an awkward feeling for the player playing on that one gaming machine.

In contrast, according to this feature, even if the manager of the gaming hall turns off the power switch of the gaming machine in question, the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine in question is retained. If the manager then turns on the power switch of the gaming machine within a predetermined time (e.g., 30 minutes), the execution of the storage process is avoided, so that the start time information stored in the start time information storage means of the gaming machine in question is not overwritten, and the start time information stored in the storage process executed when the supply of power to the other gaming machines is started all at once (simultaneously) is maintained. As a result, the elapsed time calculated for each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including the gaming machine in question, is the same (or approximately the same).

And according to this feature, each gaming machine installed on the island equipment executes a predetermined process based on the calculated elapsed time, so that the manner of execution of the predetermined process executed by each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again, can be made the same. Specifically, for example, if a configuration is adopted in which a specific presentation is started when a predetermined time has elapsed, it becomes possible to simultaneously (simultaneously) start a specific presentation on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including gaming machines whose power switches have been turned OFF and then ON again.

That is, the manager turns on the island power switch of the island equipment to start supplying power to the multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment all at once (simultaneously), then within a predetermined time (e.g. 30 minutes), turns off the power switch of one of the multiple gaming machines installed on the island equipment for which the winning probability setting is to be changed, and then turns on the power switch of the one gaming machine to start the setting change mode with the start condition for starting the setting change mode of the one gaming machine being satisfied, thereby making it possible to change the winning probability setting of the one gaming machine and to start a specific presentation all at once (simultaneously) on each gaming machine installed on the island equipment, including the one gaming machine whose power switch was turned off and then turned on again. As a result, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

[Feature γD2]
A gaming machine according to feature γD1,
A gaming machine comprising a change means for changing the length of the predetermined time.

According to feature γD2, the length of the specified time can be changed appropriately depending on the number of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall, the size of the hall, etc., so that it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the specified time has elapsed before the work to change the winning probability settings for multiple gaming machines installed in the gaming hall is completed, for example.

<Feature γE group>
The group of features γ E is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from aspect 101 of the first embodiment.

[Feature γE1]
A gaming machine,
a startup process execution means for executing one of a plurality of types of startup processes having different contents based on the start of power supply from an external source to the gaming machine;
a notification means for notifying information on the type of the startup process to be executed by the startup process execution means when the next power supply is started (notifying "Please start in setting change mode") when a specific startup process among the multiple types of startup processes is executed by the startup process execution means (when a startup process including a process for transmitting a RAM abnormality command is executed by a main control device);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature γE1, information regarding the type of startup process to be executed when the next power supply is started is notified, so that the manager of the gaming machine can execute the notified type of startup process when starting the power supply to the gaming machine again after terminating the power supply to the gaming machine. This improves the manageability of the gaming machine.

Specifically, for example, in a configuration in which, when the power supply to one of a number of gaming machines installed on an island facility is terminated and then the power supply to the one gaming machine is started again, if the notified type of startup process is not executed, the timing of the start of a specific effect executed on the one gaming machine will be shifted from the timing of the start of a specific effect executed on the other multiple gaming machines, it is possible to prevent the manager from causing the one gaming machine to execute a different type of startup process, and as a result, it is possible to prevent the timing of the start of a specific effect executed on the one gaming machine from being shifted from the timing of the start of a specific effect executed on the other multiple gaming machines.

[Feature γE2]
A gaming machine according to feature γE1,
The notification means comprises a means for continuing to notify information regarding the type of startup process until the external power supply to the gaming machine is cut off (until the power switch is turned off).

According to feature γE2, the notification of information on the type of startup process continues until the external power supply to the gaming machine is cut off. The effect of this is explained below. If the notification of information on the type of startup process is configured to end after a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds), for example, in a large gaming hall, after the manager turns on the island power switch of the island equipment to start the external power supply to the gaming machine, the notification may end before the manager reaches the gaming machine, and the manager may not be able to grasp the type of startup process to be executed by the startup process execution means when the next power supply starts. In contrast, according to feature γE2, the notification of information on the type of startup process continues until the external power supply to the gaming machine is cut off, so that it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the notification ends before the manager reaches the gaming machine and the manager is unable to grasp the type of startup process to be executed by the startup process execution means when the next power supply starts.

The inventions of the above feature group βZ to feature group γE solve the following problems:

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, technical improvements are being made from various perspectives, such as structure, control, and presentation, with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of the gaming machine, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying the structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, and providing gaming machines that are considerate of the player.

In addition, various technical improvements are being made to improve the soundness of gaming, such as detecting and preventing fraudulent behavior by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In gaming machines like those described above, further technological improvements are desired with the aim of increasing the enjoyment of the game, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, making gaming machine development more efficient, providing gaming machines that are less prone to malfunctions, providing gaming machines that are considerate of players, and providing a more wholesome experience.

It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one or more of the configurations included in the above-mentioned feature group A to feature group γE are appropriately combined. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

The following shows the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or to which each feature can be applied.

Pachinko gaming machine: A gaming machine that includes a launching means for launching gaming balls toward a gaming area based on a launching operation by a player, a starting ball entry section that is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area can enter, an information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on a gaming ball entering the starting ball entry section, and an acquired information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means.

Slot machine or other reel-type gaming machine: A gaming machine that includes a pattern display means for variably displaying multiple patterns, a start means for starting the variable display of the multiple patterns due to the operation of a start operation means, a stop means for stopping the variable display of the multiple patterns due to the operation of a stop operation means or due to the passage of a predetermined time, and a bonus granting means for granting a bonus to a player according to the pattern after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiments and modifications, and can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each aspect described in the Summary of the Invention column can be replaced or combined as appropriate to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems or to achieve some or all of the above-mentioned effects. Furthermore, if a technical feature is not described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

LIST OF SYMBOLS 10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18...Window section 19...Glass unit 20...Upper tray 21...Lower tray 22...Discharge port 23...Lever 24...Performance operation button 25...Operation handle 25a...Touch sensor 25b...Weight button 25c...Variable resistor 26...Game ball launch button 30...Game board 31...Guide rail 31a...Inner rail section 31b...Outer rail section 32...General prize opening 32a...First prize opening 32b...Second prize opening 32c...Third prize opening 33...First start opening 34...Second start opening 34a...Electric role 34b...Electric role drive section 35...Through gate 36...Variable prize device 36a...Large prize opening 36b...Opening and closing door 36c...Variable prize drive section 37...Special pattern unit 37a...First pattern display section 37b...Second pattern display section 37c...First reserved display section 37d...Second reserved display section 38...Regular pattern unit 39...Round display section 40...Variable display unit 41...Pattern display device 42...Pegs 43...Outlet 45...Main display section 45z...Game history information display section (information display section)
46...Speaker 47...Various lamps 51...First control unit 52...Second control unit 53...Third control unit 54...Tank 55...Tank rail 56...Case rail 60...Main control device 61...Main control board 62...Main MPU
62x...Main CPU
63...Main ROM
64...Main RAM
64x... flash memory 70... payout control device 71... payout device 80... launch control device 81... game ball launch mechanism 85... power supply device 86... power failure monitoring circuit 90... sound and light emission control device 91... sound and light emission control board 96... RTC
100... Display control device 300... Game history management chip 302... Buffer 304... Register 306... Memory for storing number of winning balls data 307... Memory for storing calculation execution conditions 307a... Memory for storing storage execution conditions 308... CPU
309...Memory for storing calculation results 309a...Memory for storing the number of balls scored 309b...Memory for storing ball scoring information 320...Inspection machine 321...CPU
328...Display unit 329...Connection cable

Claims (1)

A plurality of predetermined detection means for detecting game balls that have passed through a predetermined area;
a game value providing means electrically connected to the plurality of predetermined detection means and configured to execute a process for providing a game value for a game;
a payout means electrically connected to the game value providing means, and executing a payout process for paying out prize balls as the game value based on a prize ball providing signal from the game value providing means, the prize ball providing signal being related to the number of prize balls to be provided;
a process execution means that is electrically connected to the game value providing means by a signal line capable of transmitting various signals, and that executes at least a specific process related to the output of predetermined numerical information related to a predetermined game, which is a process different from the payout process and is not based on the prize ball providing signal ;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game value providing means includes:
a first reference information storage means for storing reference information used in a process for providing a game value to the game, the reference information being referenced in response to detection by the predetermined detection means;
a first transmitting means for transmitting a reference information signal corresponding to the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means to the process executing means after a predetermined supply of power to the gaming machine is started and before the start of execution of a predetermined game process that is periodically repeated at least to progress a game;
a second transmitting means for transmitting a predetermined information signal based on the ball-entering information, which is information acquired based on the detection by the predetermined detecting means, to the processing executing means;
Equipped with
The process execution means includes:
a second reference information storage means for storing reference information corresponding to the reference information signal transmitted from the game value providing means;
an execution means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal transmitted from the second transmission means and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
a processing result information storage means for storing processing result information which is information regarding a processing result of the specific processing performed by the execution means;
Equipped with
This gaming machine is
A presentation display means for displaying a presentation to be executed for each game round, which is one unit of a process for notifying the result of a predetermined lottery process, and which is visible from the front of the gaming machine;
a means for outputting the processing result information to the performance display means;
Equipped with
The processing execution means is configured to make the reference information stored in the first reference information storage means of the game value providing means non-rewritable,
the game value providing means cannot directly change the processing result information stored in the processing result information storage means;
When a front body of the gaming machine is opened and a predetermined state occurs, opening information corresponding to the opening of the front body of the gaming machine is transmitted from the gaming value providing means, and information corresponding to the opening information is stored in the processing execution means;
The plurality of predetermined detection means include at least a predetermined detection means which provides different game values based on the detection of a game ball,
The execution means includes a means for executing the specific process based on the predetermined information signal based on the predetermined detection means having different game values and the reference information stored in the second reference information storage means;
The information stored based on the predetermined information signal is erased at a predetermined timing after the specific process is completed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images